Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout2010-111 (2)INDIAN RIVER COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF UTILITY SERVICES NORTH WATER TREATMENT PLANT RAW WATER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Description DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00020 Advertisement for Bids 00100 Instruction to Bidders 00200 Local Preference in Purchasing or Contracting 00300 Bid Form & Trench Safety Act Compliance Statement 00410 AIA Document A310 Bid Bond 00431 Schedule of Subcontractors 00452 Disclosure of Relationships 00456 General Information Required of Bidders 00530 EJCDC - Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 00610 Public Construction Bond 00700 Standard General Conditions of Construction Contract 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00900 Addenda 00901 Approved Permits DIVISION 1 GENERAL 01010 Summary of Work 01014 Special Work Sequences 01025 Measurement and Payment 01035 Change Order Procedures 01050 Field Engineering 01052 Applications for Payment 01060 Regulatory Requirements and Notification 01090 Reference Standards 01170 Special Provisions 01200 Project Meetings 01311 Construction Schedules 01340 Submittals 01370 Schedule of Values 01381 Audio -Visual Documentation 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01510 Temporary Utilities 01560 Temporary Controls 01600 Delivery, Storage and Handling 01610 Material and Equipment TOC -1 DIVISION 1 GENERAL (CONT.) 01630 Substitutions and Product Options 01650 Startup and Demonstration 01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Cleaning 01720 Project Record Documents 01730 O&M Manuals and Training 01740 Warranties and Bonds DIVISION 2 SITEWORK 02100 Site Preparation 02140 Dewatering 02200 Earthwork 02220 Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction 02276 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02280 Soil Treatment for Termite Control 02690 Directional Drilling 02920 Top Soil 02932 Seeding and Mulching 02934 Solid Sodding DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03250 Concrete Accessories 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03600 Grout 03700 Modifications and Repair to Existing Concrete DIVISION 4 MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 5 METALS (NOT USED) DIVISION 6 WOODS AND PLASTIC (NOT USED) DIVISION 7 MOISTURE PROTECTION (NOT USED) TOC -2 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS (NOT USED) DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09900 Painting 09905 Piping, Valve and Equipment Identification System DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES (NOT USED) DIVISION I I EQUIPMENT 11211 Vertical Turbine Supply Well Pump DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NOT USED) \ DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) N DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15000 Mechanical — General Requirements 15044 Piping Materials, Designation, and Pressure Testing 15050 Process and Utility Piping, Fittings, Valves and Accessories 15062 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings 15126 Hangers and Supports TOC -3 DIVISION 16 —ELECTRICAL (NOT INCLUDED IN THIS DRAFT) 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16110 Raceways 16120 Wires, Cables and Connectors 16130 Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes 16140 Switches and Receptacles 16156 Solid State Reduced Voltage Motor Starters 16160 Panelboards 16170 Disconnects 16180 Overcurrent Protective Devices 16181 Fuses 16190 Equipment and Raceway Support Systems 16405 Underground Duct Banks 16450 Grounding 16460 Transformers 16520 Exterior Luminaries DIVISION 17 — INSTUMENTATION (NOT INCLUDED IN THIS DRAFT) 17000 Process Instrumentation & Control System 17010 Application Engineering Services 17015 Remote Terminal Units (RTU) 17040 Communication Network 17700 Instrumentation TOC -4 DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 00020 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS INDIAN RIVER COUNTY The Indian River County (IRC) Board of County Commissioners is accepting sealed bids for the construction of the North WTP Raw Water Transmission System - North County WTP. Bids will be received by Indian River County marked "BID ENCLOSED" until 2:00 P.M. on January 21, 2010. Each bid shall be submitted in a sealed envelope and shall bear the name and address of the bidder on the outside and the words "North WTP Raw Water Transmission System- North County WTP; Bid No. 2010024; and UCP #2422." Only bids received on or before the time and date listed will be considered. Bids should be addressed to Purchasing Division, 1800 27th Street, Vero Beach, Florida 32960. All bids will be -opened publicly and read aloud at 2:00 P.M. Deadline for receipt of bids has been set for January 21, 2010. All bids received after 2:00 P.M. will be returned unopened. All material and equipment furnished and all work performed shall be in strict accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents pertaining thereto, which may be obtained from PBS&J at 600 N. Broadway Avenue, Suite 310, Bartow, Florida 33830 (contact: Kim S. Keefer, PE, 863-533-7000). Copies of the plans and the specifications containing the necessary contract documents may be obtained by deposit of a check made payable to PBS&J, in the amount of $100 for each set, which represents cost of printing, handling and is non refundable. Communications concerning this bid shall be directed to IRC Purchasing Department at 772- 226-1416. All bids shall be submitted in Duplicate on the Bid Forms provided within the Bidding L) Documents. BID SECURITY must accompany each Bid, and must be in the form of an AIA Document A310 Bid Bond, properly executed by the Bidder and by a qualified surety, or a certified check or a cashier's check, drawn on any bank authorized to do business in the State of Florida. Bid Security must be in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid, made payable to Indian River County Board of County Commissioners. In the event the Contract is awarded to the Bidder, Bidder will enter into a Contract with the County and furnish the required 100% Public Construction Bond within the timeframe set by the County. If Bidder fails to do so, the Bid Security shall be retained by the County as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. The County reserves the right: to delay awarding of the Contract for a period of sixty (60) days after the bid opening; to waive informalities in any bid; reject any or all bids in whole or in part with or without cause; or to accept the bid that, in its judgment, will serve the best interest of Indian River County. A Pre -Bid Conference meeting will be held on January 7 2010 at 1:00 P.M. in the Indian River County Administration Building B, Conference Room B1-501, in Indian River County, 1800 27th Street, Vero Beach, FL 32960. This Pre -Bid Conference meeting is NON -MANDATORY. INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PURCHASING MANAGER For Publication in the Vero Beach Press Journal: December 18, 2009 Please furnish tear sheet and Affidavit of Publication to: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PURCHASING DIVISION 1800 27th Street Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Advertisement for Bids 00020-1 END OF SECTION Advertisement for Bids 00020-1 0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (Based Upon EJCDC No. C-700, 2002 Ed.) 1.01 DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. C-700, 2002 ed.) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a bid directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub -bidder, who submits a bid -to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible, and responsive Bidder to whom Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, The Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 1.02 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from Engineer: PBS&J, Inc. 600 N. Broadway Avenue, Suite 310, Bartow, Florida 33830, 863.533.7000 B. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. C. Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use of the Bidding Documents. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS To demonstrate qualifications to perform the work, each Bidder must be prepared to submit, within five (5) days of Owner's request, written evidence, such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments, and other such data as may be necessary to prove to the satisfaction of the Owner that the Bidder is qualified by experience to do the work and is prepared to complete the work within the stated time period. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE A. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost progress, performance, or furnishing of the work, (c) consider federal, state, and local laws and regulations that may affect costs, progress, performance, or furnishing of the work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. B. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents. Bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations, or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof the purposes of bidding or construction. To obtain access to the site, the following shall be contacted: Michael Hotchkiss, Capital Projects Manager for Indian River County Utilities (772) 567-8000. Project work site is located at the location shown on the construction plans. Those drawings of physical conditions in relation to existing surface and subsurface conditions (except underground facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents. Bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings, but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. Copies of such reports and drawings will be made available by Owner to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraphs 1.04.131 and 1.04.132 are incorporated therein by reference. Such technical data has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless it is expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, underground facilities and other physical conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 of the General Conditions. E. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies, and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. F. On request in advance, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up, and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. G. The lands upon which the work is to be performed, right-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designed for use by the Contractor in performing the work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required 00100-2 for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by and paid for by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. H. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this the Instruction to Bidder, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the work. 1.05 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA A. All questions about the meanings or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in writing to. PBS&J, Inc. 600 N. Broadway Avenue, Suite 310, Bartow, Florida 33830, 863.533.7000. Interpretation or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten days prior to the date for the opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will not be binding and will be without legal effect. B. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. 1.06 BID SECURITY A. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent of the Bidder's maximum base bid price and in the form of a certified check; cashiers check; or an AIA Document A310 Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions. B. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Contract security, whereupon the Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Contract security within fifteen days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be retained by the County. C. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the Owner until the earlier of the seventh (7) day after the effective date of the Agreement or the sixty-first (61 ) day after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid security with bids which are not competitive may be returned before the end of the sixty-day (60) period. 1.07 CONTRACT TIME 00100-3 The number of days within which, or dates by which, the work is to be substantially completed and also complete and ready for final payment (the Contract Time) are set forth in the Bid Form (Section 00300) and the Agreement (Section 00530). 1.08 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement (Section 00530). 1.09 SUBSTITUTE OR "OR EQUAL" ITEMS The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions and may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 1.10 BIDFORM A. The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be obtained from Engineer (or the issuing office). B. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter. C. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. D. Bids by partnership must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. E. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. F. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). G. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown. H. Additional forms to be submitted with Bid Form include: Section 00452 — "Disclosure of Relationships"; Section 00456 — "General Information Required for Bidders" and "Trench Safety Act Compliance Statement"; and Schedule of Subcontractors (Section 00431). 1.11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS A. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, clearly marked on the outside with the following information: Project Name/Title; Bid Number; UCP Number; and the name and address of the Bidder. If the Bid is sent through the mail, overnight delivery system, or courier, the sealed envelope, marked as set forth above, shall be enclosed in a separate outer envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the outside. B. The Bidder shall submit the Bid in duplicate on the forms, or an exact copy of the forms, furnished herewith. The blank spaces on the Bid Form shall be filled in correctly for each Bid Item for which a Bid is submitted. All Bids shall be accompanied by the Bid Security and other required documents. C. The Owner will consider only those bids received from parties who have obtained Contract Documents directly from the Owner or the Owner's Engineer. Contract Documents are not transferable to other parties for bidding purposes. Bids received from firms whose names are not recorded by the Owner or the Engineer as having secured documents for this Contract will be rejected. 1.12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS A. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. B. If, within two business days after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the work to be provided under the Contract Documents 1.13 OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. 1.14 BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT OF ACCEPTANCE All bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty days after the day of the Bid opening, but the Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date. 1.15 AWARD OF CONTRACT A. Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the work, and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all non -conforming, non-responsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Also, Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an 00100-5 award to the Bidder. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Owner reserves the right to cancel the award of any Contract at any time before the execution of such Contract by all parties without any liability to the Owner. For and in consideration of the Owner considering Bids submitted, the Bidder, by submitting its Bid, expressly waives any claim to damages, of any kind whatsoever, in the event the Owner exercises its right to cancel the award in accordance herewith. B. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidder, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. C. Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the work as to which the identity of subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Owner may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice to Award. D. Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. E. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Owner. F. If the Contract is to be awarded, Owner will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid opening. G. More than one Bid from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or association under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that one Bidder is financially interested in more than one proposal for the same work will cause the rejection of all proposals in which such Bidders are believed to be interested. Any or all proposals will be rejected if there is reason to believe that collusion exists among the Bidders, and no participants in such collusion will be considered in future proposals for the same work. H. Within fifteen (15) calendar days of the date of the Notice of Award of the Contract, the Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall execute and deliver two (2) original Contracts to the Owner, together with a Public Construction Bond for 100 percent of the contract price, in the forms set forth in the Contract Documents and General Conditions; and all required insurance certificates, before the Contract will be executed by the Owner. I. Failure upon the part of the Bidder to whom the Contract has been awarded to execute and deliver the Contract, Public Construction Bond and required insurance in the manner and within the time provided shall be just cause for cancellation of the award. It is 00100-6 understood and agreed by said Bidder, that if the award is cancelled for the above persons, the certified check or Bid Bond shall become the property of the Owner, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages. 1.16 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND The successful Bidder as Contractor shall furnish the County immediately upon delivery with the executed Contract and a Public Construction Bond in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract price, each in the form provided in the Contract Documents. The Surety shall be authorized to issue surety bonds in Florida and be included in the most recent United States Department of Treasury List of Acceptable Sureties. The successful Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact, who executed the Public Construction Bond to affix to each a current certified copy of their Power of Attorney, reflecting such person's authority as Power of Attorney in the State of Florida. Further, at the time of execution of the Contract, the successful Bidder shall provide a copy of the Surety's current valid Certificate of Authority issued by the United States Department of the Treasury under 31 United States Code sections 9304-9308. 1.17 PUBLIC DISCLOSURE STATEMENT Any entity entering into a contract with Indian River County as Owner shall disclose any relationship that may exist between the contracting entity and an Indian River County Commissioner or Indian River County employee. The relationship with either must be'disclosed as follows: Father, mother, son daughter, brother, sister, uncle, aunt, first cousin, nephew, niece, husband, wife, father-in-law, mother-in-law, daughter-in-law, son-in-law, brother-in-law, sister- in-law, stepfather, stepmother, stepson, stepdaughter, stepbrother, half brother, half sister, grandparent, or grandchild. The term "affiliate" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in the management of the entity. 1.18 FLORIDA PRODUCED LUMBER The selected Bidder agrees to comply with the provisions of Section 255.20, Florida Statutes, as such statute may be amended from time to time, wherein Indian River County as Owner must specify lumber, timber and other forest products produced and manufactured in Florida whenever such products are available and their price, fitness and quality are equal. 1.19 TRENCH SAFETY Florida Statutes Section 553.60 through 553.64, known as the "Trench Safety Act" requires all contractors engaged by Indian River County, Florida to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration's excavation safety standard, found in 29 C.F.R. s. 1926.650 Subpart P. All prospective subcontractors are required to sign a Trench Safety Act Compliance Statement and provide compliance cost information where indicated. The costs for complying with the Trench Safety Act must be incorporated into the Bid. 1.20 PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME STATEMENT Pursuant to Florida Statutes Section 287.133(2)(a), all Bidders are hereby notified that a person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for a public entity crime may not submit a bid, proposal, or reply on a contract to provide any goods or 00100-7 services to a public entity (defined as the State of Florida, any of its departments or agencies, or any political subdivision); may not submit a bid, proposal, or reply on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work; may not submit bids, proposals, or replies on leases of real property to a public entity; may not be awarded or perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity; and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Florida Statutes Section 287.017 for CATEGORY TWO [currently $25,000] for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. A "public entity crime" means a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to and directly related to the transaction of business with any public entity or with an agency or political subdivision of any other state or with the United States, including, but not limited to, any bid, proposal, reply, or contract for goods or services, any lease for real property, or any contract for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, involving antitrust, fraud, theft, bribery, collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or material misrepresentation. 1.21 PERMITS, IMPACT, AND INSPECTION FEES. In accordance with Florida Statutes Section 218.80, the "Public Bid Disclosure Act", Indian River County as OWNER is obligated to disclose all license, permit, impact, or inspection fees that are payable to Indian River County in connection with the construction of the Work by the accepted bidder. ALL PERMIT, IMPACT, OR INSPECTION FEES PAYABLE TO INDIAN RIVER COUNTY IN CONNECTION WITH THE WORK ON THIS COUNTY PROJECT WILL BE PAID BY INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF RE -INSPECTION FEES AS SET FORTH IN THE CONTRACT. The bidder will not include ANY PERMIT, IMPACT, OR INSPECTION FEES in the bid. END OF SECTION SECTION 00200 LOCAL PREFERENCE IN PURCHASING OR CONTRACTING Effective August 1, 2009, Indian River County adopted a local preference ordinance, Ordinance No. 2009 — 010 as set forth below: Section 105.041 LOCAL PREFERENCE IN PURCHASING OR CONTRACTING A. DEFINITIONS (1) "Local business" shall mean a business that meets all of the following criteria: (a) Has had a staffed and fixed office or distribution point ,with a verifiable street address, located within Brevard; Indian River; Martin; Okeechobee; Osceola; or St. Lucie County for at least one (1) full calendar year immediately prior to the issuance of the request for competitive bids or request for proposals by the County. Post office boxes shall not be used or considered for the purpose of establishing a physical address; and (b) Has had, for at least 12 months prior to the date of the advertisement for the particular good or service being solicited, a current "Local Business Tax Receipt" issued by Brevard; Indian River; Martin; Okeechobee; Osceola; or St. Lucie County, if applicable; and (c) Holds any license or competency card required by Indian River County; if applicable and (d) if the contract is awarded, will be the person or entity in direct privity of contract with Indian River County and not as subcontractor, or any lower -tier subcontractor, materialman, or supplier. (2) "Non -local business" means a bidder that is not a local business, as defined herein. B. CERTIFICATION. Any person or entity claiming to be a local business, as defined herein, and desiring to receive local preference, shall complete and submit, together with all required attachments, a "Local Business Certification Form " in the form provided by the County and contained within the bid package accompanying a public notice/advertisement. Any bidder who fails to complete, and submit the "Local Business Certification Form" together with all required attachments with their bid shall not be granted local preference consideration for the purposes of that specific contract award. The Purchasing Division shall determine if a person or entity meets the definition of a "local business." C. LOCAL PREFERENCE IN PURCHASES BY MEANS OF COMPETITIVE BID. In connection with any solicitation to which this Ordinance applies, Indian River County will give preference to local businesses in the following manner: 1.When a qualified and responsive, non -local business submits the lowest price bid (herein, "Apparent Low Bidder"), and the bid submitted by one or more qualified and responsive local businesses is equal to or within five percent (5%) of the price submitted by the Apparent Low Bidder, then the local business with the apparent next -lowest qualified and responsive bid offer (herein, the "Lowest Local Bidder") shall have the opportunity to submit an offer to match the price(s) offered by the Apparent Low Bidder as follows: (a) the Purchasing Division shall invite, in writing, by e-mail, fax, or certified mail, the Lowest Local Bidder to submit a written matching offer to the Purchasing Division (herein "Invitation"); (b) the Lowest Local Bidder may, but shall not be obligated to, submit a written matching offer to the Purchasing Division within five (5) business days after receipt of the Invitation; 00200-1 (c) If the Lowest Local Bidder submits a written offer that matches the bid from the Apparent Low Bidder, such written offer shall be accepted and the Lowest Local Bidder shall be awarded the contract; (d) If the Lowest Local Bidder submits a written offer that does not match the bid from the Apparent Low Bidder, such written offer shall be rejected; and (e) thereupon, the next successive lowest qualified and responsive local bidder, if and only if their bid is less than or within five percent (5%) of the Apparent Low Bidder will receive the Invitation. (f) This cycle shall be repeated until there are no remaining local bidders less than or within five percent (5%), then award shall be made to the Apparent Low Bidder 2. If the Lowest Local Bidder and successive next lowest local bidders do not respond, decline, or are unable to match the Apparent Low Bidder bid price(s), then award will be made to the Apparent Low Bidder. D. BOARD APPROVAL OF CHANGE ORDERS. In the event a Local Bidder is awarded a contract pursuant to this Ordinance, all requests for change orders increasing the cost of the project must be approved by the Board of County Commissioners. E. NOTICE. All solicitations that are subject to this Ordinance shall include the substance of this local preference Ordinance and the "Local Business Certification Form". F. EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS. 1. Waiver of local preference. L) The application of this Ordinance to a particular purchase or contract of the Board of County Commissioners may be waived only prior to bid solicitation/advertisement and with the approval of the Board of County Commissioners. 2. The provisions of this Ordinance shall not apply where prohibited by federal law or Florida law, or under the conditions of any grant or other funding source. 3. The provisions of this Ordinance shall not apply to contracts under the Consultants Competitive Negotiation Act (CCNA), Florida Statutes Section 287.055, as CCNA allows consideration of location in the evaluative process. 4. The provisions of this Ordinance shall not apply to any procurement where the local nature of a business has been addressed through scoring criteria. 5. The General Services Department shall be responsible for developing, implementing, and maintaining administrative procedures in support of this policy. G. SUBSEQUENT REVIEW AND SUNSET PROVISION. On or about six months after the Effective Date of this Ordinance, the General Services Department will provide the Board with the results to date of this local preference policy and the status of regional reciprocity for Indian River County businesses by Brevard; Martin; Okeechobee; Osceola; and St. Lucie Counties. Within one year after the first bid awarded under this policy, the Board shall receive a similar report from the General Services Department and shall determine whether to continue or modify this policy. Nothing in this section shall prevent the Board from taking action sooner to revise or remove this local preference policy. Local Business Certification Form 00200-2 Local Business Certification Form (1) "Local business" shall mean a business that meets all of the followincriteria: g (a) Has had a staffed and fixed office or distribution point, with a verifiable street address, located within Brevard; Indian River; Martin Okeechobee; Osceola; or St. Lucie County for at least one (1) full calendar year immediately prior to the issuance of the request for competitive bids or request for proposals by the County. Post office boxes shall not be used or considered for the purpose of establishing a physical address; and (b) Has had, for at least 12 months prior to the date of the advertisement for the particular good or service being solicited, a current "Local. Business Tax Receipt" issued by Brevard; Indian River; Martin; Okeechobee; Osceola; or St. Lucie County, if applicable; and (c) Holds any license or competency card required by Indian River County; if applicable; and (d) If the contract is awarded, will be the person or entity in direct privity of contract with Indian River County and not as subcontractor, or any l supplier. ower -tier subcontractor, materialrnan, or 1 _Company Name:= t vjbSF' �uyL-i 1i�a A I '- r 2. Address.- - 1c Ptv I I --Vi 9� 177/ 3. If applicable, Contractor License or Competency; Card C) Aja 4. PLEASE ATTACH COPY OF CONTRACTOR LICENSE OR -COMPETENCY CARD 5. If applicable, Business Tax Receipt #: 6. PLEASE ATTACH COPY OF BUSINESS TAX RECEIPT 7 -Phone Number: T 7 a -56 4 - h( 00 8.Fax Number 'Iq�- 9. 1 hereby certify that, If the contract is awarded, the entity set forth n eo m 1 aw ill be the person or entity in direct privity Of contract with Indian River County and not as subcontractor, or any lower -tier subc ofr materialman, or supplier. Signature: Name and Title:'( sy l 1<6 -se VENDOR PLEASE DONOT COMPLETE BELOW To be completed by an authorized representative from Indian River County Purchasing Division: Meets definition of Local Business _ YES NO If NO, provide reason.- Date.- . (Authorized Signature) To receive Local Bid preference, this certification andcopies of all required documents must be submitted with your Bid package. 00200-3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK END OF SECTION 00200-4 W STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION P CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET BOARD TALLAHASSEE. . FL 32399-0783 ROSE, TIMOTHY WILLIAM TIMOTHY ROSE CONTRACTING INC 1360 SW OLD DIXIE HIGHWAY #106 VERO BEACH FL 32962 (850) 487-1395 Congratulations! With this license.you become one of the nearly one million STATE of FLORIDA AC# 3824 Floridians licensed by theDepartment of Business and Professional Regulation:. Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers, from DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AN)r boxers to barbeque.restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. PROFESSIONAL REGULATION Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you better. CGCO52940 06/20/08 0781697 For information about our services, please log onto www.myfloridalicense.com. There you can find more information about our divisions and the relaCERTIFIED GENERAL impact you, subscribe to depart newsletters and learn more about the 'CONTRACTOR regulations that ROSE, TIMOTHY WILLIAM Department's initiatives. TIMOTHY ROSE CONTRACTING INC Our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We constantly strive to serve you.betterso that you can serve your customers. Thank.you_for.doing business in Florida; and congratulations on your new license! IS CERTIFIED under- the proviaiona of Ch.48S Expiration date: AUG 31, 2010 Loa06200091 .I. 1 All DEPARTMENT OF $1 . CrONSTRi7C! ..Min :..: DETACH HERE Q LORI DA PROFESSIONAL REGULATION Y LICENSING BOARD SEQ# L080620009 SECTION 00300 BID FORM (Based Upon EJCDC No.0-700, 2002 Ed.) PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: North WTP Raw Water Transmission System Bid Number 2010024 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The work is generally described as follows which shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the following: This.project includes the construction of the remote well' facilities, to include well pumps, piping, electrical, controls, and instrumentation. All ancillary work associated with these systems are to be included. —THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: Indian River County Purchasing Department 1800 27MINER th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 1. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with Owner in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time indicated in the Contract Documents and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for ninety (90) days after the day of Bid opening. Bidder will sign and submit the Agreement with the bonds and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within ten (10) calendar days after the date of Owner's Notice of Award. 3. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as more fully set to in the Agreement, that: (a) Bidder has. examined copies of all the Bidding Documents arid of the following Addenda (receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged): Date Number 0i I�-: d,& ID : ;2,o10 4:�-a 00300-1 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY I' l NOR'ri-I WTP RAW WATER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM UPC PROJECT NUMBER 2422 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY BID NUMBER: 2010024 ADDENDUM NUMBER 1 January 13, 2010 x CLARIFICATIONS: The non -mandatory pre-bid meeting minutes are attached. The column pipe described in Specification. Section 1 121 1 2.02 1, shall be 8" Schedule 10 316 Stainless Steel with flanged connections. Each well shall be supplied with 60. feet of column pipe. Question 1: We need the existing well casing inside diameter. and casing depth ,for rhe civ e){icting wells, as we need to confirm it will accommodate the specified flanged column pipe and bowl assembly Response 1: The final casing for all wells has an inside diameter of 14". The following table provides the depth of each well casing.' Well # Depth 4 385' 5 385' 6 385' 7 398' 8 383' 9 385' Question 2: We need to know the existing well casing material and specifications. Response 2: The final .casing. is 16" SDR 17 PVC Certa-Lok manufactured by Certain Teed Corporation. The casing conforrns to ASTM Specification F480. Question 3: e. need the depth of the pumps.setting to be specified.. Response 3; . All pumps shall.be supplied with 60 feet of column. pipe. Question 4: is the existing well casing at the required elevation or does it need to be extended? Response 4: ` The well casings need`to be extended so that the centerline of the aboveground discharge piping is 3' above grade: AA4a, �h PRE-BID MEETING Attendees: See attached spreadsheet From: Matt O'Connor CC: Kim Keefer Subject: Indian River County North Remote Supply Wells Date: January 7, 2010 The meeting began with an overview of the project. Indian River County has drilled six wells and desires to install well pumps and well, houses along with the raw water `piping. four of the six new wells will require power and control wiring from the North Water Plant. Wells #7 and #9 will have power drops Supplied by FPL and will not have power from the water plant.. Wells 97 and #9 will still have control wiring from the plant. CLARIFICATIONS: County is arranging Environmental Survey. The Estimate of Probable Cost is about $2 million. Periodic inspections will be performed by PBSU with day to day inspections by Indian River County. J E2 pjv 1 Z LL co 7 • 1,4 (� 3 �o ..� top n N 1� 3 O \9O , M Svc NJ „�1i M M M Jr 41 l 9 n 3 � � W ` M J C C S o � Q I Z N N N N N N N N N N M INDIAN RIVER COUNTY NORTI-I WTP RAW WATER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM UPC PROJECT NUMBER 2422 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY BID NUMBER: 2010024 ADDENDUM NUMBER 2 January 15, 2010 CLARIFICATIONS: The column pipe. described in Specification Section 11211 2.02 1, shall be 8" Schedule 40 316 Stainless Steel with flanged connections. Each well shall be supplied with 60 feet of column pipe. Question 1: Need to verify facts on electrical underground duct banks. On spec section] 6405, it calls out to totally encase gives no b duct hanks in 2500lhs concrete and rehar on sleet e-3 it g - ` description of how this is to be.done. No rebar tie points or distance between points. Also. iJt, makes. reference to encasements under.roadways. if conduits are direction bored under. roadways no encasements should be necessary. Please verify these facts this is a,.costly. factor if all conduit duct banks are to be concrete encased. Response l : The duct banks do not have to be concrete encased. V raw ""YThis. Addendum MUST be retuned with -your Bid" All Bids rnii5t be received by the Ptirchasni Division office located at 1800 2 `n Street., -Vero Beach. FL 32960. Prior to 2:00 P.M. on Januar} 11, 2010. Late bids will be rettirned Irriopeiied., C Mlipaiiy 1Variie r1 VV1ckL/ CSEc_ Nie Ivin �'Slc 2_ Title.: aypz"Printerl) Ailthorized Signatilre: �� Date: D Telephone:" ('7 2 — j6 Ll Fax: `7 v7 X88 M Bidder has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, the work, site, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or finishing of the work. (c) Bidder has studied carefully all reports and drawings of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in Paragraph SC -4.02 of the Supplementary:. Conditions of the extent of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings upon which Bidder is entitled to rely. (d) Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in (c) above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work as Bidder considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the work at the contract price, within the contract time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions, of the contract documents, including specifically the provisions of Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions; and no additional examination, investigations; explorations, test, reports, studies or similar information or date or will be 7equired by Bidder for such purposes. (e) Bidder has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract, Documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports,. studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground- facilities are or will be required by Bidder in order to perform and i.. -\ furnish the work at the contract price, within the contract time and in accordance (✓� with the 1 other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically. -the. provisions of Paragraph 4.04 of the General Conditions. (f) Bidder has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, , explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. (g) Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that it , has discovered: in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder. (h) This bid is genuine- and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any 10 undisclosed person, firth, or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any person, firmor corporation to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over Owner. 4. Bidder will complete and. include with the bid the Schedule of Bid Items attached to this proposal. The quantities shown on the Schedule of Bid Items are approximate quantities to be used for. the purpose of comparing bids. The actual quantities may vary. It is further understood that the actual amount of the Agreement, and payments there under, will be r \ based upon the actual quantities placed into the work. 5. Bidder agrees that the work will be completed in accordance with the following timeframe. (a) Within 60 calendar days from effective date of Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall complete the following tasks 1. Obtain all necessary permits. 2. Receive approved shop drawings for all materials and equipment to be utilized in the job.. I Perform all photographic recording and documentation of conditions prior to construction. 4. Locate all existing utilities in the area of work. 5. Submit and secure approval of shop drawings 6. Mobilize all labor, equipment, and materials. 7. Deliver and store all equipment and materials to the job site. 8. Notify all utilities and other affected parties prior to initiating construction. (b) From 0 calendar days to`240 ,calendar days from the effective date of Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall complete the following tasks: 1. Install all pipe and appurtenant items. 2. Perforrn all:testing. 3. Restore all disturbed areas to their pre -construction condition. 4. Correct all.,deficiencies noted by Engineer. Completion of all tasks. outlined above (i.e., Subparagraphs a) and b) constitutes Substantial Completion. (c) From 241 calendar days to 270 calendar days from the effective date of Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall complete the following tasks: 1.. Clean up project.area. 2. Remove ail equipment and material from project site. 3. Perform contract closeout procedures. Completion of all tasks outlined above (i.e., Subparagraphs a, b, and c) constitute Final Completion. 6. The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Bid: (a) Certificate of Compliance with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Section 00300 Bid Form). (b) Disclosure of Relationships...(Section 00452) (c) General Information Required for Bidders (Section 00456) (d) Local Preference in Purchasing or Contracting (Section 00200) 7. The terms used in this Bid, which are defined in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract included `as part of the Contract Documents, have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges the insurance requirements of Section 00700 as amended by Section 00800 and any other addendums and agrees to provide said insurance upon award of contract. 00300-3 BIDDER INFORMATION: SUBMITTED ON: G l' (� aG I L (DATE) SUBMITTED BY: VA (NAME OF BIDDER) f kJ b [d (STREETADDRESS) 3;Z -q 2- (CITY, STATE, ZIP) 9� (PHONE #) C,l a vi oov 00300-4 TRENCH SAFETY ACT COMPLIANCE STATEMENT �1 Project Indian River County North WTP Raw Water Transmission S stem J Bid Number # 2010024 Instructions Florida StatutesSections 553.60 through 553.64, known as the "Trench Safety Act" requires all contractors engaged by Indian River County, Florida to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration's excavation safety standard, found in 29 C.F.R. s. 1926.650 Subpart.P. All prospective contractors are required to sign this Trench Safety Act Compliance Statement and provide compliance cost information where indicated below. The costs for complying with the Trench Safety. Act must be incorporated into this Project's base Bid. Certify this Statement in the presence of a notary public. Certification 1. I understand that.the Trench Safety Act requires me to comply with OSHA excavation safety standards found in 29 C.F.R. section 1926.650 Subpart P. 1 will comply with The Trench Safety Act and I will design and provide trench safety systems at all trench excavations in excess of five feet in depth for th is Project. 2. The stimated. cost imposed by compliance with The Trench Safety Act wilt be: Hca Dollars 'a" per linear foot of trench to be excavated. 3. The esti rh.ated'cost imposed by compliance with the Trench Safety Act will be: foo 'tw Dollars $ per square foot of special shoring used. 4. The amount listed above has been included within the Base Bid, Certified: VV-LQ� _yam (Contractor) By: (Signature) ri Y%A se s (Typed or Printed Name) STATE OF. L) VZ_Lcko� COONTY _ 2 00>10 The foregoing instrument was acknowledged beforome�this o2�3 day of �Jy by 'D. � '(�-> 0 S who is personally known to m or has produced as entification and who did (did not) take an oath. Nota Public Yo1�* *`tr vtcbet.UMIGh7 rY 3 * *N N&W Public Stets Of F ON& j My Gbenmleslon CudMarch 11; 2012 My Commission Expires: Off- 11— t�1 >� �� Ganun►sel�n#oD?W'm 00300-5 t If Bidder is: A CORPORATION }�o-rporatio/n� Name) 1 0LIL (State of Corporation). l �v"a-1�s (Name o€'Person Authorized to Sign) 1 Y� c? (Title (Corporate Seal) ATTEST: Business address: w,%) v,`._ 'ALA -Ni A By: (SEAL) 00300-6 5 o F o. S � o a o c 3 CO >o E u a a g' e R vo a>�u p o V L E 9 O a m c c a T.9 8 o v 5va. o o u - 4i o 3 0 on = v w o •r� n 8 0 3 gIN O T J co v^ a S n r Z a�-o jaw � v - = o 2 o. m °� � � � a T p 0 0 c.ov �a E � ami i3 u 5 � y O CG O y O a o E � c 5 1 . v o � a3i v h o p b z�c is r1 v o c� o F CNca oit,J7 JF T r n -C W ,� u n U m U n u n W `] V n U ra U n u n u n u n u m n � u n:. W ". ani W' W cl 'p T .10 10 10J 10 a u CD - 0 o Q U U i n o ON [ •ry b N b C Nu P U -O a❑ N A b u v U m .9 — v on .5 _ . !' 0 :0. o y r w A C 3 o (� v .5 6 V)c a) °3 n -D a) V a> aJ N > 1 7 al v ie 0 > b 1 -9 u u u A u v n y J 7 -O '.N' . [ ' C o c 4 v Q)<* o o —Ica �D r� O N �n OO Cl yr N r O N rn S N rn -S -t 11 -T C) - - rte- E . 5 o F o. S � o a o c 3 CO >o E u a a g' e R vo a>�u p o V L E 9 O a m c c a T.9 8 o v 5va. o o u - 4i o 3 0 on = v w o •r� n 8 0 3 gIN O T J co v^ a S n r Z a�-o jaw � v - = o 2 o. m °� � � � a T p 0 0 c.ov �a E � ami i3 u 5 � y O CG O y O a o E � c 5 1 . v o � a3i v h o p b z�c is r1 11 SECTION 00410 AIA DOCUMENT A310 BID BOND The Contractor shall use the document form entitled "AIA Document A310 Bid Bond". END OF SECTION 07!141^009 13:06 9542-559057 BFB INC PAGE 01 I T inn. Bob Bai'ra Bonds, Inc. July 14, 2009 To Whom It May Concern, RE: Timothy Rose Contracting, Inc.. Dear Gentlemen, Please be advised that Timothy Rose Contracting; Inc., is bonded by Developers Surety and Indemnity Company. We have bonded the.principal.since 2003. We consider the principal to be a valued and respected contractor who has completed all` of their projects in a timely and professional. mariner. Currently Timothy Rose Contracting, .T ic.,'has a $5,000,000.00 single bond guideline and a $10,000,000.00 aggregate. We do not anticipate a problem providing bonds for the principal subject to our receipt and .review of a written contract and the bond terms The. request must come from, our client an,d be accompanied by our normal. underwriting information. We reserve our tight to base our decision to (� provide bonding at the time of the bond request. �✓ Our association with Timothy.Rose Contracting, Inc., has been extremely favorable and we are confident that yon will find them to be highly qualaied and, responsive, to your needs. If you have any questions please call. Si cerely, Robert Barra President Bob Barra Bonds; Inc. 9373 W. Sample Road, Ste 206, Coral Springs, FL 33065 (954)255-9855 Fax (954)Z55-9857 L) JUL-14-2009 15:11 From:9542559857 ID:TIM ROSE Paae:001 R=96% 0 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS KNOW ALL MEN 13Y THESE PRESENTS, that we Timothy Rose Contracting, Inc. 1360 SW Old -Dixie Hwy., Ste 106 (Hem insttrwlsurne.and addrmarlegal title ofCon(ractor) Vero Beach, FL. 32962 as Principal,hereinaf%rcalled. the Principal, and Developers Surety and Indemnity Company a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Indian River County 1.800 27 Street,Vero Beach, FL 32960 {licTc iiucri ful! name .and addivYs or legal title oCOwacr) as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Five Percent of Amount Bid--- -Dollars ($ 5%), for the paymcnt of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs; executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. ,} ' HEREAS.thePrincipalhassubmittedabidfor North WTP RAw Water Transimision System North County WTP Bid No. 2010.0:24 (Here insert full name, address and description of project) NL OW, THERPrORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter,irito a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid and give such bond or bonds as maybe specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereofbetween the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid there this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect Signed and5t sled this 2 0 day of January 2010 Timothy Rose Contracting, Inc. (Principal) j (Seal) (Witness) e) of y ose President e op s Surety and Indemnity Company to ) (Seal) (Witness) (Title)Robert Barra Attorney In Fact ALS DOCUMENT A310 DID BOND AIA O FEbRIJARY 1970 ED THE AMERICAN i. S"ri-(iJfE OF,,RCHI TECCS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 1 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U -S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR BB 0 2 41 9 DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY PO Box 19725, IRVINE, CA 92623 (949) 263-3300 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS that except as expressly limited, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, does hereby make, constitute and appoint: ***Robert Barra*** as its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, deliver and acknowledge, for and on behalf of said corporation, as surety, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship giving and granting unto said Attomey(s)-in-Fact full power and authority to do and to perform every act necessary, requisite or proper to be done in connection therewith as each of said corporation could do, but reserving to each of said corporation full power of substitution and revocation, and all of the acts of said Attorney(s)-in-Fact, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attomey is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEM- NITY COMPANY, effective as of January 1 st, 2008. r RESOLVED, that a combination of any two of the Chairman of the Board, the President, any Executive Vice -President, Senior Vice -President or Vice -President of the corpo- ration be, and that each of them hereby is; authorized to execute this Power of Attorney, qualifying the attorneys) named in the Power of Attomey to execute, on behalf of the corporation, bonds, undertakings and contracts of.suretyship; and that the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary of the corporation be, and each of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney; RESOLVED, FURTHER, that the signatures of such officers may be affixed to any such Power of Attomey or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile. and any such Power of Attorney or certificate beanng such facsimile signatures shall be valid and binding upon the corporation when so affixed and in the future with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its officers and attested by its Secretary or Assistant Secre- tary this January list, 2008. By 0 Daniel Young, Vice -President : `JQ : ''RP O Rq'' OCT. :< w 10 By o 1 93 6 of Stephen T. Pate, Senior Vice -President ow k State of California „*„ County of Orange .... On August 136 2008 before me, Jenny TT Nguyen Notary Public Date Here Insert Name and Tide of the Officer personally appeared Daniel Young and Stephen T. Pate Name(s) of Signer(s) who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged tome that helshelthey executed the same in hismerldieir authorized WW JENNYTT NC3UYfN capadty(ies),and that by hislherltheir signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument COMM # 179164U' NOTARY PUBLIC CALMW I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing g g paragraph is ORANGE GOU4?TY true and correct. F comm. wore§.FiA ilk 2M WITNESS my hand and official seal. Place Notary Seal Above Signature Je TT Ng n,Vtary Public CERTIFICATE The undersigned, as Secretary or Assistant Secretary of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY does hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney remains in full force. and has not been revoked and, furthermore, that the provisions of the resolution of the Board of Directors of said corporation set forth in the Power of Attorney are in force as of the date of this Certificate. This Certificate is executed in the City of Irvine, California, this 20 day of January 2010 By Gregg Oku 6ylistant Secretary ID-1438(Rev.11/09) SECTION 00431 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS The following are the subcontractors to be used if the undersigned is awarded the contract for this project. NAME & ADDRESS TYPE OF WORK L� Cc�vn vin tv� Dm Total dollar amount that will be awarded to Sub -contractors: od NO The above Schedule,of Subcontractors will become a part of the contract that has been awarded and duly executed and must be submitted in writing to the OWNER for approval prior to that sub -contractor performing file work. 00431-t SECTION 00452 DISCLOSURE OF RELATIONSHIPS THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED IN THE PRESENCE OF A NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICER AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATHS. This sworn statement is submitted with Bid, Proposal or Contract No.2000, or the North WTP Raw Water Transmission System. 1. This sworn statement is submitted by: -I—[VVI ot�,v1rZ��zC�,v«_ (Name. oY entity submitting sworn state ent) whose business address is: 13�� S11) O t Dike �_ .n . I 1w, and _ (if applicable) its Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) is tpS= O Lq-S��}� 2. cviy name iS l G VVl(� lil \i1 • c— (Please print ame of individual signing) and my relationship to the entity named above.Js 3. I understand that an "affiliate" as defined in Section 105.08, Indian River County Code, means: "affiliate" The term includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in the management of the entity. 4. 1 understand that the relationship with.a County Commissioner or County employee that must be disclosed is as follows: Father, mother, son, daughter,. brother, sister,. uncle, aunt, first cousin, nephew, niece, husband, wife; father-in-law, mother-in- law, daughter-in-law, son-in-law, brother-in-law, sister-in-law, stepfather, stepmother, stepson, stepdaughter, stepbrother, stepsister, half brother, half sister, grandparent or grandchild. 5. Based on information and belief, the statement which I have marked below is true in relation to the entity submitting this sworn statement. Please indicate which statement applies_ XNeither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in management -of the entity, have any relationships as defined in Section 105.08, Indian River County Code, with any County Commissioner or County employee. f The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers, directors, ! executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in management of the entity have the following relationships with a County Commissioner or County employee: Name of Affiliate Name of Count Relationship 00452-1 0 or Entity Commissioner or employee 1. 2. 3. 4. 5 6. 7. 8. (ignat e) (Date) m END OF SECTION 00452-2 SECTION 00456 GENERAL INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS The undersigned Bidder Guarantees the truth and accuracy of all statements and answers herein contained. Failure to comply with these requirements may be considered sufficient justification to disqualify a Bidder. Additional sheets shall be attached as required. Documentation Submitted with Indian River County Bid No: 2010024 for the North WTP Raw Water Trans►nission System 1How many years has your organization been in business as a General Contractor? 2. Describe and, give the date and owner of the last project that you have completed similar in type, size, and nature as the one proposed? VVI /]t/J'<'_1. ' 1A f 4-1 n' -1) l 5 - Zi2cr�&I Ini e-�" 3. Have youever failed to complete work awarded to you? If so, where and why? OD 4 Name three individuals or corporations for which you have performed work and to which You refer: VJ -V2 P,1- 6ts �„tkv14 S '7'79-�u7� 5. Name of person who inspected site or proposed work for your firm: Name: Date of Inspections:Vd t n tions: Describe any anticipated problems with the site and your propose 00456-1 6. Will you Subcontract any part of this Work? If so, describe which portions: C:-(:�.V�t CNL 11L�%i- - j-1 0 7. Please list the names and addresses of the subcontractors to be used for the portions of the work listed below. Additional information will be required in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders (Section 00100). PAVING: l w,o< SURVEYING: TESTING LAB: VV` &L6ikVje-e Y'L' KL v� 8. What equipment do you own that is available for the work? UL 9. What equipment will you purchase for. the work? 10. What equipment will you rent for the work? 11. Florida General Contractor's License No:,: O e;_2 61 LLD 12. The following is. given as a summary of the Financial Statement of the undersigned: (List Assets and Liabilities and use insert sheet if necessary.) .... .......... 00456-2 13. List the names and titles of ALL officers of Contractor's firm: IRU V� Co 14. State the true and exact, correct, and complete name under which you do business. BIDDER is: Coy'A"Vz- VL� v c 15. State your total bonding capacity: 16. State your bonding capacity per job. 17. Please provide name, address, telephone number, and contact person of your bonding company. ��b 1cc-r�rz-« Fjz=v�s�v3oi� �3c�vZ��- c( Cf� NOTE: if requested by the County, the Bidder, shall furnish a notarized financial statement, references and other information, sufficiently. comprehensive to permit an appraisal of his current financial condition. END OF SECTION 00456-3 SECTION 00530 - EJCDC AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE THIS AGREEMENT ("Agreement" or "Contract") dated ,20 by and between Indian River County, a political subdivision of the St of Florida ("OWNER") and Timothy Rose Contracting, Inc. ("CONTRACTOR"). BACKGROUND RECITALS A. Pursuant to applicable provisions of Florida law, OWNER has selected CONTRACTOR to perform certain work as more specifically described in the Contract Documents on the terms set forth in the Contract Documents. B. CONTRACTOR agrees to perform certain work as more specifically described in the Contract Documents on the terms set forth in the Contract Documents. NOW THEREFORE, OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, and intending to be legally bound, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 WORK 1.1. CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor and not as an employee shall furnish and complete all of the necessary labor, material, and equipment to perform the work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The work is generally described as follows, and shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the following: This project includestheconstruction_ of the remote well facilities, to include well pumps, piping, electrical, controls, and instrumentation. All ancillary work associated with these systems are to be included. ARTICLE 2 ENGINEER 2.1. The project has been designed by PBS&J, hereinafter called ENGINEER, and who is to act as OWNER'S representative, assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT TIME 3.1. Contract Times. The CONTRACTOR shall be substantially completed with the following timeframe (a) Within 60 calendar days from effective date of Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall complete the following tasks: 1. Obtain all necessary permits. 2. Receive approved shop drawings for all materials and equipment to be utilized in the job. 3. Perform all photographic recording and documentation of conditions prior to 00530-1 construction. 4. Locate all existing utilities in the area of work. 5. Submit and secure approval of shop drawings. 6. Mobilize all labor, equipment, and materials. 7. Deliver and store all equipment and materials to the job site. 8. Notify all utilities and other affected parties prior to initiating construction. (b) From 0 calendar days to 240 calendar days from the effective date of Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall complete the following tasks: 1. Install all pipe and appurtenant items. 2. Perform all testing. . 3. Restore all disturbed areas to their pre -construction condition. 4. Correct all deficiencies noted by Engineer. Completion of all tasks outlined above (i.e., Subparagraphs a) and b) constitutes Substantial Completion. (c) From 241 calendar days to 270 calendar days from the effective date of Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall complete the following tasks: 1. Clean up project area. 2. Remove all equipment and material from project site. 3. Perform contract closeout procedures. 3.2. Completion of all tasks outlined above (i.e., Subparagraphs a, b, and c) constitute Final Completion. 3.3 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving in a legal proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER four hundred fifty dollars ($450) for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.1 for Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER four hundred fifty dollars ($450) for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.1 for completion and readiness for final payment. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT PRICE 4.1. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds in the amount of $ 2,362,873.43 ARTICLE 5 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.1. General. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions and the Contract Documents. 00530-2. 5.2. Progress Payments. The OWNER shall make progress payments to the CONTRACTOR on the basis of the approved partial payment request as recommended by ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act, Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. The OWNER shall retain ten percent (10%) of the payment amounts due to the CONTRACTOR until fifty percent (50%) completion of the work. After fifty percent (50%) completion of the work is attained as certified to OWNER by ENGINEER in writing, OWNER shall retain five percent (5%) of the payment amount due to CONTRACTOR until final completion and acceptance of all work to be performed by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. Pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8)(b), fifty percent (50%) completion means the point at.which the County as OWNER has expended fifty percent (50%) of the total cost of the construction services work purchased under the Contract Documents, together with. all costs associated with existing change orders and other additions or modifications to the construction services work provided under the Contract Documents. 5.3. Pay Requests. Each request for a progress payment shall be submitted on the application for payment form supplied by OWNER and the application for payment shall contain the CONTRACTOR's certification. All progress. payments will .be. on the basis of progress of the work measured by the schedule of values established, or in the case of unit price work based on the number of units completed. Partial payment for materials and equipment in proper storage at the site of the work. or other approved storage site will be made in accordance with Section 01025 - Measurement and Payment. After fifty percent (50%) completion, and pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8)(d), the CONTRACTOR may submit a pay request to the County as OWNER for up to one half (1/2) of the retainage. held by the County as OWNER, and the County as OWNER shall promptly make payment to the CONTRACTOR unless such amounts are the subject of a good faith dispute; the subject of a claim pursuant to Florida Statutes section 255.05(2005); or otherwise the subject of a claim or demand by the County as OWNER or the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that where such retainage is attributable to the labor, services, or materials supplied by one or more subcontractors or suppliers, the Contractor shall timely remit payment of such retainage to those subcontractors and suppliers. Pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8)(c)(2005), CONTRACTOR further acknowledges and agrees that: 1) the County as OWNER shall receive immediate written notice of all decisions made by CONTRACTOR to withhold retainage on any subcontractor at greater than five percent (5%) after fifty percent (50%) completion; and 2) CONTRACTOR will not seek release from the County as OWNER of the withheld retainage until the final pay request. 5.4. Federal Funds. Paragraphs 5.2 and 5.3 do not apply to construction services work purchased by. the County as.OWNER which are paid for, in whole or in part, with federal funds and are subject to federal grantor laws and regulations or requirements that are contrary to any provision of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. In such event, payment and retainage provisions shall be governed by the applicable grant requirements and guidelines. ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT 6.1. Acceptance And Final Payment: Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the ENGINEER will promptly make such inspection and when the ENGINEER finds the work acceptable under the terms of the Contract and the Contract fully performed, the ENGINEER will promptly issue a final completion certificate stating that the work provided for in this Contract has been completed, and acceptance by the OWNER under the terms and the conditions thereof is recommended and the entire balance found to be due the CONTRACTOR, will be paid to the CONTRACTOR by the OWNER following County Commission approval of the final Contract payment. 00530-3 6.2. Acceptance of Final Payment as Release. The acceptance by the CONTRACTOR of final payment shall be and shall operate as a release to the OWNER from all claims and all liability to the CONTRACTOR other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the CONTRACTOR for all things done or furnished in connection with the work under this Contract and for every act and neglect of the OWNER and others relating to or arising out of the work. Any payment, however, final or otherwise, shall not release the CONTRACTOR or its sureties from any obligations under the Contract Documents or the Payment and Performance Bonds. ARTICLE 7 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.1. In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, work, site, locality, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work. 7.1.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and accepts the determination set forth in Paragraph SC -4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extent of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings upon which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely. 7.1.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in Paragraph 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance of furnishing of the work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms, and. conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of . Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.1.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of Paragraph 4.04 of the General Conditions. 7.1.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.1.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 8 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00530-4 8.1. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the work consist of the following: 8.1.1. This Agreement (Section 00530). 8.1.2. Performance and Payment Bonds (Sections 00610 and 00612). 8.1.3. Notice of Award and Notice to Proceed (examples in Section 00800). 8.1.4. General Conditions (Section 00700). 8.1.5. Supplementary Conditions (Section 00800). 8.1.6. Specifications bearing the title "North WTP Raw Water Transmission System" as listed in the table of contents hereof. 8.1.7. Drawings, inclusive with each sheet bearing the following general title "North WTP Raw Water Transmission System", inclusive. 8.1.8. Addenda numbers 1 to 2 8.1.9. CONTRACTOR'S. Bid (Section 00300). 8.1.10. Specifications bearing the title "IRCDUS Water and Wastewater Utility Standards, October 2006", or the latest version thereof. 8.1.11. The following, which may be delivered or issued after the effective date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: All written amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to Paragraphs 3.04 of the General Conditions. 8.2. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in Paragraphs 3.04 of the General Conditions. _... . . ART.ICLIE 9. . MISCELLANEOUS . , ... 9.1. Definitions. Terms used in this Agreement that are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2. No Assignment. The CONTRACTOR shall not assign, transfer, or otherwise dispose of this Contract or its right, title, or interest in or to the same or any part thereof, or allow legal action to be brought in its name for the benefit of others, without previous consent of the OWNER and concurrence to by the sureties. Any attempted assignment shall be void and may, at the option of the OWNER be deemed an event of default hereunder. Nothing herein shall be construed as creating any personal liability on the part of any officer or agent of the OWNER who may be a party hereto. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to its successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.3. Licenses.. The CONTRACTOR shall be properly licensed to practice its trade or trades which are involved in the completion of this Agreement and the work thereunder. 9.4. Remedies And Choice Of Law This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Florida. Venue for any lawsuit brought by either party against the other party or otherwise arising out of this agreement shall be in Indian River County, Florida, or, in the event of federal jurisdiction, in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Florida. No remedy herein conferred upon any party is intended to be exclusive of any other remedy and each and 00530-5 every such remedy shall be cumulative and shall be in addition to every such remedy given hereunder or now or hereafter existing at law or in equity or by statute or otherwise. No single or partial exercise by any party or any right, power, or remedy hereunder shall preclude any other or further exercise thereof. 9.5.. Indemnification. CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER, together with its agents, engineers, employees, elected officers and representatives, from liabilities, damages, losses, and costs, including but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused. by the negligence, recklessness or intentional wrongful misconduct of the CONTRACTOR and persons employed or utilized by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the work under this Agreement. This indemnification and hold harmless provision shall survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement. The indemnification is limited to $5 million per occurrence. 9.6. Availability of Funds. The obligations of the Owner under this Contract are subject to the availability of funds lawfully appropriated for its purpose by the Board of County Commissioners of Indian River County: 9.7. Pledge of Credit. The CONTRACTOR shall not pledge the OWNER'S credit or make it a guarantor of payment or surety for any Agreement, debt, obligation, judgment, lien or any form of indebtedness. The CONTRACTOR further warrants and represents that it has no obligation of indebtedness that would impair its ability to fulfill the terms of this Agreement. 9.8.. Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, but all such counterparts, when duly executed, shall constitute one and the same Agreement. 9.9. Public Records. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with the provisions of Chapter 119, Florida Statutes (Public Records Law) in connection with this Agreement. 9.10. Severability: If any term or provision of this Agreement or the application thereof to any person or circumstance shall, to any extent, be held invalid or unenforceable for, the remainder of this Agreement, then the application of such term or provision to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is held invalid or unenforceable shall not be affected, and every other term and provision of this Agreement shall be deemed valid and enforceable to the extent permitted by law. 9.11. Captions And Interpretations. Captions in this Agreement are included for convenience only and are not to be considered in any construction or interpretation of this Agreement or any of its provisions. Unless the context indicates otherwise, words importing the singular number include the plural number, and vice versa. Words of any gender include the correlative words of the other genders, unless the sense indicates otherwise 9.13. Entirety Of Agreement. This Agreement incorporates and includes all prior and contemporaneous negotiations, correspondence, conversations, agreements, and understandings applicable to the matters contained herein and the parties agree that there are no commitments, agreements, or understandings concerning the subject matter of this Agreement that are not contained in this document. Accordingly, it is agreed that no deviation from the terms hereof shall be predicated upon any prior representations or agreements, whether oral or written. It is further agreed that no modification, amendment 00530-6 u or alteration in the terms and conditions contained herein shall- be effective unless contained in a written document executed with the formality and of equal dignity herewith. 9.14. Background Recitals. The background recitals are true and correct and form a material part of this Contract. (Remainder of This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 00530-7 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER AND CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement the day and year first written above. This Agreement will be effective on June 1, 2010 , OWNER Indian River County Board,of-Countv Commissio er By. � Peter D. O'Bryan, dairman CONTRACTOR Timothy Rose Contracting, Inc. By: bse �t22st �-�Vl ••„„..•... (CORPORATE -S_ EAL-). Attest: J. K. Barton, Clerk of the CircuitBy C�tiL ••�s�••, Deputftlerk '"'_ t A roved By: .'Y00 .....F1•�VIV ..�•• . unnM• eph A...Baird, County Administrator pr v d as tq For d g S fficiency: f ounty Atto ey �0 Address for giving notices 1801 27`” Street Address for giving notices Vero Beach, Florida 32960 1360 SW Old Dixie Highway, Suite 106 Vero Beach, FL 32962 License No. CGC052940 Agent for service of process: END OF SECTION 00530-8 SECTION 00610 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND INSTRUCTION FOR PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND The front or cover page to the required public construction payment and performance bond shall contain the information required by Fla. Stat. 255.05(1)(a), and be substantially in the format shown on the first page following this instruction. The Public Construction Bond shall be in the form suggested by Fla. Stat. 255.05(3) as shown on the second page following this instruction. A Power of Attorney from a surety insurer authorized to do business in Florida, authorizing the signature of the Attorney in Fact who executes the Public Construction Bond shall accompany that Bond. Jeffrey K Barton, Clerk 2000 16th Avenue Vero Beach, FL 32960 (772) 770-5185 Transaction #: 374828 Receipt #: 365089 Cashier Date: 5/17/2010 9:29:54 AM (LEWIS) Page 1 of 1 I II II IIII III I III II I III III) IIII Print Date: 5/17/2010 9:29:12 AM www.clerk.indian-river.org Customer Information Transaction Information Payment Summary 2419/2375 CFN:2066012 Date:5/17/2010 DateReceived: 05/17/2010 9:29:52 AM Source Code: Over the RIVER COUNTY Counter (IRCPD) IRC PLANNING DEPT Q Code: Total Fees $27.00 Will Call #: ADMINISTRATION BUILD Return Code: Will Call Total Payments $27.00 Trans Type: Recording Agent Ref Num: 1 Payments r' JV 020305 $27.00 1 Recorded Items 2419/2375 CFN:2066012 Date:5/17/2010 MBK/PG: (BM1JD) BOND 9:29:52 AM From: TIMOTHY ROSE CONTRACTING INC To: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY Recording @ 1st=$10 Addt'I=$8.50 ea. 3 $27.00 Indexing @ 1st 4 Names Free, Addt'I=$1 ea. 4 $0.00 0 Search Items 0 Miscellaneous Items file://C:\Program Files\RecordingModule\default. htm 5/17/2010 Public Work P.S. Ch;Iptcr 255.05 (1)(a) Cover Page THIS BOND IS GIVEN TO COMPLY WITH SECTION 255.45 OR SECTION 713,23 FLORIDA STATUTES, AND ANY ACTION IN5TITUTED BY A CLAIMANT UNDER THIS BOND FOR PAYMENT MUST BON ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATION PROVISIONS IN SECTION 255-05(2) OR SECTION 713.23 FLORIDA STATUTES, BOND NO: 535182P CONTRACTOR NAME: CONTRACTOR ADDRESS: CONTRACTOR PHONP, NO: SURPTY COMPANY NAME: SURETY PRINCIPAL 13V5INESS ADDRESS: SURETY PI•IO.Nr NO, OWNER NAME: OWNhIl ADDRESS: OWNER PRONE NO. QBLI G EE NAME: ti[ wntr-jcting entity is different }mm the ---r, the contracting public entity) OBLIGEE ADDRESS: OBLIGEE PHONE NO: BOND AMU UNT. CONI IIACT NO: (if npplicahtc). DE5CRIP ION Uit WORK: PROAF:C F LOCATION: LEGAL DESCRIPTION: (11 app)icjh)e) Timothy Rose Contracting, Inc. 1360 SW Old Dixie Hwy., Ste 106 Vero Beach FL 32962 772-564-7800 Developers Surety and Indemnity Company 150 South Pine Island Road, Ste 510 Plantation, FL 33324 954-693-0270 Indian River County Board of County Commissioners 1800 27 Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 772-567-8000 THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN RECORDED IN THE PUBLIC RECORDS OF INDIAN RIVER COUNTY FL ___...__. BK: 2419 PG:2375, Pa e1 0� f 3 05/17/2010 at 09:29 ANI, - E R K'OF -C= T $2,362,873.43 2010024 North Water Treatment Plant Raw Water Transmission System / Au ahrr h0nd trnge(s) are dee Wed ,ubscyucnt In this Oilge rcgudle5� of auy page number(a) That moy br printoti there,,,,. �/� ) 00610-2 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND Bond No. 5351 82P (enter bond number) BY THIS BOND, We Timothy Rose Contracting, InpaS Principal and Developers Surety and Indemnita corporation, as Surety, are bound to Indian River County C e em ailed Owner, in the sum of $ 2 3 6 2 , 8 7 3.4 3 , for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and Severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Principal: 1. Performs the contract dated May 11, 2010 , between Principal and Owner for construction of North Water Treatment Plant Raw Water the contract being made a part of Vis b Sn"'d y UMre e','M he times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Principal with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Principal in the prosecution of the work providod for in the contract; and 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Principal under the contract; and 4. Performs the guarantor of ail work and matorials furnished under the contract for the time specified in tho contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance"'„ with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect StirtyT . obligation under this bond.�'- DATED ON ..,May � , 2010y -t i`J • Timothy Rose Contracting; Nam C p al By of y Rose President D lopers Surety and Indemnity -Alme of Sure Company BY - Robert Barra AttornQy ,;Irk Fa6t 00610-3 535182P POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY PO Box 19725, IRVINE, CA 92623 (949) 263-3300 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS that except as expressly limited, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY, does hereby make, constitute and appoint: ***Robert Barra*** as its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, deliver and acknowledge, for and on behalf of said corporation, as surely, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship giving and granting unto said Altomey(s)-in-Fact full power and authority to do and to perforrn every act necessary, requisite or proper to be done in connection therewith as each of said corporation could do, but reserving to each of said corporation full power of substitution and revocation, and all of the acts of said Attorneys) -in -Fact, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by. the Board of Directors of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEM- NITY COMPANY, effective as of January 1st, 2008. RESOLVED, that a combination of any two of the Chairman of the Board, the President, any Executive Vice -President, Senior Vice -President or Vice -President of the corpo- ration be, and that -each of them hereby is, authorized to execute this Power of Attorney, qualifying the attofney(s) named in the Power of Attorney to execute, on behalf of the corporation, bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship; and that the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary of the corporation be, and each of them hereby is, authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney; . RESOLVED, FURTHER, that the signatures of such officers maybe affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile. and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures shall be valid and binding upon the corporation when so affixed and in the future with respect to any bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it is attached. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its officers and attested by its Secretary or Assistant Secre- tary this January 1st, 2008. who.proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) Ware subscribed to the within Instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in hislherA heir authorized AryNY TT NLS capacity(les), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of COMM- # 1'791840 which the person(s) acted. executed the instrument NOTARY PUEILIC C.ALWOFM I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is ORANGE CblWY true and cared my comm: expires Feb. Io 2M ' WITNESS my hand and official seal. Place Notary Seal Above Signature - Je TT Ng n, tary Public CERTIFICATE The undersigned, as Secretary orAssistant Secretary of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY does hereby certify that the foregoirg•Powar of Attome�yr"., remains in full force and has not been revoked and, furthermore, that the provisions of the resolution of the Board of Directors of said corporation set forth to the Power:ofAq mey are in / \ force as of the date of this Certificate. This Certificate is executed in the City of Irvine, California, this 1 1 day of May 2 0 1 0 By: Gregg Okur , istanl Secretary ID-1438(Rev.11/09) , / \ Daniel Young, Vice-Presidente •yJ : O�PpRgT 1F�r ;? 4U e.+ OCT. By. 0.( 10 fh 1936 Stephen T. Pate, Senior Vice -President y •.,= State of California County of Orange On August 13th 2008 before me, Jenny TT Nguyem Nolary Public Date Here Insert Name and Tide of the Officer personally appeared Daniel Young and Stephen T. Pate Name(s) of Signer(s) who.proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) Ware subscribed to the within Instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in hislherA heir authorized AryNY TT NLS capacity(les), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of COMM- # 1'791840 which the person(s) acted. executed the instrument NOTARY PUEILIC C.ALWOFM I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is ORANGE CblWY true and cared my comm: expires Feb. Io 2M ' WITNESS my hand and official seal. Place Notary Seal Above Signature - Je TT Ng n, tary Public CERTIFICATE The undersigned, as Secretary orAssistant Secretary of DEVELOPERS SURETY AND INDEMNITY COMPANY does hereby certify that the foregoirg•Powar of Attome�yr"., remains in full force and has not been revoked and, furthermore, that the provisions of the resolution of the Board of Directors of said corporation set forth to the Power:ofAq mey are in / \ force as of the date of this Certificate. This Certificate is executed in the City of Irvine, California, this 1 1 day of May 2 0 1 0 By: Gregg Okur , istanl Secretary ID-1438(Rev.11/09) # 5/11/2010 13:23 Lion Insurance LION INSURANCE COMPANY -►TIMOTHY ROSE 1/1 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 5/1112010 Producer: Lion Insurance Company 2739 U.S. Highway 19 N. Holiday, FL 34691 This Certificate Is Issued as a matter of Information only and confers no rights upon the Certificate Holder. This Certificate does not amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies below. Insurers Affording Coverage NAIC # Insured: South East Personnel Leasing, Inc. Insurer A: Lion Insurance Company 11075 Insurer B: 2739 U.S. Highway 19 N. Holiday, FL 34691 Insurer C: Insurer D: Insurer E: Coverages epoicieso insurance listed belowhave een:ue to the insured name re a oor policy period Indicated. Notwithstanding any requirement, term or condition oarycontractorother ocumerawathrespedtowhlch this certificate may be issued or may pertain, the insurance afforded by the policies described herein is subject to all the terms, exclusions, and conditions of such policies. Aggregate limits shown may have been reduced by . paid claims. INSR LTR ADDL INSRD Type of Insurance Policy Number Policy Effective Date Policy Expiration Date Limits (MM/DD/YY) (MM/DD/YY) GENERAL LIABILITY Commercial General Liability Each Occurrence Damage to rented premises (EA occurrence) Claims Made ® Occur . Med Exp General aggregate limit applies per: Personal Adv Injury General Aggregate Policy ®Project ® _LOC Products - Comp/Op Agg AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Combined Single Limit Any Auto (EA Accident) All Owned Autos Bodilylnjury Scheduled Autos (Per Person) BodilyInjury Hired Autos - Non -Owned Autos (Per Accident) -- Property Damage (Per Accident) EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY Each Occurrence Occur ❑ Claims Made - Aggregate Deductible A Workers Compensation and Employers' Llablllty WC 71949 01/01/2010 01/012011 X I WC Statin bory Limits oTFi ER E.L. Each Accident $1.000.000 Any propdetor/parbner/executive officerlmember excluded? E.L. Disease - Ea Employee $1.000.000 If Yes, describe under special provisions below. E.L. Disease - Policy Limits $1.000,000 Other Lion Insurance Company is A.M. Best Company rated A- (Excellent). AM B # 12616 Descriptions of Operations/LocatlonsNehicles/Exclusions added by Endorsement/Special Provisions: Client ID: 31-65-108 Coverage only applies to active employee(s) of South East Personnel Leasing, Inc. that are leased to the following "Client Company": Timothy Rose Contracting, Inc. Coverage only applies to injuries incurred by South East Personnel Leasing, Inc. active employee(s) , while working in Florida. Coverage does not apply to statutory employee(s) or independent contractor(s) of the Client Company or any other entity. A list of the active employee(s) leased to the Client Company can be obtained by faxing a request to (727) 937-2138 or by calling (727) 938-5562. Project Name: BID NO. 2010024, NORTH WTP RAW WATER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, VERO BEACH, FL FAX: 772-564-7888 & 772-770-5140 / ISSUE 05-11-10 (SD) Begin Date: 2/4/2009 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION INDIAN RIVER COUNTY Should any of the above described policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing insurer will PURCHASING DIVISION endeavor to mai130 days written notice to the certificate holder named to the left, but failure to do so shall impose no obligation or liability of arty Idnd upon die insurer, its agents or representatives. 1800 27TH ST. VERO BEACH, FL 32960 F" NAY -11-2010 13:04 From: ID:TIM ROSE Page•001 R=93% rl Um. I dill Jecvuwn rayc z of 4 AC�!Rb' CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP ID TJ DATE(MMIDD/YYYY) CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, 05/12/10 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: if the cert rate holder Is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the po cy es must be endorsed. , subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certaln policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER NAME: (AJC, No, EM): (A C, No): Stuart Insurance, Inc. ADDRESS: 3070 S W Mapp Palm City FL 34990 Phone:772-286-4334 Fax:772-286-9389 CUSTOMERos, TIMOR -1 INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAICt INSURED - Timothy Rose Contracting, Inc. INSURER A :1416 8 Hacl�ysvill• ZnauLanc• Croup INSURER B INSURER C: 1360 Old Dixie Hwy SW Vero Beach FL 32962 INSURER D: GL00000049465A INSURER E: 06/06/10 INSURER F �an i Irn_i I m numomn: rz FVICInN NIIMRFP- THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS, LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSR POLICY NUMBER MMMD(1'YYY ( ) (MM/LK.Y EA) LIMBS GENERAL LIABILITY - EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE � OCCUR GL00000049465A 06/06/09 06/06/10 PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 100,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL &ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 X GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 '10 DAYS NOTICE NON -PAY GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PERS PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY JPE4 LOC $ A AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY ANYAITO " BA00000049464A 06/06/09 06/06/10 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ SCHEDULED ALTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS •10 DAYS NOTICE 0ON-PAY $ $ A UMBRELLA LIAR}{ OCCUR CMB00000049 462A 06/06/09 06/06/10 EACH OCCURRENCE s3,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE AGGREGATE $3,000,000 DEDUCTIBLE *10 DAYS $ NOTICE $ _VM RETENTION $ RKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY YIN ANY PROPRIETORIPARTNERIEXECUTIVE ❑ OFFICERIMEMSER EXCLUDED? / A - VVC6AIU­ TORY LIMITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ (Mandatory In NH) II yes, describe under - E DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS belo. A Contractors Equip Cl2M1676 06/06/09 06/06/10 I Rented 50,000 •10 DAYS NOTICE NON -PAY Equipment $1000 ded DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, H more apace Is required) Grading of Land/Site Prep - State of Florida RE: BID #2010024, North WTP Raw Water Transmission System, Vero Beach, FL. UL:K TIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE INDRC-4 I THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Indian River County Purchasing Division 772-770-5333 1800 27th Street Vero Beach FL 32960 ACORD 25 (2009/09) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD MAY -12-2010 09:26 From:STUINS-FAX01 ID:TIM ROSE TION. II rlahfs reserved Pa9e:002 R=90% This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the Controlling Law. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE and Issued and Published Jointly By A C E C National Society — Aser American Society *�Professional Enginneers Professional Engineers in Private Practice of Civil Engineers PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America IVur, a- Susts; uge lar GeatLno aininc ;h= 3::i1: En;•i:crm=n; Construction Specifications Institute EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright (0 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 1 Copyright ©2002 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005 American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Nos. C-520 or C-525 (2002 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EJCDC Construction Documents, General and Instructions (No. C-001) (2002 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. C-800) (2002 Edition). EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 ..........................:...................................................................................6 Defined Terms..........................................................................................................................................................6 1.02 Terminology.............................................................................................................................................................8 ARTICLE2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 ...............................................................................................................................9 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance 2.02 .........................................................................................................9 Copies of Documents...............................................................................................................................................9 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed 2.04 ..........................................................................................9 Starting the Work.....................................................................................................................................................9 2.05 Before Starting Construction 2.06 ...................................................................................................................................9 Preconstruction Conference....................................................................................................................................9 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules...............................................................................................................................9 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 ......................................................................10 Intent 3.02 ..................................................................................................... Reference Standards..............................................................................................................................................10 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 3.04 ................................................................................................................10 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents..............................................................................................1 1 3.05 Reuse of Documents...............................................................................................................................................11 3.06 Electronic Data...................................................................................................................................................... ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS I 1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS................................................................................................ l 1 4.01 Availability of Lands..............................................................................................................................................11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions...................................................................................................................... 12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions........................................................................................................12 4.04 Underground Facilities..........................................................................................................................................13 4.05 Reference Points....................................................................................................................................................13 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site.........................................................................................................13 ARTICLE5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE.............................................................................................................................14 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds 5.02 ..............................................................................................................14 Licensed Sureties and Insurers..............................................................................................................................15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance........................................................................................................................................15 5.04 Contractor's Liability Insurance...........................................................................................................................15 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance..................................................................................................................................16 5.06 5.07 Property Insurance................................................................................................................................................ Waiver of Rights.....................................................................................................................................................17 16 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds....................................................................................................17 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace....................................................................................... 17 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer.....................................................................................18 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES..........................................................................................................18 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence.......................................................................................................................... 18 6.02 Labor; Working Hours........................................................................................................................................... 18 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment.......................................................................................................................18 6.04 Progress Schedule..................................................................................................................................................18 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals................................................................................................................................... 19 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others...............................................................................................20 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties......................................................................................................................................21 6.08 Permits 6.09 .................................................................................................. Laws and Regulations............................................................................................................................................21 6.10 6.11 Taxes......................................................................................................................................................................22 Use of Site and Other Areas...................................................................................................................................22 6.12 Record Documents.................................................................................................................................................22 6.13 Safety and Protection.............................................................................................................................................22 6.14 Safety Representative.............................................................................................................................................23 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs........................................................................................................... ?3 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright 0 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-3 6.16 Emergencies...........................................................................................................................................................23 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples.................................................................................................................................23 6.18 Continuing the Work..............................................................................................................................................24 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee....................................................................................................24 6.20 Indemnification......................................................................................................................................................24 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services..........................................................................................................25 ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE.........................................................................................................................25 7.01 Related Work at Site...............................................................................................................................................25 7.02 Coordination..........................................................................................................................................................26. 7.03 Legal Relationships................................................................................................................................................26 ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES......................................................................................................................26 8.01 Communications to Contractor..............................................................................................................................26 8.02 Replacement of Engineer.......................................................................................................................................26 8.03 Furnish Data..........................................................................................................................................................26 8.04 'Pay When Due.......................................................................................................................................................26 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests..............................................................................................................26 8.06 8.07 Insurance...............................................................................................................................................................26 Change Orders.......................................................................................................................................................26 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals..........................................................................................................................26 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities...............................................................................................................27 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition................................................................................................27 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements.....................................................................................................................27 ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION.....................................................................................27 9.01 Owner's Representative.........................................................................................................................................27 9.02 Visits to Site...........................................................................................................................................................27 9.03 Project Representative...........................................................................................................................................27 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work..............................................................................................................................27 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work.......................................................................................................................................27 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments.....................................................................................................28 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work......................................................................................................................28 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................................................28 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................................................................28 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS...........................................................................................................28 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work...........................................................................................................................28 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work.......................................................................................................................29 10.03 Execution of Change Orders..................................................................................................................................29 10.04 Notification to Surety .............................................................................................................................................29 10.05 Claims....................................................................................................................................................................29 ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK..................................................................30 11.01 Cost of the Work.................................................................................................................................................... 30 11.02 Allowances.............................................................................................................................................................31 1 1.03 Unit Price Work.....................................................................................................................................................31 ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES.....................................................32 12.01 Change of Contract Price...................................................................................................................................... 32 12.02 Change of Contract Times.....................................................................................................................................33 12.03 Delays....................................................................................................................................................................33 ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ....... 33 13.01 Notice of Defects ....................................................................................................................................................33 13.02 Access to Work.......................................................................................................................................................33 13.03 Tests and Inspections.............................................................................................................................................33 13.04 Uncovering Work...................................................................................................................................................34 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................................................34 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work.............................................................................................................34 13.07 Correction Period..................................................................................................................................................34 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work...............................................................................................................................35 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work......................................................................................................................35 ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION..............................................................................36 14.01 Schedule of Values.................................................................................................................................................36 14.02 Progress Payments.................................................................................................................................................36 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title..............................................................................................................................37 14.04 Substantial Completion..........................................................................................................................................37 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-4 14.05 Partial Utilization..................................................................................................................................................38 14.06 14.07 Final Inspection.....................................................................................................................................................38 Final Payment ........................................................................................................................................................38 14.08 Final Completion Delayed.....................................................................................................................................39 14.09 Waiver of Claims...................................................................................................................................................39 ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION.........................................................................................39 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................................................39 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause...........................................................................................................................39 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience...............................................................................................................40 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate..............................................................................................................40 ARTICLE16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION................................................................................................................................41 16.01 Methods and Procedures.......................................................................................................................................41 ARTICLE17 - MISCELLANEOUS.........................................................................................................................................41 17.01 Giving Notice.........................................................................................................................................................41 17.02 Computation of Times............................................................................................................................................41 17.03 Cumulative Remedies.............................................................................................................................................41 17.04 Survival of Obligations..........................................................................................................................................41 17.05 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................................................41 17.06 Headings................................................................................................................................................................41 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-5 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE I - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda --Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement --The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment --The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos --Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid --The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidder --The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. 7. Bidding Documents --The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). 8. Bidding Requirements --The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. 9. Change Order --A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim --A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract --The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents-- Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor's submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price --The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times --The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any, (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer's written recommendation of final payment. 15. Contractor --The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work --See Paragraph I LOLA for definition. 17. Drawings --That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement --The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. Engineer --The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20. Field Order --A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-6 not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21. General Requirements --Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition --The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 23. Hazardous Waste --The teen Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations -- Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinanc- es, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 25. Liens --Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 26. Milestone --A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple- tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 27. Notice of Award --The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. 28. Notice to Proceed --A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Con- tract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 29. Owner --The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 30. PCBs --Polychlorinated biphenyls. 3 L Petroleum --Petrol eum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non -Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 32. Progress Schedule --A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 33. Project --The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. 34. Project Manual --The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 35. Radioactive Material --Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 201 1 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 36. Related Entity -- An officer, director, partner, employee, agent, consultant, or subcontractor. 37. Resident Project Representative --The authorized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 38. Samples --Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 39. Schedule of Submittals --A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. 40. Schedule of Values --A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 41. Shop Drawings --All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 42. Site --Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-7 43. Specifications --That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 44. Subcontractor --An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 45. Substantial Completion --The time at which the Work (or a specified partthereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 46. Successful Bidder --The Bidder submitting responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 47. Supplementary Conditions --That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 48. Supplier --A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor. 49. Underground Facilities --All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 50. Unit Price Work --Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 51. Work --The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 52. Work Change Directive --A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 1.02 Terminology A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the following meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. The Contract Documents include the terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered", "as directed" or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the require- ments of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the com- pleted Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day 1. The word "day" means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents, or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-8 approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer's - recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word "furnish," _when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services; materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "pro- vide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, "provide" is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times com- mence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise speci- fied in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule; indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as other, with copies to each additional insured identified in appropriate will be held to establish a working the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance understanding among the parties as to the Work and to (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, any additional insured may reasonably request) which procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-9 submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibil- ity for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor's full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor's Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor's Schedule of Values will be accept- able to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equip- ment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, or Engineer, or any of, their Related Entities, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Docu- ments and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 10 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepan- cy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in viola- tion of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; 2. Engineer's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; (Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or 3. Engineer's written interpretation or clarification 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor, shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or Engineer's consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaption by Engineer. B. The prohibition of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Copies of data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor or Contractor to Owner or Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user's sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60 - day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data's creator. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability ofLands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner's furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 11 may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equip- ment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Docu- ments; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relat- ing to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connec- tion therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer's findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, perfor- mance of the Work; subject, however, to the follow- ing: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 12 a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, explo- ration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's making such final commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, Owner and Engineer, and any of their Related Entities shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facili- ties, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: I. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data, b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, . c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Under- ground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 13 XF 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized.• Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to Contractor written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stop- page or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the. portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the conse- quences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 14 I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one _ year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Compa- nies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agent's authority to act. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.13, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.0 1.13 and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Condi- tions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 Contractor's Liability Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: I. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclu- EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 15 sion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these addi- tional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provid- ed in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. a. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter. 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner's option, may purchase and maintain at Owner's expense Owner's own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, (other than caused by flood) and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 16 any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accor- dance with Paragraph 5.07. D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver ofRights A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or additional insureds thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.13 shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application oflnsurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.13. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order. B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 17 settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.13. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention r� thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superin- tendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on Contractor. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guaran- tees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700- 18 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. I. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or -Equals" A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or -equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below. 1. "Or -Equal" Items: If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an "or -equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if. a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results (�,�✓) imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times, and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items a. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or -equal" item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: 1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified; 2) will state: a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will preju- dice Contractor's achievement of Substantial Completion on time; EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-19 b) whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Docu- ments (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and c) whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in con- nection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; 3) will identify: a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified , and b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; 4) and shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indi- rectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change, B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer's Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.13. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. ., E. Engineer's Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer's costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.13 Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. F. Contractor's Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or "or -equal" at Contractor's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.13), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supple- mentary Conditions, Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued . No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall consti- tute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-20 2. shall anything in the Contract Documents create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, and Engineer„ and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regula- tions, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringe- ment of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-21 entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engi- neer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-22 indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcon- tractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or , or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly em- ployed by any of them). D. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1. Shop Drawings a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. 2. Samples: Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and veri- fied: a. all field measurements, quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; b. the suitability of all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. all information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and d. shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the LJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright O 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-23 requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the " Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations, that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawing's or Sample Submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer's Review 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Sched- ule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by \ Engineer and shall return the required number of cor- rected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its Related Entities shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor's warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Sub- contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-24 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regula- tions, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the perfor- mance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable . B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in. any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: I. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified_ by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to Engineer. C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.2 1, Engineer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner's employees, or via other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Con- tract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright �) 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-25 B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner's employees, proper and safe access to the Site, a reason- able opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions I. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and respon sibility for such coordination. 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.0 LA shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor's actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor's action or inactions. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Condi- tions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shal I appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 8.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.0 and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities, if any, in respect to pur- chasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-26 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner's responsibility in respect to certain inspec- tions, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B. 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner's responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 Owner's Representative A. Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer's efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer's authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's visits or observations of Contractor's Work Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer's consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-27 Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. D. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer's written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believe that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer's decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.13. C. Engineer's written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be respon- sible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to, the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-28 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.04 Notification to Surety 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13:04.13. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner's correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such deci- sion in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims A. Engineer's Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims. B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.13. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.13. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part, 2. approve the Claim, or 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-29 D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. E. Engineer's written action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.13 will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE I 1 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.13, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.13. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. \ 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished ( Jj and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner; and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to Engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and mainte- nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the perfor- mance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equip- ment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright Ct 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-30 directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.1)), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor's fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expresses, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 1 1.0I.A.I or specifically covered by Paragraph I1.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor's principal and branch offices other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.O1.A and 11.01.13. C. Contractor's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor's fee shall be detenmined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.0 LA and 11.01.13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances 1. Contractor agrees that: a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation , overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright (0 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-31 I . Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in. the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.0I.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.13.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit (deter- mined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor's Fee: The Contractor's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: I . a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.0 LA. I and 11.0I.A.2, the Contractor's fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph I 1.01.A.3, the Contractor's fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a. fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraph 12.0l.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A. I and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-32 Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.0I.A.4, 1 1.01.A.5, and 11.01.13; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.0I.C.2.e, inclusive. 12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph I2.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times , or both. Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer and the Related Entities of each of them shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of Engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor's Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-33 Mm tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.0 and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.13 shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.04.C; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con- tract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. D. If, the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-34 A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor's use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.1 LA is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner's written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily complet- ed. E. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take posses- sion of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorpo- rating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-35 an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Applica- tion for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments I. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other docu- mentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer's observations on the Site of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer's knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicat- ed; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accor- dance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer's responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsi- bilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or b. that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4. Neither Engineer's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer's recommendation of any payment, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-36 including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.13.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replace- ment; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due I . Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.13) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. D. Reduction in Payment 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because: a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnish- ing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occur- rence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that Owner's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1. 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly after Contractor's notification, , Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-37 C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially com- plete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner's objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will within said 14 days execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or correct- ed) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions. 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all main- tenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, Copyright O 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-38 evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.13.7; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer's Review of Application and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as re- quired by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer's recommen- dation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and , will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.0 1, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjust- ment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-39 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply suffi- cient skilled workers or suitable materials or equip- ment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor's disregard of the authority of Engineer; or 4. Contractor's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and 3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.13, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.13 and 15.02.C, Contractor's services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. E. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.13, and 15.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-40 within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer's action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.13 shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions, or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process, or 3. gives written notice to the other party of their intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: I. delivered in person .to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regula- tions, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Proiect is located. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-41 A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for 17.06 Headings convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700-42 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS INDIAN RIVER COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF UTILITY SERVICES BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS 1840 25rn Street, Vero Beach, Florida 32960 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS PART I - AMENDMENTS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS Article Number Title 1 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7 OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION I 1 COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 12 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 17 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART I - AMENDMENTS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC Document No. C-700, 2002 edition) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS SC -2.01. Delete paragraphs 2.01A and B of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 2.03A. Delete paragraph 2.03A of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace with the following: The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. SC 2.05A1. Add the following immediately at the end of subparagraph 2.05A1: using the Critical Path Method (CPM). SC 2.05A.4. Add new subparagraph 4 after the existing text of 2.05 of the General Conditions: 4. If this Project is an addition to an existing working plant, then the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on tie-ins. The Owner shall have final say on plant shut down times and duration to make tie-ins. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE SC -3.01 C. Add new paragraph D immediately after Paragraph 3.01 C of the General Conditions to read as follows: D. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract Documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein SC3.03A.3 Delete existing 3.03A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following: Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or, in the exercise of ordinary care, reasonably should have recognized such conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy and failed to report it in writing to the Owner and the Engineer. SC 3.03B Delete existing 3.03B of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following B. Resolving Discrepancies. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall be read together as a whole not in isolation so as to give meaning to each provision; however, to the extent there is a conflict or inconsistency between or among provisions, the strictest or most stringent standard shall apply. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 00800-3 SC 4.01 A Delete existing paragraph 4.01A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following: A. Owner shall furnish the site. SC 4.01B Delete existing subparagraph 4.0113 of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 4.01D. Add the following after paragraph 4.01C of the General Conditions: D. Contractor shall provide to the Owner written evidence of authorization to use any private land for staging or storage of material and equipment on the private land. Such written evidence of authorization must be provided to the Owner prior to use of the private land. SC 4.02A Delete 4.02 A.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following: A. Reports and Drawings: The Contract Documents may identify those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents. Engineer has relied upon the data obtained from subsurface investigations made at the site in the form of test borings. Such data is in the form of boring logs, which are available upon request. The locations of the test borings are indicated on the Drawings. Such logs and samples are not part of the Contract Documents. SC 4.02A.2. Add the following new sentences immediately at the end of existing paragraph 4.02A.2. of the General Conditions which is to read as follows: In the preparation of Drawings and Specifications, the Engineer has relied upon the reports listed in Section 00200 and tests of subsurface physical conditions at the site. Copies of these reports are available upon request. The foregoing information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents is based on information and data furnished to Owner or the Engineer by others. The Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data, and the Contractor shall have full responsibility for requesting, reviewing, and checking all such information and data. SC -4.02B. Delete paragraph 4.02 b in its entirety and replace with the following: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities owned by others or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or the Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. The Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data, and the Contractor shall have full responsibility for reviewing and checking all such information and data, and the CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for physical conditions, and Underground Facilities owned by OWNER or others, shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. SC 4.02C, D, and E. Add new paragraphs C, D, and E immediately after Paragraph 4.02B of the General Conditions to read as follows: C. Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the construction, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to the OWNER and conflict, error or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR or any of his Subcontractors or Suppliers may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from OWNER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; provided, however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to the OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy unless CONTRACTOR or any of his Subcontractors or Suppliers had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. 00800-4 D. Scheduling: Unless it prejudices Work already excavated and uncovered, Contractor shall schedule layout, excavating and uncovering of Work or Underground Facilities a sufficient time in advance to allow the Engineer's review, and the possible amending or supplementing of the Contract Documents. E. UTILITY COORDINATION. 1. CONTRACTOR'S Responsibility: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with governmental departments, public utilities, public carriers, service companies and corporations owning or controlling roadways, railways, water, sewer, gas, electrical, cable television, telephone, and telegraph facilities such as pavements, tracks, piping, wires, cables, conduits, poles, guys, etc., including incidental structures connected therewith, that are encountered in the Work in order that such items may be properly shored, supported and protected, or the Contractor shall be solely responsible for coordinating their relocation. The _Contractor shall give proper notices, shall comply with requirements of such parties in the performance of its Work, shall permit entrance of such parties on the Work, and shall pay all charges and fees made by such parties for its Work. The Contractor's attention is called to the fact that there may be delays on the Project due to Work to be done by governmental departments, public utilities, and others in repairing poles, conduits, etc. The Contractor shall cooperate with the above parties, in every way possible, so that the construction can be completed in the least possible time. 2. Connection: At all points where the Work constructed by the Contractor connects to existing utilities and services, the actual Work of making the necessary connection to the existing service or utility shall be arranged for by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner (unless specifically indicated otherwise). Services and utilities included within (but not limited to) this responsibility are roads, ditches, electrical, sewer, mechanical, utilities, water, fencing, etc. Connections shall be made at a time that will result in the least possible interference with existing services. Sc 4.03A Delete 4.03 A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following: A. Notice. The Contractor shall promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, and in no event later than 10 days after first observance of the conditions. Notify the Owner and Engineer in writing of. (1) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in this Contract, or (2) unknown physical conditions at the site of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in Work of the character provided for in this Contract. The Owner will promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that such conditions do materially so differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work under this Contract, a Change Order shall be issued accordingly based on the Schedule of Values and executed by the Owner and the Contractor. Contractor's failure to provide notice upon discovery of the differing site condition shall waive any entitlement to such an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time. Further, no Claim of the Contractor under this paragraph 4.03A shall be allowed unless the Contractor has given the notice as required in this paragraph 4.03A. SC 4.03B. Delete paragraph 4.0313 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 4.03C1 Delete subparagraph 4.03C1 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 4.03C.1. Delete subparagraphs 4.03C 1 a. and b. of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 4.03C3. Delete paragraph 4.03C3. of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -4.05A. Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph 4.05A. of the General Conditions to 1 read as follows: B. The Contractor shall furnish all stakes, templates and other materials necessary for establishing and maintaining the lines and grades necessary for control and construction of the Work. Engineer may check the lines, elevations, reference marks, batter boards, etc., set by Contractor, and Contractor shall correct any errors disclosed by such check. Such a check shall not be considered as approval of Contractor's work and shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for accurate construction of the entire Work. Contractor shall furnish personnel to assist Engineer in checking lines and grades. SC 4.06D Delete the last sentence of paragraph 4.06D of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 4.06G Delete paragraph 4.06G of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 4.07. Add new paragraph 4.07 of the General Conditions to read as follows: 4.07. Archaeological or Historical Resources at Site. If Archaeological or Historical Resources are revealed, uncovered, or discovered at the site, Contractor shall cease work immediately and promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, and in no event later than 5.days after first observance of the conditions, notify the Owner and Engineer in writing of such conditions. Owner shall obtain the services of an Archaeologist registered with the State of Florida Register of Professional Archaeologists. Based on Archaeologist's determination, if Owner finds that such conditions cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work under this Contract, a Change Order shall be entered accordingly. Contractor's failure to provide notice upon discovery of the Archaeological or Historical Resources shall waive any entitlement to such an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE SC 5.O1A. Delete existing paragraph 5.O1A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: 5.0I A. Contractor shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when final payment is made, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Pursuant to Florida Statutes section 255.05(1)(a) (2007), any claimant (as such term is defined in Florida Statutes section 713.01) may apply to Indian River County as Owner for copies of the Agreement and the recorded payment and performance bonds and shall thereupon be furnished with certified copies of such documents. SC 5.02A. Delete the words "Owner or" in line three. SC 5.03B Delete existing paragraph 5.03B of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 5.04B Delete existing paragraph 5.04B of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: B. The Contractor shall not commence Work under the Agreement until it has obtained all insurance required under the Agreement and the Indian River County Risk Manager has approved such insurance. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, for the duration of the Agreement, the minimum insurance coverage as set forth herein. The cost of such insurance shall be included in the Contract Price C. The insurance required by paragraph 5.04A of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts: 1. Workers' Compensation: To meet statutory limits in compliance with the Workers' Compensation Law of Florida. This policy must include employers' liability with a limit $500,000 for each accident, $500,000 disease policy limit and $100,000 disease each employee. Such policy shall include a waiver of subrogation as against Owner on account of injury sustained by an employee(s) of the Contractor. 2. Commercial General Liability: A per occurrence form policy, including Premise Operations, Independent Contractors, Products and Completed Operations including X, C, U (Explosion, Collapse, Underground) Broad Form Property Damage, Broad Form Property Damage Endorsement, with a combined single limit of not less than $3,000,000 general aggregate to include products/completed operations, personal injury/advertising liability, fire damage /legal liability, and medical payments. Limits can be layered with an Excess Liability Policy (Umbrella). 3. Business Auto Liability: Coverage shall include Owned vehicles and Hired/Non-Owned vehicles, for a combined single limit (bodily injury and property damage) of not less than $3,000,000/combined single limit (Bodily Injury/Property Damage); personal injury protection -- statutory limits; $1,000,000 uninsured/underinsured motorist; $1,000,000/hired/non-owned auto liability. Limits can be layered with Excess Liability Policy (Umbrella). 4. Contractor's Builders' Risk "All Risk" Insurance: —Contractor's Builders' Risk "All Risk" Insurance: —All risk coverage with limits equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the completed value of the Work. There shall be a waiver of occupancy endorsement to enable the Owner to occupy the facility under construction during such activity. The policy must be endorsed to provide machinery/equipment endorsement during transit and installation, and Owner direct purchase materials. The maximum deductible under this coverage is $10,000 per claim, except Wind Storm coverage which will have a maximum deductible equal to 2 percent of the completed value of the work. In accordance with Article 10 of the Agreement, Indian River County as Owner shall pay the full amount of any and all deductibles incurred for any loss of Owner direct purchased materials where such loss result from either (l) the negligence of Indian River County as Owner or (2) a force majeure event beyond the control of Owner or Contractor. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor is responsible for risk of loss to Owner direct purchased materials attributable to the negligence of Contractor or its agents. 5. All risk coverage with limits equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the completed value of the Work. There shall be a waiver of occupancy endorsement to enable the Owner to occupy the facility under construction during such activity. The policy must be endorsed to provide machinery/equipment endorsement during transit and installation, and Owner direct purchase materials, if any. The maximum deductible under this coverage is $10,000 per claim. 6. Flood Insurance -Contractor shall maintain coverage when the buildings or structures are located within an identified special flood hazard area. Such flood insurance shall protect the interests of the Contractor and the County and shall be afforded for the lesser of the total insurable value of such buildings or structures, or, the maximum amount of flood insurance coverage available under the National Flood Insurance Program. D. Insurance Requirements — Ten (10) days prior to the commencement of any Work under the Contract, a certificate of insurance shall be provided to the Indian River County Risk Manager for review and approval. The certificate shall provide that: (a) Indian River County (as Owner) and Camp Dresser & McKee Inc. be named as an additional insured on the commercial general liability, auto liability, and Contractor's Builders' Risk "All Risk" insurance policies; (b) the Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary; and (c) Indian River County (as Owner) and Camp Dresser & McKee Inc. will be given thirty (30) days' notice prior to cancellation or modification of any required insurance and such notice shall be in writing by registered mail, return receipt requested and addressed to the Indian River County Risk Manager. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all subcontractors comply with all insurance requirements of this Contract E. All coverage shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of Work and remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07. In addition, with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, such insurance shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner with evidence satisfactory to Owner of the continuation of such insurance at final payment and again one year thereafter, so that Owner is assured of such continuing coverage. F. All insurers must be authorized to do business in Florida and have a Best Key Rating of A- VII. G. The insurance companies selected shall send written verification to the Indian River County Risk Manager that they will provide 30 days prior written notice to the Indian River County Risk Manager of its intent to cancel or modify any required policies of insurance. SC 5.05 Delete existing paragraph 5.05 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -5.06 Delete existing paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -5.07 Delete existing paragraph 5.07 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following. . A. All insurance policies provided by the Contractor shall contain provisions to the effect that the insurer waives all rights of subrogation against any of the insured, additional insured, (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) Owner and the Engineer. SC -5.08. Delete existing paragraph 5.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -5.09. Delete existing paragraph 5.09 of the General Conditions in its entirety. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC 6.0113 Delete paragraph 6.0113 of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace with the following: 6.01 B The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be assigned to, and in attendance at, the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall be reasonably satisfactory to the Owner. So long as the superintendent remains employed by the Contractor or any related entity, the superintendent shall not be replaced without the Owner's prior written consent, except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. SC -6.02 C and D. Add the following new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 6.02B. of the General Conditions which are to read as follows: C. Regular working hours are defined as 8 hours per day, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, between the hours of 7:00 AM and 7:00 PM. Requests to work other than regular working hours shall be submitted to Engineer not less than 48 hours prior to any proposed weekend work or scheduled extended work weeks. Occasional unscheduled overtime on weekdays may be permitted provided two hours notice is given to Engineer. D. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and/or inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours stipulated in Article SC -6.02C. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the Contractor's monthly payment request or deducted from the retainage prior to release of final payment. Overtime costs for the Owner's personnel shall be based on the individual's current overtime wage rate. Overtime costs for personnel employed by the Engineer or Owner's independent testing laboratory shall be calculated in accordance with the terms of their respective contracts with the Owner. SC 6.04A.1. Add the following sentence immediately after the existing text in paragraph 6.04 A.1 of the General Conditions: Additionally, any and all changes to the Project's critical path must be reflected in each Project schedule_ SC -6.04.A.3. Add the following paragraph immediately after paragraph GC -6.04.A.2 of the General Conditions: Contractor shall give Owner full information in advance as to its plans for performing each part of the Work. If at any time during the progress of Work, Contractor's actual progress is inadequate to meets the requirements of the Contract, Owner may, but is not obligated to, so notify Contractor. In such event, Contractor acknowledges and agrees that Contractor shall implement some or all of the following remedial actions at the sole cost and expense of Contractor: (a) Increase manpower in such quantities and crafts as necessary to eliminate the backlog of Work; (b) Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing to eliminate the backlog of Work; or (c) Reschedule the Work in conformance with the specification requirements. Neither such notice by Owner nor Owner's failure to issue such notice shall relieve Contractor of its obligation to achieve the quality of Work and rate of progress required by the Contract. Failure of Contractor to implement some or all of the remedial actions may be grounds for determination by Owner that Contractor is not prosecuting its Work with such diligence as will assure completion within times specified. Upon such determination, Owner may terminate Contractor's right to proceed with the performance of the Contract, or any separable part thereof, in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Contract. SC -6.06A. Delete Paragraph 6.06A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, (including those who are to furnish the principal items of materials or equipment), whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Acceptance of any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization by Owner shall not constitute a waiver of any right of Owner to reject defective Work. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. SC -6.06B Delete Paragraph 6.06B of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -6.08. Delete Paragraph 6.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: ALL PERMIT, IMPACT, OR INSPECTION FEES APPLICABLE AT THE TIME OF OPENING OF BIDS THAT ARE PAYABLE TO INDIAN RIVER COUNTY IN CONNECTION WITH THE WORK ON THIS COUNTY PROJECT WILL BE PAID BY INDIAN RIVER COUNTY. Contractor acknowledges that the foregoing items are governed by the provisions of Florida Statutes section 218.80, Public Bid Disclosure Act. Further, Contractor shall pay the applicable business tax and obtain a business tax receipt from the Indian River County Tax Collector. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all applicable construction permits. Owner shall reimburse Contractor for the cost of such permits on the basis of actual cost. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. As set forth in the Contract Documents, re -inspection fees are payable solely by Contractor. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent services to the Work. Owner has obtained the Temprary Consumptive Use Permit from the St. Johns River Water management District and such permits are included in the Contract Documents in Section 01060. Owner has obtained/made application for the Indian River County Minor Site Plan approval, FDEP Specific Permit to Construct PWS Components and Inidan River County ROW Permit. Any permits issued after issuance of bid documents will be provided as an Addendum.. Contractor acknowledges that the foregoing items are governed by the provisions of Florida Statutes section 218.80 (2007), Public Bid Disclosure Act. SC 6.11 A.3: Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 9 of paragraph 6.11 A.3 of the General Conditions. SC 6.19A: Delete Paragraph 6.19A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner for one (1) year from the date of Final Completion that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective; provided, however, that manufacturer equipment warranties may be of a longer duration. SC -6.20A. Delete paragraph 6.20A of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -6.21E. Delete paragraph 6.21E of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance criteria or design criteria required by or contained in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 OTHER WORK AT THE SITE SC-7.O1A. Delete paragraph 7.O1A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: 7.01A. Related Work at Site. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner's employees, or pursuant to direct contracts with others. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then written notice thereof will be given by Owner to Contractor prior to Owner starting any such other work; and Contractor shall perform in accordance with Article 7 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 8 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC -8.02. Delete paragraph 8.02 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following If Owner terminates the employment of Engineer, Owner may appoint another engineer whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. SC -8.04. Delete paragraph 8.04 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: Payments under this contract are governed by the Local Government Prompt Payment Act, Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq., SC -8.06. Delete paragraph 8.06 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -8.11. Delete paragraph 8.11 of the General Conditions in its entirety. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION SC 9.02. Delete the first sentence of paragraph 9.03A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified Engineer the progress that has been made and the quality -of the various aspects of Contractor's -executed Work. SC -9.03B.. Add the following new paragraph B. immediately after paragraph 9.03A of the General Conditions which is to read as follows: B. Engineer will furnish a part-time Resident Project Representative. Contractor is responsible to give 24-hour notice on all required inspections so that the Resident Project Representative may be present. SC 9.04 A. Delete the third sentence of paragraph 9.04A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: However, if Contractor claims entitlement to additional time or money as a result of the Field Order, such entitlement is conditioned upon obtaining a Change Order authorized and executed by Owner after timely making a Claim as provided in the Contract Documents. SC 9.08-A. Delete the second sentence of 9.08A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: Except for: (a) Claims for differing subsurface or physical conditions governed by paragraph 4.03; and (b) claims for time extensions governed by paragraph 12.03, all matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due, relating to the acceptability of the Work and the interpretation of the requirements of the contract documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 15 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 15 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later; provided, however, the Owner shall make all final determination of such matters. SC 9.08-C. Delete paragraph 9.08-C of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 9.08-D. Delete paragraph 9.08-1) of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 10.03 A.3 Delete subparagraph 10.03.A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety SC 10.05.A. Delete paragraph 10.05.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. All Claims shall initially be referred to the Engineer for decision. SC 10.05.13. Delete paragraph 10.05.13 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: Except for: (a) Claims for differing subsurface or physical conditions governed by paragraph 4.03; and (b) claims for time extensions governed by paragraph 12.03, Claims by either party shall be initiated within 15 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 15 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later, by written notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with supporting data to the Engineer and the other party by written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, dispute, or other matter delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.02.13. No claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment hereunder shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under this Contract. SC 10.05 C, D, and E. Delete paragraphs 10.05C, D, and E. of the General Conditions in their entirety. ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK SC -11.02A. Delete paragraph 11.02.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums as may be acceptable to L) OWNER. Delete paragraphs 11.0213 through D of the General Conditions in their entirety. 0 ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES SC 12.01A. Delete paragraph 12.01A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. SC 12.01B2. Delete paragraph 12.01 B2 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum. SC 12.01 B3. Delete paragraph 12.01 B3 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 12.01C. Delete paragraph 12.01 C of the General Conditions in its entirety. 12.03A and B. Delete paragraphs 12.03.A and 12.03B of the General Conditions in their entirety and replace with the following: A. Where Contractor is delayed or prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if LD a Claim is made therefore as provided in paragraph 12.02.A and (2) Contractor provides evidence that the delay impacted the critical path of the Project. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, abnormal weather �J conditions or acts of God. The Contractor must request the extension of time in writing and must provide the following information within the time periods stated hereafter. Failure to submit such information and in compliance with the time requirements hereinafter stated, shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor and a denial of the claim for extension of time: 1. Nature of the delay or change in the Work; 2. Dates of commencement�and cessation of the delay or change in the Work; 3. Activities on the current progress schedule affected by the delay or change in the Work; 4. Identification and demonstration that the delay or change in Work affects the critical path; 5. Identification of the source of delay or change in the Work; 6. Anticipated extent of the delay or change in the Work; and 7. Recommended action to minimize the delay. B. Contractor hereby affirms that the extension of time granted herein is the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy. Apart from extension of time, no payment or claim for damages shall be made to the Contractor as compensation for damages for any delays or hindrances from any cause whatsoever in the progress of the Work whether such delay is avoidable or unavoidable. SC 12.03C. Delete paragraph 12.03.0 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 12.03D. Delete paragraph 12.03D of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: In no event shall Owner, Engineer, or the Related Entities of either of them be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization, or any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for any claim, cost, loss, or damages of any nature whatsoever arising out of or resulting from delays. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK SC 13.04C. Delete paragraph 13.04.0 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to ,such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. SC 13.04D. Delete paragraph 13.04.D of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:. If, the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. SC 13.06A. Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 9 of paragraph 13.06.A of the General Conditions. SC13.07A. Add the following sentence at the beginning of paragraph 13.07.0 of the General Conditions: The Owner and Contractor agree that a warranty inspection shall be scheduled no later than eleven (11) months after final payment under this Contract so that the Owner and the Contractor may inspect and otherwise examine the Work prior to the expiration of the Performance Bond SC 13.07E. Delete paragraph 13.07E of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: Contractor's obligations under this paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or any way to limit the Contractor's continued liability for defective Work, including latent defects. SC 13.08A. TWO changes: 1. Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 8 of paragraph 13.08.A of the General Conditions. 2. Delete the phrase "(such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness)" in lines 10 and 11 of paragraph 13.08.A of the General Conditions. 13.09C Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 4 of paragraph 13.09.0 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION SC-14.02A.L Delete the first sentence of paragraph 14.02.A.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: On or before the tenth (10`h) day of each month, and not more often than once a month, the Contractor shall submit completed partial progress payment requests to the Engineer, as set forth herein. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application for Payment and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Such supporting documents shall include but not be limited to, the required Contractor's certification; retainage as set forth in the Agreement; and a monthly dated CPM schedule for the Project. The Contractor shall make the following certification (Affidavit) on each Application for Payment: "I hereby certify that the labor and materials listed on this Application for Payment have been used in the construction of this Work and payment received from the last request for payment has been used to make X1:11lllfl payments to all subcontractors, laborers, material, men and suppliers except as listed below: . "All payments by Indian River County as Owner shall be made in accordance with the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. SC- I4.02A.3. Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 14.02A.3 of the General Conditions, which is to read as follows: 4. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof to Owner and Engineer that payment received from Owner for materials and equipment not incorporated into the Work and suitably stored, has in fact been paid to the respective supplier(s) within ten (10) days of Contractor's receipt of payment from Owner. Failure to provide such evidence of payment shall result in the withdrawal of previous approval(s) and removal of the cost of related materials and equipment from the.next submitted Application for Payment, and shall be deemed.a default under the Contract. SC -14.02C.1. Delete paragraph 14.02.0 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: All payments by Indian River County as Owner shall be made in accordance with the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. SC- 14.02D. Ld. Delete paragraph 14.02D. Ld of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: d. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occurrence or -probable occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or paragraph 15.02.A. SC- 14.02D.2. Delete paragraph 14.02D.2 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner shall provide notice to Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. and pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. Owner shall pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. SC 14.02D3. Delete paragraph 14.02D3 of the General Conditions in its entirety SC- 14.03A.Add the following sentences to the end of the existing paragraph 14.03A of the General Conditions as follows: No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that Contractor has good title to all materials and supplies used by Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. SC -14.04C.. Delete paragraph 14.04C of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion that shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. In accordance with the provisions of Florida Statutes section 208.735(7)(x)(2008), upon receipt of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion from Engineer, the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor shall conduct a walk-through inspection of the Project to document a list of any items required to render the Work on the Project complete, satisfactory, and acceptable under this Agreement (herein the "Statutory List"). The Statutory List shall be reduced to writing and circulated among the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor by the Owner or the Engineer within 30 calendar days after substantial completion. The Owner and Contractor acknowledge and agree that: 1) the failure to include any corrective work, or pending items that are not yet completed, on the Statutory List does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all of the Work under this Agreement; 2) upon completion of all items on the Statutory List, the Contractor may submit a pay request for all remaining retainage except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement; and 3) any and all items that require correction under this Agreement and that are identified after the preparation of the Statutory List remain the obligation of the Contractor to complete to the Owner's satisfaction under this Agreement. After receipt of the Statutory List by the Contractor, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it will diligently proceed to complete all items on the Statutory List and schedule a final walk-through in anticipation of final completion on the Project. SC 14.04D. Delete paragraph 14.04D of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. SC 14.07A.3. Delete paragraph 14.07A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC -14.07B.1. Delete paragraph 14.0713.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: 1. If, on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will indicate, within twenty days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, in writing Engineer's recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. SC -14.07.C.1. Delete paragraph GC- 14.07.C.I in its entirety and replace with the following: Payment shall be made by Owner to Contractor according to the Local Government Prompt Payment Act, Florida Statutes section 218. et.seq. SC 14.08. Delete paragraph 14.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 14.09. Delete paragraph 14.09 of the General Conditions in its entirety. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION SC- I5.02.A.1. Delete subparagraph 15.02.A.I of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace with the following: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; SC- I 5.02.A.4. Delete subparagraph 15.02.A.4 of the General Conditions in its entirety, and replace with the following: 4. Contractor's violation of any material provisions of the Contract Documents. SC 15.02.A.5 and 6. Add the following new subparagraphs at the end of paragraph GC- 15.02.A 5. Failure of Contractor to make proper payments to Subcontractors for labor, materials or equipment in connection with the Work; 6. If Contractor abandons the Work, or assigns Contract or any part thereof, without the previous written consent of Owner, otherwise than in accordance with the Contract Documents. SC- I5.02.C. Delete the words: "arbitration or" in line 7 of paragraph 15.02.0 of the General Conditions. SC -15.03.A.3. Delete subparagraph 15.03.A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety. SC 15.02.G. Add the following new paragraph immediately following paragraph 15.02.17 of the General Conditions: G. If, after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause as set forth in paragraph 15.02, it is determined that the Contractor had not failed to fulfill its contractual obligations, the termination under paragraph 15.02 shall be deemed to have been for the convenience of the Owner. In such event, adjustment of the contract price shall be made as provided in paragraph 15.03. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION SC -16.01A. Delete the paragraph 16.01A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Prior to the filing of any suitor other legal proceedings, the parties shall endeavor to resolve claim disputes or other matters in question by mediation. Mediation shall be initiated by any party by serving a written request for same on the other party. The parties shall, by mutual agreement, select a circuit court mediator as certified by the Supreme Court of Florida within 15 days of the date of the request for mediation. If the parties cannot agree on the selection of a circuit court mediator as certified by the Supreme Court of Florida, then the Owner shall select the mediator, who shall be a circuit court mediator as certified by the Supreme Court of Florida. The mediator's fee shall be paid in equal shares by Owner and Contractor. SC 16.01.C. Delete paragraph 16.01 C of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following C. Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain the progress schedule during the dispute resolution proceedings, unless otherwise agreed by Contractor and Owner in writing. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS SC 17.01A. Delete paragraph 17.01A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following Notices: Any notice, request, demand, consent, approval, or other communication required or permitted by this Agreement shall be given or made in writing and shall be served, as elected by the party giving such notice, by any of the following methods: (a) Hand delivery to the other party; (b) Delivery by commercial overnight courier service; or (c) Mailed by registered or certified mail (postage prepaid), return receipt requested at the addresses of the parties shown in the Agreement. Notices shall be effective when received at the address as specified above. Facsimile transmission is acceptable notice effective when received, provided, however, that facsimile transmissions received (i.e., printed) after 5:00 p.m. or on weekends or holidays, will be deemed received on the next day that is not a weekend day or a holiday. The original of the notice must additionally be mailed. Either party may change its address, for the purposes of this paragraph, by written notice to the other party given in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph. SC 17.02 through and including 17.09. Add the following new paragraphs after paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions: 17.02. Utilities. The Contractor shall, at its expense, arrange for, develop and maintain all utilities in Work areas to meet the requirements of the Contract. Such utilities shall be furnished by Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, and shall include, but not be limited to the following: public telephone service for the Contractor's use; construction power as required at each point of construction; and water as required throughout the construction. Prior to final acceptance of the Work the Contractor shall, at its expense, satisfactorily remove and dispose of all temporary utilities developed to meet the requirements of the Contract. The Owner will assume the utility costs directly related to its usage of areas in which it has taken Beneficial Occupancy. 17.03. Drainage. The Contractor shall so conduct its operations and maintain the Work in such condition that adequate drainage will be in effect at all times. Existing functioning storm sewers, gutters, ditches, and other run-off shall not be obstructed. 17.04. Fire Hydrants. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the highway shall be kept accessible to fire apparatus at all times and no material or obstruction shall be placed within fifteen feet (15') of any such hydrant. 17.05. Protection of Structures. Heavy equipment shall not be operated close enough to pipe headwalls or other structures to cause their displacement. 17.06. Fencing. On all Work which includes fencing and where the Engineer determines it to be necessary for maintaining the security of livestock or adjacent property, or for protection of pedestrians who are likely to gain access to the Work from adjacent property, the Contractor shall erect an appropriate temporary security fence as a first order of business. Temporary fencing shall be installed at temporary construction easement areas on all commercial and residential properties appropriate to secure the Work area and protect persons and domestic animals. At all times, the Contractor shall conduct the Work under secure temporary fencing. Permanent fencing shall be addressed as required by the Plans and Specifications. 17.07. Record Drawings. The Contractor shall keep one record copy of all Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, and Shop Drawings at the site in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. These items shall be available to the Engineer and shall be delivered to the Engineer for the Owner. Record Drawings shall be submitted with each pay request. Record Drawings shall be submitted with each pay request. Final acceptance of the Work will be withheld until the approval of such documents are made by the Owner. 17.08. Progress Videotapes. Contractor shall deliver to the Owner both prior to commencing the Project and before receipt of Final Payment, a DVD Type color videotape of the Project showing the site before and after Work has been completed. Contractor shall audibly identify on the videotape the station numbers as those areas of the Project are taped. The cost of the videotaping is included in the bid submitted by the Contractor. 17.09. Commercial Activities. Contractor shall not establish any commercial activity or issue concessions or permits of any kind to third parties for establishing commercial activities on land owned or controlled by Owner. Contractor shall not allow its employees to engage in any commercial activities on the Project site. PART II — FORMS TO BE USED DURING PROJECT CONSTRUCTION (Pages 19 through 34) NOTICE OF AWARD — (Sample) NOTICE TO PROCEED FIELD ORDER WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE CHANGE ORDER APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION FINAL RELEASE OF LIEN DUTIES RESPONSIBILITIES AND LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE [ITI%�IZIIIE:3 (SAMPLE) NOTICE OF AWARD Dated , 20 TO: (Bidder) CONTRACT FOR: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY NORTH WTP RAW WATER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM You are notified that your Bid dated , 20 for the above Contract has been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded a contract for: (Indicate total Work, alternates or sections of Work awarded) The Contract Price of your contract is Dollars Enclosed are seven (7) copies of the Contract Documents for your execution and subsequent return to this office for further processing. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is by , 20_• 1. Execute all copies of the Agreement. Each Project Manual and set of contract drawings must bear your signature on the cover sheet. Do not date the Agreements or bonds; this will be accomplished upon execution of the contracts by the OWNER. Submit a power of attorney authorizing OWNER to date bonds and Agreements. 2. Submit seven (7) copies of the Payment and Performance Bonds. Instructions to the Surety and the Principal for execution of the bonds are as follows: Where the CONTRACTOR is a Corporation, the Agreement and any bonds must be executed by the President or other duly authorized officer of the corporation. The Agreement or Bond is accompanied by a statement certified by a Secretary of the Corporation. The signatures of the persons executing the bond on behalf of the Principal and of the Surety, respectively, shall each be dated on the signature line. If the bond is executed by an Attorney -in -Fact for the Surety, the accompanying Power of Attorney must be executed by persons whose authority to do so is plainly identified on the face of the Power of Attorney. Neither signatures nor the Corporate Seal may appear by facsimile unless the authority for them to appear in that form is plainly disclosed on the face of the document. The Secretary or other properly authorized Officer must certify and seal a statement declaring that the authority granted by the Power of Attorney remained in force on the date that the bond was executed by the Attorney -in -Fact. Include seven (7) copies of the Certificate of Insurance. The Certificate must name the OWNER as an additional insured and the standard cancellation clause must read as follows: "Should any of the above described policies be canceled or changed by restricted amendment before the expiration date thereof, the issuing Company will give thirty (30) days written notice to the below named certificate holder." Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited. Within twenty (20) days after you comply with the above conditions, the OWNER will return to you one fully signed counterpart of the Contract Documents attached. If you have any questions, or if we can be of any further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact this office. Sincerely, NOTICE TO PROCEED 20 CONTRACT FOR: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY NORTH WTP RAW WATER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM CONTRACTOR: Gentlemen: You are hereby notified to commence work on the subject contract on or before , 20 and are to fully complete the work within calendar days. In accordance with the contract documents, the Substantial Completion date is , (_days) with the Final Completion date being (-days). Extension in time will be by written change order only. The contract provides for assessment of liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day that the work remains incomplete after the above established substantial completion date the sum of $ and for each consecutive calendar day that the work remains incomplete after the above established final completion date the sum of $ Indian River County, Florida (OWNER) (Authorized Signature) W. Erik Olson, Director of Utility Services (Printed Name & Title of Above Signer) NOTE: Attach this notice to your contract making it a part thereof. IN FIELD ORDER PROJECT: FIELD ORDER NO.: DATE: CONTRACT: OWNER: OWNER'S PROJECT NO.: TO: CONTRACT DATE: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This Field Order is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order minor changes in the work and/or memorialize trade-off agreements. Both parties hereby agree that the work described by this Field Order is to be accomplished without change in Contract Sum, Contract Time, and/or claims for other costs. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DESCRIPTION: (Here insert a written description of the interpretation, change or agreement.) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FIELD ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: BY: BY: DATES: DATE: 00800-22 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE No. PROJECT: DATE OF ISSUANCE: OWNER: (Name, Address) CONTRACTOR: OWNER's Project No.: ENGINEER: CONTRACT FOR: ENGINEER's Project No.: You are directed to proceed with the following change(s): Description: Purpose of Work Directive Change: Attachment(s) (list documents supporting change): If a claim is made that the above change(s) have affected Contract Price or Contract Time, any claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one of the following methods of determining the effect of the change(s). Method of determining change in Contract Price: Time: [ ] Time and Materials [ J Unit Prices [ ] Cost plus fixed fee Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price $ . If the change involves an increase, the estimated amount is not to be exceeded without further authorization. Method of determining change in Contract [ ] Contractor's records [ ] Engineer's records [ ] Other Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Time days. If the change involves an increase, the estimated time is not to be exceed without further authorization. Once the Work covered by the directive is completed or final cost and time determined, Contractor should submit documentation for inclusion in a change Order. THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACT PRICE OR THE CONTRACT TIME. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHOULD BE CONSIDERED PROMPTLY. RECOMMENDED: APPROVED: an Engineer Owner Date: Date: 00800-23 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE INSTRUCTIONS 1. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed for use in situations involving changes in the Work which, if not processed expeditiously, might delay the Project. These changes are often initiated in the field and may affect the Contract Price or the Contract Times. This is not a Change Order, but only a directive to proceed with Work that may be included in a subsequent Change Order. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times a Field Order should be used. 2. COMPLETING THE WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE FORM Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the items involved and attachments. Based on conversations between Engineer and Contractor, Engineer completes the following: METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT PRICE: Mark the method to be used in determining the final cost of Work involved and the estimated net effect on the Contract Price. If change involves an increase in the Contract Price and the estimated amount is approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the estimated price or Contractor may stop the changed Work when the estimates time is reached. If Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Price, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked "Not Applicable". Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner for authorization because Engineer alone does not have authority to authorize changes in Price or Times. Once authorized by Owner, a copy should be sent by Engineer to Contractor. Price and Times may only be changed by Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor with Engineer's recommendation. Paragraph 10.03.A.2 of the General Conditions requires that a Change Order be initiated and processed to cover any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed pursuant to this Work Change Directive. Once the Work covered by this directive is completed or final cost and times are determined, Contractor should submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order. THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACT PRICE OR CONTRACT TIMES. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHOULD BE CONSIDERED PROMPTLY. CHANGE ORDER No. PROJECT DATE OF ISSUANCE EFFECTIVE DATE OWNER OWNER's Contract No. Project No. CONTRACTOR ENGINEER PBS&J, Inc. You are directed to make the following changes in the Contract Documents: Description: Reason for change order: Attachments: (List doenmenta .crnnnnrtinv Anna,-) CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME Original Contract Price Original Contract Times $ Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: Days or dates Net changes from previous Change Orders Net change from previous Change Orders No. to No. No. to No. $ days Contract Price prior to this Change Order Contract Time prior to this Change Order $ Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: Days or dates Net Increase (decrease) in this Change Order Net Increase in this Change Order days Contract Price with all approved Change Orders Contract Time with all approved Change Orders $ Substantial Completion: Ready for final payment: Days or dates RECOMMENDED: APPROVED: ACCEPTED: By: Engineer (Authorized Signature) Date: By: Owner (Authorized Signature) Date: By: Contractor (Authorized Signature) Date: EJCDC No. C-700 (2002 Edition) Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 00800-25 CHANGE ORDER INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed to provide a uniform format for handling contract changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Change Directive must be incorporated into a subsequent Change Order if they affect Price or Times. Changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times should be promptly covered by a Change Order. The practice of accumulating Change Orders to reduce the administrative burden may lead to unnecessary disputes. If Milestones have been listed in the Agreement, any effect of a Change Order thereon should be addressed. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or Contract Times, a Field Order should be used. B. COMPLETING THE CHANGE ORDER FORM Engineer normally initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner or Contractor for approval, depending on whether the Change Order is a true order to the Contractor or the formalization of a negotiated agreement for a previously performed change. After approval by one contracting party, all copies should be sent to the other party for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies after approval by both parties. If a change only applies to price or to times, cross out the part of the tabulation that does not apply. 8 E �2 0 Z / 'o CL 2 Of ± ± Z_ (D Z ± 6 2 / 0 U()� nw t..Q�± 2222 0f�:/ 0EO± z 0 � « L) LLF- ■ w Q @ k O R U � e z O U $ $ k\ 0 § 0 § g E 25 /k % \ / k /k /M of / \ \? \k \2 /\ \ E \� U) M E // f \ m } k/ E 7D c E / CL ƒM \7 // \E // \ / / a � / E •• 0 0 'a 7 C: k a o .g e \� @ I o / ƒ y 0cu E § �/m 6 = E :3 / >,2 a e o �a-0 0 -0& O-0 f\3 \kc7$ U) CU . \ 2 c g -a 2 CY) -0< �CU QCL k\ 2 C: 2§� « — 7 o C 3 E\ E I M \ 2 E o E o E z o w e m m Od0�Of �-R w&a»a a6co* z 0 � « L) LLF- ■ w Q @ k O R U � e z O U $ $ k\ 0 § 0 § g E 25 /k % \ / k /k /M of / \ \? \k \2 /\ \ E \� U) M E // f \ m } k/ E 7D c E / CL ƒM \7 // \E // \ / / E 0 U Q H Z O co W 0 E N 0 N 0 c 0 3 -0 C: f9 a 0 - c � o o 7) cu UU)-o 0 0- x N C: 0 U 'U) � N CL !_ E 0 m0 o � Z E O a) a) i L O O U m r-• L M �- C U C Q) >, m O _ a) co a � a M a U L O L () m E 0 w_0 U � a 'D O a) E c a O O 0 3 ^0 W ! 0 I m I - I � nUn♦♦ L W L IU c _0 m c I _0 C6 I a) U �L. co 1 L U U +_• M a) I cv -O m T 0 U T I O I C: a) (130 W Z) Q /z/� \D N) 1..1. W W Z_ C7 Z W U w t 2 U Q L E O 1*- U O U V- O oU aai a) L c (6 M L O m 0 a) U M Q) U") � U N � U) o C a � a) U C T O m O w cv E O ) E c O L U0ca La 0- O M Q] U c a) _0 E � U) Q a o � U O 0U O O 4) � a) L � � O �• U � M c O t6 a) c� N O O c c U to a a) >)OL a) E O U (n E— .� c — a) O U a) a) O O O a � O N � a) U � O U U N c .- O - U Ln (n O U .� .Ln W ry Q /Z v L.L W w Z_ U Z W U w H 2 U 2 0 E � a � : � � c 0 2 § CL CL « � 0 u � 2 0 U CD 0 CD2 O � U LU U) 0 Z / 'o � � ± ± _2 (D Z ± 0 2 / 2 0 U E= /..Of± @£2 _2 §ga) z 6 B o @ ± 2 w±Ua-02 0 ��0 _0 = be \ƒ n o$ 00U) \q ƒ� /0 E a R= o E %c Z.g£= 015 o 0 -0) U / b % §6 ƒ § 5 [ \ o .= o \: \ .�¥ 3D> 0m §o- \ E � cD°m\k/n\1 Ci - U) ° /\�\/0 53 m / ( E r- 2 -0 f 5 0 (D Co ±/f§ / �//\ oa /\/§ %§ /ƒ�0 @ � = 2� O \ 2 / O f / E Co (n \a a) 0-0 _ \ 0 ,0 =�nm \/ q\ƒ0 \ / / ) \� En a)-0 \E=%0� o 0 ML) -0 m 72 ��M� f § 7 \ x / ere= \ / >,\ k k n 5 = O § Ef 7 /\ 7\ 0 c-0 f Eƒ 2 0 > » ea 2 CL° // 5\=O /22 ƒ 7= oyM@ \ �mf 7 ) Sg / Fu £%£ L $ (n C: = m /0 f=7» _� R3ne 601 6 � a � c .. 0 b 'a + 2 e 7 _ / k o .E _0 E I = o E c cu J y 0 .$ C: ƒƒ f / kU)/CO 2 J 2 .. 2 /�2 En 2 G § 2 @ © 2 2-0 � 4- O-0 000 . C) 0)/ 7 U) C §� f E 2 E 2 gUt-0« I k E @ ° % 2«a 3 m a ± 2 ƒ c- U �3 (D = « /m 0) k 2 C § / 0 o = -- .E % L 3 3 % OkUF-ƒ ��R w&a»a a6co 0 ��0 _0 = be \ƒ n o$ 00U) \q ƒ� /0 E a R= o E %c Z.g£= 015 o 0 -0) U / b % §6 ƒ § 5 [ \ o .= o \: \ .�¥ 3D> 0m §o- \ E � cD°m\k/n\1 Ci - U) ° /\�\/0 53 m / ( E r- 2 -0 f 5 0 (D Co ±/f§ / �//\ oa /\/§ %§ /ƒ�0 @ � = 2� O \ 2 / O f / E Co (n \a a) 0-0 _ \ 0 ,0 =�nm \/ q\ƒ0 \ / / ) \� En a)-0 \E=%0� o 0 ML) -0 m 72 ��M� f § 7 \ x / ere= \ / >,\ k k n 5 = O § Ef 7 /\ 7\ 0 c-0 f Eƒ 2 0 > » ea 2 CL° // 5\=O /22 ƒ 7= oyM@ \ �mf 7 ) Sg / Fu £%£ L $ (n C: = m /0 f=7» _� R3ne cn 0 a) E 12 0 a� O E `O 3 a co a V 0- 0 -O U O C U O (6 0 Z T O 7 � (nUU) C: O U '55 N d E mU Z i+ E O N a) a a) co 0 Nw LL Q ,Z V U) w w Z Z w U w H 2 U n, Q ii w W W Z 0 Z W U. O L E O 4-- U O U � O oU n. a) a) L a a) a) m C co Q) U M � a N N C m -0 Q) U 'Q) = c Q a) aC) Q L C ^m OC I L C U Q) m m L E O L -0 U o .� O M W V cn c m � O E E0a) � Q a) L Q O 0 Y U O m •� 3 C Q) o U o U O Q) a) (n E L O � d-+ M U + — m (n _0 0— m -m c (D L M O O c c U ca Q- m 0)O m A 4-- a) E O M cn cn E. U)— m O U a) O N O � -0 Q 0- Y () a) L 0 U u) 0) U C .— O M +' U Q -0 OO .E .N Nw LL D a /Z V w LU Z Z w H U w 2 U Q E O c c a) E 7 U O C C m Q O U U Q APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION The sample form of Schedule of Values is intended as a guide only. Many projects require a more extensive form with space for numerous items, descriptions of Change Orders, identification of variable quantity adjustments, summary of materials and equipment stored at the site and other information. It is expected that a separate form will be developed by Engineer and Contractor at the time Contractor's schedule of Values is finalized. Note also that the format for retainage must be changed if the Contract permits (or the law provides), and Contractor elects to deposit securities in lieu of retainage. Refer to Article 14 of the General Conditions for provisions concerning payments to Contractor. B. COMPLETING THE FORM The Schedule of Values, submitted and approved as provided in paragraphs 2.05.13.3 and 2.07 of the General Conditions, should be reproduced as appropriate in the space indicated on the Application for Payment form. Note that the cost of materials and equipment is often listed separately from the cost of installation. Also, note that each Unit Price is deemed to include Contractor's overhead and profit. All Change Orders affecting the Contract Price should be identified and included in the Schedule of Values as required for progress payments. The form is suitable for use in the Final Application for Payment as well as for Progress Payments; however, the required accompanying documentation is usually more extensive for final payment. All accompanying documentation should be identified in the space provided on the form. C. LEGAL REVIEW All accompanying documentation of a legal nature, such as Lien Waivers, should be reviews by an attorney, and Engineer should so advise Owner. 00800-31 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT: Indian River County North WTP Raw Water Transmission System DATE OF ISSUANCE OWNER Indian River County Board of County Commissioners OWNER's Contract No. Project No. CONTRACTOR ,ENGINEER PBS&J, Inc. This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to the following specified parts thereof: To: And To IWAR`[W3 CONTRACTOR The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially complete in accordance with the contract Documents on DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the contract Documents. The items in the tentative list shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR within Days of the above date of Substantial Completion. EJCDC No. C-700 (2002 Edition) Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 00800-32 From the date of Substantial Completion, the responsibilities between OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties and guarantees shall be as follows: RESPONSIBILITIES: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: [For items to be attached see definition of Substantial Completion as supplemented and other specifically noted conditions precedent to achieving Substantial Completion as required by Contract Documents.] This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Executed by ENGINEER on ENGINEER (Authorized Signature) CONTRACTOR accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on , 20 CONTRACTOR OWNER accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on 20 (Authorized Signature) 00800-33 0 FINAL RELEASE OF LIEN KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (Company Name) The acceptance by the CONTRACTOR of final payment shall be and shall operate as a release to the OWNER from all claims and all liability to the CONTRACTOR other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the CONTRACTOR for all things done or furnished in connection with the work under this Contract and for every act and neglect of the OWNER and others relating to or arising out of the work. for all in consideration of paid to do dollars ($ ) (Total Amount of Contract) by receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, (Me/Us) hereby release and quit claim to the OWNER, its successors k., — -J 1 or assigns, all liens, lien rights, claims or demands of any kind whatsoever which now have or might have against the property, building, and/ or (I/We) for any incidental expense for the construction of (Project Number) (Project Name) thereon or in otherwise improving said property situated as above described. IN WITNESS WHEREOF I have hereunto set my hand and seal this day of 120 (SEAL) By WITNESS: Title DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITIES AND LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE GENERAL Resident Project Representative is ENGINEER'S Agent, will act as directed by and under the supervision of ENGINEER, and will confer with ENGINEER regarding his actions. Resident Project Representative's dealings in matters pertaining to the on-site Work shall in general be only with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR, and dealings with Subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge of CONTRACTOR. Written communication with OWNER will be only through or as directed by ENGINEER. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES Resident Project Representative will: 1. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing submissions and schedule of values prepared by CONTRACTOR and consult with ENGINEER concerning their acceptability. 2. Conferences: Attend preconstruction conferences. Arrange a schedule of progress meetings and other job conferences as required in consultation with ENGINEER and notify those expected to attend in advance. Attend meetings, and maintain and circulate copies of minutes thereof. 3. Liaison: 4. Serve as ENGINEER'S liaison with CONTRACTOR, working principally through CONTRACTOR'S superintendent and assist him in understanding the intent of the Contract Documents. Assist ENGINEER in serving as OWNER'S liaison with CONTRACTOR when CONTRACTOR'S operations affect OWNER'S on-site operations. 5. As requested by ENGINEER, assist in obtaining from OWNER additional details or information, when required at the job site for proper execution of the Work. 6. Shop Drawings and Samples: a. Receive and record date of receipt of Shop Drawings and samples, receive samples which are furnished at the site by CONTRACTOR, and notify ENGINEER of their availability for examination. b. Advise ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR or his superintendent immediately of the commencement of any Work requiring a Shop Drawing or sample submission if the submission has not been approved by the ENGINEER. 7. Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests: a. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist ENGINEER in determining if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents and that completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents. b. Report to ENGINEER whenever he believes that any Work is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective or does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspections, tests or approval required to be made or has been damaged prior to final payment; and advise ENGINEER when he believes Work should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. C. Verify that tests, equipment and systems startups and operating and maintenance instructions are conducted as required by the Contract Documents and in 00800-35 presence of the required personnel, and that CONTRACTOR maintains adequate records thereof; observe, record and report to ENGINEER appropriate details relative to the test procedures and startups. d. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Project, record the outcome of these inspections and report to ENGINEER. S. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Transmit to CONTRACTOR engineer's clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents. 9. Modifications: Consider and evaluate CONTRACTOR'S suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report them with recommendations to ENGINEER. 10. Records: a. Maintain at the job site orderly files for correspondence, reports of job conferences, Shop Drawings and samples submissions, reproductions of original Contract Documents including all Addenda, change orders, field orders, additional Drawings issued subsequent to the execution of the Contract, ENGINEER'S clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents, progress reports, and other Project related documents. b. Keep a diary or log book, recording hours on the job site, weather conditions, data relative to questions of extras or deductions, list of visiting officials and representatives of manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers and distributors, daily activities, decisions, observations in general and specific observations in more detail as the case of observing test procedures. Send copies to ENGINEER. C. Record names, addresses and telephone numbers of all contractors, Subcontractors and major suppliers of materials and equipment. 11. Reports: a. Furnish ENGINEER periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and CONTRACTOR'S compliance with the approved progress schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing submissions. b. Consult with ENGINEER in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the Work. C. Report immediately to ENGINEER upon the occurrence of any accident. 12. Payment Requisitions: Review applications for payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward them with recommendations to ENGINEER, noting particularly their relation to the schedule of values, Work completed and materials and equipment delivered at the site but not incorporated in the Work. 13. Certificates, Maintenance and Operation Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that certificates, maintenance and operation manuals and other data required to be assembled and furnished by CONTRACTOR are applicable to the items actually installed; and deliver this material to ENGINEER for his review and forwarding to OWNER prior to final acceptance of the Work. 14. Completion: a. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit to CONTRACTOR a list of observed items requiring completion or correction. b. Conduct final inspection in the company of ENGINEER, OWNER and CONTRACTOR and prepare a final list of items to be completed or corrected. C. Verify that all items on final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to ENGINEER concerning acceptance. 00800-36 3. LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY Except upon written instructions of ENGINEER, Resident Project Representative: 1. Shall not authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or approve any substitute materials or equipment. 2. Shall not exceed limitations on ENGINEER'S authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Shall not undertake any of the responsibilities of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or CONTRACTOR'S superintendent, or expedite the Work. 4. Shall not advise on or issue directions relative to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques,, sequences or procedures of construction unless such is specifically called for in the Contract Documents. 5. Shall not advise on or issue directions as to safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 6. Shall not authorize OWNER to occupy the Project in whole or in part. 7. Shall not participate in specialized field or laboratory tests. END OF SECTION 00800-37 SECTION 00900 ADDENDA (ADDENDA TO BE INSERTED HERE) END OF SECTION SECTION 00901 APPROVED PERMITS (PERMITS TO BE INSERTED HERE) END OF SECTION DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART I — GENERAL 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK A. The work is located within the property line limits of the County's Hobart Water Treatment Plant, Fairgrounds, and Hobart Ball fields as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. This project includes the installation of a well pump for each of the six remote supply wells; installation of raw water lines connecting the pumps to the Hobart Water Treatment Plant; and Directional Drilling beneath 58`x' Ave. (Kings Highway) and 77`x' Street. B. Special Requirement: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for removal of all soils deemed too unsuitable for construction and replace with suitable fill material as necessary for proper construction. 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS A. Interference With Work on Roads/Utilities: the CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully with all utility forces of the OWNER or forces of other public or private agencies engaged in relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any Road/Utility facilities which interfere with the progress of the Work, and shall schedule the Work so as to minimize interference with said relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities. CONTRACTOR shall minimize road lane closures and obtain County approval in writing prior to any lane closures. B. Refer to the General Conditions for additional requirements. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. Perform Work to ensure completion of the Work within the Contract Time. Completion dates of the various stages shall be in accordance with the approved construction schedule submitted by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a written plan and schedule in the event he desires to perform work from different stages concurrently. A written plan describing the CONTRACTOR's intent must be submitted for approval by the ENGINEER. 1.05 CONTRACTOR's USE OF PREMISES A. CONTRACTOR shall have use of the premises as indicated on the drawings for the performance of the Work, subject to ongoing work by other contractor's and the County. B. Coordinate use of premises with OWNER and ENGINEER. 1 1 1 C. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for security of all his and his subCONTRACTOR's materials and equipment stored on the site. D. If directed by the OWNER or ENGINEER, move any stored items which interfere with operations of OWNER or other contractor's. E. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas if needed to perform the Work. F. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining temporary sanitary facilities during construction and all associated costs. 1.06 SITE ACCESS AND EXISTING FACILITIES A. Access to the site and equipment delivery is limited to daylight hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Weekend access must be approved by OWNER. All work which interrupts normal system operation shall be scheduled with the OWNER prior to its construction. Scheduling shall include summary of procedures to be taken, date/time of work, and duration of activities. Due to operation issues, the OWNER reserves the right to modify the schedule and restrict time of day and/or date(s) of work (for both work herein listed and other work not listed but affecting operations) that impacts the system operations. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain the current level or a greater level of perimeter site security and restricted public access at all times throughout construction of the project. At no time shall any portion of the site perimeter be provided without a secure and continuous fence at the end of each day. The cost to furnish and install all required permanent and temporary fencing shall be at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. 1.07 CONTRACTOR's STAGING, STORAGE, AND STOCKPILE AREA A. The CONTRACTOR shall minimize the quantity of materials stored at the plant site throughout the construction period. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for properly storing and protecting the area such that adjacent residents, canals, and wetlands are not impacted. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for implementing theft prevention measures. The OWNER shall bear no responsibility for materials stolen or acts of vandalism. The CONTRACTOR shall supply temporary enclosed, locked storage for OWNER's spare parts until Substantial Completion. 1.08 CONNECTION TO WORK BY OTHERS OR EXISTING LINES A. Piping installed under this Contract must connect to lines installed under other contracts. The CONTRACTOR under this Contract shall perform the following work and include the cost thereof in the Contract price: 1. Remove any temporary plugs and thrust restraints provided in the pipe installed under other contracts. 2. Furnish and install necessary pipe, sleeves, fittings, specials and appurtenances to make proper connections to pipes installed by others. 3. Pressure test connections prior to connecting new piping. 01010-2 0 4. Disinfect and bacteriologically test all new potable water piping. B. Connection to existing lines to which piping of this Contract must connect: 1. Expose buried lines to confirm or determine horizontal and vertical location of all underground piping, pipe diameter, end connection, and pipe material. 2. Furnish and install all material, labor, and equipment including appropriate pipe, fittings, specials, and appurtenances to make proper connections. 3. Coordinate with OWNER to schedule installation including nights and weekends, to limit operational outages. 4. Supply temporary plugs and thrust restraint, if piping is not available. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate construction and reconstruction work with the OWNER and ENGINEER. Unless otherwise indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the sequence of the work. All work shall be performed in accordance with applicable safety rules and regulations. B. The CONTRACTOR shall insure that any utilities connected to structures, equipment, and facilities to be removed, relocated, salvaged, replaced, or abandoned shall be rendered inoperable, replaced with new utilities, or adequately bypassed with temporary utilities before proceeding with reconstruction. C. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent facilities and to limit the reconstruction activities to the extent indicated. If reconstruction beyond the scope indicated is required, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the OWNER prior to commencing work. 3.02 DISPOSAL A. Clearing and grubbing and removal of debris, where necessary, shall minimize interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities which shall not be closed or obstructed without permission from the OWNER. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed or obstructed traffic ways. B. Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from reconstruction operations shall be legally removed and disposed of at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Structures and equipment to be demolished shall be cleaned prior to demolition and the wash water properly disposed. No trace of these structures shall remain prior to placing of backfill in the areas from which structures were removed. C. Refuse, debris, and waste materials resulting from demolition and site clearing operations shall not be burned. All refuse and waste material shall be disposed of at the IRC Landfill with the CONTRACTOR paying all transportation and disposal fees. END OF SECTION 01010-3 SECTION 01014 SPECIAL WORK SEQUENCES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The purpose of this section is to summarize construction scheduling, labor, material, equipment, and facility operation constraints and requirements which the Contractor shall take into consideration when planning and scheduling work under this Contract. Work will be performed at various locations for the North WTP Raw Water Transmission System. B. This Work shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize the disruption to the operation and staff of the existing water treatment plant. Modifications that affect or may affect the operation of the treatment facilities shall not be made without first obtaining written permission from the OWNER. Disruptions include, but are not limited to: 1. Removing a process unit from service or impeding the operation of a process unit. 2. Removing from service, restricting, or impeding the function of any utility (water, electricity, compressed air, drains, sanitary sewer, storm drain, telephone, instrumentation) serving any portion of a process unit, Operations Building, maintenance room and electrical control room. 3. Removing from service, restricting, or impeding the function of any treatment chemical storage, metering, conveyance, or application system. 4. Delaying or denying access to any plant structure or area needed by the IRC operations personnel to complete their work assignments. C. Extra precautions are necessary to ensure that no damage occurs to these facilities including piping, utilities, roads, interiors of structures, and structures in general that are to remain in operation and are not to be modified or replaced. Any temporary facilities, materials, equipment, and labor required to ensure that no damage occurs shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the Work and at no additional cost to the OWNER. D. All interruptions, outages, interferences, or temporary shutdowns of plant facilities and operations shall be identified and outlined before work is to be done. Requested times and dates for these interruptions, outages, interferences, or temporary shutdowns shall be scheduled on the construction progress schedule under Section 01311. A schedule of all planned interruptions, outages, interferences, or temporary shutdowns of the plant facilities and operations shall be submitted every month in accordance with Section 01311. This schedule shall include a minimum 2 -month planning horizon. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The water treatment plant must provide continuous treatment capacity during the construction period and meet its permit requirements under all operating conditions. B. In general, no work which affects or could affect plant operations or plant performance shall be performed without a specific detailed plan by the Contractor approved in advance by the Engineer and the Owner. All requests for plant system diversions, 1 1 M shutdowns, modifications, etc. shall be in writing to the Owner with a copy to the Engineer. C. The construction progress schedule required under Section 0 13 11 shall reflect the conditions presented in this section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS A. Plant Operational Constraints: The constraints to performance of the work required because of plant operations which must be maintained at all times are identified in this section. Cumulative plant operational constraints which substantially delay the Contractor beyond the constraints identified in this section shall be treated as excusable delays. These constraints shall be included in the Contractor's progress schedule. B. Construction Scheduling Constraints: The constraints to performance of the work required because of special sequencing with other parts of the work, calendar time constraints and special testing, commissioning and work procedures are identified in this Section. These constraints are in addition to the standard procedural constraints such as shop drawings, testing, commissioning, training, etc and the above plant operational constraints. These constraints shall be included in the Contractor's progress schedule. C. A shutdown is defined as that period of time during which a normal function and activity of the water treatment plant cannot take place. Prior to any shutdown, the Contractor must have sought and received written permission from the OWNER that the proposed shutdown is acceptable. Prior to granting permission, the OWNER will review the detailed shutdown plan prepared by the Contractor that includes a shutdown schedule, planned sequence of work, milestones and projected times of completions of activities, any anticipated problems, Contractor's supervisory personnel, actions desired of the OWNER and Engineer's staff, and contingency plans. The shutdown plan must be submitted in sufficient time for the OWNER'S review, consideration, and coordination with the OWNERS operations staff. This shall be a minimum of 21 days prior to the proposed shutdown. Allow sufficient time for review and resubmittal of the shutdown plan until acceptable to the OWNER. An acceptable shutdown plan prepared by the Contractor is fully descriptive of the work and in compliance with the Contract Documents. D. Operational: To be considered operational, an existing facility or facility component must be functional in all manners intended for its use, at its rated capacity. For a new facility to be considered operational, it must be installed, tested, and if required by the Contract, OWNER personnel must be trained in the facilities operation and maintenance. E. Special Conditions: Certain special conditions, if any, related to performance of the work are identified in this section. If they affect the scheduling of the work, they shall be included in the Contractor's progress schedule. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings showing details of all L) temporary services, bypasses and tie-ins to existing systems. 01014-2 1.05 NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENT A. Give a minimum of 7 calendar days advance notice, following approval of the shutdown plan, to the OWNER of each component proposed for shutdown or disruption, all of which shall be subject to OWNER's approval and limitations. 1.06 TIE-IN PREPARATIONS A. Where new systems are to be tied -into existing systems, which are required to be shutdown to make the tie-in, the new system shall be fully prepared in anticipation of the tie-in to minimize downtime of the existing system. The new equipment shall be fully tested to the maximum extent possible prior to the tie-in. Measurements shall be taken to ensure that the new equipment is of the correct size, length and alignment to complete the tie-in. The Contractor shall supply a list of all materials and equipment needed to accomplish the tie-in and shall review the proposed tie-in with the Owner. For each tie-in, the Contractor shall also provide a detailed schedule documenting each task necessary to complete the tie-in and the estimated time to complete the respective tasks. 1. Once initiated, work shall continue until the tie-in is completed. Ensure that all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work are available at the site of the tie-in prior to the initiation of work. 1.07 PLANT OPERATIONAL CONSTRAINTS, CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING CONSTRAINTS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Existing Water Treatment Plant 1. The existing water treatment plant inclusive of all unit processes must remain in service throughout the construction activities. 2. Construction Scheduling Constraints: The new equipment shall be fully tested to the maximum extent possible prior to installation at the site. Measurements shall be taken to ensure that the new equipment is of the correct size, length and alignment as specified in the Bid documents. All new unit processes constructed under this contract shall be fully demonstrated to meet the stated performance criteria before they can be accepted for the beneficial occupancy. 3. Special Conditions: None PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATIONAL AND SCHEDULING CONSTRAINTS AND REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. At all times, including plant shutdowns, the following must be in operation or available: 1. Plant telephone and radio systems 2. Electricity to the process and operations/control building. 3. Existing standby/emergency generator facilities. 4. Treatment plant potable and utility water and sewer systems. 5. Access for OWNER, or its agent(s), and delivery vehicles to all treatment plant facilities on paved or compacted aggregate roadways. 01014-3 6. Access for chemical delivery vehicles to all chemical storage and use areas on paved or compacted aggregate roadways. 7. Parking areas for the OWNER'S personnel. 8. SCADA system including unobstructed access and electrical power to the operations control room. 3.02 SPECIFIC RESTRICTIONS ON SEQUENCE OF WORK A. Construction Sequence Restrictions: Because the Owner must maintain proper operation of the water treatment plant during execution of this contract, certain restrictions are necessary regarding the sequence of construction. The Owner will entertain proposed modifications to the restrictions enumerated below if the Contractor can provide reasonable assurance, to the Owner's satisfaction, that the objective of maintaining proper operation of the water treatment plant can be achieved. Installation of the new electrical system and modifications to the existing electrical system shall be sequenced so as not to interfere with normal treatment plant operation in so far as possible. Specific sequencing limitations are as follows: a) Contractor shall plan and schedule in advance, with the Owner and Engineer, all power outages such as generator switchgear and transformer installation to minimize and combine power outages. b) Electrical work shall generally be performed in -step with the mechanical work. Install all grounding as structures are erected. Install inside lighting at the first opportunity. 2. Tie-in work shall be planned well in advance such that all necessary materials and equipment are available. All shutdown of the treatment process shall be initiated by the Owner after the Contractor has demonstrated reasonable assurance that the available shutdown duration is sufficient. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide a contingency plan should the available shutdown duration be exceeded. END OF SECTION 01014-4 SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL Measurement and payment will be based upon work completed and accepted in accordance with the Contract Documents. No separate payment will be made for excavation, trenching, dewatering, backfilling, leakage tests, surveying, density tests, or other incidental items of work not shown in the Agreement. 1.02 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IN STORAGE Partial payment for materials and equipment in proper storage at the site of the work or other approved storage site will be made for those items for which the Contractor has submitted paid invoices to the Engineer. The partial payment for stored materials will be 50% of the value of materials and equipment, based on receipted bills, furnished but not incorporated in the work, as determined by Engineer. 1.03 MEASUREMENT A. Mobilization: Measurement shall be on a lump sum basis, and shall be limited to the following maximum amounts: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT ($) MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF FROM MORE THAN TO AND INCLUDING ITEM FOR MOBILIZATION 0 100,000 3,000 100,000 500,000 15,000 500,000 1,000,000 30,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 60,000 2,000,000 3,000,000 90,000 3,000,000 4,000,000 120,000 4,000,000 5,000,000 125,000 5,000,000 6,000,000 150,000 6,000,000 7,000,000 175,000 7,000,000 10,000,000 200,000 10,000,000 ------------- 250,000 Should the lump sum price bid for the item Mobilization exceed the maximum permissible amount for this item, as specified herein, the bid price will be reduced to the maximum permissible amount, and the reduced price will be used in correctly determining the total price for comparison of bids received. The cost of video taping the pre -construction condition shall be included in the lump -sum cost of mobilization. 01025-1 B. Pipe: Measurement of pipe shall be computed using linear feet, as measured along the centerline of the pipe installed (Except when included in lump sum bid items -ie; Aerial crossing). No deduction will be made for the length of valves and fittings installed in the line. Where the measurement terminates at a valve, bend, tee, or other fitting, the centerline of the valve or fitting shall be the point of termination. All required erosion control clearing, excavation, backfill, compaction, all restoration and replacement, paving, grading, density testing, pipe lining, coating, encasement material, restraining devices, and all mechanical joint fittings and thrust blocks shall be included in the cost of the pipe. C. Fittings: Measurement of cast iron and ductile iron fittings shall be on the basis of weight. The weights used to determine the quantity installed shall be the weights of the appropriate fittings as listed in the supplier's invoice or catalog. When mechanical joint fittings are required, the weight of the gland bolts and gaskets shall not be added to the listed weight of the fittings. Where flanged fittings are furnished, the weight of the bolts and gaskets shall not be included. D. Gate Valves, air release valves, Tapping Sleeve and Valves and other miscellaneous appurtenances: Measurement shall be on the basis of furnishing and installing each type and size of appurtenance required, including valve boxes, covers, and other associated items. (Except when included in lump sum bid items — eg; aerial crossing, directional bore.) E. Fire Hydrant Assembly: Measurement of fire hydrant assembly shall be for the actual number constructed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, or as directed by the Engineer, at the unit price bid for the item "Fire Hydrant Assembly," scheduled in the Form of Proposal. The unit price for "Fire Hydrant Assembly" shall include cutting bituminous paving, removal of paving courses and curb if required, excavation, furnishing and installation required length of 6" DIP water main, dry - barrel traffic hydrant, concrete foundations for hydrant, fitting, one (1) 6" diameter gate valve, concrete thrust block (reaction backing) for fire hydrant , backfill, blue reflective markers, all materials, equipment, labor and all else necessary therefore and incidential thereto. F. HDPE Horizontal Directional Bore: Measurement of HDPE horizontal directional bore shall be computed using linear feet, as measured prior to pulling, and deducting the length of pipe above ground service and include all material (including HDPE pipe), equipment, supplies, fuel, labor, sheeting and bracing, receiving and boring pits (if required), excavation, dewatering, backfilling, compaction, mechanical fittings, restoration, furnishing and in stallion of the HDPE pipe. Payments shall be based on a linear foot price for the directional bore length as measured as specified above. 01025-2 G. Concrete Sidewalk and Driveway Replacement: Shall include sidewalk and/or driveway removed and replaced as a result of Contractor's operations. Minimum widths of replacement shall be as described in specifications or as shown on the plans. No separate payment will be made for concrete construction, including sawcutting, excavation, formwork, reinforcing, or other work or materials required in connection with concrete construction. The cost of all concrete sidewalk and driveway replacement shall be included in the cost of the pipe. H. Asphaltic Pavement Replacement: Shall include asphalt removed and replaced as a result of Contractor's operations. Minimum width of replacement shall be as described in the specifications or as shown on the plans. Work shall include sawcutting, disposal of demo'd asphalt, and construction of the surface course, base, subgrade materials, and pavement markings, testing and all else incidental thereto. The cost of all asphaltic pavement replacement shall be included in the cost of the pipe. L Asphalt Pavement Overlay: Shall include all re -surfacing as a result of construction operations. The work shall include tack coat, surface course and pavement markings. Asphalt pavement overlay shall be included in the cost of the pipe. J. Unimproved Driveway Replacement: Shall include (dirt, marl or shell) driveway replacement/reconstruction removed and replaced as a result of the construction operations. Work shall include subgrade and surface (shell) materials, compaction, density testing, etc. Unimproved driveway replacement shall be computed using linear fee, as measured along the centerline of the pipe installed. K. Grassing: Measurement of grassing (seed or sod) shall be computed using the linear feet, as measured along the water main pipe, or grassed area disturbed and restored as a result of Contractor's operations. The entire width of the disturbed area shall be grassed. Payment shall include all necessary grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, fertilizer, mulch, and irrigation. L. Construction Stake -Out: Measurement of construction stake -out shall be computed as a lump sum item, for all required construction stake -out, including: layout and survey of the proposed construction, setting of stakes as required, necessary computations to establish the exact position of the work, establish reference to baselines, and provide and maintain off -set stakes outside the limits of construction and marked to show offset distance. M. Record Drawings/As-built Survey: Measurement of record drawings/as-built survey shall be computed as a lump sum item, for the preparation of "As -built Drawings", including field survey, drawing preparation in "ACAD", with ties to state plan coordinates, all in accordance with IRCUDS water and wastewater utility standards. The as -built drawings shall be provided certified by a licensed and registered land surveyor. PAYMENT Payment will be made at the respective contract unit and/or lump sum price for each item shown in the Agreement, installed and accepted, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials and performing all work in connection therewith and incidental thereto. 01025-3 w 1.05 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACES, STRUCTURES AND PROPERTY Where pavement, trees, shrubbery, fences, or other property or surface structures not designated as pay items have been damaged, removed, or disturbed by the Contractor, whether deliberately or through failure to carry out the requirements of the Contract Documents, state laws, municipal ordinances, or the specific direction of the Engineer, or through failure to employ usual and reasonable safeguards, such property and surface structures shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the Contractor to a condition equal to that before work began within a time frame approved by the Engineer. ** END OF SECTION ** 01025-4 SECTION 01035 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE A. Promptly implement Change Order Procedures 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time-and-material/force account basis. 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request. B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization: 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the Work, 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the authorization of changes in the Work. C. Owner will designate in writing the person who is authorized to execute Change Orders. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The amount of established unit prices. B. Conditions of the Contract: 1. Methods of determining cost or credit to Owner resulting from changes in Work made on a time -and -materials basis. 2. Contractor's claims for additional costs. C. Applications for Payment are included in Section 01052. D. Construction Schedules is included in Section 0 131 l . E. Schedule of Values is included in Section 0 13 70. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Change Order: See General Conditions 1.04 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES A. Owner or Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a proposal Request to Contractor. Request will include the following: I . Detailed description of the Change, Products, and location of the change in the Project. 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized. 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. 01035-1 5. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction to execute the changes, nor to stop work in progress. B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to Engineer, containing: 1. Description of the proposed changes 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes. 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. 5. Documentation supporting any changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as appropriate. 1.05 -CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. In lieu of Proposal Request, Engineer may issue a "Work Directive Change" for Contractor to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B. Authorization will describe changes in the work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. C. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the Changes. 1.06 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow Engineer to evaluate the quotation. B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computation including the following: 1. Labor required. 2. Equipment required. 3. Products required: a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. b. Quantities required. 4. Taxes, insurance bonds. 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. 6. Overhead and profit. 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time. C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time -and -material / force account basis, with documentation as required for a lump sum proposal, plus the following additional information: 1. Name of the Owner's authorization agent who ordered the work, and date of the order. 2. Dates and time work performed, and by whom. 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 4. Receipts and invoices for: a. Equipment used, listing dates and times of use. b. Products used, listing quantities. C. Subcontracts. 01035-2 D. Document requests for substitutions for Products as specified in Section 01630. 1.07 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order. B. Form: Change Order format provided in the Contract Documents. C. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of change. D. - Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time. 1.08 LUMP SUM / FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either: 1. Engineer's Proposal Request and Contractor's responsible Proposal as mutually agreed upon between OWNER and Contractor. 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer. B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for the contractor to proceed with the changes. C. Contractor shall sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. Content of Change Orders will be based on, either: 1. Engineer definition of the scope of the required changes. 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer. 3. Survey of completed work B. The amount of the unit prices shall be: 1. Those stated in the Agreement. 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be determined prior to start of the work: 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. 2. Contractor shall .sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Change Order directing Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and will cite the applicable unit prices. 2. At completion of the change, Engineer will determine the cost of such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. 01035-3 a. Contractor shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. 3. Engineer will sign and date a second Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 4. Owner and Contractor will sign and date the second Change Order to indicate their agreement with the terms therein. 1.10 TIME AND MATERIAL /FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/ CONSTRUCTION AUTHORIZATION A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor to Proceed with the changes on a time -and -material / force account basis. B. At completion of the change, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting and supporting data as provided in the Article "Documentation of Proposals and Claims" of this section. C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in General Conditions and Supplementary Condition. D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. E. Owner and Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement therein. 1.11 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall periodically revise Schedule of Values and Request for Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of Work, and to record the adjusted Contract Sum. B. Contractor shall periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. I . Revise sub -schedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes. C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01035-4 SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for project. 1. Survey work required in execution of project. 2. Civil, structural or other professional Engineering services specified, or required to execute Contractor's construction methods. B. The Contractor shall retain the services of a registered land surveyor licensed in the State of Florida: 1. Identify existing control points and property line corner stakes indicated on the Drawings, as required. 2. Verify all existing structure locations and all proposed building and structure corner locations, tank locations and equipment locations. 3. Maintain an accurate location of all buried piping 4 -inch in diameter and larger. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. B. Summary of Work is included in Section 0 10 10. C. Applications for Payment are included in Section 01052. D. Contract Closeout is included in Section 01700. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01340, name and address of registered land surveyor or professional Engineer. B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. C. Submit certificate signed by registered Engineer or land surveyor certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance, or non-conformance, with Contract Documents. D. At the end of the project, and prior to final payment, submit certified drawings with the Surveyor's title block (signed and sealed by the registered land surveyor) of the items listed below. Vertical Control shall conform to NGVD mean sea level datum. These drawings shall be included with, and made a part of, the project record documents. 01050-1 1. Certified site survey at 1 -inch = 40 -feet scale or larger but not greater than 1 -inch = 20 -feet scale, on reproducible Mylar(s) 24 -inch by 36 -inch, indicating the building corners, sidewalks, paved areas and location of all above ground structures within the plant or project site. 2. Certified drawing showing the location, lines and grades of all lines 4 -inch in diameter and larger buried and exterior to buildings and other buried facilities (e.g. valves, tanks, vaults, etc) installed as a result of the work. This shall be at the same scale as the Engineer's yard piping drawing and submitted on reproducible Mylar. 3. Certified survey at the same scale as the Engineer's line drawings (e.g. process piping, force main, duct banks etc) indicating lines, grades, elevations and coordinates at each change of direction. Provide elevations of structure bottom, pipe invert(s) and rim elevations on all manholes. E. Topographical surveys shall meet the following criteria: 1. 1 -inch = 100 -feet scale reproducible plot, 2 foot contours. 2. Produced on national map accuracy standards for 1 -inch = 100 -feet scale maps with 2 foot contour intervals 3. Contractor shall submit computer generated drawing files in AutoCAD 2005 format on CD-R/RW disks. All entries shall be place on layers named to describe the entity being mapped. All elevation information in the AutoCAD file shall be in an appropriate three dimensional format. A digital terrain model (DTM) AutoCAD file containing adequate three dimensional points and break lines to accurately model the surface shall be submitted. The DTM file shall be compatible for use with SoftDesk S.7 software. �✓ F. Survey shall include all the requirements as outlined in Paragraph 1.06 below. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR OR ENGINEER A. Registered professional Engineer or land surveyor of the discipline required for the specific service on the project, currently licensed in the State of Florida. 1.05 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on Drawings. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and preserve all permanent reference points during construction. 1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to the Engineer. 2. Report to the Engineer when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3. Require surveyor to correctly replace project control points which may be lost or destroyed. a. Establish replacements based on original survey control. 01050-2 1.06 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements a. Stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement. b. Utility slopes and invert elevations. 2. Batter boards for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations and floor levels. 4. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades. C. From time to time, verify layouts by same methods. D. Establish all lines and grades prior to construction of line work for all piping 4 inches in diameter and larger at 50 -feet increments and at defined breaks in grade. 1.07 RECORDS A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses. B. Update the project record drawings on a monthly basis based on the work performed during the month ending at the pay request as a condition for approval of monthly progress payment requests. C. Maintain an accurate record of piping changes, revisions, and modifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01050-3 SECTION 01052 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Submit Applications for Payment to Engineer in accordance with the schedule established by Conditions of the contract and Agreement between Owner and Contractor. B. The accepted Schedule of Values, Section 01370, shall be used as the basis for the CONTRACTOR'S Application for Payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. In other parts of the Construction Documents: 1. Agreement between Owner and Contractor 2. General Conditions of the Contract 3. Article 14 — Payments to Contractor and Completion B. Specified in Other Sections: 1. Summary of Work is included in Section 0 10 10. 2. Contract Closeout is included in Section 01700. 1.03 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED A. Submit itemized applications typed in a format approved by Engineer. All applications for payment must be numbered, dated, and signed by the Contractor. B. Provide itemized data on payment application (format, schedules, line items and values accepted by Engineer). 1.04 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Application Form: 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to the date of submittal of application 2. Fill in summary of dollar values 3. Execute certification with the signature of a responsible officer of the contract firm 4. Have resident project representative review and sign application prior to submission to Engineer 1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. When the Owner or the Engineer requires substantiating data, Contractor shall submit suitable information, with a cover letter identifying: 1. Project 2. Application number and date 01052-1 3. Detailed list of enclosures 4. For stored products: a. Item number and identification b. Description of specific material B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. 1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Application for payment is required for progress payments B. Only one application will be acceptable in any one month 1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Submit Applications for Payment to Engineer at the time stipulated in the Agreement B. Number: Five copies of each progress Application C. When Engineer finds the Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit the applications for payment to the Owner PART 2 — PRODUCTS Not applicable PART 3 — EXECUTION Not applicable END OF SECTION 01052-2 J 0 SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND NOTIFICATION PART l — GENERAL 1.01 PERMITS REQUIRED A. Florida Department of Environmental Protection: The construction permit from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) for the project is being obtained. B. The Environmental Resource Pennit (ERP) from the St. Johns Water Management District for the project has been obtained. C. Building Permits: The Contractor is required to obtain all applicable local building pen -nits from the County, such as concrete, plumbing, and electrical permits. The cost of these permits is to be drawn from an allowance to be included in the bid amount. Unused portions of the allowance for permits is to be returned to the County by final change order in the form of a deduct. Permit fees in excess of the allowance will be compensated by means of change order process. D. Indian River County Permits a. Tree Removal Permit: The Contractor is responsible for obtaining this permit. b. Land Clearing Permit: The Contractor is responsible for obtaining this permit. c. Right -of -Way Pen -nit: The Contractor is responsible for obtaining this permit. d. Stonnwater Management System Permit: The SW IS permit from Indian River County for the project is being obtained. E. Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission (FWC) Permits: The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the services of a FWC Authorized Gopher Tortoise Agent to perforin gopher tortoise burrow surveys within the project area and within 25 feet surrounding the project area. The project area that will require a gopher tortoise burrow survey includes any upland area in which the ground will be affected by the project including but not limited to egress and ingress areas, stockpile areas, staging areas, and any unpaved upland areas that will be used by Contractor vehicles. If any Potentially Occupied gopher tortoise burrow is found within the project area or within 25 -feet of the project area, a gopher tortoise relocation permit must be obtained from the FWC and the gopher tortoise(s) relocated prior to the initiation of construction activities. The Contractor shall provide the results of the gopher tortoise burrow survey to the County within 10 days of completion of the survey. If a gopher tortoise relocation permit is required, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the permit to the County prior to initiating construction activities. NOTE: All Potentially Occupied gopher tortoise burrows are protected (68A-27.004 F.A.C) and must not be impacted without a permit from the FWC. The FWC has determined that if a 25 -foot radius surrounding the burrow is protected from disturbance then that burrow would not be considered impacted and a permit would not be required. 1.02 NOTIFICATION A. Indian River County: The Contractor is required to notify the Indian River County Utilities Department 48 hours prior to initiating construction (Michael Hotchkiss, 772-567-8000 x1821). B. Utility Companies: Contractor shall call Sunshine State One -Call of Florida, Inc. (386-575- 2009) to obtain all utility provider information and notify the known utility companies in the area 48 hours prior to initiating construction. C. The Contractor shall give the Owner not less than seven (7) calendar days notice of the time and place (or places) where he will start the work. D. When the Contractor's excavating operations encounter prehistoric remains or artifacts of historical or archeological significance, the operations shall be temporarily discontinued in that area and the Engineer shall be notified. The Engineer will consult archaeological authorities and determine the disposition of the remains or artifacts. The Contractor agrees that he will make no claim for additional payment or for extension of time because of any delays in or alteration of his procedure due to removal of any such remains or artifacts. END OF SECTION 01060-2 SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED Abbreviations and acronyms used in Contract Documents to identify reference standards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or applicable codes establish stricter standards. B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OR ORGANIZATIONS A. Obtain copies of reference standards direct from publication source, when needed for proper performance of work, or when required for submittal by Contract Documents. B. The following, as appropriate to project, is a list of referenced standards and their mailing addresses for requesting copies of standards: AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue, NW Washington, D.C. 20006 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1000 Vermont Avenue, NW Washington, D.C. 20005 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, D.C. 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150 Redford Station Detroit, MI 48219 ADC Air Diffusion council 435 North Michigan Avenue Chicago, IL 60611 01090-1 Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 1221 Avenue of the Americas New York, NY 10020 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16`h Street, NW Washington, D.C., 20036 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1815 North Fort Myer Drive Arlington, VA 22209 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and / Air Conditioning Engineers 345 East 47`h Street New York, NY 10017 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47`h Street New York, NY 10017 ASPA American Sod Producers' Association Association Building Ninth and Minnesota Hastings, NE 68901 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers 960 Illuminating Building Cleveland, OH 44113 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206 01090-2 AWPA American Wood -Preservers Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society 2501 NW 7`" Street Miami, FL 33125 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 W. Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 CDA Copper Development Association 57`" Floor, Chrysler Building 405 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10017 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue Washington, D.C. 20036 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 180 North LaSalle Street, Suite 2110 Chicago, IL 60601 J FDOT Florida Department of Transportation Haydon Burns Building 605 Suwannee Street Tallahassee, FL 32301 FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston -Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062 FS Federal Specifications General Services Administration Specifications and Information Distribution Section (WFS1S) Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197 Washington, D.C. 20407 GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Avenue Evanston, IL 60201 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 2400 East Devon, Suite 205 Des Plaines, IL 60018 0 01090-3 MIL Military Specification Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 MLSFA Metal Lath / Steel Framing Association 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 L Street, N W Washington, D.C. 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association 470 Atlantic Avenue Boston, MA 02210 NFPA National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Avenue, NW Washington, D.C. 20036 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association 804 Sterick Building Memphis, TN 38103 NSF National Sanitation Foundation NSF Building 3475 Plymouth Road Ann Arbor, MI 48106 NSWMA National Solid Waste Management Association 1120 Connecticut Avenue, NW Washington, D.C. 20036 NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association 3166 Des Plaines Avenue Des Plaines, IL 60018 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 20076 01090-4 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 20 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 PS Product Standard U.S. Department of Commerce Washington, D.C. 20203 RCSHSB Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit Shake Bureau 515 116`h Avenue Bellevue, WA 98004 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 3812 St. Louis, MO 63122 SDI Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North Cleveland, OH 44107 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 111 East Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601 SJI Steel Joint Institute 1703 Parham Road, Suite 204 Richmond, VA 23229 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 TCA Technical Aid Series Construction Specifications Institute 1150 Seventeenth Street, NW Washington, D.C. 20036 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08540 UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 01090-5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01090-6 SECTION 01170 SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART l — GENERAL 1.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment with particular reference to the pumps and electric drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been completed, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the foundations, and after conformation of all alignments, the sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, grout, or other materials necessary to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. Perform all grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection. 1.02 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A. Provide all openings, channels, chases, etc, in new construction and furnish and install anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to complete the work under this Contract. Perform all cutting, coring and rough and finish patching required in existing construction for the work of all trades. B. Subcontractors shall furnish all sleeves, inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc, required for the execution of their work. It shall be their responsibility before the work of the Contractor is begun to furnish him with the above items and with templates, drawings or written information covering chases, openings, etc, which they require and to follow up the work of the Contractor as it progresses, making sure that their drawings and written instructions are carried out. Failing to do this, they shall be responsible for the cost of any corrective measures which may be required to provide necessary openings, etc. If the Contractor fails to carry out the directions given him, covering details and locations of openings, etc, he shall be responsible for any cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary corrections. In no case shall beams, lintels, or other structural members be cut without the approval of the Engineer. 1.03 RELOCATION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the Drawings. The cost of all such 01170-1 relocations shall be included in the bid for the project and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 GREASE, OIL AND FUEL A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's supply of all required lubricants including grease and oil of type recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied under Divisions 11, 15 and 16. 1.05 TOOLS A. Any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation and maintenance of any equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. B. Tools shall be furnished in heavy steel tool boxes complete with lock and duplicate keys. 1.06 POWER SUPPLY A. Unless otherwise specified, all motors 1/2 Hp and larger shall be designed for a power supply of 460 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz, and all motors `/3 Hp and smaller shall be designed for a power supply of 120 Volts, single phase, 60 Hz. / 1.07 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS A. All single and multi speed three phase induction motors 5 Hp and larger shall be furnished with factory provided power factor correction capacitors. B. Capacitors shall be sized by the manufacturers such that over voltage due to self excitation will be prevented and transient torques limited to normal values. Full load power factor shall be corrected to not less than 0.95 where such correction will not violate the provisions of NEC Article 460. C. Capacitor enclosures shall be compatible with those specified for their respective motors. D. Capacitors shall be dry or oil insulated with integral fuse protection and discharge resistor. The insulating medium shall be non-flammable and meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Standards. E. Capacitors shall be installed under Division 16. 1.08 ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS A. Maintain coordination among all Sections (windows, window walls, louvers, doors and frames, etc.) requiring PGVF, PVC or anodic coatings. All coatings shall match to the satisfaction of the Engineer with regard to color and texture. Items rejected by the Engineer shall promptly be removed from the job site. 01170-2 1.09 PIPE MARKING J A. Pipe marking is included in Division 15, but it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assist, as required by the Owner, in identifying pipe contents, direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe. 1.10 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall prepare a valve schedule for all valves required for the work showing a number, the location, type, function, and normal operating position, for each valve. The schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval not less than 30 days prior to start-up. B. The Contractor shall furnish tags for all valves required for the work. Valve tags shall be 2 -in diameter, 19 gauge, brass or plastic, with brass hooks suitable for attaching the tag to the valve operator. Tags shall be stamped or etched with the valve number and the information on the valve schedule coded in a system provided by the Owner. Submit two samples of the type of tag proposed and the manufacturer's standard color chart and letter styles to the Engineer for approval. C. The Contractor shall install valve tags on all valves required for the Work. 1.11 NOISE LIMITATIONS i �A. All equipment to be furnished under this Contract, unless specified otherwise in the technical specifications, shall be designed to ensure that the sound pressure level does not exceed 85 decibels over a frequency range of 37.8 to 9600 cycles per second at a distance of 3 -ft from any portion of the equipment, under any load condition, when tested using standard equipment and methods. Noise levels shall include the noise from the motor. Mufflers or external baffles shall not be acceptable for the purpose of reducing noise. Data on noise levels shall be included with the shop drawing submittal. 1.12 SPARE PARTS A. Where spare parts are specified in the technical Sections, furnish all spare parts recommended by the manufacturer or system supplier for one year of service. In addition, furnish all spare parts itemized in each Section. B. Collect and store all spare parts in an area to be designated by the Owner. Furnish the Owner with an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivery cost. C. Spare parts shall be packed in cartons, properly labeled with indelible markings with complete descriptive information including manufacturer, part number, part name and equipment for which the part is to be used and shall be properly treated for one year of storage. 01170-3 1 1.13 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, submit a Hurricane Preparedness Plan to the Engineer and the Owner for approval. The Plan shall describe in detail the necessary measures which the Contractor will perform, at no additional costs to the Owner, in case of a hurricane warning. Revise Plan as required by the Engineer and Owner. 1.14 WEATHER PROTECTION A. In the event of inclement weather, the Contractor shall protect the Work and materials from damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner, any portion of the Work or materials has been damaged by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced with new materials and Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1.15 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run-off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into the supplies and surface waters of the State. Control measures must be adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by the State or other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish unless limits have been established for the particular water. In surface water used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of construction equipment to prevent operations which promote erosion. 1.16 WARRANTIES A. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, all equipment supplied under these Specifications shall be warranted by the Contractor and the equipment Manufacturers for a minimum period of one (1) year. Warranty period shall commence on the date of Owner acceptance. B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced in the machine(s) and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. C. The Manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment warranties in accordance with Section 01740 from each of the respective suppliers or Manufacturers for all the equipment specified under Divisions 11, 15 and 16. D. In the event that the Manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the Contractor shall obtain from the Manufacturer a two (2) year warranty starting at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. This two-year warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the one-year warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment. it WIM 1.17 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and prepare for connections to the existing water treatment plant system as shown on the Drawings or where directed by the Owner. The cost for this work and for the actual connection to the existing water treatment plant system shall be included in the bid for the project and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to expose as required, the existing pipes at the tie-in locations and, if necessary, any buried utilities in the immediate area of the tie-in that may affect the installation of new pipe as shown on the Drawings. Contractor is fully responsible for ordering any additional material, such as fittings and restrained pipe that may be needed to avoid existing buried utilities should such material not be shown on the Drawings or included in the Schedule of Prices. The Contractor may not schedule any tie-in activity until such additional material is on site and a specific detailed plan is approved by the Engineer in accordance with Section 01014. 1.18 OBSTRUCTIONS A. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the fact that during excavation at the Project site, the possibility exists of the Contractor encountering various water, chemical, electrical, or other lines not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate and flag these lines so as to avoid damage to the existing lines. Should damage occur to an existing line, the Contractor shall repair the line at no cost to the Owner. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles, the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation, are temporarily stayed in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the pole and that the utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable advance notice of any such excavation by the Contractor. 1.19 PROVISIONS FOR THE CONTROL OF DUST AND LITTER A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the amount of dust created. Wetting down the site may be required or as directed by the Owner to prevent dust as a result of vehicular traffic. Control of blowing litter caused by any regrading by the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.20 ON SITE STORAGE A. The Contractor's attention is invited to special storage requirements and possible charges for noncompliance of on-site storage requirements for materials and equipment as specified in Section 01600. 1.21 EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS AND ACCIDENT REPORTS A. Emergency phone numbers (fire, medical, police, and Contractor's emergency after hours number) shall be posted at the Contractor's phone and its locations be made to known to all. 01170-5 B. Accidents shall be reported immediately to the Engineer by messenger or phone, C. All accidents shall be documented by the Contractor and a fully detailed written report submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer after each accident. 1.22 TRAFFIC CONTROL A. The Contractor shall ensure that vehicular flow is maintained in a safe manner and shall adhere to all State and Local requirements for maintenance of traffic, safety precautions, and lighting. Should the Owner request the preparation and submittal of a traffic maintenance and/or safety plan, the Contractor will do so, at no additional cost to the Owner, within 21 days of receipt of request. 1.23 WORK ADJACENT TO UTILITY FACILITIES A. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to existing overhead and underground utility facilities in the area of the Work. The Contractor shall protect all existing utility transmission and distribution facilities throughout the period of construction and shall notify the offices all utility companies at least 72 hours prior to the start of any construction. B. It is the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor to determine the exact location of all overhead and underground utility transmission and distribution facilities in the area of the Work whether or not they are indicated on the Drawings. L�) 1.24 SALVAGE A. Any existing equipment or material, including but not limited to, valves, pipes, fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of construction under this project may be designated as salvage by the Engineer or Owner and if so shall be excavated, if necessary, and shall be cleaned and stored on or adjacent to the site in a protected place specified by the Owner or loaded into trucks provided by the Owner. Any equipment or material not worthy of salvaging, as directed by the Owner, shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a suitable location at the Contractor's expense. 1.25 POTABLE WATER FOR TESTING AND CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a temporary water meter from the Owner for the metering of the potable water used during testing and construction. The Owner shall provide this water at no cost to the Contractor, as long as the water is used at the project site exclusively. The Owner will perform daily tracking of water usage volumes. 1.26 DISINFECTION A. The Contractor shall clean, disinfect, and bacteriologically test and clear in accordance with Chapters 17-550, 17-555, and 17-560 of the Florida Administrative Code (FAC) and the local Health Department requirements, all water supply facilities affected by this project which shall come into contact with raw water, water being treated or treated water prior to placing the facility in operation. The above statement shall apply to both new facilities installed, and existing facilities which are to be impacted. 01170-6 B. The Contractor shall employ a disinfection method approved by the Engineer and Owner, and shall fully satisfy the Owner that adequate disinfection has been achieved prior to placing a facility on-line. C. The Contractor, in the presence of the Owner, will be responsible for the collection of all water samples. The samples shall be collected in accordance with best management processes in Chapter 17-550, 17-555 and 17-560, F.A.C. and submitted to a NELAC approved analytical laboratory for analyses of the required constituents. D. The cost of all disinfection work shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid and the Contractor shall pay for all bacteriological clearance tests. 1.27 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN A. Bid prices of equipment furnished under Divisions 11, 15 and 16 shall include the cost of a competent field service technician of the Manufacturers of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved Manufacturer's operation and maintenance data as specified in Section 01730 shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be divided into two or more time periods as required by the installation program or as directed by the Engineer. B. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the Manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls. 6. Energize equipment. 7. Deficiency correction 8. Demonstration of compliance with application performance specification. C. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. D. Upon completion of this work, the Manufacturer's field service technician shall submit, in triplicate, to the Engineer a complete, signed report of the results of his inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. E. Each equipment Manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel. Training shall not be performed until the requirements of paragraph B, C and D above have been fully satisfied and any specified performance testing completed. Training shall be provided for the number of days specified in each equipment Section of 01170-7 these Specifications. Training shall be provided on an 8 -hour per day basis. Partial days (less than eight (8) full working hours) shall not be credited toward the specified durations. Training shall not be concurrent with on-going testing debugging or installation activities; but shall be a separate activity devoted exclusively to the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the Manufacturer's equipment. Training shall be performed by qualified representatives of each equipment Manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operation personnel. Training shall provide an overview of operations and maintenance requirements and shall include but not be limited to: 1. Description of unit and component parts, 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria, 3. Operating procedures, 4. Maintenance procedures, 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules, 6. Troubleshooting, and 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface as a minimum. The operating and maintenance data to be provided in accordance with Specification Section 01730 shall be used as a basis for training. F. A certificate from the Manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the unit has been satisfactorily tested, is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit shall be submitted before start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The certificate shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of operating personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on the certification sheet, the form of which is at the end of this section. G. See the detailed Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the services of the Manufacturer's field service technician. H. For equipment furnished under Divisions other than 11, 15 and 16, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the Manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over -heating makes such services necessary in the opinion of the Engineer. 1.28 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operating and maintenance data covering all equipment furnished shall be delivered directly to the Orlando office of PBS&J, for approval within 60 days of shop drawing approval of each piece of equipment. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or stored on-site until the Engineer has approved the adequacy and completeness of the operating and maintenance data. Data shall be prepared and submitted in full conformance with Section 01730. Final approved copies of operating and maintenance data shall have been delivered to the Engineer on Owner's behalf two weeks prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. END OF SECTION 01170-8 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the Resident Project Representative to schedule and administer pre -construction meeting, periodic progress meetings and specially called meetings throughout progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 3. Preside at meetings. 4. Record the minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions. 5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 15 working days after each meeting. a. To participants in the meeting. b. To Owner, Engineer, and other parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. B. Representatives of Contractors, Owner, Subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. L�D C. Attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Instructions to Bidders are included in Division 0. B. Construction Schedules are included in Section 01311. C. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples are included in Section 01340. D. Contract Closeout is included in Section 01700. E. Operating and Maintenance Data is included in Section 01730. 1.03 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule a preconstruction meeting no later than 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the Owner. C. Attendance 1. Owner's Representative. 2. Engineer and his/her professional consultants. 3. Resident Project Representative. 01200-1 4. Contractor's Superintendent. 5. Major Subcontractors. 6. Major suppliers. 7. Utilities 8. Others as appropriate. D. Suggested Agenda 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major Subcontractors and suppliers. b. Projected Construction Schedules. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project Coordination. a. Designation of responsible personnel. b. Contractor, Owner, Engineer, and Resident Project Representative responsibilities. 5. Procedures and processing of- fa. a.Field decisions. b. Proposal requests. C. Submittals. d. Change Orders. e. Applications for Payment. 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. S. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas. b. Owner's requirements. 9. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 10. Temporary utilities. H. Housekeeping procedures. 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings. The progress meetings will be held every 30 days with the first meeting 30 days after the pre -construction meeting or 30 days after the date of Notice to Proceed. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the work. C. Location of the meetings: Project field office of Contractor or Resident Project Representative. D. Attendance 1. Contractor 2. Owner's representatives 3. Engineer and his/her professional consultants as needed. 4. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 5. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda. 6. Others as appropriate. 01200-2 E. Suggested Agenda 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations, problems and conflicts. 4. Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 8. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 12. Pending changes and substitutions. 13. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the project. 14. Other business. 15. Construction schedule. 16. Critical/long lead items. F. Attend progress meetings and is to study previous meeting minutes and current agenda items, in order to be prepared to discuss pertinent topics such as deliveries of materials and equipment, progress of the work, etc. r G. Provide a current submittal log at each progress meeting in accordance with Section 01340. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01200-3 SECTION 01311 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Promptly after award of the Contract, Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner and Engineer estimated construction progress for the Work, with sub -schedules of related activities which are essential to its progress. - B. Coordinate the work and scheduling with and around other Contractors and individual trades performing work on the Project. C. Submit revised progress schedules with each application for payment. D. Progress Schedule shall become part of Contract Documents after approval by Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. In other parts of the Contract Documents: 1. General Conditions: a. Articles 2 and 6 — Schedules, Reports, and Records b. Sections 6.01 and 6.02 — Supervision by Contractor C. Article 15 — Supervision of Work, Termination, and Delay B. Specified in other sections: 1. Summary of Work is included in Section 01010. 2. Submittals is included in Section 01340. 1.03 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart as follows: I . Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. 4. Minimum sheet size: 24 inch by 36 inch B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By major specification section numbers. 1.04 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule shall: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 7L) 2. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of construction. 3. Show projected percentage of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 01311-1 1.05 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of Schedule: 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities modified since previous submission. 3. Revised projections of progress and completion. 4. Other identifiable changes. C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime Contractors. 1.06 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial schedules within ten (10) days after award of Contract; Owner and Engineer will review schedules for information only. Submit to Owner and Engineer, one (1) reproducible transparency, five (5) blueline prints and one (1) computer CD of the initial schedule. B. Submit to the Owner and Engineer, one (1) reproducible transparency, five (5) blueline prints and one (1) computer CD of the revised schedule within 14 calendar days of approval of the initial schedule. C. Submit revised progress schedules with each application for payment or monthly, whichever is the shortest period. Submit one (1) bhieline print of the previous schedule with annotations showing status and changes, one (1) reproducible transparency, and one (1) computer CD of the updated schedule. Along with the updated schedules, submit: 1. A narrative report. 2. An updated summarized milestone schedule to reflect current project status. Identify any changes invoked or contemplated to the original program plan. 1.07 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of approved schedules to: 1. Owner 2. Engineer 3. Job site file 4. Subcontractors 5. Other concerned parties 6. Owner (two copies) B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections shown in the schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable 01311-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor agrees that whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly schedule that delays to the critical path have resulted, and hence, that the contract completion date will not be met or when so directed by the Owner, he will take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner, submitting to the Owner for approval, a written statement of the steps he intends to take to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule. 1. Increased construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Owner's representative, the backlog of Work. 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Owner's representative, the backlog of work. 3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule. 4. Costs incurred by the Owner arising from such lengthening of hours, including furnishing of Inspectors, shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be deducted from monies due him. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Owner's representative may be grounds for determination by the Owner that the Contractor is not proceeding at such rates as will insure completion within the specified time and may result in the termination of the right of the Contractor to continue the Work. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT SCHEDULE AND COMPLETION TIME A. If the Contractor desires to make changes in his method of operating which affect the approved schedule, he shall notify the Owner in writing stating what changes are proposed and the reason for the change. If the Owner approves these changes, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval, without additional cost to the Owner, all of the affected portion of the schedule. The schedule shall be adjusted by the Contractor only after prior approval of his proposed changes by the Owner. B. Adjustments may consist of changing portions of the activity sequence and/or activity durations, division of approved activities, or other adjustments as may be approved by the Owner. The addition of extraneous, non -working activities and/or activities which add unapproved restraints to the schedule shall not be approved. C. If the completion of any activity, whether or not critical, falls more than 100 percent behind its approved duration, the Contractor shall submit for approval a schedule adjustment showing each such activity divided into two activities reflecting completed versus uncompleted work. D. Shop drawings which are not approved on the first submittal or within the scheduled time shall be immediately rescheduled, as well as pipelines and tanks which do not pass leak tests. E. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract. In the event the Contractor requests an extension of any contract completion date, he 01311-3 shall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the Engineer may deem necessary for determination as to whether the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of the contract. Engineer will, after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor in writing thereof. If the Engineer finds that the Contractor is entitled to any extension of any contract completion date under the provisions of this contract, the Engineer's determination as to the total number of days of extension shall be based upon the currently approved schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities which, according to the schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the schedule do not have any affect on the contract completion date or dates, and therefore, will not be the basis for a change therein. F. From time to time it may be necessary for the contract schedule and/or completion time to be adjusted by the Engineer to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the Owner or his representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the Contractor shall reschedule the work and/or contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions and the Contractor shall revise his schedule accordingly. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for such schedule changes except for unavoidable overall contract time extensions beyond the actual completion of all unaffected work in the contract, in which case the Contractor shall take all possible action to minimize any time extension and any additional cost to the Owner. It is specifically pointed out that the use of - available float time in the schedule may be used by the Owner as defined by the Engineer, as well as by the Contractor. Float time is defined as the amount of time between the early start date, and the late start date, or the early finish date and the late finish date, of any of the activities in the schedule. G. The Owner controls the float time in the approved schedule and, therefore, without obligation to extend either the overall completion date or any intermediate completion dates set out in the schedule, the Owner may initiate changes to the contract work that absorb float time only. Owner -initiated changes that affect the critical path on the approved schedule shall be the sole grounds for extending (or contracting) said completion dates. Contractor -initiated changes that encroach on the float time identified in the approved schedule may be accomplished with the Owner's concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to Owner -initiated changes competing for the same float time. 3.03 COORDINATING SCHEDULES WITH OTHER CONTRACT SCHEDULES A. Where work is to be performed under this contract concurrently with and/or contingent upon work performed on the same facilities or area under other contracts, the Contractor's schedule shall be coordinated with the schedules of the other contracts. The Contractor shall obtain the schedules of the other appropriate contracts from the Engineer and/or Owner for the preparation and updating of his schedule and shall make the required changes in his schedule when indicated by changes in corresponding schedules. END OF SECTION 01311-4 SECTION 01340 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. This Section specifies the general methods and requirements of submissions applicable to Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Construction Photographs, and Construction or Submittal Schedules. Additional general submission requirements are contained in Article 6.17 of the General Conditions. Detailed submittal requirements are specified in the technical Sections. B. All submittals shall be clearly identified by reference to Section Number, Paragraph, Drawing Number or Detail as applicable. Submittals shall be clear and legible and of sufficient size for presentation of data. C. The Contractor is to maintain an accurate updated submittal log and will bring this log to each scheduled progress meeting with the Owner's representatives. This log should include the following items: 1. Submittal -Description and File number assigned. 2. Date to Engineer. L) 3. Date returned to Contractor from Engineer. 4. Status of submittal (REVIEWED, NO COMMENTS; REVIEWED COMMENTS AS NOTED; REJECTED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT; or NOT REVIEWED). 5. Date of resubmittal and return (as applicable). 6. Date material released for fabrication. 7. Projected date of fabrication. 8. Projected date of delivery to site. 9. Status of O&M submittal. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES A. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings as specified in individual Sections include, custom -prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings, scheduled information, setting diagrams, actual shop work manufacturing instructions, custom templates, special wiring diagrams, coordination drawings, individual system or equipment inspection and test reports including performance curves and certifications, as applicable to the work. 2. All shop drawings submitted by subcontractors shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking. The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission at the proper time so as to prevent delays in delivery of materials. 3. Check all subcontractors' shop drawings regarding measurements, size of members, materials and details to make sure that they conform to the intent of the Drawings and related Sections. Return shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in error to the subcontractors for correction before submission thereof. 01340-1 4. All details on shop drawings shall show clearly the relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the drawings before being submitted. 5. Submittals for equipment specified under Divisions 11 shall include a listing of all installations where identical or similar equipment has been installed and been in operation for a period of at least one year. B. Product Data 1. Product data as specified in individual Sections include, standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturer's product specification and installation instructions, availability of colors'and patterns, manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing -in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring diagrams, printed performance curves and operational -range diagrams, production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare -parts listing and printed product warranties, as applicable to the work. C. Samples 1. Samples specified in individual Sections include, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of repetitively -used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols and units of work to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing, as applicable to the work. 2. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter in triplicate for each shipment of samples. Contractor shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment and send a copy of this letter to the Engineer. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract Requirements. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples, including those by subcontractors, prior to submission to determine and verify the following: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data 4. Conformance with related Sections B. Each shop drawing, sample and product data submitted by the Contractor shall have affixed to it the following Certification Statement including the Contractor's Company name and signed by the Contractor: Certification Statement: by this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings and all Contract requirements. Shop drawings and product data sheets 11 -inch by 17 -inch and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and bear the above Certification Statement 01340-2 (� on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully describe the packaged data and include a ✓ listing of all items within the package. Provide to the Resident Project Representative a copy of each transmittal sheet for shop drawings, product data and samples at the time of submittal to the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall utilize the following Shop Drawing numbering system: 1. The Submittal Log Number shall reference the Specification Section Number. 2. The numbering system shall be specification section number followed by a "1" for original submittal, "1 A" for first resubmittal and so forth, (for example: 15050-1, 15050-1A, 15050 -IB...) D. Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the Contractor and the Engineer will have no responsibility therefor. F. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing, sample, or product data shall be started nor shall any materials be fabricated or installed prior to the approval or qualified approval of such item. Fabrication performed, materials purchased or on-site construction accomplished which does not conform to approved shop drawings and data shall be at the Contractor's risk. The Owner will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies required to accomplish conformity. G. Project work, materials, fabrication, and installation shall conform with approved shop drawings, applicable samples, and product data. 1.04 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor. B. Each submittal, appropriately coded, will be returned within 30 calendar days following receipt of submittal by the Engineer. C. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit the number of opaque reproductions which the contractor requires, plus five (5) copies which will be retained by the Engineer. 2. Product Data: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus five (5) copies which will be retained by the Engineer. 3. Samples: Submit the number stated in the respective Sections. D. Submittals shall contain: 1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. 2. The Project title and number. 3. Contractor identification. 4. The names of: a. Contractor 01340-3 b. Supplier C. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product, with the section number, page and paragraph(s). 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Standards numbers. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. H. A blank space suitably sized for Contractor and Engineer stamps. 12. Contractor's stamp or review and approval, initialed or signed, certifying to review of initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents. 13. Where calculations are required to be submitted by the Contractor, the calculations shall have been checked by a qualified individual other than the preparer. The submitted calculations shall clearly show the names of the preparer and of the checker. 1.05 REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. The review of shop drawings, data and samples will be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. They shall not be construed: 1. as permitting any departure from the Contract requirements; 2. as relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and materials; 3. as approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise provided herein. B. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner. C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a departure from the Contract requirements which Engineer finds to be in the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception. D. When reviewed by the Engineer each of the Shop Drawings will be identified as having received such review being so stamped and dated. Shop Drawings stamped "REVIEWED, COMMENTS AS NOTED" OR "REJECTED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT" and with required corrections shown will be returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmittal. E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmittals the Contractor shall identify all revisions made to the submittals, either in writing on the letter of transmittal or on the shop drawings by use of revision triangles or other similar methods. The resubmittal shall clearly respond to each comment made by the Engineer on the previous submission. Additionally, the Contractor shall direct specific attention to 01340-4 N any revisions made other than the corrections requested by the Engineer on previous submissions. F. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be returned to the Contractor and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete. G. Repetitive Review 1. Shop Drawings and other submittals will be reviewed no more than twice at the Owner's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense based on the Engineer's then prevailing rates. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all such fees invoiced to the Owner by the Engineer. Submittals are required until approved, 2. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of submittal will not entitle Contractor to extension of the contract time. H. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give written notice thereof to the Engineer at least 7 working days prior to release for manufacture. I. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the Engineer. 1.06 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reproductions of approved shop drawings and copies of approved product data and samples, where required, to the job site file and elsewhere as directed by the Engineer. Number of copies shall be as directed by the Engineer but shall not exceed six. 1.07 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS A. Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work of other related Sections, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar sequenced activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work. 01340-5 P.E. CERTIFICATION FORM The undersigned hereby certifies that he/she is a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida and that he/she has been employed by in accordance with Section (Name of Contractor) (Insert P.E. Responsibilities) North WTP Raw Water Transmission System (Name of Project) to design for the The undersigned further certifies that he/she has performed the design of the North WTP Raw Water Transmission System, that said design is in conformance (Name of Project) with all applicable local, state and federal codes, rules, and regulations, and that his/her signature and P.E. stamp have been affixed to all calculations and drawings used in, and resulting from, the design. The undersigned hereby agrees to make all original design drawings and calculations available to the Indian River County Board of County Commissioners (Insert Name of Owner) or the Owner's authorized representative within seven days following written request therefor by the Owner. P.E. Name Signature Address Contractor's Name Signature Title Address END OF SECTION 01340-6 SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Submit a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the work, within twenty- one (21) days after the effective date of the Agreement. B. Upon request of the Owner or Engineer, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract B. Application for Payment is included in Section 01052. 1.03 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Type schedule on an 8'/z -inch by 11 -inch or 8'/z -inch by 14 -inch white paper furnished by the Owner; Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by the Engineer upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with: 1. Title of Project and location. 2. Engineer and Project number. 3. Name and Address of Contractor. 4. Contract designation. 5. Date of submission. B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. C. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective Section. D. For each major line item list sub -values of major products or operations under the item. E. For the various portions of the work: 1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit. 2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into: a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. Paid invoices are required for materials upon request by the Engineer. b. The total installed value. 01370-1 F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum. 1.04 SUB -SCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES A. Submit a sub -schedule of unit costs and quantities for: 1. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products. B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values. C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste. D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into: 1. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid. 2. Copies of invoices for component material shall be included with the payment request in which the material first appears. 3. Paid invoices shall be provided with the second payment request in which the material appears or no payment shall be allowed and/or may be deleted from the request. E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01370-2 SECTION 01381 AUDIO-VISUAL DOCUMENTATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Prior to commencing of the Work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio -video tape recording taken along the entire length of the project to serve as a record of preconstruction conditions. The preconstruction swale elevations shall be recorded at 100' intervals. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Summary of Work is included in Section 0 10 10. B. Contract Closeout is included in Section 01700. 1.03 APPROVAL No construction shall begin prior to review and acceptance of the tapes covering the construction area by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the authority to reject all or any portion of a videotape not conforming to specifications and order that it be redone at no additional charge. The Contractor shall reschedule unacceptable coverage within five (5) days after being notified. The Engineer shall designate those areas, if any, to be omitted from or added to the audio -video coverage. Tape recordings shall not be made more than thirty (30) days prior to beginning of construction of any area. All tapes and written records shall become the property of the Owner. The tapes shall be delivered to the Owner as soon as possible after recording. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional electrographer. The color audio - video tapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of preconstruction color audio -video tape documentation. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL All equipment, accessories, materials, and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2.02 QUALITY The total audio -video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall have minimal distortion, tearing, rolls, or other imperfections. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume and clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. 2.03 CAMERA 01381-1 The color video camera used in the recording system shall have a horizontal resolution of 300 lines at center, a luminance signal-to-noise ratio of 45dB, and a minimum illumination requirement of 25 foot candles. 2.04 TAPES Audio -video shall be new. Reprocessed tapes will not be acceptable. The tapes shall be one- half inch, high energy, extended still frame capable videocassette, shall be interchangeable with the color videocassette player, and shall be compatible for playback with the player - receiver. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 VIDEOTAPING PROCEDURES A. Each tape shall begin with the current date, project name, and municipality, and be followed by the general location; i.e., name of street, house address, viewing side, and direction of progress. The audio track shall consist of an original live recording. The recording shall contain the narrative commentary. B. All video recordings must, by electronic means, display continuously and simultaneously generate, with the actual taping, transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording, and station numbers, if shown on the Drawings. The date information shall contain the month, day, and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minute, and second. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, name of street, house address, direction of travel, and the viewing side. The transparent information shall appear on the screen. C. All taping shall be done during times of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist, or fog. The recording shall be done only when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. D. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed 44 feet per minute. Panning, zoom -in, and zoom -out rates shall be sufficiently controlled to maintain a clear view of the object. E. Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, ditches, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, and headwalls within the area covered. F. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used, the distance from the camera lens to the ground shall not be more than twelve (12) feet. In some instances, audio -video tape coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking or special conveyance approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 01381-2 SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART I — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform certain specified testing. All testing described in the Contract Documents shall be paid for by the Contractor. This requirement takes precedence over any other specification that may indicate that the testing fees (including collection, shipping and laboratory fees) be paid for by the Owner or any other party other than the Contractor. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the work of the Contract. B. Selection of testing laboratory shall be approved by. Engineer and Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions of the contract: Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, \� rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities. B. Respective sections of specifications: Certification of Products. C. Each specification section listed: Laboratory tests required and standards for testing. D. Testing Laboratory inspection, sampling and testing is required for but not limited to the following: 1. Division 2 — Site Work 2. Division 3 - Concrete 3. Division 4 - Masonry 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction." C. Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located. D. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of Inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 01410-1 E. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards b. Accepted values of national physical constants. 1.04 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Resident Project Representative and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and methods of construction: 1. Comply with specified standards 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Owner, Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Engineer, Owner, and Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued 2. Project title and number 3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions 7. Date of test 8. Identification of product and specification section 9. Location of sample or test in the Project 10. Type of inspection or test IL . Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer E. Perform additional tests as required by Engineer or the Owner. 1.05 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to work and to manufacturer's facilities. 01410-2 C. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. D. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. E. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The Owner or Engineer may require the Contractor to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing and certification. F. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to work to be tested 2. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested 3. To facilitate inspections and tests 4. For storage and curing of test samples G. Notify laboratory, in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignments of personnel and scheduling of tests. H. If the tests and any subsequent retests indicate the materials and equipment fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay for the laboratory costs directly to the testing firm, and these costs will not be reimbursable to the Contractor. PART 2 — PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 — EXECUTION Not applicable. END OF SECTION 01410-3 SECTION 0 15 10 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary utilities required for construction; remove on completion of entire project. B. Provide temperature, ventilation, and lighting requirements, if applicable, as specified in each individual section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Summary of Work is included in Section 01010. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code. B. Comply with federal, state, and local codes and regulations, and with utility company requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS (GENERAL) Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage. They MUST NOT create unsafe conditions, and MUST NOT violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. The Contractor must maintain power to all existing buildings and areas. B. The Contractor is responsible for providing and paying for all power required for his operations. Contractor shall make arrangements with Owner for temporary power. C. Contractor is responsible for arranging power for his office trailers(s), power tools, etc., at his own expense. The Contractor shall pay the costs of all power used. D. Provide POWER CENTERS for miscellaneous tools and equipment used in the work: 1. Weatherproof distribution box with minimum of four 20 -amp., 120 -volt grounded outlets. 2. Locate so that power is available at any point of use with minimum 100 -foot CONSTRUCTION -TYPE power cords. 3. Provide circuit breaker protection for each outlet. 01510-1 E. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work, when natural light is not adequate for work, and for areas accessible to persons other than Contractor's employees. F. If Contractor requires service other than specified above, he shall arrange for, provide maintenance, and pay all costs incurred. 2.03 TEMPORARY AIR AND WATER Contractor shall make arrangements with Owner for all temporary water at the project site. Contractor shall pay for all temporary water required for his operations. The Contractor shall provide all air and water, including temporary piping and appurtenances required therefore, as may be required for the cleaning and testing of pipelines and equipment necessary the Work. Temporary piping and appurtenances shall be removed upon approval of equipment being tested. 2.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Contractor shall provide temporary sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations. B. Contractor shall provide for regular service, cleaning, and maintenance of temporary facilities and enclosures. 2.07 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide portable UL -rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide portable UL -rated Class ABC dry chemical extinguishers or a combination of NFPA recommended Classes for the exposure. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. END OF SECTION 01510-2 N SECTION 01560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary control facilities required for construction; remove on completion of entire project any features not intended to remain on the project site. B. Provide noise control, dust control, water control, debris control, pollution control and erosion control as specified in the appropriate sections of these documents. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with federal, state, and local codes and regulations and utility company requirements. B. Comply with Department of Transportation requirements. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS (GENERAL) A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity and quality for the required usage, MUST NOT create unsafe conditions and MUST NOT violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.02 TEMPORARY NOISE CONTROL A. Mechanical equipment shall be fitted with mufflers to reduce noise from internal combustion type engines. B. Bells, sirens, alarms, etc., shall be adjusted to provide adequate warnings to personnel on the project site; however, they shall be regulated to an intensity that is amenable to the neighboring communities. C. Exterior construction work noises shall be kept to a minimum during evening, night, and early morning hours. In addition, weekend and holiday noises shall be limited to acceptable levels. D. In addition to on-site control, noise considerations shall be made to off-site vehicles and equipment (mobilization, demobilization, deliveries, etc.). 2.03 TEMPORARY DUST CONTROL A. Dust formed as a result of the construction shall be controlled by the Contractor. Cleaning of work areas and application of dust control materials are the most effective methods of dust control. 01560-1 H 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL A. The flow of water through the construction site shall be controlled by the Contractor such that it does not damage any constructed items; however, it shall be diverted and channeled to effectively leave the site as soon as possible. Puddling and ponding on the site is not permitted. B. Water shall be controlled such that it does not enter excavated areas, nor is deposited on or against constructed features. 2.05 TEMPORARY DEBRIS CONTROL A. Provision shall be made by each Contractor to have available adequate containers to hold any and all debris that is to be generated from the project. Containers should be covered to prevent wind blowing paper, plastic, and lightweight products around and off the site. B. Instructions shall be given to personnel to utilize the trash containers. Containers shall be placed in convenient places at the site. C. At least once per week, a thorough cleaning of trash and debris shall be made at the construction site. An acceptable method of disposal shall be employed. END OF SECTION 01560-2 SECTION 01600 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the general requirements for the delivery handling, storage and protection for all items required in the construction of the work. Specific requirements, if any, are specified with the related item. 1.02 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY A. Transport and handle items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Schedule delivery to reduce long term on-site storage prior to installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall equipment be delivered to the site more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from the Resident Project Representative. C. Coordinate delivery with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that are hazardous, flammable, easily damaged or sensitive to deterioration. D. Deliver products to the site in manufacturer's original sealed containers or other packing systems, complete with instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. E. All items delivered to the site shall be unloaded and placed in a manner which will not hamper the Contractor's normal construction operation or those of Subcontractors and other Contractors and will not interfere with the flow of necessary traffic. F. Provide necessary equipment and personnel to unload all items delivered to the site. G. Promptly inspect shipment to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and items are undamaged. For items furnished by others (i.e. Owner, other Contractors), perform inspection in the presence of the Engineer. Notify Engineer verbally, and in writing, of any problems. 1.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Storage instruction shall be studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Resident Project Representative by him/her. Instruction shall be carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the Contractor. Arrange storage to permit access for inspection. B. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. Cement and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural, miscellaneous and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, cracking and spalling to a minimum. D. All mechanical and electrical equipment and instruments subject to corrosive damage by the atmosphere if stored outdoors (even though covered by canvas) shall be stored in a weathertight building to prevent injury. The building may be a temporary structure on the site or elsewhere, but it must be satisfactory to the Resident Project Representative. Building shall be provided with adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer. I. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease and other lubricants unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. 2. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal -to -metal "welding". Upon installation of the equipment, the Contractor shall start the equipment, at least half load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. 3. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. New lubricants shall be put into the equipment at the time of acceptance. 4. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guaranty the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION W011 SECTION 01610 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best Engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable. C. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Conditions of the Contract B. Summary of Work is included in Section 0 10 10. C. Special Provisions is included in Section 01170. D. Submittals are included in Section 01340. E. Substitutions and Product Options are included in Section 01630. F. Cleaning is included in Section 01710. G. Operating and Maintenance Data is included in Section 01730. H. Warranties and Bonds are included in Section 01740. 1.03 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the work. All materials and equipment furnished shall be subject to the inspection and approval of the Resident Project Representative. No material shall be delivered to the work without prior approval of the Resident Project Representative. 1 . 1 B. Within 30 days after the effective date of the Agreement, submit to the Resident Project Representative, data relating to materials and equipment proposed to be furnished for the work. Such data shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Resident Project Representative or Engineer to identify the particular product and to form an opinion as to its conformity to the specifications. The data shall comply with Section 01340. C. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Resident Project Representative or Engineer requires, either prior to beginning or during the progress of the work, submit samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demonstrate that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for and pay for the tests. D. Submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit consideration and approval before materials are necessary for incorporation in the work. Any delay of approval resulting from the failure to submit samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claim against the Owner or the Engineer. E. In order to demonstrate the proficiency of workmen or to facilitate the choice among several textures, types, finishes and surfaces, provide such samples of workmanship or finish as may be required. F. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the approved samples / or other data. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including five copies to the Resident Project Representative. 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Resident Project Representative for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.05 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 01610-2 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.06 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Furnish a covered, weather -protected storage structure providing a clean, dry, non- corrosive environment for all mechanical equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. Furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the Engineer prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment estimate. B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 4. Store loose granular materials in a well -drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled and stored before, during and after shipment in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting and any injury, theft or damage of any kind whatsoever. to the material or equipment. D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural and miscellaneous steel and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete beams shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking and spalling to a minimum. E. All materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the work and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. 01610-3 F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions and free from damage or deterioration. G. Protection after Installation 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering when no longer needed. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment and supplies sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, equipment and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without additional cost to the Owner. I. Failure to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, Engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. 1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools (including L) grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their use. Preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and instructions in good order no later than 10 days prior to plant start-up. 1.08 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT ON SITE A. Because of the long period allowed for construction, special attention shall be given to the storage and handling of equipment on site. As a minimum, the procedure outlined below shall be followed. 1. Equipment shall not be shipped until approved by the Resident Project Representative. The intent of this requirement is to reduce on-site storage time prior to installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall equipment be delivered to the site more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from the Resident Project Representative. Operation and maintenance data as described in Section 01730 shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to shipment of equipment. 2. All equipment having moving parts such as gears, electric motors, etc, and/or instruments shall be stored in a temperature and humidity controlled building approved by the Resident Project Representative, until such time as the equipment is to be installed. 3. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, etc, unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. 4. A copy of the manufacturer's storage instructions shall be given to the Resident Project Representative and shall be carefully studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Resident Project Representative by him. These instructions shall be carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the Contractor. 01610-4 5. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to insure proper lubrication and to avoid metal -to -metal "welding". Upon installation of the equipment, start the equipment, at least half load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. 6. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. Mechanical equipment to be used in the work, if stored for longer than ninety days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed and lubricated prior to testing and startup, at no additional cost to the Owner. 7. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guarantee the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.09 WARRANTY A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. 1.10 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts for certain equipment provided under Divisions 11, 15 and 16 have been specified in the pertinent Sections. Collect and store all spare parts as required by the manufacturer in accordance with Paragraph 1.08 above. In addition, furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. Deliver the spare parts to the Owner not later than 10 days prior to plant start-up. 1.11 GREASE, OIL AND FUEL A. All grease, oil and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied under Divisions 11, 15 and 16. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of the equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of operation. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01610-5 SECTION 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and install products specified, under options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. B. Whenever a product, material or item of equipment is specified or described by using the name of a proprietary product or the name of a particular manufacturer or vendor, followed by the phase "or equal," the specific item mentioned shall be the basis upon which bids are to be prepared, and shall be understood as establishing the type, function, dimension, appearance and quality desired. Other manufacturer's or vendor's products not named will be considered as substitutions, provided the required information is submitted in the manner set forth in this section and provided the substitution will not require substantial revision to the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Bid Form is included in Division 0. B. Change Order Procedures are included in Section 01035. 1.03 SUBMITTAL OF LIST OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS A. Bidders shall submit their list of proposed substitutions and the proposed monetary changes associated therewith to the Owner on the standard form provided together with their bids. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For Products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For Products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named which complies with Specifications. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal," submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. 01630-1 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. In order for substitutions to be considered, the Contractor shall submit, within 30 days of issuance of Notice of Award, complete data as set forth herein to permit complete analysis of all proposed substitutions noted on his substitutions list. No substitution shall be considered unless the Contractor provides the required data in accordance with the requirements of this Section within the 30 day period. B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. 4) Operation and maintenance data. C. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; List significant variations. Substitution shall not change design intent and shall perform equal to that specified. 3. Data relating to impact on construction schedule occasioned by the proposed substitution. 4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required in other work or products. 6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified. a. Amount of any net change to Contract Sum. 7. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 8. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials. C. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from Contractor. 2. They are requested directly by a Subcontractor or supplier. 3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. D. Requests for substitutions submitted after Notice of Award will not be considered unless evidence is submitted to the Engineer that all of the following circumstances exist: 1. The specified product is unavailable for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor. Such reasons shall consist of strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacturer, or acts of God. 2. The Contractor placed, or attempted to place, orders for the specified products within 10 days after Notice of Award. 3. Request for substitution is made in writing to the Engineer within 10 days of the date on which the Contractor ascertains that he cannot obtain the item specified. 4. Complete data as set forth herein to permit complete analysis of the proposed substitution is submitted with the request. 01630-2 E. The Engineer's decision regarding evaluation of substitutions shall be considered final and binding. Requests for time extensions and additional costs based on submission of, acceptance of, or rejection of substitutions will not be allowed. All approved substitutions will be incorporated into the Agreement by Change Order. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making formal request for substitution, Contractor represents that: I. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified. 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his Contract, but not: a. Costs under separate contracts. b. Engineer's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents. 1.07 ENGINEER DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01630-3 SECTION 01650 STARTUP AND DEMONSTRATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a competent field services technician of the manufacturers of all equipment furnished under Divisions 11, 15 and 16 to supervise installation, adjustment, initial operation and testing, performance testing, final acceptance testing and startup of the equipment. B. Perform specified equipment field performance tests, final acceptance tests and startup services. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Operation and Maintenance Data is included in Section 01730. B. Performance and acceptance testing and startup requirements are included in the respective sections of Divisions 11, 15 and 16. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name, address and resume of proposed field services technicians at least 30 days in advance of the need for such services. B. Submit to the Owner and Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, detailed testing 'procedures for shop tests, field performance tests and final acceptance tests as specified in the various equipment sections. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Test procedures shall be submitted at least 30 days in advance of the proposed test dates and shall include at least the following information: a. Name of equipment to be tested, including reference to specifications section number and title. b. Testing schedule of proposed dates and times for testing. C. Summary of power and water needs and identification of who will provide them. d. Outline specific assignment of the responsibilities of the Contractor and manufacturers' factory representatives or field service personnel. e. Detailed description of step-by-step testing requirements, with reference to appropriate standardized testing procedures and laboratory analyses by established technical organizations (e.g., ASTM, WPCF Standard Methods, etc). f Samples of forms to be used to collect and record test data and to present tabulated test results. 2. Copies of test reports upon completion of specified shop, performance and acceptance tests. Test reports shall incorporate the information provided in the 01650-1 test procedures submittals, modified to reflect actual conduct of the tests and the following additional information: a. Copy of all test data sheets and results of lab analyses. b. Summary comparison of specified test and performance requirements versus actual test results. C. Should actual test results fail to meet specified test and performance requirements, describe action to be taken prior to re -testing equipment. Copies of the manufacturer's field service technician's report summarizing the results of his/her initial inspection, operation, adjustment and pre-tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions and tabulations of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained, suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance, and the equipment supplier's Certificate of Installation in the format specified herein. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C653 - Disinfection for Water Treatment Plants. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Water Pollution Control Federation (WPCF) D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field service technicians shall be competent and experienced in the proper installation, adjustment, operation, testing and startup of the equipment and systems being installed. B. Manufacturers' sales and marketing personnel will not be accepted as field service technicians. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS A. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, before it is operated by others, the manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants. 01650-2 (� B. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment has �✓ been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. C. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall submit a signed report of the results of his/her inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. 3.02 STARTUP AND ACCEPTANCE A. General Requirements 1. Successfully execute the step-by-step procedure of startup and performance demonstration specified herein. 2. The startup and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to Substantial Completion and acceptance by the Owner. 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least 5 working days in advance or as otherwise specified with the Owner and the Engineer. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during the workweek of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified. B. Preparation for Startup 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that they are in good working order and properly connected. Preliminary equipment operation shall be conducted. All systems shall be cleaned and purged as required. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, pump wells and pipelines which are hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the testing is complete. 2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full range. All other adjustments required for proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made. 3. Perform all other tasks needed for preparing and conditioning the facilities for proper operation. 4. No testing or equipment operation shall take place until it has been verified by the Resident Project Representative that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is in good working order. 5. No testing or equipment operation shall take place until it has been verified by the Resident Project Representative that all lubricants, tools, maintenance equipment, spare parts and approved equipment operation and maintenance manuals have been furnished as specified. C. Facilities Startup 1. Startup period shall not begin until all new facilities and equipment have been tested as specified and are ready for operation. The Owner shall receive spare parts, safety equipment, tools and maintenance equipment, lubricants, approved operation and maintenance data and the specified operation and maintenance instruction prior to the startup. All valve tagging shall also be complete prior to this startup. 2. Demonstrate a seven consecutive day period of 24 hour per day successful operation of the facility as a prerequisite of Substantial Completion and Acceptance. 3. In the event of failure to demonstrate satisfactory performance of the facility on the first or any subsequent attempt, all necessary alterations, adjustments, repairs 01650-3 N and replacements shall be made. When the facility is again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and a new test shall be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer, for the specified duration. 4. The Owner will furnish all operating personnel (other than vendor's or subcontractor's service personnel) needed to operate equipment during the final test period; however, said personnel will perform their duties under Contractor's direct supervision. Until performance tests are completed and units and systems are accepted by the Owner as substantially complete, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the operation and maintenance of all new facilities. 5. The Owner will provide all necessary chemicals and electricity. However, the Contractor shall provide all necessary personnel of the various construction trades, i.e., electricians, plumbers, etc, and field service personnel of the major system suppliers on an 8 hour per day basis at the facilities. 6. Do not, at any time, during startup allow the facility to be operated in a manner which subjects equipment to conditions that are more severe than the maximum allowable operating conditions for which the equipment was designed. 01650-4 DEMONSTRATION TEST PROCEDURES (SAMPLE) PROJECT DATA NAME: North and South WTP Remote Supply Wells LOCATION: Vero Beach OWNER: Indian River County, Florida OTHER: TEST AREA: INTERNAL RECYCLE PUMPS TEST DESCRIPTION: 1. Pump Capacity Verification CONTRACT DATA NUMBER: DATE: A. Shutoff Head - Record pressure of each pump under dead head conditions (pump against closed valve). Pump 1 psig (actual) psig (expected) Pump 2 psig (actual) psig (expected) SHEET: I OF 2 DATE VERIFIED VERIFIED BY B. Operation test for each pump with valve open. Take discharge and suction pressure readings while reading flow meter (flow meter will be assumed to be accurate) after ten minute runs at steady pressure after flow has been fully establish. Pump 1 gpm (from meter) TDH gpm (from cert. curve @ above pressure) Pump 2 gpm (from meter) TDH gpm (from cert. curve @ above pressure) C. Pump check valve operation observed 01650-5 TEST AREA: INTERNAL RECYCLE PUMPS SHEET: 2 OF 2 TEST DESCRIPTION: E. Pump control functions observed: DATE VERIFIED VERIFIED BY 1. Hand mode (including speed control) 2. Manual speed control of VFD 3. Auto mode (speed control) 4. Auto mode (ratio control) F. Pump SCADA monitoring functions observed: G. Pump Alarms observed: H. Pump Suction Valving observed: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY 01650-6 NORTH AND SOUTH WTP REMOTE SUPPLY WELLS EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION Owner INDIAN RIVER COUNTY Project NORTH AND SOUTH WTP REMOTE SUPPLY WELLS Contract No. EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION SECTION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION I (Print Name) (Print Manufacturer's Name) hereby CERTIFY that Authorized representative of (Print equipment name and model with serial no.) installed for the subject project has (have) been installed in a satisfactory manner, has (have) been tested and adjusted, and is (are) ready for final acceptance testing and operation on : Date: Time: CERTIFIED BY: Date: (Signature of Manufacturer's Representative) END OF SECTION 01650-7 (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 1 . 1 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Closeout procedures. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Adjusting. 4. Project Record documents. 5. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Operation and Maintenance Data are included in Section 01730. B. Warranties and Bonds are included in Section 01740. 1.03 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following documents; actual revisions to the work shall be recorded in these documents: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor elevation datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. 01700-1 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. F. Submit documents to Engineer with Application for Final Payment. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Engineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit Application for Final Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments and sum remaining due. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. 1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged (�.✓i transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 4. Wipe surface of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 5. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even -textured surface. 1.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. END OF SECTION 01700-2 SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Execute cleaning, during progress of the work, and at completion of the work, as required by General Conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. B. Each Section: Cleaning for specific products or work. 1.03 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and anti -pollution laws. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations. B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site. 01710-1 3.02 DUST CONTROL A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as -needed basis until painting is finished. B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly -coated surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. D. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. E. Ventilating Systems: 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction. 2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. F. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. G. Prior to final completion, or OWNER occupancy, conduct an inspection of sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean. END OF SECTION 01710-2 N SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART I GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 9. Field engineering records for compliance with field engineering submittals 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01050: Field Engineering B. Section 01052: Application for Payment C. Section 01340: Submittals 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI/CSC format. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Resident Project Representative. E. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is to exhibit the currently updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner. 1.04 MARKING DEVICES A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by the Resident Project Representative. 01720-1 1.05 RECORDING A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Drawings: legibly mark to record actual construction. 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. All underground piping with elevations and dimensions, changes to piping location, horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements, and actual installed pipe material, class, etc. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings. 7. Equipment and piping relocations. 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, windows, etc. 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and shop drawings. 10. Bronze tablet plaque revisions according to actual installation. 11. One set of record shop drawings for each process equipment, piping, (including casings) electrical system and instrumentation system. D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record. 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. E. Shop drawings (after final review and approval). F. Certified site survey, below ground piping survey, and line elevations and stationing at 100 foot increments per Section 01050 by a registered land surveyor. 1.06 SUBMITTAL A. At contract close-out, deliver record documents listed in paragraph LOIA to the Engineer for the Owner. The required field engineering submittals certified by a registered land surveyor are listed in Section 01050. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01720-2 SECTION 01730 O&M MANUALS AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. 2. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. 3. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. 4. Assemble individual equipment O&M manuals into multiple volume overall manual sets in a format similar to that illustrated in Table 01730-1. 5. Submit O&M manuals in hard copy and CD or DVD. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the. extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8 1/2 -inches x 11 inches. 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages. 01730- 1 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 4. Drawings: a) Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b) Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger than 11 inches x 17 inches. 5. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment separated by a Section Tab. a) Provide typed description of products and major component parts of equipment. b) Provide indexed tabs to separate the individual product within each binder volume. 6. Cover: Identify each individual volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". An example cover and spine is presented in Table 01730-3. List: a) Title of Project. b) Identity of separate structure as applicable. C) Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C. Binders: L 1.04 1. Commercial quality heavy duty EZD VIEW three D -ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers in black or white. 2. Maximum post width: 3 inches 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. In addition to the hard copies one copy of the O&M manuals shall be submitted in electronic format on a CD. CONTENT OF MANUAL 01730-2 A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. An example Table of Contents is presented in Table 01730-1. The Table of Contents shall be submitted and approved before final preparation of the manual volumes. B. Fly- Leaf .Data: An example fly —leaf is presented in Table 01730-2. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of: a) Subcontractor or installer, manufacturer and supplier name, address and telephone number. b) A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. C) Identify area of responsibility of each. d) Local source of supply for parts and replacement name, address and telephone number. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a) Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b) Clearly identify data applicable to installation. C) Delete references to inapplicable information. 3. Operation and maintenance information as herein specified. 4. Record shop drawings as submitted and approved with all corrections made for each product. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: 01730-3 a) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b) Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for*the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a) Proper procedures in event of failure. b) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit six copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content: for applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a) Catalog number, size, composition. b) Color and texture designations. C) Information required for reordering special manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. a) Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b) Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product. C) Recommend schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Content, for moisture protection and weather -exposed products: 01730-4 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a) Applicable standards. b) Chemical composition. C) Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit six copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. C) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d) Summary of information listed on equipment and motor data plates. 2. Operating procedures: a) Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b) Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down and emergency instructions. C) Summer and winter operating instructions. d) Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures: a) Routine operations. b) Guide to "trouble -shooting". c) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. 01730-5 d) Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a) Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. 13. Approved record shop drawings with all corrections made, and a copy of the warranty statement, check-out memo, and demonstration test procedures and certification. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts. a) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b) Performance curves, engineering data and tests. C) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards. a) Electrical service b) Controls 3. As installed color coded wiring diagrams. 01730-6 4. Operating procedures: a) Routine and normal operating instructions. b) Sequences required. C) Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a) Routine operations. b) Guide to "trouble -shooting. C) Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d) Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications. 1.07 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed Table of Contents, formats and outlines of contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals within 90 days after Notice to Proceed. Sets of example O&M manuals are available for examination upon request. B. Submit two copies of completed data in preliminary form no later than 20 days following Engineer's review of the last shop drawing of a product and/or other submittal specified under Section 01340, but no later than delivery of equipment. One copy will be returned with comments to be incorporated into the final copies and the other copy will be retained on-site for use in any early training. C. Submit six (6) copies of approved manual in final form directly to the offices of the �J Engineer, Post, Buckley, Schuh & Jernigan, Inc. within 10 days after the reviewed copy or last item of the reviewed copy is returned. 01730-7 D. Provide six (6) copies of addenda to the operation and maintenance manuals as applicable and certificates as specified within 30 days after final inspection. 1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to demonstration test, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. C. Instructors shall be fully qualified personnel as outlined within the individual equipment specifications. If no specific training specifications are listed with the equipment, the Contractor shall provide the instruction with qualified Contractor personnel. D. The instructors shall provide for and prepare lesson scopes and handouts for up to five individuals designated by the Owner that outline the items to be covered. Separate sessions for operation and maintenance instruction shall be provided consecutively. Handouts shall be submitted to the Owner with at least one week's notice prior to the training sessions. E. All instruction sessions shall be video taped with portable video cameras and tapes supplied by the Contractor. Video taping shall be made by the Contractor under the direction of the Owner with conventional VCR compatible taping equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used) 01730-8 Q 01730-9 TABLE 01730-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS XXXXXXXX WATER TREATMENT PLANT XXXXXXX EQUIPMENT MANUALS SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION OF ITEM VOLUME SECTION VOLUME I PRETREATMENT 11331 Mechanical Bar Screen 1 1 11320 Grit Collection System 1 2 VOLUME II BARDENPHO SYSTEM 11221 Fermentation Mixers (4) 7 '/z HP II 1 11221 1" & 2nd Anoxic Mixers (8) 15 HP II 2 11255 Denite Gate II 3 11375 Carrousel VFD Aerators (2) 100 HP II 4 VOLUME IIA BARDENPHO SYSTEM 11286 Sluice Gates II A 1 11287 Slide and Weir Gates II A 2 11222 Alum Mixer II A 3 11346 Alum Feed System II A 4 11376 Re - Aeration Diffused Aeration Equipment IIA 5 11372 Re — Aeration Centrifugal Blowers IIA 6 VOLUME III CLARIFICATION/SEDIMENTATION 11336 Clarifiers III 1 1_1331 Waste Activated Sludge Pumps III 2 X331 �Yi314 Return Activated Sludge,Pumps� n r-- �, r--- Scum Pumps '0 i HI 3 4 11215 RAS/WAS-Meter Vault Sump Piu s l� ---',% ( �� HI 5 VOLUM, E-IV,SAND FILTERS/EFFLUENT PUMPS' 11365 Sand Filters---/ L/ U La L/ u L1 L`� �" �= = � IV 1 11365 Sand Filter Air Compressor IV 2 11214 Effluent Discharge Pumps IV 3 VOLUME V ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements V 1 16461 Oil Filled Transformers V 2 16720 Fire Alarm System V 3 16800 Generator Switch Gear V 4 VOLUME VI INSTRUMENTATION 13310 Control Panel Wiring Diagrams VI A 1 13320 Allen-Bradley PLC, UPS, and Panel Components VI B 2 13310 Field Instruments VI C 3 13320 PLC Software Documentation VI D 4 VOLUME VH PIPING/VALVES/HVAC 15050 Miscellaneous Valves VII 1 15050 Air Release Valves VII 2 15150 Eccentric Plug and Butterfly Valves VII 3 15770 HVAC VII 4 VOLUME VIII EMERGENCY GENERATOR 16700 Emergency Generator VIII 1 01730-9 TABLE 01730-2 EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT ITEM MVFR PAM= TABLE 01730-2 (Continued) 01730- 10 FACILITY NAME OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE DATA FORM DATE: Page 1 of 2 EQUIPMENT DATA Description: Manufacturer: Model No.: Quantity: Serial Nos.: Contract Specification No.: Service: IWAS Pump, RAS Pump, Clarifier etc ELECTRIC MOTOR DATA Description: Manufacturer: Model No.: Quantity: Serial Nos.: VENDOR DATA Contractor: Address: Phone No.: email: SubContractor: Address: Phone No.: email Vendor: Address: Phone No.: email: Local Representative: Address: Phone No: email: LUBRICATION DATA Item: (Pump Oil,etc) Vendor & Type: (Any SAE 1OW-30 Motor Oil etc) Item: Vendor & Type: Item: Vendor & Type: Item: Vendor & Type: Item: Vendor & Type: Item: I Vendor & Type: TABLE 01730-2 (Continued) 01730- 10 EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT ITEM r-nVFR PArF 01730 - 11 FACILITY NAME OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE DATA FORM DATE: Page 2 of 2 SPARE PARTS DATA List Critical Spare Parts Recommended and/or Provided: WARRANTY DATA Manufacturers Warranty Shop for Parts and Service is: Name: Address: City, State, ZIP Phone No.: email COMMENTS 01730 - 11 m XZX W zcn� F- Lu XZ� X XQ XUX a (: xu �v�j O (L W L I D SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART I — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer's standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Conditions of Contract for the general requirements relating to warranties and bonds. B. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01700 Contract Closeout. C. Specific requirements for warranties for the work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted are included in the individual Sections of Division 2 through 15. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Owner prior to the date for Substantial Completion. If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the work, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties upon request of the Owner. B. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Owner within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor or the Contractor and a Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer; prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner for approval prior to final execution. D. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 15 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal.of special warranties. E. At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, Subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 01740-1 F. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3 -ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -inch by 11 -inch paper. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the Section in which specified and the name of the product or work item. H. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address and telephone number of the installer, supplier and manufacturer. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", the project title or name and the name, address and telephone number of the Contractor. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual 1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. E. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the contract Documents. F. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the 01740-2 products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and Subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.05 MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATIONS A. Where required, the Contractor shall supply evidence, satisfactory to the Owner and Engineer, that the Contractor can obtain manufacturers' certifications as to the Contractor's installation of equipment. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01740-3 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. This Section covers clearing, grubbing, and stripping along the construction sites, complete as specified herein, and disposal of the cleared and grubbed material. The Contractor is expected to visit the sites of the work and determine the extent of the clearing and grubbing necessary for the construction operations. 2. The Contractor shall clear and grub all of the area within the limits of actual construction as required, which includes, but is not limited to, roadways, trenchwork, structures, and open areas. The width of the area to be cleared shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the beginning of any clearing. 3. The Contractor's attention is directed to any Soil Erosion and Sediment Control L) Ordinances in force. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable sections of these ordinances. 4. Clearing, grubbing and stripping at each structure shall be a minimum distance of 10 feet outside the structure periphery. 5. A line locate for any and all utilities is to be conducted prior to clearing and grubbing operations at any of the sites within this project. The owner of the utility or utilities known to be in the vicinity of the work is to be contacted by the Contractor to request a line locate. If lines are not located properly before work begins and the Contractor damages the line in any way, the Contractor shall pay for repair and/or replacement of the utility. Once lines are located, the Contractor is to take care not to damage the existing utilities. Again, if the Contractor damages the line in any way, the Contractor shall pay for repair and/or replacement of the utility. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCES A. Silt fences shall consist of woven or non -woven geotextile fabrics as specified in Section 985 of the MOT Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction. 02100- 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. The surface of the ground, for the area to be cleared and grubbed shall be completely cleared of all timber, brush, stumps, roots, grass, weeds, rubbish, and all other objectionable obstructions resting on, or protruding through, the surface of the ground. However, those trees which are designated by the Engineer shall be preserved as hereinafter specified. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent damage to existing structures and installations, and to those under construction, so as to provide for the safety of employees and others. 3.02 GRUBBING A. Grubbing shall consist of the complete removal of all stumps, roots larger than '/2 -inch in diameter, matted roots, brush, timber, logs, and any other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, resting on, under or protruding through the surface of the ground to a depth of 2 feet below the excavated surface under roadways, structures and embankments, and 1 foot below all other areas requiring clearing and grubbing. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of such objects, shall be refilled with suitable materials and compacted to a density conforming to the surrounding ground surface. 3.03 STRIPPING A. For open areas for sodding or seeding, grass and roots shall be stripped to a depth of 4 inches. B. Stripped material suitable for topsoil shall be stockpiled and shall be protected until it is replaced. Any topsoil remaining after all work is in place, shall be disposed of by the Contractor unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 3.04 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall dispose of all material and debris from the clearing and grubbing operation by hauling such material and debris away to an approved landfill. No burning shall be allowed on-site. The cost of disposal (including hauling and obtaining the necessary permits) of cleared and grubbed material and debris shall be considered an obligation of the Contractor; the cost of which shall be included in the contract sum. The contractor shall not allow any debris to accumulate on-site for more than 48 hours and shall remove such debris when requested by the Owner's Representative. 02100-2 3.05 PRESERVATION OR REMOVAL OF TREES A. Trees outside the limits of construction shall be carefully protected from damage. The Contractor shall erect such barricades, guards, and enclosures as may be considered necessary for him for the protection of the trees during all construction operations, including damage from piled material, contact with equipment, subsurface damage to roots, soil contamination, and general construction operations. Care shall be taken to prevent damage not only to the tree trunk, but also the root system and overhanging branches and limbs. B. If found necessary, removal or trimming of trees within the limits of construction shall be in accordance with applicable local ordinances. The Contractor shall apply for and pay for all costs associated with the permitting of and removal of trees from the proposed developed area. The Contractor is required to repair or replace trees damaged or removed during construction. C. Cutting of branches, limbs, and roots, when deemed necessary, shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All cutting shall be smoothly and neatly done without splitting or crushing. Cut or injured portions shall be neatly trimmed and covered with an application of grafting wax or tree healing paint. Such cutting or repairing shall be performed by a qualified tree surgeon. END OF SECTION 02100-3 SECTION 02140 DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work to be performed under this section shall include the design and installation of a temporary dewatering system until completion of construction to -remove storm and subsurface waters from structure or utility trench excavations as required. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The temporary dewatering system shall be designed by a firm who regularly engages in the design of dewatering systems and who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the design of such dewatering systems. The firm shall have a successful record of operation for a minimum of five (5) years prior to bid date. The design firm shall supply the Engineer with previous installation details of at least three (3) successful dewatering operations of a similar nature in the State of Florida. B. In lieu of experience, the Contractor shall provide a performance and warranty bond for 1.0 times the total installed cost of the temporary dewatering system. This bond shall be executed prior to award and/or contract execution. C. Standards: The dewatering of any excavation areas and the disposal of water during construction shall be in strict accordance with all local and state government rules and regulations. If a consumptive use permit is required by SJRWMD, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining said permit. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed methods of construction, including dewatering, excavation, bedding, filling, compaction and backfilling for the various portions of the Work. Review shall be for method only. The Contractor shall remain responsible to the adequacy and safety of the methods. B. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340, and shall include the following: 1. Design Notes and Drawings. 2. Descriptive literature of the temporary dewatering system. 3. Layout of all piping involved. 02140- 1 4. Observation well locations. 1.04 CRITERIA A. The dewatering system shall be developed to the point that is capable of dewatering the site surrounding all structures or utility trenches as shown on the Drawings. Each wellpoint system shall be capable of dewatering and maintaining groundwater levels at the respective excavations. Observation wells shall be constructed for the purpose of testing each system. B. Observation Wells: 1. Prior to excavation, the Contractor shall install groundwater observation wells at locations to be approved by the Engineer adjacent to structures under construction for the purpose of measuring water levels during excavations. The observation well shall consist of screen, casing and cap of approved size and material of construction. The observation well shall be placed in a 2 1/2 -inch bore hole which shall be carried to an elevation at least to final bottom grade of structure. The annular space surrounding the intake point and the riser pipe shall be sealed in such a way as to prevent infiltration from surface water. The observation well shall be developed in such a manner as to ensure proper indication of subsurface water levels adjacent to the well. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the observation wells and for observing and recording the elevation of groundwater in them until adjacent structure or utilities are completed and backfilled. Each observation well shall be observed and recorded daily. Measurements shall be supplied daily to the Engineer. The Engineer may require that the observation wells reflect true groundwater levels by adding water to the well, recording the drop in the level from the time the water was added. Any plugged observation well shall be redeveloped if necessary to indicate true groundwater levels. 3. Observation wells shall be abandoned when directed by the Engineer, and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 1.05 PUMPING AND DRAINAGE A. The Contractor shall at all times during construction provide and maintain proper equipment and facilities to remove all water entering excavations, and shall keep such excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation condition until the fills, structures or pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for review, a plan for dewatering systems prior to commencing work. The dewatering system installed shall be 02140-2 in conformity with overall construction plan, and certification of this shall be provided by a Geotechnical Engineer. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be required to monitor the performance of the dewatering systems during the progress of the work and require such modifications as may be required to assure that the systems are performing satisfactorily. B. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at proposed bottom of excavation and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures. As a minimum, the water level shall be two (2) feet below the trench bottom or excavation. Well or sump installations shall be constructed with proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the surrounding ground. C. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and pumped from the excavation to maintain a bottom free from standing water. D. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions or prevent uplift of any structure during construction. E. The conveying of water in open ditches or trenches will not be allowed. Permission to use any storm sewers or drains that have adequate capacity for water disposal purposes \\ shall be obtained from the Owner. No flooding of streets, driveways, or private property L) will be permitted. Any requirements and costs for such use shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. However, the Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow in the drainage facilities, and the Contractor shall leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean as originally found. Any damage to facilities shall be repaired or restored as directed by the Engineer or the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Flotation shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages which may result from failure of this system. G. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the Contractor and the Engineer agree that the system is no longer required; the material and equipment constituting the system, shall be removed by the Contractor. H. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to preclude the accidental discharge of fuel, oil, etc. in order to prevent adverse effects on groundwater or receiving water quality. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 02140-3 2.01 GENERAL A. The equipment specified herein shall be standard dewatering equipment of proven ability as designed, manufactured, and installed by firms having experience in the design and production of such equipment. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods. B. The Contractor shall engage a Geotechnical Engineer registered in the State of Florida, to design the temporary dewatering system for all structures. The Contractor shall submit a conceptual plan for the dewatering system prior to commencing work. The dewatering system installed shall be in conformity with the overall construction plan, and certification of this shall be provided by the Geotechnical Engineer. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be required to monitor the performance of the dewatering system at the Contractor's expense during the progress of the work and require such modifications as may be required to assure that the systems will perform satisfactorily. Dewatering system shall be designed in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed structures or utilities and to preserve the integrity of any adjacent structures. C. Dewatering equipment shall be electrically driven in lieu of diesel driven to avoid possible problems with spillage of fuel. Equipment shall have a noise limit of 67 dB at 15 feet from the equipment. No equipment is to be located within 50 feet of a residential unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Dewatering: The Contractor shall install a temporary dewatering system for the removal of subsurface water encountered during construction of the proposed structures or utilities. B. CUP Permits: If pumping requirements exceed certain limits, the Contractor shall pay for and obtain a CUP from the water management district (SJRWMD) for such pumped volumes. 3.02 PROTECTION AND SITE CLEAN-UP A. At all times during the progress of the work the Contractor shall use all reasonable precautions to prevent either tampering with the wellpoints (if used) or the entrance of foreign material into the landfill's storm drain system. B. Immediately upon completion of the dewatering operations, the Contractor shall remove all of his equipment, materials, and supplies from the site of the work, remove all surplus materials and debris, fill in al] holes or excavations, and grade the site to elevations of the 02140-4 r LJ surface levels which existed before the work started. The site shall be thoroughly cleaned and graded as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 02140-5 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered under this section shall consist of excavating, placement, compaction and final shaping of soil materials within the limits of construction. B. Also included in this section is the preparation of subgrade, placement, compaction and final shaping of all embankments, dikes, berms or other earthwork fill sections as noted. All earthwork operations either fill or excavation shall conform to the alignments, sections and elevations as shown on the Drawings and as specified here in. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Excavation and shoring drawings for worker protection do not require submittal, but shall be in accordance with the General Conditions and other applicable specifications. B. Submit six (6) copies of a report from a testing laboratory verifying that the material conforms to the gradation specified. 1.03 TESTING FOR COMPACTION A. Determine the density of soil in place in accordance with the sand cone method, ASTM D1556, or rubber balloon method, ASTM D 2167. B. Determine the laboratory moisture -density relations and maximum density by ASTM D 1557 or D 2049. C. Sample fill materials by ASTM D 75. D. Compaction shall be deemed to comply with the specifications when no more than one test of any three consecutive tests falls below the specified relative compaction. The one test shall be no more than three percentage points below the specified compaction. The Contractor shall pay the costs of any retesting of work not conforming to the specifications. E. "Relative compaction" is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the in-place density to the laboratory maximum density. F. Density tests will be made for determination of specified compaction by an independent 0- testing laboratory provided by the Owner as specified in Section 01410. Tests will be 02200-1 made in locations reviewed by the Engineer, but spaced not more than 50 feet apart and a minimum of three tests per compaction area in each vertical lift. If any tests are unsatisfactory, re -excavate and re -compact the fill or backfill until the desired compaction is obtained. Additional compaction tests will be taken to each side of an unsatisfactory test at locations reviewed by the Engineer to determine the extent of re -excavation and re -compaction necessary. G. Contractor will pay for each failed compaction test and for each additional test taken to determine extent of re -excavation and re -compaction as described previously. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fill material shall be excavated native material or borrow material that conforms to the specified criteria. B. Fill material shall be classified as A-1, A-3 or A-2-4 per ASTM D 3282 or shall consist of clean, fine to medium sand, contain less than 1.0 percent by weight of organic matter (peat, humus, leaves, and carbon compounds), and conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size (Square Openings) No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 10 (2.00 mm) No. 40 (0.420 mm) No. 60 (0.250 mm) No. 100 (0.149 mm) No. 200 (0.074 mm) 2.02 WATER FOR COMPACTION Weight Percent Passing Square Mesh Sleeves 95 to 100 90 to 100 70 to 95 40 to 80 5 to 40 less than 10 A. Water shall be free of acid, alkali, or organic materials and shall have a pH of 7.0 to 9.0. The Contractor shall furnish all water needed for earthwork. The Contractor shall provide temporary piping, valves, and trucks to convey water from the source to the point of use along with any meters required if the water is taken from a public water system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 02200-2 3.01 EXCAVATION A. The Contractor shall perform all earthwork operations necessary to accomplish the construction indicated on the Drawings. Excavation shall be unclassified regardless of material encountered. All suitable excavated material, not required for fill or embankment, shall be deposited on the project site as directed by the Owner. The Contractor shall do all shoring necessary to perform and protect any excavation and as necessary for the safety of the workers and any existing facility. Wherever excavations are made below the grades indicated on the Drawings, approved material shall be used to restore the area to the proper grade and shall be compacted in accordance with these Specifications. B. In the event materials containing toxic substances, oil products or other pollutants are encountered during excavation, immediately cease operations and notify the Engineer. Proceed with the excavation only when so directed by the Engineer, using additional procedures and precautions, if any, as necessary to contain and dispose of the contaminated material in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations. 3.02 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. Where muck, rock, clay or other unsuitable material is encountered within the limits of construction the Contractor shall excavate such material as directed by the Engineer and backfill the excavated area with suitable material. Backfill material shall be compacted and shaped to conform to the required section. Muck shall be disposed of as designated by the Owner. 3.03 EMBANKMENT A. Embankment work shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting the specified materials required for fill or embankment as shown on the Drawings. The material used for embankment shall consist of sand, gravel, or a mixture thereof, and/or other suitable material approved by the Owner. If the materials are of a variable quality, the Contractor shall plan his operation so that the upper 2 feet of the embankment is constructed of selected materials as approved and directed by the Owner. B. Prior to placing any embankment, the surface to receive the embankment shall be cleared, plowed or scarified. Fill or embankment shall be placed, shaped, and compacted in successive uniform layers of not more than 8 inches in thickness, measured loose. 02200-3 3.04 BACKFILL A. All backfill material shall be clean and free of lumber, trash, or other debris. Backfill material shall be placed in 8 -inch layers, measured loose, and then shall be thoroughly compacted. Prior to placing backfill, the areas around structures upon which the backfill is to be placed shall be cleaned of all trash and debris. Sheeting and bracing, if required, shall be left in place. Any sheeting and bracing allowed to be left in place shall be cut off a minimum of 2.5 feet below finished grade and the exact horizontal and vertical location shall be noted on Contractor's "as -built" drawings. 3.05 EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. During excavation, place the excavated material only within the project area. Do not obstruct roadways, streets, sidewalks or other pedestrian pathways. Conform to federal, state, and local codes governing the safe loading of trenches with excavated material. Separate suitable and unsuitable material. 3.06 DRAINAGE, EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION A. Maintain all existing drainage patterns and control stormwater runoff from the construction area to prevent erosion, sedimentation, or flooding due to the construction. Comply with all provisions of Section 02276, Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 3.07 FINISH GRADING A. Finish grading shall consist of the preparation, trimming, and shaping to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, of all areas, outside the paved areas, in such a manner to receive grassing, sod, and/or plantings without additional work. B. Round tops of banks to circular curves to not less than a 6 foot radius. Neatly and smoothly trim rounded surfaces. Shape the surface of earthwork and trenches to conform to lines, grades, and cross sections as shown on the Drawings, within 1/10 of a foot. C. Where construction operations disturb areas outside the immediate limits of construction, re -grade those areas to the typical cross-section that existed prior to construction. 3.08 PROOF ROLLING A. Proof rolling, where required or directed, shall be conducted as follows: 02200-4 1. After initial stripping, proof rolling shall be conducted to encompass any proposed building pad areas, parking lot areas, street areas or other areas of concern. 2. Proof rolling equipment shall consist of a self-propelled vibrating roller that imparts a minimum dynamic drum force of 36,000 pounds. 3. Each section of subgrade shall be subjected to overlapping coverage of the compactor as it operates at full vibrational frequency and at a travel speed of not more than 2 feet per second. 4. Each area shall receive a minimum of 5 overlapping passes. 5. Should yielding/unstable materials be encountered during proof rolling operations, they should be removed and replaced with clean sand that is compacted to at least 98 percent of the material's ASTM D-1557 (AASHTO T 180) maximum dry density. 6. After proof rolling operations are complete and prior to compaction and replacement of the initial fill, shape, level, and compact all areas disturbed or rutted during the proof rolling operation. B. Proof rolling operation shall be monitored by a Geotechnical Engineer to evaluate the potential for or necessity of additional earthwork operations. C. The Owner, upon recommendation of the Geotechnical Engineer, may modify the above test procedure as necessary. 3.09 COMPACTION A. Areas to be compacted shall be moistened and the soil moisture content shall be maintained within ±1% of optimum moisture during compaction operation. B. Conduct compaction by either rolling, tamping, or any other method approved by the Owner in order to obtain the desired density. C. The Owner shall inspect all compacted areas prior to subsequent construction operations to ensure that satisfactory compaction has been obtained. D. All embankments, including backfill and embankment adjacent to structures, shall be compacted to a density of not less than 98 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557 (AASHTO T 180). E. Fill areas under streets, paved areas, parking lots, etc. shall be compacted to 95% density per ASTM D 1557 at 2 feet below final grade. 02200-5 F. General fill areas not supporting structures and/or paved areas shall be compacted to 90% maximum density per ASTM D 1557. 3.10 TESTING A. All testing as described below shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory retained by the Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all construction operations to allow for adequate testing. B. Field density tests will be made in each vertical layer, and using the following approximate spacing: 1. Under structures, pavements, and slabs, one test per 2,500 square feet with at least two tests per structure or area. 2. In trenches, one test every 100 feet in continuous trenches under pavements or future pavements plus one test at each intersection or one test every 300 feet in continuous trenches not under pavements, plus one test at each pavement or driveway crossing. 3. In all other areas, one test per each 7,500 square feet. C. If any field density tests indicate material below the specified relative density, the L) Contractor shall re -compact or re -excavate, re -backfill and re -compact the area until the specific density is obtained. A minimum of two field density tests per re - compacted and/or re -excavated area will be performed to verify compliance with the specifications. 3.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGED PROPERTY A. Existing curbs, walks, streets, poles, paving, survey monuments and other features, which are to remain, shall be fully protected by the Contractor. Any damaged items shall be removed and restored to their original condition at the Contractor's expense. 3.12 ACCEPTANCE A. After the specified density tests have been successfully completed, the Owner may cross section the excavation and/or fill area to verify that the excavation or fill area conforms to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings and to verify quantities of material. The Contractor shall correct deviations from line and grade in excess of the tolerances specified at no expense to the Owner. END OF SECTION 02200-6 SECTION 02220 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work included under this Section consists of dewatering, excavating, trenching, sheeting/shoring, grading, backfilling, and compacting those soil materials required under, adjacent, and for the construction of buildings, structures, piping, ditches, utilities, roads, and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Definitions: 1. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a specific material. 2. Optimum Moisture Content: The optimum moisture content shall be determined by ASTM D 1557 specified to determine the maximum dry density for relative compaction. Field moisture content shall be determined on the basis of the fraction passing the 3/4 -inch sieve. 3. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard natural substance which requires the use of explosives and/or special impact tools such as jack hammers, sledges, chisels or similar devices specifically designed for use in cutting or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench excavating machinery. 4. Suitable: Suitable materials for fills shall be non -cohesive, non -plastic granular local sand which shall be free from vegetation, organic material, marl, silt or muck. The Contractor shall furnish all additional fill material required. 5. Unsuitable: Unsuitable materials are highly organic soil (peat or muck) classified as A-8 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M 145. C. Plan For Earthwork: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, the conformation of the ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantities of materials to be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract according to the General Conditions. 02220- 1 2. Prior to commencing the excavation, the Contractor shall submit a plan of his proposed operations to the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall reflect the equipment and methods to be employed in the excavation. Prices established in the Proposal for the work to be done will reflect all costs pertaining to the work. No claims for extras based on substrata or groundwater table conditions will be allowed. D. Trench Safety Act: The Contractor shall comply with all of the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Chapter 90-96, CS/CB 2626, laws of Florida). The Contractor shall acknowledge that included in various items of his bid proposal and in the total bid price are costs for complying with the provisions of the Act. Additionally, the Contractor is required to break out the costs for complying with the Florida Trench Safety Act. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUEST IN THIS SECTION SHALL RESULT IN THE BID BEING DECLARED NON-RESPONSIVE. Failure to comply with the provisions of the Act shall result in a per diem penalty of $1,000 per day that the work is out of compliance. 1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. All publications and standard specifications referred to herein are the latest or current issue of that publication or specification as of the specification date. 1.03 1QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A Testing Laboratory employed by the Owner will make such tests as are deemed advisable. The Contractor shall schedule his work so as to permit reasonable time for testing before placing succeeding lifts and shall keep the laboratory informed of his progress. Costs for all testing shall be paid by the Owner. However, any and all tests which have to be repeated because of the failure of the tested material to meet specification shall be paid for by the Contractor and the cost of any tests shall be deducted from payments due the Contractor. B. Field Engineering: Provide the services of a Professional Land Surveyor registered in the State ofFlorida to establish all vertical and horizontal controls required for layout of the work and for preparation of a certified survey showing recorded finish elevations and dimensions upon completion of site preparation and earthwork. 1.04 FEDERAL AND STATE REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All trench excavations which exceed 5 feet in depth shall comply with the applicable trench safety standards as stated in the OSHA excavation safety standards 29 CFR S.1926.650 Subpart P as regulated and administered by the Florida Department of Labor and Employment Security as the "Florida Trench Safety Act." 02220-2 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions encountered during construction warrant a change in the footing elevation, or in the depth of removal of unsuitable material from that indicated in the soils report, an adjustment will be made in the contract price, as provided in the General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. Provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. C. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. D. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied facilities. E. The use of explosives is not permitted. F. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by vibration, settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 1.06 PRE -CONSTRUCTION SURVEY A. Prior to commencing excavation, backfill or dewatering, the Owner and Contractor shall jointly conduct a survey of those existing structures which, in the opinion of the Engineer, may be subject to settlement or distress resulting from excavation or dewatering operations. B. The Contractor shall monitor the structures surveyed to ascertain evidence of settlement or distress. If settlement or distress becomes evident the Contractor shall be required to repair the structures to the previous condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Costs shall be paid by the Contractor. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer for review the proposed methods of construction, including dewatering, excavation, bedding, filling, compaction and backfilling for the various portions of the work. Review shall be for method only. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the adequacy and safety of the methods. B. Certifications: Submit copies of a certification, from an independent testing laboratory that the material to be used for all backfills, fills, and structural backfills meets the specified criteria. 02220-3 A PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: All fill material from on and off-site sources shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All fill material shall be unfrozen and free of organic material, trash, or other objectionable material. Excess or unsuitable material as designated by the Engineer shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor. B. Soil Materials: Satisfactory soil materials are ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, SW and SP. Unsatisfactory soil materials are ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH and PT. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 in. sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. E. Common Fill Material: Common fill shall be sand not containing stones, rock, concrete or other rubble larger than 2 inches in diameter. It shall have physical properties which allow it to be easily spread and compacted. 2. The Contractor shall utilize as much excavated material as possible for reuse in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications or as directed by the Engineer. 3. The Engineer shall direct the Contractor on the type of material allowed in certain sections of the earthwork operations. 02220-4 F. Structural Fill: Structural fill shall be well graded sand to gravelly sand having the following gradation: U.S. Sieve Size 1 - inch No. 4 No. 40 No. 100 No. 200 Percent Passing By Weitzht 100 75-100 15-80 0-30 0-10 G. Class I Soils: Class I soils are not defined in ASTM D2487. Class I Soils shall be manufactured angular, granular material, 1/4 to 1/2 inches (6 to 12 mm) in size, including materials having significance such as crushed stone or rock, broken coral, crushed slag, cinders, or crushed shells. Crushed stone shall consist of clean mineral aggregate free from clay, loam or organic matter, conforming with ASTM C33 stone size No. 8 and with particle size limits as follows: U.S. Sieve Size 1/2 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 H. Class II Soils: Percent Passing By Weight 100 85-100 10-30 0-10 0-5 Class II soils shall be in accordance with ASTM D2487, less than 5 percent pass No. 200 sieve as follows: 2 GW: Well -graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines. Fifty (50) percent or more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean. 3. GP: Poorly graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines. Fifty (50) percent or more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. Clean. 4. SW: Clean, well -graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines. More than fifty (50) percent passes No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. 5. SP: Clean, poorly graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines. More than fifty (50) percent passes No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. 1. Coarse Sand: Sand shall consist of clean mineral aggregate with particle size limits as follows: 02220-5 U.S. Sieve Size No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 Percent Passing By Weight 95-100 85-100 65-97 25-60 5-35 0-7 J. Other Material: All other material, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 02100. 3.02 SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING A. Furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting, shoring, and bracing as required to support the sides of excavations, to prevent movement which could in any way diminish the width of the excavation below that necessary for proper construction, and to protect adjacent structures, and to protect workers from hazardous conditions or other damage. Such support shall consist of braced steel sheet piling, braced wood lagging and soldier beams or other approved methods. If the Owner is of the opinion that sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he may order additional supports be installed at the expense of the Contractor, and compliance with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall be taken to prevent voids beside the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and compacted. Where soil cannot be properly compacted to fill a void, lean concrete shall be used as backfill at no additional expense to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall construct sheeting outside the neat lines of the foundation unless deemed desired otherwise for his method of operation. Sheeting shall be plumb and securely braced and tied in position. Sheeting and bracing shall withstand all pressure to which the structure or trench will be subjected. Any deformation shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense so as to provide the necessary clearances and dimensions. C. Where sheeting and bracing is required to support the sides of excavations for structures, the Contractor shall engage a Professional Geotechnical Engineer, registered in the State of Florida, to design the sheeting and bracing. The sheeting and bracing installed shall conform with the design, and certification of this shall be provided by the Professional Geotechnical Engineer. 02220-6 D. The installation of sheeting, particularly by driving or vibrating, may cause distress to existing structures. The Contractor shall evaluate the potential for such distress and, if necessary, take all precautions to prevent distress of existing structures because of sheeting installation. E. The Contractor shall leave in place to be embedded in the backfill, all sheeting and bracing not shown on the Drawings but which the Owner directs him in writing to leave in place at any time during the progress of the work for the purpose of preventing injury to structures, utilities, or property, whether public or private. F. Steel or wood sheeting may be used at the Contractor's option. Sheeting shall be of adequate strength for the purpose intended. Where conditions permit, steel drag shields or trench boxes may be used. Voids left by the advancement of the shield shall be carefully backfilled and compacted in accordance with trench backfill requirements. G. Steel sheeting above the crown elevation of pipe may be completely removed when sufficient backfill has been placed to prevent damage to the work and/or existing structures. Care shall be exercised to prevent the opening of voids during the extraction process. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all timber sheeting shall be cut off thirty (30) inches below grade and left in place, with proper bracing to provide lateral support. All sheeting placed below the crown elevation of pipe shall be cut off above the pipe crown elevations and left in place. H. All sheeting and bracing not left in place shall be carefully removed in such manner as not to endanger the construction, or other structures, utilities, or property. All voids left or caused by withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand by ramming with tools especially adapted for that purpose, or otherwise directed by the Owner. I. The right of the Owner to order sheeting and bracing left in place shall not be construed as creating any obligation on his part to issue such orders, and his failure to exercise his right to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages to persons or property occurring from or upon the work occasioned by negligence or otherwise, growing out of a failure on the part of the Contractor to leave in place sufficient sheeting and bracing to prevent any caving or moving of the ground. 3.03 PUMPING AND DRAINAGE A. See dewatering requirements of Section 02140. B. All water pumped or drained from the excavated area shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without undue interference with other work, without damage to surrounding property, and in accordance with pertinent rules and regulations. C. No construction, including pipe laying, shall be allowed in water. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 12 inches below excavation. No water shall be allowed to come into 02220-7 contact with masonry or concrete within 24 hours after being placed. The Contractor shall constantly guard against damage due to water and take full responsibility for all damage resulting from his failure to do so. D. The Contractor will be required at his expense to excavate below grade and refill with approved fill material if the Owner determines that adequate drainage has not been provided. 3.04 EXCAVATION A. Excavating for Structures and Utilities: Excavation work shall be performed in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions being taken against all hazards. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete forms. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut for extended footings. 2. Excavation shall be made to such dimensions as will give suitable room for bracing and supporting, for pumping and draining, for installing the pipelines, and for all other work required. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 ft. a) Excavation for precast or prefabricated structures shall be carried to an elevation two (2) feet lower than the proposed outside bottom of the structure to provide space for the structural backfill material. b) Excavation for structures constructed or cast -in-place in dewatered excavations shall be carried down to the bottom of the structure where dewatering methods are such that a dry excavation bottom is exposed and the naturally occurring material at this elevation leveled and left ready to receive construction. Material disturbed below the founding elevation in dewatered excavations shall be replaced with Class B concrete. 3. Immediately document the location, elevation, size, material type and function of all new subsurface installations, and utilities encountered during the course of construction. 4. Excavation equipment operators and other concerned parties shall be familiar with subsurface obstructions as shown on the Drawings and should anticipate the encounter of unknown obstructions during the course of the work. 5. Encounters with subsurface obstructions shall be hand excavated. 6. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose, "quick" or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result of 02220-8 inadequate dewatering or other construction methods, shall be removed and replaced by crushed stone as required by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. 7. The bottom of excavations shall be rendered firm and dry before placing any structure or pipe. Excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. The bedding schedule for pipes shall be as shown in Table 02220-A. Excavated material shall be stockpiled in such a manner as to prevent nuisance conditions. Surface drainage shall not be hindered. 9. All structure and pipe locations and elevations as required herein must be permanently documented by the Contractor, on the Record Drawings prior to the Engineer's approval of the Application for Payment for that work. 10. Excavated material shall be stockpiled in such a manner as to prevent nuisance conditions. Surface drainage shall not be hindered. No excavated material or other construction material shall be placed within thirty (30) feet of the edge of pavement of any public road. 02220-9 TABLE 02220-A COMPACTION AND BACKFILL SCHEDULE Area Beneath structures, foundations, slabs, and pavements. (minimum 2 -foot depth) Around structures, foundations and slabs (minimum 2 -foot spacing) From cleared existing surface to subgrade for paved and gravel roadway surfaces Disturbed area require- ing seeding and mulch- ing 3.05 UNDERCUT FOR STRUCTURES Material Compaction Structural Fill 8 -inch lifts, compacted (Para. 2.01 F) to 98% of the soil's modified Proctor maximum dry density. Fill should not be placed over any in-place soils until those layers have been compacted to 95% of the soil's modified Proctor maximum dry density. Structural Fill 8 -inch lifts, compacted (Para. 2.01 F) to 98% of the soil's modified Proctor maximum dry density. Use light rubber -tired or vibratory plate compactors. Common Fill 12 -inch lifts, compacted (Para 2.01 E) to 98% of the soil's modified Proctor maximum dry density. Topsoil See Section 02920 A. If the bottom of any excavation is below that shown on the Drawings or specified because of Contractor error, convenience, or unsuitable subgrade due to the Contractor's excavation methods, he shall refill to normal grade with fill at his own cost. Fill material and compaction method shall be as directed by the Engineer. 02220- 10 3.06 STABILIZATION A. Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm, dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; shall be free from mud and muck; and shall be sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact. B. Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms which are otherwise solid, but which becomes mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with one or more layers of crushed rock or gravel. Not more than 1/2 inch depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms when the pipe bedding material is placed thereon. The finished elevation of stabilized subgrades for concrete structures shall not be above subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings. C. All stabilization work shall be performed by and at the expense of the Contractor. 3.07 FILL AND COMPACTION A. Materials: 1. To the maximum extent available, excess earth obtained from structure and trench excavation shall be used for the construction of fills and embankments. 2. Materials used as backfill shall be free from rocks or stones larger than 2 inches in their greatest dimension; brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic or other deleterious materials; and must be acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shall not be done except by permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials be in any backfill, fill or embankment. B. Placement and Compaction: Backfill materials shall be placed in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 8 inches in uncompacted thickness. Material deposited in piles or windrows by excavating and hauling equipment shall be spread and leveled before compaction. 2. Each layer of material being compacted shall have the best practicable uniform moisture content to ensure satisfactory compaction. The Contractor will be required to add water and harrow, disc, blade, or otherwise work the material in each layer to ensure uniform moisture content and adequate compaction. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling or other method acceptable to the Engineer to 98 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content as determined by Modified Proctor Method, ASTM D1557, latest (AASHTO T180). 02220- 11 Whenever a trench passes through a backfill or embankment, material shall be placed and compacted to an elevation 12 inches above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. C. Compact and backfill excavations and construct embankments for structures according to the schedule listed in Table 02220-A. Backfill schedule for pipes is listed in Table 02220-B. D. Pipe shall be laid in open trenches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. E. Excavations shall be backfilled to the original grade or as indicated on the Drawings. Deviation from this grade because of settling shall be corrected. Backfill operation shall be performed to comply with all rules and regulations and in such a manner that it does not create a nuisance or safety hazard. F. Embankments shall be constructed true to lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans or ordered by the Owner. Embankments shall be placed in successive layers of not more than 8 inches in thickness, loose measure, for the full width of the embankment. As far as practicable, traffic over the work during the construction phase shall be distributed so as to cover the maximum surface area of each layer. G. If the Contractor requests approval to backfill material utilizing lifts and/or methods other than those specified herein, such request shall be in writing to the Engineer. Approval will be considered only after the Contractor has performed tests, at the Contractor's expense, to identify the material used and density achieved throughout the backfill area utilizing the method of backfill requested. The Engineer's approval will be in writing. H. Foundation Preparation 1. The existing ground beneath building foundations and equipment base slabs and slabs on grade shall be removed and the area proof -rolled. Proof -rolling the buildings and containment areas should consist of at least 10 passes of a self- propelled vibrator compactor capable of delivering a minimum impact force of 30,000 to 35,000 pounds per drum to the soils. Each pass should overlap the preceding pass by 30 percent to insure complete coverage. Backfilled areas shall be compacted in 8 -inch layers to a density of not less than 98 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D 1557 latest (AASHTO T 108) for a depth of not less than 2 -feet below the bottom of the foundations or concrete slabs. Any unsuitable foundation material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. 2. Slabs On Grade: Subgrades for concrete slabs shall be removed, backfilled, and compacted to the required grade. The top 2 -feet of concrete slab subgrade in cut sections and all fill material shall be compacted in 8 -inch layers to a density of not 02220- 12 less than 98 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557, latest (AASHTO T180). 3.08 TRENCH EXCAVATION (SEE FIGURE 02220-1) A. The Contractor shall not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work. Four hundred (400) feet shall be the maximum length of open trench on any line under construction. All trench excavation shall be open cut from the surface. 1. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover: The alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline shall be fixed and determined from offset stakes. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and the maximum joint deflection used in connection therewith shall be in conformity with requirements of the section covering installation of pipe. 2. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the Contract Drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over the top of the pipe of 42 inches where in paved or graded streets where surface grades are definitely established and 36 inches in other locations. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves or to provide necessary clearance beneath existing pipes conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or pavement surface elevation. B. Limiting Trench Widths: 1. Stipulated minimum sidewall clearances are not minimum average clearances but are minimum clear distances which will be required. 2. Cutting trench banks on slopes to reduce earth load to prevent sliding and caving will be permitted only in areas where the increased trench width will not interface with surface features or encroach on right-of-way limits. Slopes shall not extend lower than one foot above the top of the pipe. 3. Trenches shall be excavated to a width which will provide adequate working space and sidewall clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and embedment. However, minimum permissible sidewall clearances between the installed pipe and each trench wall, expressed in inches, shall be as follows: Pipe Size Minimum Sidewall Clearance 02220- 13 60 24 54 21 48 19 36 or smaller 12 C. Mechanical Excavation: 1. The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, and other existing property, utilities, or structures above or below ground. In all such locations, hand excavating methods shall be used. 2. Mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of the type, design, and construction, and shall be so operated, that the rough trench excavation bottom elevation can be controlled, that uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an elevation one foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench, and that trench alignment is such that pipe when accurately laid to specified alignment will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between the pipe and sidewalls of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance will not be permitted. D. Pavement Cutting: Cuts in concrete pavement, asphalt pavement, and asphalt base pavements shall be no larger than necessary to provide adequate working space for proper installation of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting shall be started with an asphalt or concrete saw in a manner which will provide a clean groove for the full depth of pavement along each side of the trench and along the perimeter of cuts for structures. 2. Asphalt pavement and asphalt base pavement over trenches excavated for pipelines shall be removed so that a shoulder not less than 6 inches in width at any point is left between the cut edge of the pavement and the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be greater than at the top and no undercutting will be permitted. Pavement cuts shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines which, unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the centerline of the trench. 3. Pavement removed for connections to existing lines or structures shall not be greater than necessary for the installation as determined by the Engineer. E. Artificial Foundations in Trenches: Whenever so ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate to such depth below grade as the Engineer may direct and the trench bottom shall be brought to grade with such material as the Engineer may order installed. All piling, concrete, or other foundations made necessary by unstable soil shall be installed as directed by the Engineer. Compensation for extra excavation and piling, 02220- 14 concrete, or other foundations, except where provided by contract unit prices, shall be made in accordance with the contract provisions for extra work. F. Bell Holes: Bell holes shall provide adequate clearance for tools and methods used in installing pipe. No part of any bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom, trench walls, or granular embedment when the pipe is jointed. 3.09 TESTS A. As stipulated in the quality control section, all tests required for preliminary review of materials shall be made by an independent testing laboratory supplied by the Owner. Two initial gradation tests shall be made for each type of backfill material and one additional gradation test shall be made for each additional 500 tons of each material by the independent testing laboratory. Moisture -density (Proctor) tests and relative in place density tests on the materials, and all in-place field density tests, shall be made at the expense of the Owner. 3.10 DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE A. Trenches across roadways, driveways, walks, or other trafficways adjacent to drainage ditches or water courses shall not be backfilled prior to completion of backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the trafficway to prevent impounding water after the pipe has been laid. Bridges and other temporary structures required to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. All material deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the line of trench shall be removed immediately after backfilling is completed and the original sections, grades, and contours of ditches or watercourses shall be restored. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary. 3.11 FINAL GRADING A. After other outside work has been finished, and backfilling completed and settled, all areas on the site of the work which are to be graded shall be brought to grade with the tolerance of ± 0.1 feet at the indicated elevations, slopes, and contours where seeding or sodding is not required or, where sodding is required within three (3) inches of finished grade. Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final grading and dressing of slopes, provided the result is uniform and equivalent to hand work. All surfaces shall be graded to secure effective drainage. Unless otherwise shown, a slope of at least one percent shall be provided. B. After grading and where seeding is required, topsoil shall be evenly spread to a minimum depth of six (6) inches. Topsoil shall be from an Engineer approved source and shall be clear of trash, debris and surface vegetation more than six (6) inches in height. See Section 02920, Topsoil. 02220- 15 C. Grading and surfacing shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.12 EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Insofar as needed, suitable excavated materials shall be used in fills and embankments shown on the Drawings. All suitable excess excavated material shall be placed at the stockpile area designated by the Owner or Engineer. B. The Contractor shall segregate different types of excavated materials (i.e. sands, clayey sands) as possible in the stockpile area. All debris, junk, stones, logs, stumps, roots, and other unsuitable materials may be disposed of by the Contractor in the sanitary landfill, but first must be weighed on the truck scales. C. The Contractor should slope and compact the stockpile with a light roller type vehicle to maintain stability. D. The Contractor shall maintain proper soil and erosion control measures. 3.13 SETTLEMENT A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all settlement of backfill, fills, and embankments which may occur within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions. B. The Contractor shall make, or cause to be made, all repairs or replacements made necessary by settlement within 30 days after notice from the Engineer or Owner. 02220- 16 0 � U T 0 N C o V N N m 0 N N N O O o 0 0 0 0 C) - N Q ll' kr� O O i i O O O O i i O O VI VI z mO 3N 3N a O U -C� 7�as WC/� V] C � � _ _ O 0 0 E t In w C3 � E L -a E x x U U U U U U U U U a O O a s Z y O O O O O O O O o� O n k, kr) k N N p Q o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o O o A a cd w a5 C�j cd �y N cn vU vU vU ,In —• In O O O O O O CC ctl ca al 73 ca A U U U U U U U U U U U U c Q W o o 1 1A o � In i In In 'A ro In In cn cn CQ U U U U U U U U U U U U U C CCC (� G v C'� U CG U SCC C� U CCS CO U CCS CC U E—I U z z zC/I z z Z V C). N OC CC s V V V ^UU✓ � O CZ Q U v N N N N bA � O a Qv5Ua.UM, w a3 0. cG = U m 0 N N N O K. 0 N N N O c v to b C's o � ci o f ` U N o a' O cz o C,J � CUC L+ L U CC O N ca ai EY 3 O c W� O �- ON O o- O ON cC > U 3 �❑ U U 3 �❑ O'V >^�oU-0 w a3 W U O Y oon o a as cl, Q o o L" kn Lr) -9- O c"I bn o 0 � NU U U Q) u _ cz CZ N N U .b � bq � • O U U G O Cal E Q U U V] W U U O O O y al In U 'C cd : U +'�+ 'n v� U v o u C u c aj C °' 'O v H O Z Z oo aj U O _ > O O n cz 3 an o CZ Q bA n oC13 ca E U O N O U cci . U —14bb G' z U Y V1 U Q. U V7 'O D N C czYO �. n. Ca a) ¢ U o 0aj ` r te 0 a� a PC7 rn w .. ca S, U Z �- N M � K. 0 N N N O SECTION 02276 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Scope of Work: the work specified in this Section consists of designing, providing, maintaining and removing temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as necessary. All phases of sedimentation and erosion control shall comply with and be subject to the approval of the Florida Environmental Protection. Contractor shall prepare sedimentation and erosion control drawings meeting the requirements for approval by that agency. Contractor is responsible for obtaining the appropriate permits. Upon approval, furnish two copies of the permit and drawings to the Engineer. B. Temporary Facilities: 1. Temporary erosion controls include, but are not limited to, grassing, mulching, netting, watering, and reseeding on-site surfaces and spoil and borrow area surfaces and providing interceptor ditches at ends of berms and at those locations which will ensure that erosion during construction will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as established by the FDEP, water management district, or local regulatory agencies. 2. Temporary sedimentation controls include, but are not limited to, silt dams, traps, barriers, and appurtenances at the foot of sloped surfaces which will ensure that sedimentation pollution will be either eliminated or maintained within acceptable limits as established by the Owner and applicable permit conditions. 3. Contractor is responsible for providing effective temporary erosion and sediment control measures during construction or until final controls become effective. 1.02 APPLICABLE REGULATIONS A. Comply with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations concerning environmental pollution control and abatement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EROSION CONTROL A. Netting - fabricated of material acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer. 02276- 1 2.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Bales - clean, seedfree cereal hay type. B. Netting - fabricated material acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer. C. Filter stone - crushed stone conforming to Florida Department of Transportation specifications. D. Concrete block - hollow, non -load-bearing type. E. Concrete - exterior grade, Class B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EROSION CONTROL A. Minimum procedures for grassing are: 1. Scarify slopes to a depth of not less than six inches and remove large clods, rock, stumps, roots larger than 1/2 -inch in diameter and debris. 2. Sow seed within 24 hours after the ground is scarified with either mechanical seed drills or rotary hand seeders. 3. Apply mulch loosely and to a thickness of between 3/4 -inch and 1 1/2 -inches. 4. Apply netting over mulched areas on sloped surfaces. 5. Roll and water seeded areas in a manner which will encourage sprouting of seeds and growing of grass. Reseed areas which exhibit unsatisfactory growth. Backfill and seed eroded areas. 3.02 SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Install and maintain silt dams, traps, barriers, and appurtenances as necessary to prevent any contaminated water from leaving the project. Hay bales which deteriorate and filter stone which is dislodged shall be replaces. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Should any of the temporary erosion and sediment control measures employed by the Contractor fail to produce results which comply with the requirements of the FDEP, water management district, or others the Contractor shall immediately take whatever steps are necessary to correct the deficiency at his own expense. 02276-2 B. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Owner may issue an Order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to any such Stop Orders shall be made the subject of a claim for extension of time or excess costs or damages by the Contractor unless it is later determined that the Contractor was in compliance. END OF SECTION 02276-3 SECTION 02280 SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide soil treatment for termite control, as herein specified, under the floor slabs on grade. Provide soil treatment around the perimeter of and within hollow cells of concrete block walls of the blower building. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to the requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the work, including preparation of substrate and application. Soil treatment methods shall be in accordance with the National Pest Control Association recommendations. B. Engage a professional pest control company, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution. Pest control company shall be Terminix Int.; Orkin Extermination Co.; Massey Services, Inc.; or Sears Pest Control. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions in accordance with Section 01340. Transmit copy of instructions to the Applicator. 1.04 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Furnish written guarantee certifying that the applied soil poisoning treatment will prevent the infestation of subterranean termites and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during the guarantee period, the Contractor will re -treat the soil and also repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. B. Provide guarantee for a period of one year. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 02280- 1 A. Soil Treatment Solution: 1. Use an emulsible concentrate insecticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. 2. Provide a working solution of Dursban TC, 1.0 percent in water emulsion. 3. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator and if acceptable to local governing authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which soil treatment for termite control is to be applied. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 JOB CONDITIONS A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. B. Penetration: To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with other handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Toxicants shall be applied after placement of compacted fill under slabs. Immediately cover application area with vapor barrier material after treatment. B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows: 1. Under slab -on -grade structures, treat the soil before concrete slabs are poured using either power sprayer or tank sprayers. 2. Apply one gallon of chemical solution per 10 square feet as an over-all treatment under slabs and attached slab areas. 3. Apply four gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet per foot of depth from 02280-2 bottom of footer to grade around structure perimeters. 4. Apply two gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet of concrete block hollow cells after placement of CMU. 5. Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application before beginning concrete placement or other construction activities. 6. Post signs in the areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. 7. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction activities following application 8. Place treatment sticker on permit board after applications are complete END OF SECTION 02280-3 SECTION 02690 DIRECTIONAL DRILLING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work specified in this section consists of furnishing and installing underground utilities using the horizontal directional drilling (HDD) method of installation, also commonly referred to as directional boring or guided horizontal boring. This work shall include all services, equipment, materials, and labor for the complete and proper installation testing, restoration of underground utilities and environmental protection and restoration. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Requirements Horizontal alignment shall be as shown on the Drawings. The pipe shall have a minimum 36 -inch cover. The maximum depth shall be determined based on 18 -inch minimum clearance from the existing or proposed utilities to be crossed or minimum clearances shown on the plans. Bending radius shall not be less than minimum bending radius of the pipe. Compound curvatures may be used, but shall not exceed the maximum deflections as set forth by the pipe manufacturer or AWWA Standards, whichever is more strict. 2. Entry angle shall be 12° - 14° ideal (not to exceed 15°). Exit angle shall be 6° - 12° to facilitate "pull-back." B. Qualifications: Directional drilling contractor (or subcontractor) shall have a minimum of four years experience with similar construction including pipelines of the same or larger diameter and the same or greater lengths. All pipe and appurtenances of similar type and material shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. C. Reference: All work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of ASTM F 1962 (latest edition). This includes planning, design, and execution of the directional drill. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Work Plan: Prior to beginning work, the Contractor must submit to the Engineer a work plan detailing the procedure and schedule to be used to execute the project. The work plan should include a description of all equipment to be used, down -hole tools, a list of personnel and their qualifications and experience, list of subcontractors, a schedule work activity, a safety plan, traffic control plan (if applicable), an environmental protection plan and contingency plans for possible problems. Work plan should be comprehensive, realistic and based on actual working conditions for 02690- 1 this particular project. Plan should document the thoughtful planning required to successfully complete the project. B. Equipment: Contractor will submit specifications on directional drilling equipment to be used to ensure that the equipment will be adequate to complete the project. Equipment shall include but not be limited to: drilling rig, mud system, mud motors (if applicable), down -hole tools, guidance system, rig safety systems. Calibration records for guidance equipment shall be included. Specifications for any drilling fluid additives that Contractor intends to use or might use will be submitted. C. Material: Specifications on material to -be used shall be submitted to Engineer. Material shall include the pipe, fittings and any other item which is to be an installed component of the project. D. Bore Path Layout and Design: The Contractor shall submit a proposed bore path layout in both plan and profile. The proposed path should conform to the drilling equipment and pipe material constraints. The Contractor shall also submit calculations confirming the stresses imposed during installation and in-service (after installation) are within the allowable limits (i.e., allowable pullback force, deflection and buckling) of the selected pipe materials. Calculations shall utilize the equations presented in ASTM F 1962. PART 2 - EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The directional drilling equipment shall consist of a directional drilling rig of sufficient capacity to perform the bore and pull-back the pipe, a drilling fluid mixing, delivery and recovery system of sufficient capacity to successfully complete the crossing, a drilling fluid recycling system to remove solids from the drilling fluid so that the fluid can be reused, a magnetic guidance system to accurately guide boring operations, a vacuum truck of sufficient capacity to handle the drilling fluid volume, trained and competent personnel to operate the system. All equipment shall be in good, safe operating condition with sufficient supplies, materials and spare parts on hand to maintain the system in good working order for the duration of this project. 2.02 DRILLING SYSTEM A. The directional drilling machine shall consist of a hydraulically powered system to rotate, push and pull hollow drill pipe into the ground at a variable angle while delivering a pressurized fluid mixture to a guidable drill (bore) head. The machine shall be anchored to the ground to withstand the pulling, pushing and rotating pressure required to complete the crossing. The hydraulic power system shall be self-contained with sufficient pressure and volume to power drilling operations. Hydraulic system shall be free of leaks. Rig shall have a system to monitor and record maximum pull- back pressure during pull-back operations. The rig shall be grounded during drilling and pull-back operations. There shall be a system to detect electrical current from the 02690-2 drilling string and an audible alarm which automatically sounds when an electrical current is detected. 2.03 PIPE A. HDPE pipe shall have ductile iron pipe outside diameters and be in accordance with AWWA C 906. The dimension ratio shall be verified by the Contractor based on the anticipated pullback force and external loads required for the directional drilling. The minimum working pressure rating of the pipe supplied shall be minimum 150 psi. Pipes shall be marked in accordance with AWWA requirements. Potable water piping will have an impregnated blue stripes the entire length of the pipe and reclaimed water piping shall have similar purple striping. HDPE mechanical joint adapters shall be used at each end of the HDD. HDPE pipe shall be manufactured by Performance Pipe, Polypipe, or approved equal. B. Fusible PVC pipe shall be AWWA C-905, DR 25, with ductile iron pipe size outside diameters. The formulation for extrusion of Fusible PVC pipe shall be compounded to the specific proprietary recipe for fusible pipe, and meet the requirements of PPI TR -2. The pipe shall be extruded with plain ends. The ends shall be square to the pipe and free of any bevel or chamfer. The pipe color shall be in accordance with Section 09905 and come in 20 or 30 foot lengths. The pipe shall be tested at the manufacturing plant in accordance with the AWWA C-905 requirements. The test results shall be summarized and submitted to the Owner for review. The pipe shall be marked in accordance with AWWA C-905 requirements. Fusible PVC pipe shall be manufactured by Underground Solutions or approved equal. Fusible PVC pipe shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Fusible pipe shall be butt fused with standard heat fusion equipment with temperature, pressure, fusion time and cooling time as recommended by the manufacturer. The external bead shall be removed prior to installation. The pipe shall be installed in a manner not to exceed the recommened bending radius or the safe pulling force. 2.04 DRILLING FLUIDS A. Drilling fluids shall consist of a mixture of potable water and gel -forming colloidal material such as bentonite, or a polymersurfactant mixture producing a slurry of custard -like consistency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS A. Responsible representatives of the Contractor and Subcontractor(s) shall be present at all times during the actual crossing operations. A responsible representative as 02690-3 specified herein is defined as a person experienced in the type of work being performed and who has the authority to represent the Contractor in a routine decision making capacity concerning the manner and method of carrying out the work specified herein. B. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) shall have sufficient number of competent workers on the project at all times to ensure the utility placement is made in a timely, satisfactory manner. Adequate personnel for carrying out all phases of the actual crossing operation (where applicable: tunneling system operators, operator for removing spoil material, and laborers as necessary for various related tasks) must be on the job site at the beginning of work. A competent and experienced supervisor representing the Contractor or Subcontractor that is thoroughly familiar with the equipment and type of work to be performed, must be in direct charge and control of the operation at all times. In all cases, the supervisor must be continually present at the project site during the actual crossing operation. 3.02 COORDINATION OF THE WORK A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of starting work. In addition, the actual crossing operation shall not begin until the engineer or his representative is present at the project site and agrees that proper preparations for the crossing have been made. The Engineer's approval for beginning the crossing shall in no way relieve the Contractor from the ultimate responsibility for the satisfactory completion of the work. B. The Contractor and the Engineer shall select a mutually convenient time for crossing operation to begin in order to avoid schedule conflicts. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC A. Erection or installation of appropriate safety and warning devices in accordance with the Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Manual on Traffic Control and Safe Practices shall be completed prior to beginning work. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Erosion and sedimentation control measures and on-site containers shall be installed to prevent drilling mud from spilling out of entry and/or exit pits. Drilling mud will be disposed of off-site in accordance with local, state and federal requirements and/or permit conditions. I. No other chemicals or polymer surfactant shall be used in the drilling fluid without written consent of the Engineer, and after a determination is made that the chemicals to be added are not harmful or corrosive to the facility and are environmentally safe. 02690-4 B. Pilot Hole: Pilot hole shall be drilled on bore path with no deviations greater than 2 percent of depth over a length of 100 feet. In the event that pilot does deviate from bore path more than 2 percent of depth in 100 feet, Contractor will notify Engineer and Engineer may require Contractor to pull-back and re -drill from the location along bore path before the deviation. C. Reaming: Upon successful completion of pilot hole, Contractor will ream bore hole to a minimum of 40 percent greater than outside diameter of pipe using the appropriate tools. Contractor will not attempt to ream at one time more than the drilling equipment and mud system are designed to safely handle. The Contractor shall take all precautions required to avoid inadvertent mud returns (frac outs). D. Pull -Back: After successfully reaming bore hole to the required diameter, Contractor will put the pipe through the bore hole. In front of the pipe will be a swivel and barrel reamer to compact bore hole walls. Once pull-back operations have commenced, operations must continue without interruption until pipe is completely pulled into bore hole. During pull-back operations, Contractor will not apply more than the maximum safe pipe pull pressure at any time. Contractor shall protect the pipe from damage or gouging at all times and shall at no time overstress the pipe during pull-back or any other operation. E. As -built variance from the designed bore path shall not exceed plus or minus 1 foot in the vertical plane and plus or minus 2 feet in the horizontal plane. Contractor shall submit any proposed deviations from the design bore path with shop drawings. Contractor shall use true tracker tracking system or equal in order to achieve as -built variance. F. The pipe entry area shall be graded to provide support for the pipe to allow free movement into the bore hole. The pipe shall be guided in the bore hole to avoid deformation of, or damage to, the pipe. G. If unexpected subsurface conditions are encountered during the bore, the procedure shall be stopped. The installation shall not continue until the Owner and Engineer have been consulted. H. The pipe shall be pulled back through the bore hole using the wet insertion construction technique. The pipe may be installed full of water. I. The pipe shall be installed in a manner that does not cause upheaval, settlement, cracking, movement or distortion of surface features. 3.05 FIELD TESTING A. Perform hydrostatic testing for leakage prior to installation in accordance with manufacturer and following installation in accordance with Section 02622, 3.04 for PVC pipe and ASTM F 2164 for HDPE pipe. 02690-5 M B. Perform mandrel testing through the entire length of the installed pipe. The mandrel size shall be 90 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe. END OF SECTION 02690-6 SECTION 02920 TOPSOIL PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED MATERIALS A. All applicable provisions of the Bidding and Contract Requirements including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements and Conditions, shall apply to the work under this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, material, necessary equipment and services to complete the Top Soil work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except as for items specifically indicated as "NIC". B. Including, but not limited to: I. Topsoil (existing soil on site) 2. Soil Conditioners 3. Prepared Planting Soil Mixes 1.03 RELATED WORK Related work includes but is not limited to the following: A. Section 02932 — Seeding and Mulching B. Section 02934 — Solid Sod 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Independent test laboratory B. Requirements or Regulatory Agencies: Conform to requirements of all City, County, and State agencies C. Reference standards 02920- 1 0 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Test reports shall consist of pH range, major and minor element analysis, soluble salt concentrations, sand fraction analysis, percolation rate, and separate fertilizer recommendations for a commercial landscape with ornamental plantings and Bahia sod to be maintained in optimum condition. Reports shall be identified by project name, date, soil mix type, and location on site. 1. Results of topsoil (on-site existing soil) analysis. 2. Results of planting soil mix(es) analysis: One test required per each type of soil mix with and without specified fertilizer (note: pH ranges for plant type). 3. Results of Sand Analysis: One sand fraction analysis required. 4. Results of percolation rate analysis. 5. Six (6) soil samples shall be taken (i.e., 2/3 existing on-site soil, 1/3 Peat/coarse grained clean sand) from various locations around the project site as designated by the Landscape Architect. A total of five (5) locations will be required. B. Certificates: Manufacturer's certification and/or testing laboratory certification that content of soil conditioners meet specification requirements. 2. Manufacturer's certificate of fertilizer's chemical composition including but not limited to percentage and derivation of nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, and micro -nutrients. 3. Submit all certification to the Landscape Architect a minimum of one week prior to installation of any materials. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor to make himself/herself familiar with the site and the required work to complete this section in accordance with the drawings and what is specified herein. B. Contractor shall be responsible for bringing all areas to finished grade as shown on drawings. Any changes, modifications, or disturbances, to the fine grading shall be corrected by the responsible contractor. 02920-2 C. Protection: Protect and avoid any damage whatsoever to existing walks, pavement, curbs, utilities, plant material, and any other existing work. D. Contractor shall be responsible for stabilizing all slopes and planting soil by approved methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL (ON-SITE EXISTING SOIL) A. Topsoil source for planting shall be from on site. B. Topsoil shall be suitable for ornamental plant growth and free from hard clods, stiff clay, hardpan, gravel, subsoil, brush, large roots, refuse or other deleterious material, and of reasonably uniform quality. C. Mechanical analysis: Topsoil and soil mixture(s) shall meet these specifications and the following mechanical analysis: Sieve Size Percentage Passing by Dry Weight 1 inch 99-100 1/4 inch 97-99 No. 200 less than 7% Materials larger than one inch shall be disposed of off the site or as directed by the architect. Existing leaf litter and plant material shall be excluded from topsoil and soil mix with less than 7% of the soil passing the 200 Sieve size. D. Maximum Soluble Salts: 500 ppm. E. Contractor shall assure existing soils are free of any visible weeds. F. In the event topsoil on site does not meet the above requirements, topsoil meeting the requirements shall be imported from off-site sources if approved in writing by Owner as an additional cost. 2.02 SOIL CONDITIONERS A. Dolemetic Limestone: Approved product, designated for agriculture use. 02920-3 B. Aluminum Sulfate: Manufacturer's standard commercial grade. C. Peat: Suitable for plant growth, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, and specifically pulverized for agriculture use. Peat shall be free of deleterious materials that would be harmful to plant growth, shall be free of nematodes, shall be of uniform quality, and shall have a pH value between 5.5 and 6.5 (as determined in accordance with ASTM E70). Peat shall be sterilized to make free of all viable nut grass and other undesirable weeds. D. Pesticides: As recommended by applicable Agricultural Public Agencies. E. Herbicides: As recommended by applicable Agricultural Public Agencies. F. Soil Fumigants: As recommended by applicable Agricultural Public Agencies. G. Fertilizer: 1. Commercial grade fertilizer to comply with State of Florida Fertilizer laws. Chemical designation shall be specified with at least 50% of the nitrogen derived from a non -water soluble organic source and all potash to be derived from triple super phosphate forms for all plantings. The following minor elements shall be included: 1.77% Zn 0.25% Cu 4.00% Mg 0.52% Fe 0.39% Mn 0.3% B Percentages shall be verified by the soil test report fertilizer recommendations and revised, if necessary. a. Federal Specifications O -F-241 Type 1, Grade A or B. b. The chemical designation for granular fertilizer for all plantings shall be 12-8-8 or as recommended by soil analysis. 2. Note Section 02950, Landscape Planting for additional fertilizer requirements. 3. Contractor shall adjust specified analysis of fertilizer as required depending upon test results of planting soil(s) and testing laboratories recommendations at no additional cost to Owner. 1.'►.IEl H. Water: Free of substances harmful to growth of plants. Water shall also be free of staining agents as well as elements causing odors. L Soil Sterilizers: As recommended by State and Local Agriculture agencies. J. Planting Mix Sand: Clean, white, coarse-grained (0.5 mm or greater) sand, free of substances harmful to growth of plants. K. Supply complete information on all analysis/test methodologies and results; laboratory certifications, manufacturer's specifications, and agency approvals to Landscape Architect prior to placement of soil conditioners. Landscape contractor shall make all modifications and improvements to soil and soil mixes deemed necessary by Landscape Architect to meet requirements herein, and to ensure proper growing medium for all plant material without cost to Owner, prior to planting. 2.03 PLANTING SOIL MIXES A. Planting soil mixture(s) shall be suitable for plant growth and free from hard clods, stiff clay, hardpan, gravel, brush, large roots, nematodes, weeds, refuse, or other deleterious material, and of reasonably uniform quality. B. Contractor shall be responsible to assure adequate percolation of all planting pits if adequate percolation cannot be achieved, Contractor shall backfill the bottom six inches (6") of each planting pit with approved clean gravel and one layer of soil separator fabric between gravel, and soil for increased drainage percolation if approved by the Owner at an additional cost. C. Planting soil mix shall be placed as a growing medium for all annuals: '/2 clean, coarse-grained sand '/4 approved Florida Peat 1/8 fine milled composted pine bark 1/8 vermiculite D. Shrubs and Groundcovers: Planting soil mixture shall be applied in a 4" layer throughout all planting beds and hand tilled to 10" depth in all shrub and groundcover beds, and shall consist of a mixture of - 1/3 f: 1/3 approved peat 2/3 approved clean, coarse-grained sand 02920-5 E. Trees: Planting soil mixture to be placed as backfill around the root balls of all trees shall consist of a mixture of: 1/3 approved peat 2/3 approved clean, coarse-grained sand F. Sterilize planting soil mixtures to make free of all viable nut grass, and other undesirable weed seeds. G. All planting soil mixes shall be thoroughly blended to form a uniform planting medium suitable for exceptional plant growth. H. Test pH of existing soil and planting soil mixtures by method acceptable to current industry standards. If pH is not between 5.5 and 6.5 add approved soil conditioner/additive to bring pH within that range. L The planting soil mixture for Azaleas and all other plant material specified which grow best in slightly acidic soil shall a pH range between 4.5 and 5.5. In the event that these pH ranges cannot be achieved, the desired pH shall be achieved by applying fertilizer or dolometic limestone in quantities necessary to adjust the pH to the specified range. J. Supply complete information on all analysis/test methodologies and results; laboratory certifications, manufacturer's specifications, and agency approvals to Landscape Architect prior to placement of soil mixtures. In addition, provide Landscape Architect with thoroughly mixed sample of soil mixes for approval prior to placement (note pH ranges). Landscape Contractor shall make all modifications and improvement to soil mixes deemed necessary by Landscape Architect to meet requirements herein, and to ensure proper growing medium for all plant material without cost to Owner, prior to planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive soil preparation to assure work of other trades has been completed. B. Verify that plants to remain undisturbed have been clearly identified and protected from injury during construction. If not, identify and protect plants to remain according to procedures set forth in Section 02950 Landscape Planting. 02920-6 C. . Remove all construction materials and debris from all areas to be landscaped, without additional expense to Owner, prior to subsoil preparation. D. Verify that all areas have been properly graded and that all planting areas have adequate surface drainage prior to planting. E. Do not proceed with soil preparation until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 SITE PREPARATION This contract will include the eradication of any and all existing weeds throughout the project site where new planting is specified at the time of construction. Existing vegetation to remain shall be protected from damage. A. General: Within the entire area to be landscaped and/or sodded as shown on the drawings, the contractor shall complete the following site topsoil preparation items to eradicate all existing weed and/or natural groundcover. Initiate site topsoil preparation as stated herein and coordinate all work with the existing underground sprinkler system and electrical lines. B. Post Emergence Herbicide: Apply "Roundup" as manufactured by Monsanto Corp. according to manufacturer's recommended rate and specification within the limits of all areas to be landscaped. Protect existing plants from overspray. Contractor shall ensure total eradication of all existing weed and/or natural groundcover of all areas to be landscaped within the project area prior to proceeding with site clearing and/or tillage. 1. Existing sod areas or seeded areas may be stripped as required by Contractor. Disposal of excess materials shall be the Contractor's responsibility off-site. 2. Comply with all applicable codes and laws for use of herbicides around water. C. After all areas have been treated with post emergence herbicide and its effective period, as determined by the manufacture has expired, the contractor shall thoroughly clear all remaining treated existing weeds and/or groundcover, stumps, stones larger than 2" in diameter, roots, cable, wire, and all other debris or materials that may hinder proper grading, tillage, planting, or subsequent maintenance operations by removed from the project site and properly disposed of off property. D. Grading: The contractor shall fine grade all areas to the previously -established existing grades. All areas shall be maintained in a true and even condition. All areas shall be positively drained to existing drainage structure and properly compacted to 02920-7 prevent the formation of depressions where water will stand. All undulations and irregularities in the surface resulting from tillage, grading or application of soil amendments shall be leveled prior to initiating landscape planting. E. Pre -Emergence Herbicide: Apply "Surflan" or approved equal to all areas to be landscaped according to the manufacturer's recommended rate and specification. Contractor shall be responsible to re -apply appropriate herbicide to eradicate all remaining weeds and maintain a weed -free condition in all areas throughout all landscape planting operations. F. All herbicide and soil fumigant applications shall be completed by experienced personnel only, in strict accordance with applicable codes and regulations, and contained within the limits of areas to be landscaped. The contractor shall be responsible to replace all existing landscape material present on the site with equal sized material that may be damaged while applying herbicide, including overspray or improper application of herbicide, at his own expense. Coordinate with Owner time of application. Provide warning signage for all treated areas. G. The work shall be performed in a timely fashion to prevent soil erosion. H. Acceptance: Upon completion of all site topsoil preparation, the contractor shall request acceptance from the Owner's Representative prior to initiating landscape planting as specified. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Subsoil: Remove all debris, gravel, rocks and other deleterious material over 2" in diameter, within 12" of surface in areas to receive topsoil mixture, from the project site. Fine grade subsoil to assure finish grades are achieved by adding the specified depth of topsoil mixture. 1. Upon approval of existing topsoil for use in planting soil mixtures, contractor may till in conditioners with the approved existing top soil to depths as specified and/or detailed. B. Soil Mixtures: 1. Prior to installing planting soil, test tree pits and planting areas for percolation. If areas do not drain, notify Owner's Representative. 2. Remove rocks and other objects over 1" in diameter. 02920-8 3. Smooth soil mixtures to two inches (2") below top of surrounding paving, wherever planting beds abut paved surfaces to allow for mulch. 4. Do not compact planting soil mixture, wet -soak planting areas to assure proper settlement. Replace topsoil/planting soil mixture to specified grade after watering, where necessary. 5. Remove limerock or soil cement in tree planter islands within paved parking or construction areas. Do not damage sub -base material for paved surfaces. Assure percolation and then backfill with approved planting soil mix. 6. Excavate annual beds and replace soil with approved planting soil mix. 3.04 CLEAN-UP A. Immediately clean up spills, soil and conditioners on paved and finished surface areas. B. Remove debris and excess materials from project site immediately. END OF SECTION 02920-9 SECTION 02932 SEEDING AND MULCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work consists of establishing a stand of grass at the locations shown on the Drawings. Also included are mulching, fertilizing, watering, and maintenance as required to produce a healthy stand of grass. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Certification: Certification of quality by producer shall be delivered to Engineer ten days prior to use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Seed: Grassing shall be in accordance with Section 570-1 through 570-3 of the DOT Specifications and as follows: 1. Grass seed shall be a mixture of 20 parts of Bermuda seed and 80 parts of Argentine Bahia seed. The separate types of seed used shall be thoroughly dry mixed immediately before sowing. Seed which has become wet shall not be used. 2. The Bermuda seed shall be of a common variety with a minimum pure seed content of 95% and a minimum germination of 85%. The Argentine Bahia seed shall be scarified seed, having a minimum pure seed content of 95% with an active germination of 40 percent and a total germination of 85 percent. All seed shall meet the requirements of the State Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services and all applicable state laws, and shall be approved by the Engineer before being sown. B. Commercial Fertilizer: 1. Commercial fertilizers shall comply with the state fertilizer laws. 2. The numeral designations for fertilizer indicate the minimum percentages respectively of (1) total nitrogen, (2) available phosphoric acid and (3) water soluble potash, contained in the fertilizer. 02932- 1 3. The chemical designation of the fertilizer shall be 18-12-8. At least 50 percent of the phosphoric acid shall be from normal super phosphate or an equivalent source which will provide a minimum of two units of sulfur. The amount of sulfur shall be indicated on the quantitative analysis card attached to each bag or other container. C. Water For Grassing: The water used in the grassing operations shall be obtained from the Owner once the plant irrigation system is substantially complete. Sodding operations shall not be made prematurely. Salt water and off-site water shall not be used. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Fertilizer Spreader: The device for spreading fertilizer shall be capable of uniformly distributing the material at the specified rate. B. Seed Spreader: The seed spreader shall be an approved mechanical hand spreader or other approved type of spreader. C. Rollers: A cultipacker, traffic roller, or other suitable equipment will be required for rolling the grassed areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Preparation Of Area To Be Seeded: The ground to be seeded shall be prepared by disc harrowing and thoroughly pulverizing the soil to a depth of 4 inches. The prepared soil shall be loose and reasonably smooth. It shall be reasonably free of large clods, roots and other material which will interfere with the work and subsequent mowing and maintenance operations. Hand picking may be required. B. Soil analysis: Before applying fertilizer, the soil pH shall be brought to a minimum range of 6.0 - 7.0. 3.02 APPLICATION A. General: Grassing shall be in accordance with Section 570-4 through 570-5 of the DOT Specifications. 2. Mulching shall be in accordance with Section 570-4.6 of the DOT Specifications. 3. Weather Limitations: Fertilizing, seeding or mulching operations will not be permitted when wind velocities exceed 15 miles per hour. Seed shall be sown only when the soil is moist and in proper condition to induce growth. No seeding 02932-2 shall be done when the ground is unduly wet, or otherwise not in a tillable condition. 4. Sequence Of Operations: The several operations involved in the work shall proceed in the following sequence: Preparation and fertilizing of the ground, seeding and rolling. B. Fertilizing: 1. The fertilizer shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 400 to 500 pounds per acre, by a spreading device capable of uniformly distributing the material at the specified rate. Immediately after spreading, the fertilizer shall be mixed with the soil to a depth of approximately 4 inches. C. Seeding: 1. While the soil is still loose and moist, the seed shall be scattered uniformly over the grassing area at a rate of 100 pounds per acre. 2. When so directed by the Engineer, seed of an approved quick growing species of grass, such as rye, Italian rye, millet or other cereal grass, shall be spread at a rate of 30 pounds per acre in conjunction with the permanent type seed mixture. D. Rolling: Immediately after completion of the mulching, the entire seeded and mulched area shall be rolled thoroughly with the equipment specified. At least two trips over the entire area will be required. E. Watering: The seeded areas shall be watered so as to provide optimum growth conditions for the establishment of the grass. In no case, however, shall the period of maintaining such moisture be less than 2 weeks after the planting. F. Maintenance: 1. Grassing and mulching shall be maintained in accordance with Section 570-4.8 and 570-5 of the DOT Specifications. 2. The Contractor shall, at his expense, maintain the seeded areas in a satisfactory condition until final acceptance of the project. Such maintenance shall include the repairing of any damaged areas where the establishment of the grass stand does not appear to be developing satisfactorily, or where erosion has washed away an area and filling and leveling are required. 3. Replanting or repair necessary due to the Contractor's negligence, carelessness or failure to provide routine maintenance shall be at the Contractor's expense. Replanting necessary due to factors determined to be beyond the control of the Contractor shall be paid for under the appropriate contract pay items. 02932-3 G. Mowing: Provide initial mowing of the seeded areas when the grass reaches a height of 12" and then at a rate of 1 mowing per month during the growth months and once at the end of the project at final completion. END OF SECTION 02932-4 SECTION 02934 SOLID SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Permanent sodding at locations indicated on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO): A. Section 02932 — Seeding and Mulching B. Section 02920 — Topsoil 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. B. Submit description of type grass and location from which harvested, for approval by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sod: Argentine Bahia grass sod. 1. Sod shall be well matted with root growth. 2. Unless otherwise directed by Owner, sod grass shall match the grass type adjacent to which it will be planted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLANTING B. Planting: 1. At time of planting, sod shall be live, fresh, and uninjured, with native soil mat adhering firmly to root structure. 2. Pre -irrigate soil to wet it to a depth of 2 in. Soil should be damp, but not L) muddy. 02934- 1 3. Plant sod within 24 hours after it has been delivered to site. Do not leave it exposed to direct sun any longer than is necessary. 4. Roll-out sod or lay squares carefully. Use a 2 x 4 laid on its side as a "kicker" to butt against sod strips and force them into place. 5. Stagger joints. 6. Roll with lawn roller filled with water. It is important to get new sod into close contact with the soil by thorough rolling. 7. After laying and rolling, water area. thoroughly and deeply. Keep sod well watered during the first two weeks after planting to insure good rooting into base soil. END OF SECTION 02934-2 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide formwork for cast -in-place concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement B. Section 03250: Concrete Accessories C. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Florida Building Code 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete & Commentary 4. ACI 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork 5. ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 6. Local codes and regulations B. Contractor's Responsibility: For design of the formwork and for safety in its construction, use and removal. C. Tolerances: Construct formwork to insure that finished concrete surfaces will be in accordance with the tolerances listed in ACI 347. Provide camber as necessary to compensate for anticipated deflection in formwork and concrete due to weight and pressure of fresh concrete and other construction loads. 03100-1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, product data and other manufacturer's literature on form ties, spreaders, corner formers, form coatings and bond breakers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Douglas Fir or Larch or So. Pine, No. 2 grade, seasoned and surfaced on four sides. B. Plywood: Plyform, Class 1, BB -Exterior type, mill oiled and edge sealed, with thickness not less than'/4-inch. C. Medium Density Overlay (MDO) Plywood Forms: PS -1, B -B High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I, un -oiled. 1. Butt -form panels, make contact surface fully flush and seal butting holes with sponge form tape. Chamfer edges of beams and ceilings. 2. Where MDO plywood is used to form beams, use no piece of MDO plywood that has been patched or damaged. D. Drip Forms: Varnished ponderosa pine or equally rigid non -staining plastic '/2 -inch wide on each leg. E. Steel Forms: Uncoated steel, 3/16 inch minimum thickness, fabricated to close tolerances, protected only by the specified release agent, braced so as not to bend, dent or dimple under wet concrete loads, vibrator impact, and tool impact. Maintain steel forms in rust -free condition by use of steel wool and light grinding, followed by coats of specified release agent. Use forms that can be adjusted into true alignment without stops or ridges. F. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Forms: Smooth coated forms, braced so as not to bend, dent or dimple under wet concrete loads, vibrator impact and tool impact, and at least 0.11 inch thick. Design forms for external bracing at piers and columns, without use of form ties. G. Plugged Cone Form Ties: Rod type, with ends or end fasteners which can be removed without spalling the concrete and which leave a hole equal in depth to the required reinforcement clearance. Form ties shall be of a design in which the hole left by the removed end or end fastener is easily filled to match the surface of the hardened concrete. Provide removable cones 1'/4 -inches in diameter by 1'/2 -inches deep. Provide preformed mortar plugs to match the color of the concrete, recessed '/4- 03100-2 inch, adhered with an approved two part epoxy. H. Circular and Elliptical Column Forms: Fabricate of two pieces, clamped watertight using gaskets and without horizontal joints. Install horizontal construction joints only where indicated or as directed by the Engineer. Beam Forms: Provide in one length without form joints and suitable for cambering up to 1/160 of span without distortion of profile or opening of seams. J. Control Joint Filler: Use epoxy joint filler equal to BurkEpoxy Joint Filler to fill voids left by saw cuts and to resist against spalling caused by vehicle traffic in concrete slabs. K. Inserts: Galvanized cast steel or galvanized welded steel, complete with anchors to concrete and fittings such as bolts, wedges and straps. L. Shoring: As designed and executed by Contractor to support all loads. M. Chamfer Strips: Polyvinyl strips designed to be nailed in the forms to provide a 3/4 -inch chamfer at exposed edges of concrete members. N. Form Release Agent: A blend of natural and synthetic chemicals that employs a chemical reaction to provide quick, easy and clean release of concrete from forms, and equal to Eucoslip, by the Euclid Chemical Company, or Release #1, by The Burke Company. Use a non -staining release agent that leaves the concrete with a paintable surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A. Contractor's Responsibility: The design, engineering, and construction of the formwork. B. Design watertight formwork in accordance with ACI 347 Chapter 1, to withstand the pressure resulting from the placement and vibration of the concrete, and which is sufficiently hard and rigid to resist indentation and scratching while maintaining tolerances, and with maximum deflection between form supports of 1/240 span length. Chamfer all exposed edges with 3/4" chamfer. 3.02 INSTALLATION/ERECTION A. Construction Of Formwork: Construct forms sufficiently strong to withstand the pressure resulting from the placement and vibration of concrete, sufficiently rigid to maintain specified tolerances, and sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar. Brace forms against lateral, upward or downward movement. 03100-3 B. Form Facing Materials: Use form -facing materials that produce a hard uniform L) texture on the concrete. Do not use facing materials with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Use facing materials with maximum deflection, as reflected in concrete surfaces not in excess of 1/240 of the span between structural members. Prevent formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects of finished concrete. C. Preparation of Form Surfaces: After each use and prior to placing reinforcing, clean forms of mortar, grout and other foreign material and apply the form release agent. Do not allow the form release agent to stand in puddles in the forms, to come in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed, or with reinforcing steel and items to be embedded. Reuse only forms, which maintain a uniform surface texture on exposed concrete surfaces. Apply light sanding between uses to obtain such uniform texture. Plug unused tie rod holes with corks, shave flush and sandpaper on the concrete surface side. D. Adjustment: Provide positive means of adjustment of shores and struts to take up all settlement during concrete placing. E. Temporary Openings: Provide temporary openings in wall forms to limit the free fall of concrete to a maximum of 6 -feet unless an elephant trunk is used. Locate such openings to facilitate placing and consolidation, and space no more than 8 -feet apart. Provide temporary openings in the bottom of wall and column forms and elsewhere as necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately prior to placing. F. Construction Joints: At construction joints, overlap the contact surfaces of the form sheathing over the hardened concrete by not more than 1 -inch. Hold forms against the hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar. G. Chamfers: Provide chamfers where indicated herein or on the Drawings. H. Do not embed any form -tying device or part thereof other than metal in concrete. I. Form all surfaces of concrete members except where placing concrete against ground. Dimensions of concrete members shown on Drawings apply to formed surfaces, except where otherwise indicated. Add at least 2 inches of concrete where concrete is placed against trimmed undisturbed ground in lieu of forms. Limit placement of concrete against ground to footings and then only where ground can be trimmed to required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing. J. Runways: Provide smooth and rigid runways (if needed) for moving equipment and concrete. Support runways directly on formwork or on grade and in no case on reinforcing steel or bar supports. K. Form Removal: 03100-4 1. Remove formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams and other parts not L) supporting the weight of the concrete only after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. Remove forms and shoring supporting the weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other members only after the concrete has attained its specified 28 -day compressive strength. After last concrete is placed, do not remove forms, shoring and wall bracing before the following minimum periods: a. Sides of footings and encasements: 24 hours b. Walls not supporting load: 48 hours c. Vertical sides of beams, girders and similar members: 48 hours d. Slabs, beams and girders: 10 days (forms only) e. Shoring for slabs, beams and girders: When concrete reaches 3000 psi compressive strength. f. Wall bracing: When top or roof slab concrete reaches 3000 psi compressive strength. 2. Do not remove forms from concrete placed when outside air temperature is L) below 50T without first determining if concrete has properly set without regard to time. Do not apply heavy loading on green concrete. N L. Embedded Items: Set anchor bolts and other embedded items accurately and hold securely in position in the forms until the concrete is placed and set. Check all special castings, channels, or other metal parts that are to be embedded in the concrete prior to and again after concreting. Check all nailing, blocks, plugs and strips necessary for the attachment of trim, finish and similar work prior to concreting. Coordinate with other trades for items to be embedded in the concrete and not shown on Structural Drawings. M. Pipes and Wall Spools Cast in Concrete: 1. Install wall spools, wall flanges and wall anchors before placing concrete. Do not weld, tie or otherwise connect the wall spools to the reinforcing steel. 2. Support pipe and fabricated fittings to be encased in concrete on concrete piers or pedestals. Carry concrete supports to firm foundations so that no settlement will be possible during construction. 03100-5 N. Form Tolerances: 1. Tolerances or allowable variations from dimensions or positions of structural concrete work: a. Sleeves and Inserts + '/4" to -'/4" b. Projected ends of anchors +'/4" to — 0" c. Anchor bolt setting + t/4" to - '/4" d. Finished concrete, all locations+'/4" to -'/4" in 10 feet of length 2. Planes or axes from which above tolerances are measured: Sleeves and Inserts: Centerline of sleeve or insert Projected ends of anchors: Plane perpendicular to end of anchor Anchor bolt setting: Centerline of anchor bolt Finish concrete: Concrete surface 3. Comply with equipment manufacturer's tolerances if more severe than above. END OF SECTION 03100-6 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide steel reinforcement for cast -in-place and precast concrete structures. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork B. Section 03250: Concrete Accessories C. Section 03300: Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Florida Building Code 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement 4. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 5. ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 6. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1 7. Local codes and regulations 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01, the following: 1. Mill test certificates identifying chemical and physical analyses for each load of reinforcing steel delivered. 2. Bending lists and placing drawings for reinforcement. Indicate openings (mechanical, electrical, equipment), including additional reinforcing at openings and intersecting wall, beam and footing arrangements. Coordinate placing drawings with concrete placing schedule. Submit complete bending lists and 03200-1 placing drawings together for each element of structure (grade slabs, footings, walls, deck, floor or roof slabs), including all dowels and other bars. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship reinforcement with bars of same size and shape fastened in bundles with metal identification tags giving size and mark securely wired on. Label identification tags with same designation as shown on bar lists and shop drawings. B. Store bars off ground. Protect from moisture and keep free from dirt, oil and injurious contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. B Metal Bar Supports: CRSI MSP -1, Chapter 3, Protected Bar Supports (capped or dipped), or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. Use concrete supports for reinforcement in concrete placed on grade. C Tie Wire: 16 -gauge minimum, black, soft annealed. D. Coupler Splice Devices: Cadweld tension couplers, capable of developing the ultimate strength of the bar as manufactured by Erico Products, Incorporated, Solon, Ohio, or equal. Use coupler splice devices only with the approval of the Engineer. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Do not commence fabrication until receipt of the shop drawings approval. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with all requirements of the specified standards and within CRSI tolerances, and unless otherwise indicated, with the following: 1. Provide standard hooks. 2. Extend bottom bars a minimum of 6 inches into supporting members or as shown or detailed in the Drawings. 3. Provide cover indicated to the outermost stirrup, tie or bar. 4. Provide splices where indicated on the Drawings and as per CRSI. PART 3 - EXECUTION 03200-2 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Before placing, clean reinforcement of loose mill scale and rust, dirt and other coatings and contaminants that reduce or destroy bond. B. Supporting Reinforcement: Provide bar supports as required by CRSI MSP -1. Support top and bottom bars in slabs formed on earth on precast concrete block supports except where such bars are properly supported from formwork. Precast concrete block supports are not required in slabs formed on working mat concrete but may be used at the CONTRACTOR's option. C. Placing Reinforcement: Place reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric as indicated on the Drawings and as recommended by CRSI MSP -1 and ACI 315. Securely tie and support reinforcement to prevent displacement during concrete placement. D. Where splices are indicated on the Drawings, splice bars in slabs, beams and girders according to ACI 315. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, lap splices in reinforcement shall not be less than 47 bar diameters. Splice horizontal bars in circular structures (i.e., Sludge Holding Tank) with not less than 47 bar diameters. When splicing bars of different diameters, length of lap is based on the smaller bar. Stagger splices in adjacent bars when shown on the Drawings. 1 E. Coupler Splice: Where shown on the Drawings and as approved by the Engineeer, J provide full positive tension connections. Install such devices in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. F. Dowels: Wire dowels in position prior to placing concrete. G. Field Bending: Do not use heat to bend bars. Do not bend bars after being embedded in concrete. H. Welding: Welding of reinforcing will not be permitted. I. Place reinforcement a minimum of 2 inches clear of any metal pipe or fitting. J. Unless otherwise shown, install reinforcement with the following clearances for concrete coverage. 1. Beams and Girders: 2" outside of stirrups or ties 2. Solid Slabs: 1'/2" cover when there is no exposure to moisture 2" cover when placed against working slab 3" cover when placed against earth 3. Columns: 2" outside of ties 03200-3 4. Walls: 2" to outermost reinforcement 5. Grade Beams: 3" outside of stirrups, side and bottom, 2" top 6. Pile Caps and Foundations: 3" outside of steel, side and bottom, 2" top 7. Formed Structures in 2" outside of steel contact with soil or exposed to weather, water, sludge or sewage END OF SECTION 03200-4 SECTION 03250 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide accessories for cast -in-place concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork B. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement C. Section 03300: Cast -in -Place Concrete 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and samples in accordance with Section 01340. B. Submit product data on the following items. 1. Water Stops 2. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers and Sealers C. Submit samples on the following items: 1. Water Stops PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Precast Concrete Block Supports For Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 315. Provide blocks with No. 4 dowels bent 90° to support top bars. B. Water Stops: Polyvinyl chloride meeting all requirements of U.S. Army Corps of Engineer's Specification CRD -C-572 and equal to Burke Water Stops as manufactured by The Burke Company. Provide flat ribbed type and split ribbed type, 6 -inches x 3/8-inc for wall thicknesses up to 12 inches and 9 inch by 3/8 inch for wall thickness greater than 12 inches. Provide water stops as indicated on the (� Drawings and at all exterior walls and bottom slabs of liquid containing structures. C. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: 03250-1 1. Bituminous type conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 994. 2. Non -extruding type, self -expanding cork, 3/4 -inch thick or as otherwise shown on the Drawings, conforming to the requirements of ASTM D1752, Type IIL, and compatible with the specified joint sealant compound. D. Joint Sealant: A multipart, gray, polyurethane sealant meeting U.S. Federal Specification TT -S -00227E (3) Type 1, Class A self -leveling for horizontal joints, and Type II, Class A, non -sag for vertical joints, and recommended by the manufacturer for continuous immersion in water. Provide sealants as manufactured by Products Research and Chemical Corporation, Mameco International, The Burke Company, W.R. Meadows, or equal. E. Inserts: Stainless steel to fit the proposed hanger or support. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Precast Concrete Block Supports For Reinforcing Bars: Provide in sufficient quantity to support reinforcing bars in slabs formed on earth at a spacing not to exceed 4 -feet on centers in both directions. Provide blocks with dowels to support top bars. Block supports are not required in slabs formed on tremi or working may concrete, but may be used at the Contractor's option. Blocks are not required for reinforcing bars properly supported from formwork. At other locations, refer to ACI 315 and CRSI MSP_ 1. B. Water Stops: 1. Installation: Protect water stops from dirt, oil and concrete spatter and rigidly secure in position by means of split bulkheads and by fastening to reinforcing bars in two directions at not more than 12 inches on centers. Install water stops in construction joints in hydraulic structures required to contain liquid or to resist the entry of groundwater. 2. Splices: Butt -splice water stops using a thermostatically controlled electric splicing iron as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints of size and at locations as shown on the Drawings. Place expansion joint fillers every 30 feet in straight runs of walkways, at right angle turns and wherever concrete butts into vertical surfaces, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. D. Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants where indicated on the Drawings. Prepare surfaces, prime, prepare materials, all in complete compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 03250-2 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide cast -in-place concrete as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100: Concrete Formwork B. Section 03200: Concrete Reinforcement C. Section 03250: Concrete Accessories 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Florida Building Code, 2004 Edition 2. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 4. ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 5. Local codes and regulations B. Plant Qualification: Comply with all requirements of the Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities of the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association and ASTM C 94. C. Worker Qualification: Workers with at least 5 years experience in performing concrete work of high quality, including forming, color, texture and finishing and of the size and complexity of this project. D. Testing: 1. Obtain standard laboratory compressive test cylinders as required by the laboratory when concrete is discharged from the mixer at the middle of the batch of concrete in the truck. Test cylinders will be made and cured by the laboratory in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 31, including a set of 6 cylinders for each 50 cubic yards or 03300-1 fraction thereof placed each day, for each type of concrete. The cylinders will be cured under laboratory conditions and will be tested in two groups of one at 7, three at 28 days of age and hold two for 56 day break, respectively in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 39. 2. Air entrainment tests shall be made by the laboratory when concrete is discharged from the mixer, for each pour or other volume of concrete for which a set of test cylinders is required in accordance with the previous paragraph. The amount of air entrained will be determined by either the pressure method or the volumetric method in accordance with ASTM C231 or ASTM C173, respectively. 3. The laboratory will make slump tests of Class A and Class B concrete as it is discharged from the mixer. Slump tests will be made of every batch of concrete placed, and failure to meet specified slump requirements will be sufficient cause for rejection of that batch. E. Evaluation and Acceptance Of Concrete: Evaluation and acceptance of concrete will be in accordance with ACI -318, Chapter 5. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with Section 01340. 1. Plant Qualification: Submit satisfactory evidence indicating compliance with the specified qualification requirements. 2. Materials: Submit satisfactory evidence indicating that materials to be used, including cement, aggregates and admixtures meet the specified requirements. 3. Design Mix: Submit the concrete mixes to be used, as prepared by qualified persons. The design of the concrete mixes is the responsibility of the Contractor subject to the limitations of the Specifications. Define within the submittal where each mix design will be used; ie. mats, walls, filled cells, etc. 4. Submit, at least 24 hours before placing concrete, signed certification providing the following: a. Exact location and portion of structure to be placed; b. Date and time concrete is to be placed; c. Type of concrete to be used (mix), and the method to be used in placing the concrete; d. Estimated quantity of concrete to be placed; e. That line and grade have been checked and grade properly compacted; 03300-2 E That location e size and spacing of reinforcement has been type, P g checked and conform to the Drawings; g. That any water stops, construction joints, or seals have been placed and conform to the Drawings; h. That any embedded pipes have been placed, are the correct size and type and conform to the Drawings; i. That any embedded conduits, grounding wires or receptacles have been placed and conform to the Drawings; j. That any embedded anchor bolts, bearing plates, dowels etc. are in place, are of the correct size and are located as indicated on the Drawings; and k. That forms are properly located and adequately braced. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Domestic Portland cement conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 150 Type I, Type Il or Type III. Construct sanitary sewer manholes, wet wells, pumping stations, and liquid containing structures exposed to water or wastewater with Type II cement. Use Type III cement for high early strength concrete only for special locations and only with the approval of the Engineer. Use Type I cement for structures not exposed to wastewater or water. 2. Use only one brand of cement in any individual structure unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Do not use cement, which has become damaged, partially set, lumpy or caked and discard the entire contents of the sack or container, which contains such cement. Do not use salvaged or reclaimed cement. B. Aggregates: 1. ASTM C33: Coarse aggregates shall be size No. 57, 1 -inch to No. 4 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Use size No. 8 for filling of cells of masonry units. 2. In addition to requirements of ASTM C33, apply the following criteria for structures exposed to sewage: a. Soft particles: Not more than 2.0 percent 03300-3 b. Chert as a soft impurity (defined in Table 3 of ASTM C 33): Not more than 1.0 percent c. Total of soft particles and chert as a soft impurity: Not more than 2.0 percent d. Flat and elongated particles (long dimension more than 5 times short dimension): Not more than 15.0 percent C. Water: Potable quality, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials. D. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: 1. Concrete Without Superplasticizer: a. Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type A, equal to Eucon WR -75 by the Euclid Company, Pozzolith 20ON by Master Builders, Plastocrete 161 by Sika Chemical Corporation, and containing no calcium chloride. b. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type D, equal to Eucon Retarder -75 by the Euclid Company, Pozzolith 100 XR by Master Builders, (`�✓) Plastiment by Sika Chemical Corporation, and containing no calcium chloride. c. Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C494 Type C or E, equal to Accelguard 80 by the Euclid Company, Darex Set Accelerator by W.R. Grace, and containing no calcium chloride. 2. Concrete With Superplasticizer: a. Water Reducing, High Range Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type F or G, equal to Eucon 37 by the Euclid Company, Rheobild 716 by Master Builders, Daracem 100 by W.R. Grace, Sikament by Sika Chemical Corporation, and consisting of a second -generation admixture, free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those attributable to water) composed of a synthesized sulfonated complex polymer, enabling the concrete to maintain its rheoplastic state in excess of two hours if necessary. b. Manufacturer's Job Site Representation: Provide the services of a competent field service representative from the manufacturer of each of the admixtures selected for use to provide at the job site advice and consultation on the use of the admixture materials, including the effect on the concrete in place, including recommending maximum discharge time for superplasticizer method and procedure to induce superplasticizer into mixer, quantities of admixtures to be used if variations are required because of temperature/humidity, wind, or other environmental 03300-4 considerations, and to be available on short call at any time requested by the Owner, Contractor, or concrete producer. F. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I and Type 1D, Class A and Class B, containing no ingredient which would adversely affect the bond of coatings or toppings. 1. For exposed concrete not to receive special finishes, protective coatings and/or concrete toppings, provide curing and sealing compound equal to Super Rez- Seal, by Euclid Chemical Co., or Burke Spartan -Cote Cure -Seal Hardener by The Burke Company. 2. For exposed concrete to receive special finishes, protective coatings and/or concrete toppings, provide curing compound equal to Kurez-DR, by Euclid Chemical Co., or Burke Rez-X Curing Compound by The Burke Company. G. Mortar for Repair of Concrete: Same materials as used for concrete, except omit coarse aggregate and use not more than one part cement to two and one-half parts sand by damp loose volume. Use no more mixing water than is necessary for handling and placing. H. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Euco #452, BurkEpoxy MV, Sikadur Hi Mod, Concresive 1001 -LPL, or equal. I. Powdered Epoxy Coating For Anchor Bolts: Powdered epoxy resin as manufactured by the 3M Company, Scotchkote No. 213, Armstrong No. R349, or equal. 2.02 MIXES A. General Requirements: 1. Mix Design: Conform to ACI 318, Section 5.3. Submit data on consecutive tests and standard deviation. 2. Maximum Water -Cement Ratio: 0.37 (lbs/]b) - Class A and B concrete with superplasticizer 0.45 (lbs/lb) Class A concrete with or without superplasticizer 0.55 (lbs/lb) - Class B concrete without superplasticizer 0.75 (lbs/lb) - Class C concrete without superplasticizer 3. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent (Class A and B). 4. Slump: 4 -inches plus or minus 1 -inch for Class A and B without superplasticizer. 7 -inches plus or minus 1 -inch for Class A and B with superplasticizer. 8 -inches plus or minus 1 -inch for tremie/working mat concrete and Class C concrete. 03300-5 5. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: Class A: 4,500 psi, for all structural concrete inclusive of liquid -containing (water and wastewater) structures, buildings and building components, pump stations, pipe supports, building slabs -on -grade and structural foundations. Class B: 3500 psi, may be used for utility encasements, concrete fill, curbs, sidewalks, and miscellaneous concrete. Class C: 1500 psi, shall be used for protection of waterstops and reinforcement connectors at future wall and slab extensions. This concrete is non-structural and shall be used specifically for encasement purposes as called for on the Drawings. B. Production Of Concrete: 1. General: Use ready mixed concrete, batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Air Entraining Admixture: Add admixture into the mixture as a solution measured by means of an approved mechanical dispensing device, and as a part of the total mixing water. 3. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Measure and add water reducing and retarding admixture as recommended by the manufacturer. Complete the addition of the admixture within one minute after addition of water to the cement has been completed, or prior to the beginning of the last three-quarters of the required mixing, whichever occurs first. Store, handle and batch admixtures in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 68. C. Delivery Tickets: Conform to ASTM C94, including cement content and water/cement ratio. Furnish ticket for each batch of ready -mixed concrete delivered to the site. D. Temperatures: Deliver concrete to site at temperature not higher than 90°F, otherwise, add ice to reduce the temperature, as recommended by ACI. E. Modifications To The Mix: Do not make modifications to the mix in the plant or on the job which will decrease the cement content or increase the water -cement ratio beyond that specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Preparations Before Placing: Place no concrete until the approval of the Engineer has been received. Ensure that forms are thoroughly clean and reinforcing and all other items required 03300-6 to be set in concrete have been placed and thoroughly secured. Notify Engineer 24 hours before concrete is placed. B. Conveying: General: Transport concrete from the truck to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients to maintain the quality of the concrete. Place no concrete more than 90 minutes after mixing has begun for that batch. 2. Buckets and Hoppers: Provide buckets and hoppers having discharge gates with a clear opening equal to no less than one-third of the maximum interior horizontal area or five times the maximum aggregate size being used, and having side slopes no less than 60 degrees. Provide controls on gates to permit opening and closing during the discharge cycle. 3. Runways: Provide runways as specified in Section 03100. Use extreme care to avoid displacement of reinforcement during the placing of concrete. 4. Elephant Trunks: Use hoppers and elephant trunks to prevent the free fall of concrete for more than 6 -feet. 5. Chutes: Provide metal or metal lined chutes having a slope not exceeding one vertical to two horizontal and not less than one vertical to three horizontal. Use chutes more than 20 -feet long and chutes not meeting the slope requirements only if they discharge into a hopper before distribution. 6. Pumping Equipment: If required, provide pumping equipment and procedures conforming to ACI 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. Measure slump at the point of discharge. Do not allow loss of slump in pumping to exceed P/2 -inches. 7. Conveying Equipment Construction: Do not use aluminum or aluminum alloy pipe for trem1es or pump lines and chutes, except for short lengths at the truck mixer. 8. Cleaning: Clean conveying equipment at the end of each concrete operation. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Placing: 1. General: Deposit concrete continuously, or in layers of such thickness (not exceeding 2 -feet in depth) that no concrete will be deposited on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. Repair any such seams or planes of weakness with injected epoxy grout and patch to match adjacent surfaces. 03300-7 2. Supported Elements: Allow at least two hours to elapse after depositing concrete in columns or walls before depositing in beams, girders, or slabs supported thereon. 3. Segregation: Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject the concrete to procedures, which cause segregation. Do not allow the concrete to free fall more than 5 feet. 4. Concrete Under Water: Place all concrete in the dry except for Tremie concrete. 5. Concrete Fill at Tank Bottom Slab: Where shown on the Drawings, place concrete fill for the tank bottoms within the tolerances described herein and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations for the clearance required by the mechanical equipment. Do not operate the mechanical equipment of the tanks as a primary screed for moving the concrete fill, except in the final screeding operation, provided any damage to the equipment is repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Seals and Tremie Concrete: 1. General: a. Wherever practicable, dewater all foundation excavations and deposit the concrete in the dry. Where conditions are encountered which render it impracticable to dewater the foundation before placing concrete, place a concrete foundation seal as shown on the Drawings. Then dewater the foundation and place the balance of the concrete in the dry. b. Place seal concrete in a manner to ensure satisfactory performance of the seal in providing a watertight excavation for subsequent placing of structural concrete. Repair or replace any seal concrete which subsequently fails to perform properly, as necessary to perform its required function, at no cost to the Owner. 2. Method of Placing: Deposit concrete under water by means of a tremie, a closed -bottom dump bucket of not less than one cubic yard capacity, or other approved method, in one continuous pour. Do not place concrete in running water. Provide watertight form work and excavation sheeting designed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Florida, for all form work required to retain concrete under water. 3. Use of Tremie: For depositing concrete under water, use a tremie consisting of a tube having a minimum inside diameter of ten inches, and constructed in sections having tight joints. Do not use aluminum parts in contact with the concrete. Ensure that the discharge end is entirely seated at all times and that the tremie tube is kept full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, slightly raise the tremie (but not out of the concrete at the bottom) until 03300-8 the batch discharges to the bottom of the hopper; then stop the flow by lowering the tremie. Support the tremie in such a manner as to permit the free movement of the discharge end over the entire top surface of the work, and to permit it being lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard the flow. Do not interrupt concrete flow until the work is completed. Use special care to maintain still water at the point of deposit. 4. Use of Bottom -dump Bucket: When the concrete is placed by means of a bottom -dump bucket, lower the bucket gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed. Then raise the bucket very slowly during the discharge travel; the intent being'to maintain, as nearly as possible, still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. Aluminum buckets will not be permitted. 5. Time of Beginning Pumping: Do not start pumping to dewater a sealed cofferdam until the seal has set sufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure, and in no case earlier than 72 hours after placement of the concrete. C. Consolidating Concrete: 1. General: Consolidate concrete by means of internal vibrators operated by competent workmen. 2. Vibrators: Use vibrators having a minimum head diameter of at least 2 -inches, a minimum centrifugal force of 700 -pounds and a minimum frequency of 8,000 vibrations per second. 3. Vibrators for Confined Areas: In confined areas, use additional vibrators having a minimum head diameter of 1'/2 -inches, a minimum centrifugal force of 300 -pounds and a minimum frequency of 9,000 vibrations per second. 4. Spare Vibrator: Keep one spare vibrator for each three in use on the site during all concrete placing operations. 5. Use of Vibrators: Insert and withdraw vibrators at points approximately 18 -inches apart. At each insertion operate vibrator for 5 to 15 seconds. Do not transport concrete in the forms by means of vibrators. D. Protection: Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or to damage the surface finish. Protect concrete from construction overloads and do not apply design loads until the specified strength has been attained. E. Construction Joints: Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide horizontal construction joints at top of foundation members and slabs on grade and at the soffit of supported slabs and beams. Locate other horizontal and vertical construction joints as indicated on the Drawings. Except in the locations shown, provide no other joints, unless otherwise recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 03300-9 F. Bonding: Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has set, thoroughly clean the surfaces of the set concrete to expose the coarse aggregate and to ensure they are free of laitance, coatings, foreign matter and loose particles. Retighten forms. Dampen, but do not saturate hardened concrete of joints and then thoroughly cover with a coat of cement grout of similar proportions to the mortar in the concrete. Place the grout as thick as possible on vertical surfaces and at least'/2-inch thick on horizontal surfaces. Place the fresh concrete before the grout has attained its initial set. G. Embedded Items: In addition to steel reinforcement, securely place pipes, inserts and other metal objects as shown, specified or ordered to be built into, set in or attached to the concrete. Take all necessary precautions to prevent these objects from being displaced, broken or deformed. Before concrete is placed, take care to determine that all embedded parts are firmly and securely fastened in place as indicated. Thoroughly clean surfaces free from paint and other coating, rust, scale, oil, and any foreign matter. Pressure test embedded pipes for leakage, as specified elsewhere, before concrete is placed. Wrap metal rainwater leaders, firelines and other such piping with at least two thicknesses of 301b. roofing felt before placing concrete. Do not embed wood in concrete. Pack concrete tightly around pipes and other metal work to prevent leakage and to secure perfect adhesion. Adequately protect drains from intrusion of concrete. H. Bonding To Existing Surfaces: Clean existing concrete surfaces that are to have new concrete bonded thereto of all grease, oil, dust, dirt and loose particles and coat with an epoxy bonding agent just prior to placing of the new concrete. Apply the bonding agent as recommended by the manufacturer and allow the agent to become tacky before the new concrete is placed. Do not allow the bonding agent to overlap or be spilled on the surfaces to be exposed after the work is completed. 3.03 FORM REMOVAL A. Maintain formwork in place for the following structural conditions until the concrete has attained the minimum percentage of indicated design compressive strength or for the period of time specified in the following table. Note: Time periods in the table include all days except those in which the temperature falls below 40 degrees F. 03300-10 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHINGS A. Repair of Surface Defects: 1. General: Repair surface defects (less than 1/2" deep), including tie holes immediately after form removal. Dampen the area to be patched and an area at least 6 -inches wide surrounding it to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. Notify the Engineer prior to commencing operations. 2. Removal of Defective Concrete: Remove all honeycombed (more than 1/2" deep) and other defective concrete down to sound concrete. Cut edges perpendicular to the surface or slightly under cut. Sand blast surfaces to receive repair. 3. Bonding Grout: Thoroughly dampen surfaces to be patched and apply a coat of bonding grout consisting of one part cement to one part fine sand passing a No. 30 sieve and having the consistency of thick cream. 03300-11 Minimum Compressive Normal Strength for Structural Normal High -Early Form Removal Member or Strength Strength (% Design Condition Concrete Concrete Strength) Cantilevers 12 days 7 days 90 Over 20 feet 12 days 7 days 90 between supports Stairways 10 days 5 days 80 Floor slabs 5 days 3 days 70 Free standing 5 days 3 days 70 walls, column and piers Walls, piers, columns, sides 24-48 hours 12-24 hours 70 of beams, footings, slabs on grade, and vertical surfaces Front face form 6-24 hours 6 hours 70 of curbs 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHINGS A. Repair of Surface Defects: 1. General: Repair surface defects (less than 1/2" deep), including tie holes immediately after form removal. Dampen the area to be patched and an area at least 6 -inches wide surrounding it to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. Notify the Engineer prior to commencing operations. 2. Removal of Defective Concrete: Remove all honeycombed (more than 1/2" deep) and other defective concrete down to sound concrete. Cut edges perpendicular to the surface or slightly under cut. Sand blast surfaces to receive repair. 3. Bonding Grout: Thoroughly dampen surfaces to be patched and apply a coat of bonding grout consisting of one part cement to one part fine sand passing a No. 30 sieve and having the consistency of thick cream. 03300-11 N_m 4. Placing Patching Mortar: After the bonding grout begins to lose its water sheen, apply a premixed patching mortar, thoroughly consolidating it into place and striking it off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. Leave mortar undisturbed for one hour to permit initial shrinkage and then finally finish. 5. Tie Holes: After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, fill the tie holes solid with patching mortar. B. Concrete Finishes: 1. Slab Surfaces: a. General: After concrete has been consolidated, finish all concrete slabs with a floated finish. After floating, trowel finish all concrete slabs, except for areas to receive roofing, insulation, tile or topping, and immediately light broom finish. Where a finish is not indicated, provide a troweled finish. Finish Designation Area Applied S-1 Slabs and floors not water bearing: Smooth steel trowel finish. S-2 Slabs and floors which are water bearing and slab surfaces on which mechanical equipment moves: Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks and all irregularities. S-3 Slabs, floors and stair treads of structures or buildings exposed to view: Steel trowel finish without local depressions or high points and apply a light hair -broom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or brushes. Leave hair -broom lines parallel to the direction of slab drainage. S-4 Slabs and floors at slopes greater than 10%: Steel trowel finish without local depressions or high points. Apply a stiff bristle broom finish. Leave broom lines parallel to the direction of slope drainage. S-5 Exposed edges of slabs, floors and tops of walls: Finish with a'/4 -inch radius edge if a chamfer is not indicated. b. Floated Finish: After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and leveled, �J do not work the surface further until water sheen has disappeared and the surface has hardened sufficiently to permit floating. During the first floating, check the plane of 03300-12 the slab with a 10 -foot straight edge applied at no less than two angles. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots to produce a surface having the required tolerance. Then re -float the slab to a uniform sandy texture. c. Light Broomed Finish: After floating, power trowel slabs to receive a light broomed finish to produce a smooth surface, relatively free of defects. Before the surface sets, pass a soft broom drag over the surface to produce a surface uniform in texture and appearance. d. Troweled Finish: After floating, power trowel slabs to receive a troweled finish to produce a smooth surface, relatively free of defects. Hand trowel after the surface has hardened sufficiently. When a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surfaces, perform final troweling by hand to produce a surface which is thoroughly consolidated, free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and plane to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 -foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. e. Hardener Finish: Where indicated to receive a troweled hardener finish, water cure slabs without application of curing and sealing agent. When slab is at least 28 days old and thoroughly dry, apply the hardener in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where dry -shake hardener or slip -resistant finish is required, apply the hardener or slip -resistant product prior to complete curing and finishing, in accordance with the requirements and recommendation of the product manufacturer. £ Saw Cut Joints: Cut joints that are to be saw cut not sooner than 2 hours after the concrete is poured and not later than 8 hours after the pour. 3.05 PROTECTING A. Curing: 1. Immediately after surface defects have been repaired, apply a spray coat of curing compound to all exposed surfaces, including slabs, walls, beams and columns in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Protect exposed steel keyways and other embedded items from the curing compound. Cure all concrete surfaces that are to be exposed to wastewater, surfaces that are to be coated with a coal tar epoxy system, and concrete floors requiring a bond for special finishes. 2. Do not apply curing compound during periods of rainfall. Should the film become damaged from any cause within the required curing period, immediately repair the damaged portions with additional compound. Upon removal of forms, immediately coat the newly exposed surfaces to provide a curing treatment equal to that provided for the surface. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Use clear compound conforming to Federal Specification TT -C -800A, 30% solids content minimum, having test data from an 03300-13 independent laboratory indicating a maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per sq. cm. when applied at a coverage rate of 300 sq. ft. per gallon, and equal to Super Floor Coat or Super Pliocure by The Euclid Chemical Company or Masterseal 66 by Master Builders. Furnish manufacturer's certification as required. 4. Apply specified clear curing and sealing compound to all horizontal areas as noted on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Apply immediately after final finishing. Apply this compound to non-structural construction joints of slabs on grade to act as a bond breaker prior to placement of adjacent concrete. END OF SECTION 03300-14 GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment and perform all grouting as specified hereinafter and indicated on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's literature for review on the following items: 1. Non -shrink grout data including grout properties, mixing, surface preparation and installation instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store grouting materials in unbroken containers with seals and labels intact as packaged by the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Non -shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: The Burke Company's Non -Ferrous, Non -Shrink Grout, Sauereisen F-100 Level Fill, Master Builders Masterflow 713, Euclid NS Grout, or equal pre -mixed type. B. Non -shrink Metallic Grout: The Burke Company's Metallic Spec Grout, Master Builders Embeco 636 Grout pre -mixed type, or equal. C. Epoxy Grout: Sikadur 42 Grout -Pak, or equal, for grouting sleeves for anchor bolts, etc. 03600-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean all bonding surfaces of dust and oil. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Non -shrink Grout: Use non -shrink, nonmetallic grout for grouting precast concrete wall panel connections, column base plates, anchor bolts, reinforcing bars, pipe sleeves, machinery supports and pump base plates. Use epoxy grout for anchor bolts, etc., where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Mix and place non -shrink grout as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Mix grout as close to the work area as possible and transport quickly to its final position in a manner which will not permit segregation of materials. 4. Cure non -shrink grout with water saturated burlap for at least three days or with an application of Super Rez Seal cure and seal compound applied immediately after grout placement. 5. Do not operate machinery set on grout pads until the grout has cured for at least 24 hours. END OF SECTION 03600-2 SECTION 03700 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO EXISTING CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.O1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to cut, repair, demolish, excavate or . otherwise modify parts of existing structures or appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein, including connecting new concrete to existing concrete, as necessary to complete the work under this Contract. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Do not cut, remove, or otherwise alter existing structures or concrete until authorization is given by the Engineer. B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures, and when making openings in existing structures, take all precautions and use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, nor to damage the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Epoxy Bonding Compound: Two component, moisture insensitive, heavy viscosity, high strength, rigid epoxy system that will bond under dry, damp or wet conditions, and is equal to BurkEpoxy MV or BurkEpoxy Mortar as manufactured by The Burke Company, Sikadur Hi -Mod as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corp., or Euco 615 Epoxy as manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company. 03700-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Take field measurements in the required structures to determine the amount of concrete to be removed and/or repaired and the amount of patching to be done. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Where new concrete is to be made integral with existing concrete, use the methods shown in the Drawings. B. Mix and apply all bonding and patching materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.03 MODIFYING OR REPAIRING EXISTING CONCRETE A. Remove concrete to the depths shown or required. Roughen contact surface by chipping, sandblasting, scarifying or other approved methods. Thoroughly clean the surface, removing loose particles and dust. B. Cut off projecting reinforcement when required to provide at least 1 -inch cover. Where shown, bend reinforcement across cut face and cover with new concrete. C. Thoroughly wash the roughened concrete surfaces and keep the surfaces saturated for at least 6 hours before placing new concrete. Remove all free water prior to placing the concrete. An epoxy bonding compound, as specified, may be used in lieu of saturating surface for 6 hours. D. Place cement mortar, where required, to a thickness slightly in excess of the finished surface, and steel -trowel -finish, flush with the adjacent surface. E. When the finish surface of new concrete in exposed surfaces is not specified to be coated, match the color of the existing adjoining concrete as closely as possible. F. Mix cement mortar in the proportions of one part portland cement to two parts of sand by volume. Do not use accelerating admixtures in surface treatment. Where shown on the Drawings, use a non -shrink grout for patching and filling. 3.04 CONNECTIONS, NEW CONCRETE TO EXISTING CONCRETE A. Make connections to existing concrete as shown on the Drawings. B. Where it is necessary to expose existing reinforcement, clean the reinforcing rods 03700-2 or wire mesh by wire brushing and hook new reinforcement into existing reinforcement and lap or weld as directed. Provide at least 3/4 -inch clearance around each bar. C. Mix and apply the epoxy in strict accordance with the printed instructions of the approved manufacturer. D. Preparation of Concrete Surfaces: 1. Surfaces must be clean and sound. Surfaces may be dry, damp, or wet, but free of standing water. Remove dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds, impregnations, waxes, foreign particles, and disintegrated materials by mechanical abrasion methods such as sandblasting. Sandblast steel to appropriate finish. 2. If the concrete surfaces are sound and it is only necessary to remove laitance, grease or dust, the Contractor may, with the prior written approval of the Engineer, forego sandblasting and wash the concrete with a degreasing and etching chemical applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as stipulated in these Specifications hereinafter. 3. Degreasing and Etching Chemical: ProSoCo, Inc., Sure-Klean Degreaser & Etch, or equal. 4. Application of Degrease and Etching Compound: As per manufacturer recommendations. E. Application of Bonding Compound: 1. Cover the area to be overlayed with one coat of the epoxy compound applied with long -nap paint rollers, brushes, brooms, or by spray as per manufacturer's instructions. 2. Place the concrete while the epoxy compound is still tacky. If the bonding compound should harden before the concrete is placed, apply a fresh coat over the hardened coat and proceed. F. Application of Grouting: To prepare a grout for anchor bolts or to level base plates, mix the compound as recommended by the manufacturer. G. Weather Limitations: Place the epoxy compound only when both the concrete surface temperature and the ambient temperature are as recommended by the manufacturer. 03700-3 3.05 OPENINGS IN CONCRETE A. Where openings are required for pipes, thimbles for gates, gate stems or other installations in existing concrete structures, cut the existing concrete within the limits required, as shown on Drawings or specified, expose the existing reinforcing steel and perform the work in such a manner as to prevent damage to the existing adjacent structures or equipment. B. Unless otherwise permitted, line drilling will be required. C. Where concrete is cut to provide openings for gate stems, accurately install pipe sleeves and grout in place in an approved manner. 1. Clean the exposed reinforcement by wire brushing, then cut and bend to permit the installation and finally bend around the new pipe or thimble. Provide additional reinforcement as shown on the Drawings for typical reinforcing details of openings in walls and slabs, otherwise shown, specified or required. 2. After installation of pipelines and thimbles, etc., prepare the existing concrete as specified above and fill the void between the outside of the pipe or thimble and the existing concrete with non -shrink non-metallic grout. END OF SECTION 03700-4 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to provide a protective coating system for the surfaces listed herein and not otherwise excluded. All surfaces described, whether new or existing, shall be included within the scope of this section. B. The work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces such as ceilings, walls, floors, miscellaneous metal, doors, frames, transoms, roof fans, construction signs, guardrails, posts, pipes, fittings, valves, equipment, and all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified herein or on the Drawings. The omission of minor items in the schedule of work shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to include such items where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as stated herein. The following major items of the Project shall be painted: Interior of building gypsum walls and ceilings, exposed concrete block walls, and exposed concrete walls and ceilings. This shall include the interior walls and ceilings of the blower and electrical building. 2. Interior of the concrete water retaining structures. This shall include the interior concrete surfaces of the grit removal structure, bar screen structure, anaerobic tanks, first anoxic tanks, aeration tanks, second anoxic tanks, reaeration tanks, polymer mix box, clarifier flow splitter, new clarifiers, filter flow splitter, new filters, and new chlorine contact tanks. 3. Exposed surfaces of any ferrous metal or galvanized components of equipment (except stainless steel). 4. Exposed surfaces of PVC components of pipe, fittings, valves, electrical conduits, and equipment. 5. Exposed surfaces of equipment, pumps, and motors, ferrous metal or galvanized fittings and accessories (except stainless steel). 6. Exterior surfaces of all exposed interior and exterior metallic piping, fittings, and valves. Embedded aluminum or aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals. C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. D. The following items shall not be painted: 1. Any code -requiring labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. 2. Any moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Aluminum doors, windows, louvers, and other exposed members. 4. Stainless steel angles, tube, pipe, or other components. 5. Products with polished chrome, aluminum, nickel or stainless steel finish. 6. Flexible couplings, lubricated bearing surfaces, insulation and metal and plastic pipe interiors. 7. , Plastic switch plates and receptacle plates. 8. Signs and nameplates. 9. Finish hardware. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Paint piping and equipment for identification purposes in accordance with Section 09905: Piping, Valve and Equipment Identification System. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by approved paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. B. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. C. Undercoat and finish coat paints shall be compatible. 09900-2 D. Painting shall be accomplished by experienced painters specializing in industrial painting familiar with all aspects of surface preparations and applications required for this project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall include manufacturer's data and samples as indicated below and shall be prepared and submitted in time to provide adequate review by the Engineer. B. Samples - Painting: I. Paint colors will be selected by the Engineer with final approval by the Owner. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Samples of each finish and color shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any work is started. 3. Samples shall be prepared so that an area of each sample indicates the appearance of the various coats. For example, where three coat system is specified, the sample shall be divided into three areas: one showing the application of one coat only, one showing the application of two coats and one showing the application of all three coats. 4. Such samples when approved in writing shall constitute a standard, as to color and finish only, for acceptance or rejection of the finish work. 5. For piping, valves, equipment and miscellaneous metal work, provide sample chips or color charts of all paint selected showing color, finish and general characteristics. 6. Rejected samples shall be resubmitted until approved. 1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. Provide labels on each container with the following information: a) Name or title of material b) Fed. Spec. number if applicable 1 c) Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture �✓ d) Manufacturer's formula or specification number 09900-3 C) Manufacturer's batch number f) Manufacturer's name g) Generic type h) Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents i) Thinning instructions j) Application instructions k) Color name and number 2. Containers shall be clearly marked to indicate any hazards connected with the use of the paint and steps which should be taken to prevent injury to those handling the product. B. All containers shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent damage or loss of labels or containers. C. The Engineer shall designate areas for storage and mixing of all painting materials. Comply with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the building shall be provided by the Contractor and used for painting wastes. No plumbing fixtures shall be used for this purpose. D. Used rags shall be removed from the buildings every night and every precaution taken against spontaneous combustion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All paint shall be manufactured by one of the following and shall be their highest grade of paint: Carboline Company, ICI Paints and Devoe Coatings, or Tnemec Company, Inc. B. The following coating systems list a product by name to establish a standard of quality; other products of the same generic types may be submitted to the Engineer for approval. When other than the specified coating system is proposed, the Contractor shall submit on a typewritten list giving the proposed surface preparation, coatings (including proposed number of coats and dry film thickness), brand, trade name, generic type and catalog number of the proposed system for the Engineer's approval. US01111M C. Paint used in successive field coats shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Paint used in the first field coat over shop painted or previously painted surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to underlying paint. D. Emulsion and alkyd paints shall contain a mildewcide and both the paint and mildewcide shall conform to OSHA and Federal requirements, including Federal Specification TT -P-19. E. Any coating containing lead shall not be allowed. F. Rags shall be clean painters' rags, completely sterilized. 2.02 COATING SYSTEMS A. Class 1 Exposures - Exposed Concrete, Interior or Exterior (Building Interior Walls and Ceilings): Class 1 exposures consist of exposed interior masonry and concrete surfaces and shall include the following surfaces: 1. Surfaces To Be Coated: a) Surfaces of the interior block walls within the new buildings. b) Interior concrete walls, ceilings, columns, and beams of the new buildings. 2. Class 1 Coating System: a) Surface Preparation: Clean and mechanically abrade pre -cast or cast in place concrete per ASTM D4258 and D4259. Fill cracks, voids and other surface imperfections. Remove mortar droppings. Use a material specifically designed for the intended use, such as Carboguard 501 or 510, and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b) Primer Coat: Pre -cast or Cast In Place Concrete - None. Concrete Block — Epoxy Polyamide Amine. (1 coat @ 60 sq. ft. per gal.) (Carboline Sanitile 600) c) Finish Coats: Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy. (2 coats @ 5 mils DFT per coat) (Carboline Carboguard 890) 09900-5 B. Class 4 Exposures - Metal (Non -submerged Exterior/Interior, Subject To Moisture and Condensation): Class 4 exposures consist of interior or exterior metal surfaces that are not subject to submergence and shall include the following: 1. Surfaces To Be Coated: a) Pumps and Equipment. b) Aboveground piping, valves, conduit, and fittings. C) Miscellaneous steel shapes, angles, etc. d) Roof mounted equipment, hatches and ducts. e) Exposed surfaces of electric panels, conduit, ventilation fans, A/C units, and duct work, etc. f) Galvanized steel surfaces. 2. Class 4 Coating Systems: a) Surface Preparation: Ferrous Metal - degrease by solvent cleaning in compliance with SSPC-SP1 and sandblast clean to commercial blast surface (SSPC-SP6) all surfaces not shop primed or shop primed surfaces damaged during installation. Non -Ferrous Metal - degrease by solvent cleaning in compliance with SSPC-SP1. b) Prime Coat: Phenalkamine Epoxy (1 coat @ 5 mils DFT) (Carboline Carboguard 635) C) Finish Coat: Waterborne Acrylic (1 coat @ 3 mils DFT per coat) (Carboline Carbocrylic 3359) C. Class 5 Exposures - Plastic Conduit, Piping, and Valves: Class 5 exposures consist of PVC or other plastic piping or electrical systems requiring color coding, and exposed exterior plastic components. 1. Surfaces to be Coated: a) PVC and Plastic Piping, Valves and Fittings requiring color coding in accordance with Section 09905. b) Exposed exterior plastic piping and components subject to UV degradation. 2. Class 5 Coating System: a) Surface Preparation: Clean or wash with detergent to remove all dirt and foreign material. b) Finish Coats: Waterborne Acrylic (Prime (1st coat) @ 2 mils DFT; Carboline Carbocrylic 120) (Finish (2nd coat) @ 3 mils DFT; Carboline Carbocrylic 3359) D. Class 7 Exposures - Wood (Exterior/Interior): Surfaces to be coated: Class 7 exposures consist of exterior and interior exposed wood surfaces throughout the project work. 2. Class 7 Coating System: a) Surface preparation: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of all dust, dirt, grease, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, with either manual or mechanical means, as applicable, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of the priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finished surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried and dust off. b) Primer Coat: Waterborne Acrylic (1 coat @ 2 mils DFT) (Carboline Carbocrylic 120) C) Finish Coat: Waterborne Acrylic (1 coat @ 3 mils DFT) (Carboline Carbocoat 139) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. In addition to the aforementioned preparations, all dirt, rust, scale, splinters, loose particles, disintegrated paint, grease, oil and other deleterious substances shall be removed from all surfaces which are to be coated. 09900-7 B. Hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with painted surfaces and not to be painted shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations. C. Before commencing work, the painter must make certain that surfaces to be covered are in perfect condition. Should the painter find such surfaces impossible of acceptance, he shall report such fact to the Engineer. The application of paint shall be held as an acceptance of the surfaces and working conditions and the painter will be held responsible for the results reasonably expected from the materials and processes specified. D. Program the cleaning and painting so contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted surfaces. E. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster and stucco. to be painted by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. F. Clean ferrous substances, which are not galvanized or shop -coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. All welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth. All pits and dents shall be filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for painting. G. Surface profile as obtained from sandblasting shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer and verified using the press o tex film. 3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and directions, stirring materials before and during application to maintain a mixture of uniform density, free of film, dirt and other foreign materials. B. No thinners shall be used except those specifically mentioned and only in such quantity as directed by the manufacturer in his instructions. If thinning is used, sufficient additional coats shall be applied to assure the required dry film thickness is achieved. The manufacturer's recommended thinner or cleanup solvent shall be used for all clean-up. Application by brush, spray, airless spray or roller shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for optimum performance and appearance. 3.03 APPLICATIONS A. Paint all exposed surfaces in rooms scheduled for painting whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where the natural finish of material is obviously intended r 1 and specifically noted as a surface not be painted. Where items or surfaces are not �✓ specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If &ME color or finish is not designated, the Engineer will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems as specified. B. Color Selection for Color Coding: 1. Color Coding Piping: All exposed piping shall be identified as specified in Section 09905. Pipe identification system shall include color coding or banding, legends and arrows. 2. Color Coding Conduit: All exposed electrical conduit with conductors over 120 volts shall be color banded as specified in Division 16 and Section 09905. C. All painting shall be done by skilled and experienced craftsmen and shall be of highest quality workmanship. D. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the type of material being applied. E. All paint shall be at room temperature and the surface to be painted shall be dry and clean. F. Apply additional coats, when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. G. Paint shall be applied in a neat manner with finished surfaces free of runs, sags, ridges, laps and brush marks. Each coat shall be applied in a manner that will produce an even film of uniform and proper thickness. H. Paint surfaces behind moveable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. I. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match the exposed surfaces. J. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. K. Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise specified. L. The prime and intermediate coats as specified for the various coating systems may be applied in the shop by the manufacturer. The shop coats shall be of the type specified and shall be compatible with the field coat or coats. Such items as pumps, motors, equipment, electrical panels, etc. shall be given at least one touch up coat with the intermediate coat material and one complete finish coat in the field. 3.04 APPLICATIONS RESTRICTIONS A. Application of materials shall be done only on properly prepared surfaces as herein specified, and all exterior painting shall be done only in dry weather. Any surface coating damaged by moisture or rain shall be removed and redone as directed by the Engineer. B. In no case shall paint be applied to surfaces which show a moisture content greater than 15 percent. 3.05 MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS A. Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and per SSPC PA2 Standards. Minimum coating thickness shall be as specified above. B. Apply a prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. C. Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 3.06 FINISHES A. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. B. Complete Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specific requirements. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All completed surfaces will be checked by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide the necessary properly calibrated gauges. All nonferrous surfaces shall be checked for number of coats and thickness by use of a Tooke gauge. All ferrous surfaces shall be checked for film thickness by use of an Elcometer or Micro -Test magnetic dry film gauge properly calibrated. In addition, submerged tank linings and metals shall be tested for freedom from holidays and pinholes by use of a Tinker-Rasor or K -D Bird Dog Holiday Detector. All defects shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The presence of moisture shall be determined prior to coating by testing with a moisture detection device such as a Delmhors Model DB. 3.08 PROTECTION A. All other surfaces shall be protected while painting equipment, piping, etc. EZZ 1 B. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings, and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operation. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery nameplates and all machined parts not to receive paint. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to adequately protect structures, flooring, piping, equipment, and other work from all damage. 3.09 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall perform the work under this Section while keeping the premises free from accumulation of debris and rubbish and shall remove all scaffolding, paint cloths, paint, and brushes from the building and project site when completed. B. Cleaning: All paint brushed, splattered, spilled or splashed on any surface not specified to be painted shall be removed. 3.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Paint To Be Supplied To Owner: Upon completion of painting work, the Owner shall be furnished at no additional cost, one gallon of each type and color of finish paint for touching up. Paint container labels shall be complete with manufacturer's name, generic type, number, color and location where used. END OF SECTION zmm SECTION 09905 PIPING, VALVE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this Section consists of providing an identification system for piping systems and related equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: ANSI Standard A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications and other pertinent data. B. Schedules: 1. Provide a typewritten list of all tagged valves giving tag color, shape, letter code and number, the valve size, type, use and general location. 2. Provide a complete list of materials to be furnished and surfaces on which they will be used. C. Samples: 1. Provide a sample of each type valve tag supplied. 2. Provide a sample of each type of identification tape supplied. 3. Provide manufacturer's color charts for color selection by Engineer. 1.04 PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Except for locally mixed custom colors, deliver sealed containers with labels legible and intact. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store only acceptable project materials on project site. 2. Store in suitable location. 09905-1 3. Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied. 2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated. B. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not to be painted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials for painting shall conform to requirements of Section 09900. B. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be thep roduct of a single manufacturer. C. Aboveground piping shall be identified by self-adhesive pipe markers equal to those manufactured by W. H. Brady Company or equal. 1. Markers shall be of wording and color as shown in Table 09905-B. 2. Lettering shall be: a) 2 1/4 -inches high for pipes 3 inches diameter and larger. b) 1 1/8 -inches high for pipes less than 3 inches diameter. 3. Flow arrows shall be: a) 2 1/4 -inches by 6 inches for pipes 3 inches diameter and larger. b) 1 1/8 -inches by 3 inches for pipes less than 3 inches diameter. D. Buried piping shall be identified by identification tape installed over the centerline of the pipelines. 09905-2 1. Identification Tape for Steel or Iron Pipe: Identification tape shall be manufactured of inert plastic film so as to be highly resistant to alkalies, acids, or other destructive agents found in soil, and shall have a minimum thickness of 4 mils. Tape width shall be 6 inches and shall have background color specified below, imprinted with black letters. Imprint shall be as specified below and shall repeat itself a minimum of once every 2 feet for entire length of tape. Tape shall be Terra Tape Standard 250, or approved equal. 2. Identification Tape for Plastic or Non -Magnetic Pipe: Identification tape shall be manufactured of reinforced inert plastic film with a minimum overall thickness of 9.7 mils and shall have a 0.5 mil thick magnetic metallic foil core. The tape shall be highly resistant to alkalies, acids, and other destructive agents found in soil. Tape width shall be 3 inches and shall have background color specified below, imprinted with black letters. Imprint shall be as specified below and shall repeat itself a minimum of once every 2 feet for entire length of tape. Tape shall be TerraTape Sentry Line 1350, or approved equal. Identification Tape for Fiber Optic Cable Conduit: See Section (NIC) 4. Tape background colors and imprints shall be as follows: Imprint Pipe Service Backgroun d Color "Caution - Non -Potable Water NPW, EF, SA Green Pipe Buried Below" 5. Identification tape shall be "Terra Tape" as manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., Houston, TX, (800) 231-6074; Allen Systems, Inc., Wheaton, IL (800) 323-1749; or approved equal. E. Aboveground Valve Identifications: On all valves, the Contractor shall provide a coded and numbered tag attached with brass chain and/or brass "S" hooks. Tag Types: Tags for valves on pipe shall be brass or anodized aluminum. Colors for aluminum tags shall, where possible, match the color code of the pipe line on which installed. Square tags shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round tags shall indicate normally open valves. 2. Coding: In addition to the color coding, each tag shall be stamped or engraved with wording or abbreviations to indicate the valve service and number. All color and letter coding shall be approved by the Engineer. Valve service shall either be as listed in Table 09905, or by equipment abbreviation if associated with a particular piece of equipment. Valve numbering, shall be as approved by the Engineer and/or Owner. 09905-3 r� 1 F. A blue coded number (#) 14 gauge OF (Underground Feeder per NEC Article 339) solid �J tracer wire and joint seal (Kearney Aquaseal, Bishop or approved equal) shall be installed along all non-metallic pipes and services and must be taped below the spring line of the pipe and stubbed at hydrants and valves. At each valve, the wire shall be installed along the outside of the valve box to the adjustable piece (see WS 501). Sections of the wire shall be spliced together using Buchanon connectors or similar approved methods for splicing. Twisting the wire together is not acceptable. For directional bores, number (#) 10 OF solid tracer wire shall be used. The tracer wire must provide full signal conductivity (including splices), for the line locating equipment. G. Buried valves shall have valve boxes protected by a concrete pad. The concrete pad for the valve box cover shall have a 3 -inch diameter, bronze disc embedded in the surface as shown on the Contract Drawings. The bronze disc shall have the following information neatly stamped on it: Size of valve, inches 2. Type of valve: Valve numbers shall be as approved by the Engineer and/or Owner and valve number shall follow the valve type as listed below: a) GV - Gate Valve b) BFV - Butterfly Valve C) PV - Plug Valve Valve Service - See Table 09905 for abbreviations 4. Number of turns to fully open 5. Direction to open 6. Year of installation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT A. Piping color codes, and code labels for pipe identification shall conform to Table 09905. B. General Notes and Guidelines: Pipelines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be assigned a color by the Owner and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract. 2. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids, or semi -liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, 09905-4 fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit systems. 3. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are potential hazards shall be Safety Orange. 4. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards. 5. All in-line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. 6. All pipe hangers and pipe support floor standards shall be painted. C. All hangers and pipe support floor and accessories stands shall be painted to match their piping. The system shall be painted up to, but not including, the face of flanges or the flexible conduit connected to electrical equipment. Structural members used solely for pipe hangars or supports shall be painted to match their piping. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will contact concrete, mortar or plaster, the contact surface of the metals shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900. D. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted between and up to, but not including, the face of flanges or connections on the equipment. E. All insulated surfaces, unless otherwise specified, shall be given one coat of glue sizing, one prime coat and one finish coat. F. System code lettering, identification banding and arrows shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A 13.1 marked on piping as follows: Lettering and identification band colors shall be as shown in Table 09905. 2. Markers shall be placed no more than 20 feet apart with at least one marker on every straight run and additional markers at turns and where pipe passes through walls. 3. An arrow indicating direction of flow shall be placed adjacent to each marker. 3.02 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT A. Unless otherwise indicated or specifically approved, all fabricated equipment,shall be shop primed and finished. See Section 09900. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other cause. 09905-5 C. Where specified in other sections of these specifications for mechanical equipment, the Contractor shall apply field coat or coats of paint in accordance with Section 09900. If shop finish coat is unsatisfactory due to poor adhesion or other problems with primer or finish coats, coatings shall be removed and replaced by sandblasting, priming and finishing in accordance with Section 09900 and this Section. D. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, the Contractor shall protect all motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment found to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned. Equipment contaminated by grit in critical areas, such as bearings, gears, seals, etc., shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION TAPE A. Identification tape shall be installed for all buried water lines and chemical lines in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and as specified herein. B. Identification tape shall be installed 1 foot below final grade over centerline of pipe. 3.04 BURIED VALVES `1 A. In paved or concrete areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set flush with pavement or �✓ concrete top. In concrete areas, valve boxes shall be embedded. Following paving operations, a 24 inch square shall be neatly cut in the pavement around the box and the paving removed. The top of the box shall then be adjusted to the proper elevation and a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad poured around the box cover. Concrete pads in traffic areas shall be reinforced with No. 4 reinforcement bars as shown on the Contract Drawings. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. B. In unpaved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 0.20 -foot above finished grade. After the top of the box is set to the proper elevation, a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad shall be poured around the box cover. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. C. The bronze, valve identification disc shall be embedded in the concrete pad. 09905-6 Table 09905 COLOR CODES AND ABBREVIATIONS END OF SECTION 09905-7 pipe Conduit, Service Abbreviation Identification pipe, and Letter and Flow Band Color Valve Color Arrow Color Code Raw Water RW Green Lt. Gray Black. Electrical Conduit ----- ----- Interior - N/A w/Conductors 120 Volts or less Match adjacent wall or equipment color Exterior — Gray END OF SECTION 09905-7 SECTION 11211 VERTICAL TURBINE SUPPLY WELL PUMP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work covered in this Section shall consist of providing all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for furnishing six (6) potable water supply well pump and motor. The pumps shall be open lineshaft type vertical turbine pumps with bowl assemblies, column pipe, shaft and impellers, vertical motor, suction strainers, electrical connections, and all other materials necessary to provide a complete unit. The Supplier shall furnish complete O&M material, start-up assistance to the GC, and Owner training for the equipment as specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material Service Requirements: The pumps, motors and all related equipment shall be suitably constructed of materials to withstand the operating conditions which shall be experienced during the pump's performance and outside environment. B. Balancing: Pump units shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The vibration allowance in the units shall not exceed the upper limits as established by the Hydraulic Institute Standards. C. Tests: Each pump with its own drive motor shall be fully tested on water at the pump manufacturer's plant before shipment. Tests shall consist of checking the unit at its rated speed, head, capacity, required NPSH, efficiency and brake horsepower, and at such other conditions of head and capacity to properly establish the performance curve. Certified copies of test reports shall be submitted. The Standards of the Hydraulic Institute shall govern the procedures and calculations for these tests. During these tests the pumps with drive motors shall be checked for balance. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit six copies of the following for approval before fabrication: 1. Manufacturer's literature, illustrations and applicable data for the pumps. 2. The shop drawings shall include details of pump assembly; installation layout and procedures; piping and electrical connections and requirements; types of materials (� used in pump construction; details on all pump accessories, such as couplings, �✓ line shaft, discharge head, etc.; dimensions of major components; weights, structural and operating features, space required, clearances, type of finish or shop coat, and other pertinent data. 3. A list of manufacturer's recommended spare parts to be supplied, with the manufacturer's current price for each item. See Paragraph 2.05 D. List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 4. The following data shall be provided on the drive motor: materials of construction, dimensions, rpm at full load, frequency, voltage, full load current, code and design letter, efficiency, horsepower, number of phases, time rating, temperature rise, service factor and bearing life rating. The submittal shall include motor manufacturer's recommended lubrication requirements. B. Performance Curves: The Contractor shall submit the following for approval, prior to shipment from the factory. 1. Submit manufacturer's certified performance curves for each pump and motor combination furnished illustrating pump characteristics of head, discharge flow, efficiency, impeller size, motor speed, and horsepower for the full range of head conditions specified. 2. Curves shall be submitted on 8 1/2 -inch by 11 inch sheets, at as large a scale as is practical. Curves shall be plotted from no flow at shut off head to maximum pump runout head and gallonage allowed by the manufacturer. 3. Points of operation which cause bearing stress or shaft deflection in excess of the manufacturer's tolerances for continuous operation shall be indicated on the submitted curves. C. Submit the following for each proposed vertical turbine pump: Pump Manufacturer's Name 2. Pump Model No. 3. Rated Capacity gpm 4. Total Dynamic Head At Rated Capacity feet 5. Nominal Speed of Turbine RPM 6. Number of Stages 7. Length of Pumping Unit feet 8. Outside Diameter of Bowl inches 11211 -2 11211 -3 9. Size of Column Pipe inches 10. Length of Column Pipe feet 11. Size of Suction Connection inches 12. Size of Discharge Connection inches 13. Length from Centerline of Suction/Discharge inches Connection to Underside of Discharge Head 14. Length From Underside of Discharge Head to Bottom of Bowl Assembly feet 15. Size of Line Shaft inches 16. Type of Impellers 17. Discharge Head Model No. 18. Motor Manufacturer and Model No. 19. Motor NEMA Frame No. 20. Motor Horsepower HP 21. Motor Speed RPM 22. Motor Efficiency at Rated Capacity % 23. Actual Bowl Efficiency at Rated Capacity (Adjusted for Staging) % 24. Line Shaft Loss at Rated Capacity HP 25. Brake Horsepower of Pumping Unit at Rated Capacity BHP 26. Kilowatt Consumption Per Hour at Rated Capacity KW/hr 27. Field Efficiency of Turbine (Wire to Water) % 28. Hydraulic Thrust at Rated Capacity pounds 29. Weight of Line Shaft pounds 11211 -3 30. Total Thrust Load at Rated Capacity pounds 31. Capacity of Motor Thrust Bearing 32. Inside Diameter of well casing pounds inches B. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Submit six sets of installation, operation, and maintenance manuals. The operation and maintenance manuals shall have been prepared specifically for the model and type of pump furnished and shall not refer to other models and types of similar equipment. Disk copies of material submitted shall be provided in MS Word and ACAD Version 11 or 12. The operation and maintenance manuals shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Equipment function. 2. Description. 3. Normal and limiting operating characteristics. 4. Installation instructions (assembly, alignment and adjustment procedures). `1 5. Operation instructions (normal start-up and shutdown procedures, normal �J operating conditions and emergency situations). 6. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 7. Troubleshooting guide. 8. Parts list with catalog numbers and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 9. Drawings - cross sectional view, assembly and wiring diagrams. 10. Performance curves. 11211 -4 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is complete. B. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment. Pumps shall be prepared for shipment in accordance with API Standard 610. C. Finished surfaces of all exposed pump openings shall be protected by wooden blanks. D. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. E. After hydrostatic or other tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior to shipment, and proper care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of water during shipment, storage, and handling. F. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pumping unit being supplied against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of two (2) years from acceptance by owner or 30 months from shipment of the equipment, whichever is shorter. B. The equipment shall be under warranty to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Certifications: Furnish a written certification signed by the manufacturer's representative, that the installed equipment: Has been installed per manufacturer's requirements. 2. Has been lubricated per manufacturer's instructions. Has been accurately aligned and proper running clearances set. 4. Is free from undue stress imposed by piping or mounting bolts. 5. Is ready to be operated on a continuous basis, and is free from any known defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11211 -5 iJ 2.01 EQUIPMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Pump curves shall have no more than one specific flow rate corresponding to one specific head condition except for shut-off head. B. Material Service Requirements: Pumps and all related equipment shall be constructed of materials suitable for the intended applications. C. Data Plates: All data plates shall be of stainless steel suitably attached to the pump with stainless steel screws. Pump data plates shall contain the manufacturer's name, serial number, pump size and type, serial number, speed, impeller diameter, design capacity and head and other pertinent data. 2. Motor data plates shall contain the manufacturer's name and model number, rpm, HP, frequency, voltage, phase, efficiency, and service factor. D. Hardware: All machine bolts, nuts and cap screws shall be hex head type, stainless steel. Hardware requiring special tools or wrenches shall not be used. Anything other than stainless steel will not be accepted. E. Parts Numbering: Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Identical parts for separate units shall have the same number. F. Miscellaneous Parts: The equipment shall be furnished with shims, stainless steel anchor bolts, couplings, sheaves, belts, motor flanges, drive and belt guards and any other miscellaneous materials necessary to properly mount and install pump and motor. G. Painting: All external parts of the motor, drive unit, base, and accessories shall be primed and finish painted (1 coat) at the factory prior to shipping. Surface preparation and priming shall be suitable for complete protection of the metal surfaces prior to installation and finish painting. Field finish painting will be provided by the GC and will be a medium oil alkyd. Stainless steel parts will not be painted. 2.02 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP A. General: The vertical turbine pump shall be an open lineshaft type with a vertical drive hollow shaft motor capable of pumping from a new well at designed capacities as noted and shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA Standard El O1, latest revision, Vertical Turbine Pumps - Line Shaft and Submersible Types. B. Manufacturers: Sulzer/Johnston Model 12RMC - 4 stage; or approved equal 11211 -6 C. Potable Water Supply Well Pump: 1. Pumps Required: 6 2. Pump Size: 4 stage, 10 inch suction/column, 10 inch discharge 3. Speed: 1,770 RPM, maximum 4. Impeller: 8.88 inches (nominal) 5. Operating points: a) Primary point - 2000 GPM at 152 feet TDH at not less than 80 percent bowl efficiency, 77.5% overall pump efficiency b) Secondary point — 2200 GPM at 130 feet TDH c) Third Operating Point — 1600 GPM @ 175 feet TDH d) Shutoff - 265 feet TDH (minimum) 6. Motor: 100 HP, 1.15 S.F., 460V, 3 phase, 60 -Hz, 94.1 percent premium efficiency D. Bowl Assembly: Each pump shall be furnished with a three -stage pump bowl assembly. Pump bowls shall be cast 316L Stainless Steel ASTM A351 CF3M, free from blow holes, sand holes, and all other faults, accurately machined and fitted to close dimensions. Each bowl shall be fitted with Carbon-Babbitted bearings. Material certifications are required. E. Impeller: Pump impellers shall be cast 316L Stainless Steel ASTM A351 CHM, accurately machined and finished and shall be of the enclosed type. Impellers shall be hydraulically balanced and dynamically balanced to 4W/N at normal pump operating speed. They shall be securely fastened to the impeller shaft with Type 316 stainless steel keys, tapered bushings, or lock nuts. Impellers shall not be overhung but supported between bearings. Impellers shall be polished to a class'C' finish. Material certifications are required F. Impeller Shaft: 1. The ANSI Type Nitronic 50 (ASTM A-276 XM 19) pump shaft shall be turned, ground and polished over its entire length to a tolerance of 0.0005" T.I.R. per 10 feet of shaft length. Shaft lengths shall not exceed 10 feet in length. The size of the shaft shall be determined by the procedure described in AWWA Standard E101. Material certifications are required 11211 -7 W 2. Straightness and machining tolerance shall be as noted for lineshafts. G. Lineshafts: The line shafting shall be manufactured ofNitronic 50 (ASTM A-276 XM19) material, and shall be turned, ground and polished precision shafting of 1 3/16 -inch minimum size. The shaft couplings shall be of the same material as the lineshaft and designed with a safety factor of 1 1/2 times the shaft safety factor and shall have a left- hand thread to tighten during pump operation. The line shaft shall be coupled to the motor shaft (head shaft) above the seal box area. No section of the lineshaft shall be over ten (10) feet. To insure accurate alignment of the shafts, they shall be straight within 0.0005" T.I.R per 10 foot length length; the butting faces shall be machined square to the axis of the shaft; the maximum permissible error in the axial alignment of the thread axis with the axis of the shaft shall be 0.002 -inches in 6 inches. Material certifications are required. H. Bearing and Bearing Retainers: The lineshaft shall be supported by 316SS backed rubber bearings. Each bearing retainer shall be of 316L SS material and placed within each column flange. I. Column Pipe: The column pipe size shall be as noted. The column pipe shall be Schedule 10 made in 316L Stainless Steel, supplied with oversized flanged connections to accommodate a 1 " PVC Draw -down gauge tube to be supplied by the manufacturer. Each flanged column section shall not exceed 5' (five feet) in length. The column pipe flanges shall have register fits to insure proper alignment when assembled. Material certifications are required. The entire column pipe shall be pickled & passivated. J. Discharge Head: The discharge head shall provide for above ground mounting and be fabricated in 316L SS material, and shall provide machined surfaces for base support, motor attachment, discharge pipe flange attachment, and column pipe attachment. The seal box shall be constructed in 316L SS and be suitable for a John Crane type 1100 mechanical seal that will be furnished by the manufacturer. The discharge head shall have a 1/2 -inch NPT connection with a plug for a pressure gauge. Lifting lugs shall be provided with the capacity to support the weight of the entire pump unit. Material certifications are required. The entire discharge head shall be heat treated, pickled and passivated. K. Base Plate: A suitable base plate of fabricated 316 Stainless steel shall be provided and attached to the bottom of the discharge head. It shall be sized to match the dimensions of the well casing mounting plate and be capable of supporting the entire pump, motor and appurtenances. It shall be fitted with machine bolt holes as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2.03 PUMP MOTORS 11211 -8 A. The pump manufacturer shall be responsible for supplying the motors and shall ensure proper coordination for mounting of the motors on the pumps. He shall properly select and size the drive unit for each pump inclusive of thrust bearing capacity for all conditions as start-up, runout, and shutoff. B. The motor bearing loading for the driver shall include the total pump lineshaft downthrust. The motor bearings shall be designed to withstand any momentary total upthrust. C. Adjusting nut shall be provided at the top of the motor for varying the impeller clearance. D. The pump motor shall be a vertical, hollow shaft specially built NEMA Style "P" base, squirrel cage induction type, with low starting current and normal starting torque characteristics. The motor shall be designed for continuous operation with a 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz power supply with a maximum speed of 1800 RPM. E. Pump motor shall be provided with a non -reverse ratchet coupling assembly. Motor windings shall be triple dipped and baked with epoxy and finally shall be coated with a fungicidal varnish suitable for tropical environments. Rotation of the vertical shaft shall be counter clockwise when viewed from above. F. The motor shall be non -overloading, without use of the service factor, at any point on the driven pump's performance curve. The motor shall be NEMA Design B, and shall be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with applicable IEEE, NEMA, AFBMA and ANSI standards as manufactured by U.S. Electrical Motors, or an equal approved by the Engineer. Motors shall be given a short commercial test in accordance with IEEE standards and furnished with the following construction features: Construction: All cast iron construction for frame, end brackets, conduit box and fan shroud. Motor shall be supplied with lifting lugs bolts on the top of the motor. 2. Enclosure: Weather -Protected (WP -1) design with forced air circulation by integral fan. Openings for ventilation shall be uniformly spaced around the motor frame. Openings shall be screened with 1/8 -inch stainless steel mesh screen to prevent entry of large insects and rodents. 3. Horsepower: 100 HP 4. Efficiency: Premium, 94.1 percent at rated capacity 5. Insulation: Class H 6. Temperature Rise: Class B based upon 40 degrees C ambient 0 7. Service Factor: 1.15 S. Epoxy coated rotor and stator windings 11211 -9 11 9. Motor windings for stator and rotor and motor leads shall be manufactured using solid copper wire. 10. Shielded, regreasable, vacuum degassed steel ball bearings. Motor thrust bearings shall have ample capacity to carry the weight of all rotating parts plus the hydraulic thrust of the pump impellers with an ample safety factor. Minimum 13- 10 bearing life of 100,000 hours. 11. Stainless steel hardware, insect screens and grease plugs 12. Gasket between motor frame and conduit box 13. Gasketed cast iron conduit box, sized for 150% of NEMA minimum. 14. Stainless steel nameplate fastened with stainless steel pins 15. Accessories: Each motor shall be provided with a manually reset heat overload protection device to protect the motor from overheating during operation. The device shall immediately stop the drive motor in the event of excessive heat buildup. Motor shall be provided with a 120 -volt single phase strip heater to maintain a motor temperature of at least 40 degrees C, or 10 degrees C above ambient, whichever is greater. 16. Vibration and Sound Limits: Vibration shall not exceed Hydraulic Institute Standards and sound pressure level shall not exceed 67 dbA at 5 feet under full load conditions in accordance with IEEE Standard 85. 2.04 PUMP AND MOTOR COUPLING GUARD A. Provide a coupling guard on the pump base to prevent personal injury from the rotating pump and motor coupling. The guard shall be manufactured of stainless steel and shall comply with all applicable OSHA requirements. The guard shall be bolted or screwed to the pump base with stainless steel bolts and nuts or screws and shall be easily removable for access to the pump and motor coupling. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Sampling Tap and Pressure Gauge Tap: A stainless steel sampling tap shall be provided for the purpose of taking samples on each pump discharge line and for mounting of the GC -supplied pressure gauge. The gauge tap and sample tap shall be connected to the discharge head. B. Miscellaneous Parts: The equipment shall be furnished with shims, Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts, couplings, sheaves, motor flanges, and any other miscellaneous materials necessary to properly mount and install pumps and motors. 11211 - 10 M C. Lubricants: Pump and drive units shall be delivered with the equipment fully lubricated insofar as possible. If any point cannot be serviced, it shall be clearly marked to the effect that it is not lubricated and requires servicing prior to operation. An adequate supply of proper lubricant, with instructions for its application, shall be supplied with the equipment for each point not lubricated prior to shipment. D. Spare Parts: Furnish for each pump, the recommended spare parts, properly boxed and labeled for each pump, which are to include, as a minimum, the following: 2 sets of gaskets and O -rings 2. 2 mechanical seals 3. The pump manufacturer shall furnish a complete list of all recommended spare parts necessary for the first two (2) years of operation of the pumping unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide all necessary items to insure a complete and satisfactory installation of the pumping equipment including pump, electric motor, line shafting, column pipe, electrical connections and piping connections. Installation and concrete foundation will be provided by the GC. B. Hardware: Provide all anchor bolts, nuts and washers in Type 316 stainless steel. All brackets and the hardware items shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 3.02 FACTORY SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide for the services of a qualified factory service representative for up to two, 8 -hour days to provide verification of proper installation, startup assistance to the GC, and Owner training on the maintenance of the unit. B. After the equipment has been installed but before it is operated, the representative shall inspect the completed installation for soundness (no damaged or cracked components), completeness, correctness of setting and alignment, that the pump is free from stresses imposed by attached piping, and for the adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. The service representative shall assist in start-up of the equipment and instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance procedures. C. The service representative shall witness field tests conducted by the GC that indicate that pump efficiency and discharge capacity conforms to the Specifications. 11211 - 11 D. If the pump performance does not meet the Specifications, the pump shall be repaired or replaced with a pump which satisfies the conditions specified. E. Submit six copies of the result of this inspection, adjustments, and start-up. The report shall include descriptions of the inspection, adjustments made, and the start-up. The report shall also include a statement that the equipment is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. 3.03 PUMP CURVES A. Submit six (6) of the certified performance curve for each pump, 8 1/2 -inch by '11 inch in size, laminated in plastic. The pump curve shall indicate the pump number, type of service, manufacturer, model number, serial number, location in the plant and other data specific to the pump as required above for submittals. END OF SECTION 11211 - 12 SECTION 15000 MECHANICAL - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish all labor, materials, services, supplies, tools, equipment, transportation and facilities necessary to install complete and operable all mechanical equipment as shown on the Drawings and specified in this Division. B. Drawings and Specifications: The Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as complementary, one to the other, so that materials and work indicated, called for, or implied by the one and not by the other shall be supplied and installed as though specifically called for by both. The Drawings are to be considered diagrammatic, not necessarily shown in the detail or to scale all of the equipment or minor items. In the event of discrepancies between the Drawings and the Specifications, or between either of these and any regulations or ordinances governing work of this Division, the Bidder shall notify the Engineer in ample time to permit revisions. C. Safety Requirements: In addition to the components specified and shown on the Drawings and necessary for the specified performance, the Contractor shall incorporate in the design and show on the shop drawings all the safety features required by the current codes and regulations, including, but not limiting to, those of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and Amendments thereto. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment and materials used in this installation shall be new, of the best quality and, unless otherwise noted, shall be standard catalog items of the various manufacturers. B. Equipment and appurtenances shall be designed in conformity with ANSI (formerly ASA), ASME, IEEE, NEMA, OSHA, AGMA, and other generally acceptable applicable standards. They shall be of rugged construction and of sufficient strength to withstand all stresses that may occur during fabrication, testing, transportation, installation, and all conditions or operations. All bearings and moving parts shall be adequately protected against wear by bushings or other approved means. Provisions shall be made for adequate lubrication with readily accessible devices. C. Machinery parts shall conform to the dimensions shown on the working drawings within allowable tolerances. The corresponding parts of identical machines shall be made interchangeable. Protruding members such as joints, corners and gear covers shall be 15000- 1 Le finished in appearance. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth and the corners of structural shapes shall be rounded or chamfered. D. Clearances and Access: Ample clearance shall be provided for inspection and adjustment. All equipment shall fit the allotted space and shall leave reasonable access room for servicing and repairs. Greater space and room required by substituted equipment shall be provided by the Contractor and at his expense. Provide access panels at walls or ceilings for access to valves, dampers, equipment or any part requiring maintenance or service. Provide minimum sizes of 12 inches by 12 inches for hand access or 24 inches by 24 inches for personnel access. E. Safety Requirement: All machinery and equipment shall be safeguarded in accordance with the safety codes of the ANSI, OSHA, and local industrial codes. 2. The Contractor shall provide for each V -belt drive or rotating shaft a protective guard that shall be securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. The guard shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety requirements. 3. For fans, the belt guard shall be arranged so as not to restrict the air flow into the fan inlet. Guards shall not interfere with lubrication of equipment. 1.03 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. All machined surfaces and shafting shall be cleaned and protected form corrosion by the proper type and amount of coating necessary to assure protection during shipment and prior to installation. B. Oil lubricated gearing, bearings, etc. are to be shipped with an oil soluble protective coating as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. C. Motors, reducers and electric controls shall have the standard factory finish prior to delivery. D. Refer to Section 09905 for painting of equipment and piping and Section 09900 for painting. 1.04 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT A. Fabricated sub -assemblies, if any, shall be shipped in convenient sections as permitted by carrier regulations and shall be properly match -marked for ease of field erection. 15000-2 1.05 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. All piping and equipment shall be perfectly aligned, horizontally and vertically. Tolerances for piping and equipment installation shall be 1/2- inch in 30 ft. horizontal and vertically. All valves and operators shall be installed in the position shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer if not shown. B. The Contractor shall have on site sufficient proper construction equipment and machinery of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally encountered in work of this character. To minimize field erection problems, mechanical units shall be factory assembled when practical. C. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the foundations and supports at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer during installation. D. The equipment shall be brought to proper level by shims (1/4 -inch maximum). After the machine has been leveled and aligned, the nuts on the anchor bolts shall be tightened to bind the machine firmly into place against the wedges or shims. Grout shall be as specified in Division 3. E. The grout shall be tamped into position with a board, steel bar or other tool. Tamping should not be so hard as to raise or otherwise displace the plate. F. All equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to provide access for routine maintenance including lubrication. G. For equipment such as pumping units, which require field alignment and connections, the Contractor shall provide the services of the equipment manufacturer's qualified mechanic, millwright, machinist, or authorized representative, to align the pump and motor prior to making piping connections or anchoring the pump base. H. All rotating equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Unless otherwise specified, the vibration allowance in the units shall not exceed the upper limits as established by the manufacturer. Equipment of a portable nature which require no installation shall be delivered to a location designated by the Owner. All cutting and patching necessary for the work shall be performed by the Contractor. Where interferences occur, and departures from indicated arrangements are required, the Contractor shall coordinate the mechanical work with the other trades involved and make a determination as to changed locations and elevations of ductwork and/or piping and shall obtain approval from the Engineer for the proposed changes. 15000-3 K. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will contact concrete, mortar or plaster, the contact surface of the metals shall be coated, according to Section 09900. 1.06 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION AND SUPPORTS A. All foundations, platforms and hangers required for the proper installation of equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. B. All floor mounted equipment shall be mounted on a reinforced concrete pad of four inches in height as a minimum or as required by the Drawings. Concrete for pads shall be 3,000 lb. and shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300. Reinforcement shall be as shown on the Drawings or specified in Section 03200 and all edges shall be chamfered. C. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and protect all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances required for the installation of equipment. These shall be of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. D. Anchor bolts required or indicated by the Drawings shall be furnished and built into the concrete foundations. E. Structural steel supports and miscellaneous steel required for supporting and/or hanging equipment and piping furnished under this Division shall be provided and installed by Contractor. F. All foundations, anchor pads, piers, pipe supports, and structural steel supports shall be built to template and reinforced as required for loads imposed on them. G. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for sizes, locations and design of all foundations, anchor pads, piers, pipe supports, curbs and structural steel supports. 1.07 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. All rotating or reciprocating equipment unless otherwise directed shall be mounted on vibration isolators and provided with flexible connections to isolate the equipment from the structure and/or installation. B. Isolators shall produce uniform loading and deflections, regardless of equipment weight distribution, and shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such items and who publishes engineering and selection data. 15000-4 1.08 LUBRICATION A. The Contractor shall thoroughly lubricate all equipment in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Lubricating oils and greases shall be of type and viscosity as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. B. All lubricants shall be furnished by the Contractor. C. All systems requiring oil lubrication for gearing, bearings, etc., are to be flushed with flushing oils as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. This includes all gearings, bearings, etc., regardless of whether they have been shipped with or without oil soluble protective coatings. D. Following flushing, oil lubricated systems shall be filled with "run-in" oil as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. The equipment will be "run-in" at the no- load condition for a minimum period of 2 hours. Following "run-in" and inspection, the equipment is to be drained and flushed again with flushing oil as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. E. The schedule for the above procedures is to be submitted for review by the Engineer at least two (2) weeks prior to the selected procedure starting date. At this time inspection details can be worked out. F. The Contractor shall provide a one-year supply of all types of lubricants required for the various types of equipment furnished and installed under this Contract. Lubricants shall be in metal containers suitably labeled. 1.09 TEST OPERATION A. When equipment is required to be factory tested, the results of the tests shall be submitted to the Engineer and approval of the test results shall be obtained before shipment of the equipment. B. When an item of equipment, including controls and instrumentation, has been completely erected, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, who will designate a time to make such tests as required, and operate the item to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. "Completely erected" shall mean that the installation is erected, all necessary adjustments have been made, all required utility connections have been made, required lubricants and hydraulic fluid have been added and the unit has been cleaned up. C. Contractor shall furnish labor, lubricants, and all other materials, equipment and instruments necessary for all tests. 15000-5 1.10 FAILURE OF TESTS A. Any defects in the equipment, or deviations from the guarantees or requirements of the Specifications, shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor by replacements or otherwise. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the Contractor fails to correct any defects or deviations, or if the replaced equipment when tested shall fail again to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding his having made partial payment for such equipment, may reject that equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from the premises at the Contractor's expense. B. In case the Owner rejects a particular item of equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay the Owner all sums of money paid to him and the Owner agrees to deliver to the Contractor a bill of sale of all his rights, title, and interest in and to the rejected equipment provided, however, that the equipment shall not be removed from the premises until the Owner obtains from other sources other equipment to take the place of that rejected. The bill of sale shall not abrogate the Owner's right to recover damages for delays, losses or other conditions arising out of the basic Contract. The Owner hereby agrees to obtain the alternate equipment within a reasonable time and the Contractor agrees that the Owner may use the original equipment furnished by him without rental or other charge until the other equipment is obtained. 1.11 RESPONSIBILITY DURING TESTS A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. 1.12 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. Equipment which will require any manufacturer's service representative for the purpose of assisting and directing and installation and adjustment of equipment is noted in the applicable sections of this Division. All costs relative to services by equipment manufacturer's service representatives shall be borne by the Contractor. B. A letter of certification (check-out memo) shall be submitted to the Engineer from the manufacturer's representative upon completion of plant visit indicating that the equipment has been checked out and is in proper working order and that the plant personnel have been instructed in the proper use of the equipment. 15000-6 1.13 NAMEPLATES A. Provide identification nameplates for all equipment, controls, and apparatus where nameplates and/or data plates are not specified elsewhere. Equipment and apparatus nameplates shall be fabricated from 1 1/2 -inch high black laminated plastic with 1 inch high cut -in white letters, permanently secured with stainless steel screws. 2. Controls and switches shall be labeled with 1 inch high black laminated plastic with 1/2 -inch white letters to designate functions. 3. Nameplates schedule and sample shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. B. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with stainless steel data plate securely fastened in a conspicuous place and clearly inscribed with the equipment manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number and principal rating data. These data plates shall not be painted. 1.14 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Pipe Identification: All exposed pipe shall have code letters and flow arrows painted as per specification Section 09905. The mechanical contractor shall ensure that the pipes are properly marked. 2. All underground pipe shall be located by laying plastic warning tape continuously along the run of pipe as per specification Section 09905. B. Valve identification: On all valves, the Contractor shall provide a coded and numbered identification tag as per specification Section 09905. 1.15 EQUIPMENT CLEANING A. All equipment, piping, duct work, insulation and other work provided under this Division and to receive finish painting by the General Contractor shall be thoroughly cleaned and ready for finish painting. B. Thoroughly inspect all items of equipment and any items dented, scratched or otherwise damaged in any manner shall be replaced or repaired and painted to match original finish. All items so repaired and refinished shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for inspection and approval. 15000-7 1.16 SYSTEM CLEANING A. Each system of piping shall be blown through, washed out and/or flushed after completion to remove grit, dirt, sand, etc., from coils and piping for as long a time as required to thoroughly clean the apparatus. B. All elements within the system that may be damaged by the cleaning operation shall be removed or otherwise protected during the operation. C. Repair or replace any control valves or other system components which do not function properly due to damage during the cleaning operation or because of imperfect cleaning of any piping system. D. All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned as often as required and left in a clean condition at project completion. 1.17 PRESSURE TESTS A. After installation, all piping shall be pressure tested. Piping shall be tested in accordance with Section 15044. B. All tests shall be made in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative, and also to the satisfaction of any local or state inspector having jurisdiction. 1. Provide not less than three days notice to the Engineer and the authority having jurisdiction when it is proposed to make the tests. 2. Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject to mechanical or other injury in the opinion of the Engineer shall be retested in part or in whole as directed by the Engineer. 3. The piping systems may be tested in sections as the work progresses but no joint or portion of the system shall be left untested. C. All elements within the system that may be damaged by the testing operation shall be removed or otherwise protected during the operation. D. All defects and leaks observed during the tests shall be corrected and made tight in an approved manner and the tests repeated until the system is proven tight. E. Repair all damage done to existing or adjacent work or materials due to or on account of the tests. 111 0 F. Provide test pumps, gauges, and other instruments and equipment required for the performance of all tests. Provide all temporary bracing, test plugs, and additional restraint that may be required for test pressures above normal working pressures. G. All tests shall be maintained for as long a time as required to detect all defects and leaks but not less than the duration specified for each type of pipe or piping system in this Division. 1.18 PROTECTION OF PIPING, DUCT WORK AND APPURTENANCES A. All duct work, piping, appurtenances, and openings furnished and installed under this Division shall be protected from dirt, foreign objects, and damage during the construction period. Damaged piping, duct work or other appurtenances shall be replaced without additional cost to the Owner, should the damage occur prior to final acceptance of the work by the Owner. As soon as installed, all metal plated or polished fixture trimmings shall be thoroughly covered with noncorrosive grease that shall be maintained until all construction work is completed. B. Suitable precautions against freezing shall be taken during cold weather. C. All open ends of piping shall be closed by suitable cap or plug fitting to prevent obstruction and damage. D. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the work of other trades that may be damaged or disturbed in the course of this work and he shall restore it to the condition existing prior to damage without additional cost to the Owner. 1.19 FIRE HAZARD RATING A. All piping, duct work, and equipment insulation, fastener, and jacketing materials shall have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for flame spread, 50 for fuel contributed, and 50 for smoke developed. Rating shall be determined by ASTM Designation E84, "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". Corresponding ratings determined by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL -723, "Test Method for Fire Hazard Classification of Building Materials", will also be acceptable. B. Fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use shall be substantiated by test results from the National Bureau of Standards, a certified report from an approved testing laboratory, or a UL label or listing. C. Flameproofing treatments will not be accepted 15000-9 1.20 HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND DOMESTIC PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. Related documents: The General Provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Description of work: The work specified under this Section includes all labor, materials, services, supplies, tools, equipment, transportation and facilities necessary to furnish and install complete and operable heating, ventilating, and air conditioning as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. 2. The installation of this Section of the work shall be in accordance with the regulations and ruling of all authorities having jurisdiction over the work. Any changes required to accomplish the intent of these specifications shall be the Contractor's responsibility as to accomplishment and any extra cost for performing work. 3. The standard specifications that are referred to herein shall be the test revisions of such specifications. C. Related work: The Contractor shall furnish all electrical work associated with and including electrical controls, switches, contactors and starters for all equipment items requiring same. All work shall conform in all respects to the requirements of the applicable sections of Division 16. D. Interchangeability: In all design and purchasing, interchangeability of items of equipment, subassemblies, parts, motors, starters, relays, and other items is essential. All similar items shall be of the same manufacturer, type, model, and dimensions. 1.21 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit in conformance with the General Conditions for review by the Engineer, complete sets of detailed and dimensioned working shop drawings showing the construction of the proposed facility and installation of all equipment complete in every respect. B. Each drawing shall be indexed and/or referenced to the Drawings and Specifications. C. No work upon the manufacture or fabrication of any equipment shall be performed until the Engineer's review has been completed. 15000- 10 D. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish all necessary material and equipment, and to perform all work required by the Contract Documents. E. Certified performance data/curves shall indicate actual test performance of units furnished. The Contractor shall submit, with the certified shop drawings, layout drawings showing exact installation, piping and foundation details for the units being submitted. F. The various Sections in this Division specify additional requirements for shop drawings with which the Contractor shall comply. G. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the Section 01340. 1.22 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer before final acceptance and shall include the following minimum requirements: 1. Exact vertical and horizontal locations of all buried pipes and conduits, giving dimensions from fixed reference points. 2. Tanks and Structures: A survey shall show any deviations from contract drawings and such changes shall be reviewed prior to approval. 3. Ductwork: Drawings shall show routing of ductwork with indications of balancing dampers, splitter dampers, fire and smoke dampers, access doors, and fans or other items needing periodic maintenance. 4. Piping: Drawing shall show routing of piping indicating valves, cleanouts, and access panels. 1.23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Bound Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall furnish the specified number of sets of bound operation and maintenance manuals to the Owner. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be prepared in accordance with Section 01730, in addition to the following requirements. The manuals shall consist of catalog cuts, bulletins shop drawings, wiring diagrams, schedules, parts lists, procedures and other data showing the equipment installed and shall include the following: 1. System layout showing piping, valves and controls. 2. Approved wiring and control diagrams, with data to explain the detailed operation and control of each component. 15000- 11 e A control sequence describing startup, operation, and shutdown. 4. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment, including lubrication instructions. Parts lists and recommended spare parts. 6. Other data and instructions as specified under the various Sections. B. All data furnished shall conform to the installation as constructed. Cuts showing other equipment and data not applicable to the installation shall be crossed out and where practical shall be omitted from the manual. The assembly of the manual shall be in a logical manner and each section shall be indexed in the Table of Contents. C. Each manufacturer shall outline a maintenance procedure for his equipment installed and the Contractor shall then compile these procedures in a logical manner to provide a procedure for the operating personnel of the Owner to follow in their day to day operation of the facility. D. The materials shall be permanently bound into each manual between 3 -ring vinyl binding covers. The instruction booklets shall be approximately 9 inches by 12 inches and the diagram booklet large enough to contain the drawings without excessive folding so that they may be easily opened. E. The booklets shall be neatly entitled with a descriptive title, the name of the job, the location, year of installation, Owner, Manufacturer, Contractor and Engineer. Copies of drawings shall be in black on white background and shall be easily legible. The arrangements of the booklets, the method of binding, materials to be included and the composite text shall all be reviewed and approved by the Engineer and Owner. 1.24 FIELD INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion and start-up of the work and at a time designated, the Contractor shall provide the services of one or more project engineers to work in conjunction with the service engineers and suppliers'representative in instructing the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. The project engineer(s) shall also be required to start up and operate under normal working conditions the entire installation as a unit. These field instructions shall cover all the items contained in the bound instructions. The instruction period shall be given at the time the facility is operating under normal conditions. In addition to these requirements, the Contractor shall provide field instructions as specified under the various Sections of the Specifications. 15000- 12 1.25 FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS A. Approved wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system, including equipment, piping, valves and control sequence, framed in laminated plastic, shall be posted within the associated control panels or where directed by the Owner. In addition, condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal safety operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams. Proposed diagrams, instructions and other sheets shall be submitted for approval prior to posting. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems. 1.26 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work, materials, equipment, etc. against defects for a period of two years from the date of the final acceptance, that all the equipment has the capacity specified and that it will operate without excess noise or vibration caused by improper installation. In addition to the guarantee, the Contractor shall provide the performance warranties as specified for the equipment in the various sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 15000- 13 SECTION 15044 PIPING MATERIALS, DESIGNATION, AND PRESSURE TESTING PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: This section specifies the pneumatic, hydrostatic, and leakage testing of piping and acceptable piping materials for each application. The piping designations (mark) are also indicated. 2. Piping Materials: Piping materials for the various services shall be as shown in Table 15044, except that any piping materials designated on the drawings shall supercede Table 15044. C. Test Pressures: Test pressures for the various services and types of piping are shown in Table 15044, or if not shown, shall be calculated at 1.5 times maximum working pressure. Any exceptions to the pressure test schedule are shown on the Contract Drawings. D. Testing Records: 1. Provide a record of each piping installation during the testing. These records shall include: a) Date of test. b) Identification of pipeline tested or retested. C) Identification of pipeline material. d) Identification of pipe specification. e) Test fluid. f) Test pressure. g) Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of repairs, or corrections made. 15044- 1 h) Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured conformed to the specifications. i) Signature of Owner's representative witnessing pipe test. 2. Submit five (5) copies of the test records to the Engineer's representative upon completion of the testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Testing fluid: Water unless a pneumatic test is indicated. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide pressure gauges, pipes, bulkheads, pumps, and meters to perform the hydrostatic and pneumatic testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING PREPARATION A. Pipes shall be in place with joints restrained and/or anchored before commencing pressure testing. B. Conduct hydrostatic and pneumatic tests on exposed and aboveground piping after the piping has been installed and attached to the pipe supports, hangers, anchors, expansion joints, valves, and meters. C. Before conducting hydrostatic tests, flush pipes with water to remove dirt and debris. For pneumatic tests, blow air through the pipes. D. Test new pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines by isolating the new line from the existing line by means of pipe caps, special flanges, or blind flanges. After the new line has been successfully tested, remove caps or flanges and connect to the existing piping. E. Conduct hydrostatic tests on buried pipe after the trench has been completely backfilled. The pipe may be partially backfilled and the joints left exposed for inspection for an initial leakage test. Perform the final test, however, after completely backfilling and compacting the trench. 6. Testing of piping under structures shall be completed prior to beginning construction of the structure. In the case of concrete encased piping, the pressure test shall be conducted 15044-2 after the concrete encasement has been placed and cured, but prior to beginning construction of any structure above the piping. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Hydrostatic Testing of Aboveground or Exposed Piping: Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air while the pipe is being filled. Subject the piping system to the test pressure indicated. Maintain the test pressure for a minimum of four hours. Examine joints, fittings, valves, and connections for leaks. The piping system shall show no leakage or weeping. Correct leaks and retest until no leakage is obtained. B. Hydrostatic Pressure and Leakage Testing of Buried Piping: 1. All components of pressure mains including pipe, fittings, and valves shall be tested following installation in accordance with applicable portions of ANSI/AWWA, C 600, latest revision. 2. All pumps, gauges and measuring devices shall be furnished, installed, and operated by the Contractor and all such equipment and devices and their installation shall be approved by the Engineer. All pressure and leakage testing shall be done in the presence of a representative of the Owner and the Engineer as a condition precedent to the approval and acceptance of the system. 3. Water for testing and flushing shall be clean water provided by the Contractor from a source approved by the Engineer. 4. Hydrostatic testing shall commence only after a minimum of 36 hours have elapsed after the last concrete reaction or thrust block has been cast using high early strength concrete, or at least 10 days after the last concrete reaction or thrust block has been cast using standard strength concrete. 5. Pressure piping shall be hydrostatically tested to the pressure specified in Table 15044 at the end of this Section for a minimum duration of three hours. The test pressure shall not vary by more than ± 5 psig. 6. Procedure for Hydrostatic Testing: a) Each section of the pipe to be tested shall be slowly filled with water. 15044-3 b) During filling of the pipe and prior to testing, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If permanent automatic or manual air release valves are not located at all high points, the Contractor shall install temporary air vents at all high point, complete with tapping saddle, corporation stop, fittings and valves. Following completion of testing, the taps shall be tightly plugged unless otherwise specified. 7. Apply the specified test pressure, measured at the point of highest elevation in the pipe, by means of a test pump connected to the pipe in a manner approved by the Engineer and the Owner. 8. A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the hydrostatic pressure test. Leakage shall be defined by a measured quantity of water that must be supplied from a calibrated container into the newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof, to maintain pressure within ± 5 psi of the specified test pressure, after the air in the pipe has been expelled and the pipe has been completely filled with water. 9. Allowable leakage shall be limited to the following formula as set forth in ANSI/AWWA C 600 latest revision, or to Table 6 of ANSI/AWWA C 600. The maximum allowable leakage shall be the minimum quantity of the three values as determined by the following formulas or obtained from Table 6. The allowable leakage formulas are: L) a) 10 gpd/inch diameter/mile b) L = SD P �' 148,000 in which: L is the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipe tested, in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches; and P is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gauge. 10. During the hydrostatic and leakage tests, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, pipe couplings, and the like will be carefully examined. Acceptance of the pipe shall be determined on the basis of the allowable leakage. If any test of the pipe laid indicates leakage greater than that allowed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, repair by removing and replacing defective pipe, fittings, valves, pipe couplings, and the like, with materials that are free of defects, after which the pipe shall be retested. Repair and retesting shall be done until the pipes pass the specified test. All visible leaks and cracked pipe, fittings, valves, pipe couplings, and the like shall be repaired or replaced regardless of the amount of leakage. [KI C. Infiltration/Exfiltration Testing For Gravity Drain Pipes: 1. All gravity drain pipes shall be tested for infiltration and exfiltration. The infiltration/exfiltration test shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner. 2. The allowable limits of infiltration or exfiltration or leakage for the drain pipes, or any portion thereof, shall not exceed a rate of 0.04 gallons/inch of diameter/hour/100 feet of pipe. 3. Any part, or all of the system may be tested for infiltration or exfiltration, as directed by the Engineer. Prior to testing for infiltration, the system shall be pumped out so that normal infiltration conditions exist at the time of testing. The amounts of infiltration or exfiltration shall be determined by pumping into or out of drums, measured by means of a calibrated V -notch, sharp crested weir constructed in a rigid sealed frame of the correct size for the drain pipe being tested, or by other approved methods. 4 The water tightness of the drain pipe which has a crown lying below the normal groundwater level shall be tested by measuring the infiltration. The water tightness of drain pipes having a crown 1 inch or more above groundwater level shall be tested by filling the pipe with water to produce a hydrostatic head of 2 feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or to a depth equal to the normal wet season groundwater table outside the drain pipe, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. For the exfiltration test, the trench excavation shall remain dewatered as required throughout the test. 5. For the exfiltration test, the water level in the drain pipe section being tested shall be allowed to stabilize a minimum of one hour before beginning the test. Following the one hour stabilization period, water loss shall be measured from the drain pipe system for a continuous test period of two hours. Upon application of internal hydrostatic pressure for exfiltration testing, care shall be taken to preclude unseating the joint gaskets for a specific type of pipe by exceeding the pressure capability thereof. 6. Where infiltration or exfiltration exceeds the allowable limits specified herein, the defective pipe, joints, or other faulty construction shall be located and repaired by the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot be located, the Contractor shall remove and reconstruct as much of the work as is necessary in order to conform to the specified allowable limits. 7. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials and shall conduct all testing required, under the direction of the Engineer. 15044-5 D. Pneumatic Testing: Test Pressure: Minimum 1 '/2 times working pressure. 2. Perform pneumatic testing using nitrogen. Perform tests only after the piping has been completely installed including supports, hangers, and anchors. Protect test personnel and Owner's operating personnel. Secure piping to be tested to prevent the pipe from moving and to prevent damage to adjacent piping and equipment. Remove or isolate from the pipe any appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by the test, prior to applying the test. 3. Apply an initial pneumatic leakage test of 25 psig to the piping system prior to final leak testing. Examine for leakage, detected by soap bubbles, at joints and connections. After correcting visible leaks, gradually increase the pressure in the system to not more than one-half of the test pressure. Then increase the pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure has been reached. Continuously maintain the pneumatic test pressure for a minimum time of four hours and for such additional time as may be necessary to conduct a soap bubble examination for leakage. The piping system shall show no leakage. Correct any visible leakage and retest. E. Vacuum Testing: 1. Test Pressure: Minimum 1 '/2 times working vacuum pressure. 2. Perform vacuum test after performing a pneumatic test (as previously specified) on all lines scheduled for vacuum testing. Develop a vacuum in the entire line being tested by use of temporary mechanical means and as measured by attached gauges. Develop vacuum slowly until test vacuum pressure has been achieved. Vacuum must hold for 4 hours without significant loss in vacuum pressure to demonstrate a leak proof system. TABLE 15044 PIPING PRESSURE TEST SCHEDULE AND MATERIAL LISTING Service Mark Test Pressure (in psig) Pipe Material Raw Water RW 150 C-905 PVC DR 25 END OF SECTION 15044-6 SECTION 15050 PROCESS AND UTILITY PIPING, FITTINGS, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: The work included in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials and in performing all operations necessary for the construction or installation of all process and utility piping, valves, valve boxes and all castings and appurtenances within, adjacent and connecting to pump stations, and inside the limits of the work shown, complete and ready for operation as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construction Requirements: All underground pipes shall be installed with at least 36 inches of cover, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. For underground utilities, changes in horizontal alignment of less than 11 1/4 degrees may be achieved through the use of allowable pipe deflection in lieu of fittings shown on the Contract Drawings at the Contractor's option, but subject to approval of the Engineer as to layout. Said deflection shall not exceed 80 percent of the maximum allowable deflection as stated in the pipe manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Pipe Inspection: The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturers a certificate of inspection to the effect that the pipe and fittings supplied for this Contract have been inspected at the plant and that they meet the requirements of these specifications. 2. All pipe and fittings shall be subject to visual inspection at time of delivery by rail or truck and also just before they are lowered into the trench to be laid. Joints or fittings that do not conform to these specifications will be rejected and must be removed immediately by the Contractor. 3. The entire product of any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the methods of manufacture fail to secure uniform results, or where the materials used are such as to produce inferior pipe or fittings. 15050- 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. In general, the following shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to construction: a) Mill test certificates or certified test reports on pipe and fittings, coatings and linings. b) Details of restrained and flexible joints. C) Fire hydrants, backflow preventers. d) Valve boxes. e) All valves, including gate, plug, butterfly, ball, check, telescoping, automatic air release, etc. f) Couplings. g) Service saddles. h) Pressure gauges. i) Flexible expansion joints and tie rods. j) Joint lubricant. k) Detailed piping layout Drawings and pipe laying schedule (see below). 1) Temporary plug and anchorage system for hydrostatic pressure test. m) Tie rods. n) Valve and meter vaults. 2. Tabulated layout schedule for each pipe system including: a) Pipe invert station and elevation at each change of grade and alignment. b) The limits of each reach of pipe thickness class and of restrained joints. c) The limits of each reach of concrete encasement or encasement in casing. 15050-2 d) Locations of valves and other mechanical equipment. e) Methods and locations of supports. f) Details of special elbows and fittings. 3. A separate shop drawing submittal will be required for each major item listed above and for each different type of an item within a major item. For example, separate submittals will be required for gate, plug, butterfly, ball, check and automatic air release valves. All submittals shall be in accordance Section 01340. B. Acceptance of Material: 1. The Contractor shall furnish an Affidavit of Compliance certified by the pipe manufacturer that the pipe, fittings and specials furnished under this Contract comply with all applicable provisions of current AWWA and ASTM Standards and these Specifications. No pipe or fittings will be accepted for use in the work on this project until the Affidavit has been submitted and approved by the Engineer. 2. The Owner reserves the right to sample and test any pipe or fitting after delivery and to reject all pipe and fittings represented by any sample which fails to comply with the specified requirements. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit operation and maintenance manuals for valves, hydrants, backflow preventers, and other applicable components requiring periodic maintenance and/or explanation of operation. Manuals shall be prepared in accordance with Section 01730. Information shall include: 1. Detailed assembly Drawings, clear and concise instructions for operating, adjusting, overhauling, troubleshooting and other maintenance. Include shop drawings previously submitted and approved with all corrections made. 2. A complete lubrication schedule including lubricant types, grades and frequency of lubrication. 3. A list of parts for all products with catalog numbers and all data necessary for ordering replacement parts. Such instructions and parts lists shall have been prepared for the specific product furnished and shall not refer to other types or models. 15050-3 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. During shipping, delivering and installing pipe, fittings, valves, backflow preventers, and accessories, they shall be handled in such manner as to ensure a sound undamaged condition. B. Particular care shall be taken not to damage the pipe coating. C. Insides of valves and backflow preventers shall be kept free of dirt and debris. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Water in Excavation: Water shall not be allowed in the trenches while underground pipes are being laid and/or tested. The Contractor shall not open more trench than the available pumping facilities are able to dewater to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for disposing of all water so as not to injure or interfere with the normal drainage of the territory in which he is working. In no case shall the pipelines being installed be used as drains for such water, and the ends of the pipe shall be kept properly and adequately plugged during construction by the use of approved stoppers and not by improvised equipment. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent the entrance of mud, sand, or other obstructing matter into the pipelines. If on completion of the work any such material has entered the pipelines, it must be cleaned as directed by the Engineer so that the entire system will be left clean and unobstructed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to allow either ductile iron pipe or PVC pipe for water and sewer lines 3 inches in diameter or larger, unless one pipe material is expressly called for on the drawings or defined in Section 15044. 2.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI, A 21.51 and AWWA C 151, latest revision. The underground pipe shall have a minimum pressure class of Class 350 for diameters 4 to 12 inches in size and a minimum pressure class of Class 250 for diameters larger than 12 inches in size. Flanged pipe shall have a minimum thickness class of Class 53. B. Pipe shall have a minimum rated water working pressure of 250 psi and shall be furnished in nominal laying lengths of 20 feet or less, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. 15050-4 C. Lining and Coating: The applicator firm and personnel shall be certified, experienced, and qualified to perform the application of the lining and coating materials specified herein. All ductile iron pipe and ductile iron fittings shall have the linings and coatings applied and warranted by the same applicator firm. The applicator firm shall submit certification attesting that it met the requirements of this specification and the requirements of the lining and/or coating materials manufacturer's application specifications. The pipe lining material shall be applied to new, unused, never lined ductile iron pipe and fittings. The pipe and fitting linings and coatings shall be tested for freedom from holidays and pinholes by use of a Tinker-Rasor or K -D Bird Dog Holiday Detector. The pipe and fittings shall be lined and coated as specified below. Interior Lining for All Piping Except Potable Water, Raw Water, Reclaimed Water, and Substandard Effluent Piping: Ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials shall be coated with Protecto 401, a high build multi-component amine cured Novalac epoxy polymeric lining manufactured by Indurall Coatings, Inc., Birmingham, Alabama, or approved equal. The interiors of the ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials shall receive 40 mils DFT of the protective lining. Storage, surface preparation, application and safety precautions shall strictly follow manufacturers instructions. The applicator of the interior lining shall be approved by the lining manufacturer and written certification of such approval shall be submitted to the Engineer before any lining work is initiated. Applicator firms not having lining manufacturer's written approval will not be considered. 2. Interior Lining for Potable Water, Raw Water, Reclaimed Water, and Substandard Effluent Piping: Ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials shall be cement lined in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 104, current revision, "Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water". The cement lining shall have standard thickness and, after curing, the lining shall have a seal coat of bituminous material in accordance with AWWA C 104, current revision. 3. Exterior Coatings for Buried Pipe: Ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials to be installed underground shall be coated on exterior at the factory with an asphaltic coating as specified in AWWA C 151. All clamps, bolts, nuts, studs and other uncoated parts of joints for underground installation shall be coated with coal tar epoxy prior to backfilling. Coal tar epoxy shall be equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 4. Exterior Coating for Exposed Pipe: Ductile iron pipe, fittings and specials to be installed aboveground shall be furnished with a shop applied primer on the exterior. The shop primer shall be as specified in Section 09900 -Painting. 15050-5 5. Polyethylene Pipe Encasement: a) Polyethylene tube encasement shall be provided and installed for all buried ductile iron pipe. Both material and installation procedures shall be in accordance with AWWA C 105. b) The polyethylene encasement shall be a minimum of 8 mil thick and shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide suitable protection of pipe installation in corrosive soil. c) All pipe joints shall consist of a minimum of one foot of polyethylene overlap onto the adjacent pipe at both ends. All overlap material shall be secured in place with at least two wraps of 1 '/z -inch x 8 mils polyethylene adhesive tape. Any slack liner material along the pipe barrel shall be taken up by folds secured in-place with adhesive tape. Repair any rips, punctures or other damage to polyethylene with tape or by patching. d) All valves, fittings_ and specialty items shall be jointed with proper overlaps and fastening as described above. Prepare openings for service taps, air -relief connections, etc., by making a cut in the polyethylene and temporarily folding back the edges. After installation is completed, replace the polyethylene and repair the cut with polyethylene adhesive tape. e) Care shall be taken during backfilling so that no damage will occur to the polyethylene liner. In general, backfilling shall be done in accordance with AWWA Standard C 600. f) The Contractor shall install polyethylene encasement in accordance with all liner and pipe manufacturer recommendations. D. Fittings: Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be either mechanical joint, restrained joint or flanged joint as indicated on the Drawings and shall have a minimum working pressure of 250 psi. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 110, ANSI/AWWA C 111 and ANSI/AWWA C 153, latest revisions for flanged and mechanical joint pipe. Fittings shall be coated and lined as specified above for ductile iron pipe. The rubber gaskets for flanged, mechanical, and push -on joints shall be as described below. E. Push -On Joints: Pipe using push -on joints shall be in strict accordance with AWWA C 111 and ANSI A21.11, latest revision and shall be as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Company (Fastite Joint), United States Pipe Company (Tyton Joint), or Clow Corporation (Super Bell Tite Joint). Jointing materials shall be provided by the pipe manufacturer and installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended practice. 15050-6 F. Mechanical Joints: Jointing materials for mechanical joints shall be provided by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. Materials assembly and bolting shall be in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 111 and ANSI/AWWA C 153, latest revisions. Tee head bolts and nuts for mechanical joints shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel as manufactured by NSS Industries, Plymouth, Michigan or an equal approved by the Engineer. G. Flanged Joints: Flange drillings shall be Class 125 per ANSI B 16.1 with any special drilling and tapping as required to insure correct alignment and bolting. 1. Gaskets: Fullface, 1/8 -inch thick, cloth -inserted rubber: Johns -Manville No. 109, John Crane Co., Style 777, or approved equal. Gaskets shall be suitable for a water pressure of 350 psi at a temperature of 180°F. 2. Bolts and Nuts for Flanges: a) Bolts and nuts for flange located outside above ground or indoors and in enclosed vaults and structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B. b) Bolts and nuts for buried and submerged flanges and flanges located in wet wells, and manholes shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade 138M for bolts, and ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for nuts. 3. Flanges shall be long -hub type screwed tightly on pipe by machine at the foundry prior to facing and drilling. Flange machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor immediately after facing and drilling. Field assembled screwed on flanges are prohibited. H. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be provided for all piping systems in accordance with the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA) Standards, to restrain system thrust. Restraint calculations shall be based on pipe laying condition type 4 and soil type SM. Pipe joints and fittings shall be restrained as specified below. 1. Manufactured Restrained Joints: Manufactured restrained joints shall be Flex -Ring, Lok -Ring, Lok -Fast or Fast Grip, manufactured by the American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Lok -Type or Tr -Flex Type, manufactured by the United States Pipe Company or an equal approved by the Engineer. Joints shall be manufacturer's standard specifically modified push -on type joints with joint restraint provided by ductile iron retainer rings joined together by corrosion resistant, high strength steel tee head bolts and nuts or with joint restraint provided by a welded -on retainer ring and a split flexible ring assembled behind the retainer ring. 2. Restrained joint pipe and fittings shall be ductile iron only and shall comply with applicable portions of this specification. Manufactured restrained joints shall be 15050-7 capable of deflection during assembly. Deflection shall not exceed 80 percent of the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Tee head bolts and nuts for restrained joints shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel as manufactured by NSS Industries, Plymouth, Michigan, or an equal approved by the Engineer. 4. Surcharged gravity pipes shall be restrained as pressure pipes. I. Alternate Restrained Joints: Ductile iron pipe fittings with mechanical joints may also be restrained, at the Contractor's option, using a follower gland which includes a restraining mechanism. When actuated during installation, the restraining device shall impart multiple wedging action against the pipe wall which increases resistance as internal pressure in the pipeline increases. The joint shall maintain flexibility after installation. Glands shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 and restraining devices shall be of heat treated ductile iron with a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. The gland shall have standard dimension and bolting patterns for mechanical joints conforming to ANSI/AWWA C 111 and C 153, latest revisions. 2. Tee head bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant, high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel in accordance with ASTM A 242. 3. The restraining wedges shall have twist -off nuts to insure proper torquing. The mechanical joint restraint device shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 250 psi with a minimum safety factor of 2 to 1 and shall be MEGALUGR as manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc. No other retainer gland type device will be acceptable. After installation prior to backfilling, all parts of the joint restraint system shall be coated with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. Identification: All buriedpiping shall receive a color -coded adhesive identification tape as specified in Section 09905. 2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Small Gravity Drainage Piping: PVC pipe smaller than 4 inches nominal diameter used for gravity drainage piping shall be Schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM D 1785. Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall have solvent welded joints as specified for PVC pressure pipe. B. Large PVC Gravity Piping: PVC pipe and fittings 4 inches nominal diameter and larger for wastewater gravity sewer lines and services shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 3034, latest revision, with a standard dimension ratio (SDR) 35. PVC pipe shall be suitable for use as a wastewater gravity sewer conduit. Pipe shall have integral wall 15050-8 bell and spigot joints. The pipe bell shall have the same strength as the pipe. Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of 20 ft. The PVC gravity sewer pipe and fittings shall be as manufactured by J -M Manufacturing Company, Inc., or an equal approved by the Engineer. 1. Bell and Spigot: Pipe joints shall be an integral wall bell and spigot with a solid cross section, elastomeric ring gasket which shall conform to the manufacturer's standard dimensions and tolerances and meet the requirements of ASTM D 3212, latest revision. The elastomeric ring gasket shall be factory assembled in the pipe bell and securely locked in place to prevent displacement during jointing in the field. PVC pipe bell, gasket and spigot shall be "Ring Tite" as manufactured by J- M Manufacturing Company, Inc., or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2. Fittings: All fittings and accessories shall be manufactured of PVC in accordance with the same specifications as PVC pipe of the same size. Fittings shall have bell ends with elastomeric gaskets which conform to the same dimensions, tolerances and specifications as the PVC pipe. Fittings shall be manufactured and furnished by the pipe manufacturer. C. Small PVC Pressure Piping: Unless otherwise specified, PVC pressure pipe smaller than 4 inches nominal diameter shall be Schedule 80 PVC in accordance with ASTM D 1785. Schedule 80 pipe shall have either solvent welded or threaded joints. PVC pressure pipe shall bear the approved seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). PVC pipe that is exposed to sunlight shall be manufactured with additives to provide resistance to ultraviolet deterioration. Fittings: Socket type, solvent welded fittings for Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall be in conformance with ASTM D 2467. Threaded type fittings for Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall be in conformance with ASTM D 2464. All solvent welded or threaded joints shall be watertight. 2. Flanges: Flanges for Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall be rated for a 150 psi working pressure with ANSI B 16.1 dimensions and bolting pattern. Flanges shall be connected to PVC piping with either solvent welded or threaded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2467 or ASTM 2464, respectively. Gaskets shall be full faced type with a minimum thickness of 1/8 -inch. Nuts and bolts shall be hexagonal with machine threads, manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 320, Class 2. Type 316 stainless steel flat washers w/lock washers shall be used against PVC flanges. 15050-9 3. Solvent Cement: PVC solvent cement shall be in compliance with ASTM D 2564 and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Thread Lubricant: Lubricant for Schedule 80 threaded joints shall be a plastic pipe dope recommended by the pipe manufacturer or Teflon tape. D. Large PVC Pressure Piping: Unless otherwise noted, PVC pressure pipe for nominal diameters 4 to 12 inches in size shall conform to the requirements ofAWWA C 900 with a dimension ratio of DR! 8, a pressure class of 150 psi and gasketed integral bell ends, and for nominal diameters larger than 12 inches in size shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C 905 with a dimension ratio of DR18, a pressure class of 235 psi and gasketed integral bell ends. Pipe shall be designed with not less than a 4 to 1 sustained hydrostatic pressure safety factor. Fittings shall be ductile iron fittings with restrained mechanical joint ends as specified hereinbefore. Pipe shall be made to ductile iron pipe O.D.'s instead of IPS. Bell and Spigot: Pipe joints shall be made with integral bell and spigot pipe ends. The bell shall consist of an integral thickened wall section designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. The bell shall be supplied with factory glued rubber ring gasket which conforms to the manufacturer's standard dimensions and tolerances. The gasket shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477 "Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe". PVC joints shall be "Ring-Tite" as manufactured by J -M Manufacturing Company, Inc. or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be provided for all piping systems in accordance with DIPRA Standards, to restrain system thrust. Restraint calculations shall be based on pipe laying condition type 4 and soil type SM. Pipe joints and fittings shall be restrained as specified below: a) Uniflange, EBAA Iron, or approved equal. b) Surcharged gravity lines shall be restrained as pressure lines. E. Identification: All buried piping shall receive a color -coded adhesive identification tape as specified in Section 09905. 2.04 WALL SLEEVES, SEALS, AND PIPES AND NON-STANDARD CASTINGS A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Wall sleeves shall be of cast iron, ductile iron or carbon steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication (see below for plastic alternate) and shall have a water stop 1 located in the center of the wall. Sleeves shall be provided with seals and shall be oversized as required for the installation of seals. Sleeves shall terminate flush 15050- 10 IN with finished surfaces of walls and ceilings, and shall extend 2 inches above the finished floor. 2. For poured or grouted in place sleeves, lightweight, high -impact thermoplastic sleeves may be substituted. Plastic sleeves shall have integral water stop and anchoring ribs. Plastic sleeves shall be a product of the sleeve and seal manufacturer and shall be Century Line Sleeves as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or approved equal. 3. Wall sleeves shall be installed for all piping passing through building walls and floors, except where noted on the Contract Drawings. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to pass the pipe without binding. Sleeves shall terminate flush with finished surfaces of walls and ceilings, and shall extend 2 inches above the finished floor. Escutcheons shall be provided at walls and floor to completely conceal the sleeves smaller than 3 inches. Escutcheons shall be cast iron, nickel plated split -type. B. Wall Sleeve Seals: Wall sleeve seals shall be modular mechanical type consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall sleeve. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide an absolutely water -tight seal between the pipe and wall sleeve. The synthetic rubber shall be suitable for exposure to wastewater and groundwater. Bolts, nuts and hardware shall be 18-8 stainless steel. The seals shall be Link Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or approved equal, and the wall sleeve and seal shall be sized as recommended by the seal manufacturer. C. Wall Pipes: Wall pipes shall be of the size and types indicated on the Drawings. All wall pipes shall be of ductile iron and shall have a central fin not less than V2 -Inch thick and the same diameter as the bolting flange cast midway of the length to form a waterstop. Each wall pipe shall be of the same grade, thickness and interior coating as the piping to which it is joined. Those portions of the wall pipes that are buried shall have a coal tar epoxy outside coating. D. Non -Standard Fittings and Castings: Fittings having non-standard dimensions and cast especially for this project shall be of an approved design. Fittings shall be manufactured to meet the requirements of the same specifications and shall have the same diameter and thickness as standard fittings but laying lengths and types of ends shall be determined by positions in the pipelines and by the particular piping to which it is connected. Flange facing and drilling shall conform to the 125 pound American National Standard. Where required, flanges shall be drilled and tapped for studs. Other dimensions shall be substantially equal to corresponding parts of standard bell and spigot fittings. 15050- 11 2.05 PIPE COUPLINGS A. Couplings: Pipe couplings used to joint two pieces of plain end pipe shall be sized to suit the outside diameter of the pipe ends to be jointed. Transition couplings shall be used to join pipes of different outside diameters. Pipe couplings shall be bolted type with steel middle ring and end followers. B. Coating: All carbon steel parts of the coupling shall be coated on the interior and exterior with a fusion bonded or thermosetting epoxy coating with a 12 mil nominal coating thickness. The coating shall be equal to AL -CLAD as manufactured by Dresser Industries, Inc. C. Gaskets: Gaskets for the coupling shall be wedge type manufactured of Buna-N resilient rubber. D. Bolts: Bolts shall be manufactured of high strength Type 304 stainless steel with Type 316 stainless steel hexagonal nuts. Bolts and nuts shall conform dimensionally to ANSI/AWWA C 111, latest revision. E. Manufacturer: Couplings shall be Style 38 as manufactured by Dresser Industries, Inc. or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.06 PVC BALL AND BALL CHECK VALVES A. PVC Ball Valves: All PVC ball valves '/2 -inch through 4 inch in size shall be of a one piece capsule type manufactured of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC. Ball valves shall be true union design with two-way blocking capability and shall have solvent welded socket or NPT threaded ends. Ball valves shall have Teflon seats with Viton backing cushions and Viton O-ring seals, and shall be designed for a 150 psi water working pressure at 120° F. Valves shall be supplied with ABS lever operating handles. PVC ball valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, or an equal approved by the Engineer. B. PVC Ball Check Valves: All PVC ball check valves `/2 -inch through 2 inch in size shall be of a solid thermoplastic construction manufactured of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC. Ball check valves shall be true union design with solvent welded socket or NPT threaded ends. Ball check valves shall be furnished with a solid thermoplastic ball and stainless steel spring to assist ball in seating faster. Ball seat shall be Teflon coated Viton. The same seal shall function as both the ball seat and the union seal. PVC ball check valves shall be designed for a 150 psi water working pressure at 1207. Valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.07 GATE VALVES A. Bronze Gate Valves: Gate valves installed aboveground, 2 inches in size and smaller, shall be Class 150 all bronze valves conforming to Fed. Spec. WW -V -54d, Type I, Class B designed for a non -shock water pressure of 300 psi. Bronze for valve body and 15050- 12 internals shall be in accordance with ASTM B 16.18. Valves shall be furnished with screwed ends, handwheel operator, non -rising stem, one-piece solid wedge disc and screwed bonnet. Valves shall be as manufactured by Crane, Powell or an approved equal. The minimum weight of valves shall be as follows: Valve Size Valve Weight Inches Pounds '/z 1.0 3/4 1.5 1 2.5 1-1/4 3.6 1-1/2 4.6 2 7.6 B. Iron Gate Valves: Iron gate valves shall open by turning to the left (counter -clock -wise), when viewed from the stem. When fully open, gate valves shall have a clear waterway equal to the nominal diameter of the pipe. Operating nut or hand wheel shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening. Each valve shall have the manufacturer's distinctive marking, pressure rating and year of manufacture cast on the body. Prior to shipment from the factory, each valve shall be tested by applying to it a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the specified working pressure. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 500 or ANSI/AWWA C 509, latest revisions, whichever is applicable. 2. Gate valves with nominal sizes from 2 to 2 '/z -inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 500, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi. Valves shall be iron body, bronze -mounted, double disc, parallel seat, non -rising stem type with double, Buna-N, O-ring stem seals. Bronze items of construction shall include the stems, seat rings, stem nuts, wedge bushings and upper and lower wedges. Bronze used for construction of these items shall be low zinc alloy bronze. Valve ends shall be screwed and as specified for steel pipe and fittings. Interior ferrous surfaces of valve, except for finished or bearing surfaces, shall be coated with a fusion bonded or thermo setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before coating. Exterior surfaces shall be coated as specified hereinafter. Gate valves for this size range shall be as manufactured by American Flow Control, Kennedy Valve Manufacturing Company, Dresser Industries, Inc., or approved equal. 3. Gate valves with nominal sizes from 3 to 20 inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 509, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum L) working pressure of 200 psi. Valves shall be iron body resilient seat type with O-ring stem seals. The valve stem, stem nut, glands and bushings shall be bronze. Valve disc shall be constructed to assure uniform seating pressure between disc 15050- 13 seat ring and body seating surface. Resilient seat of valve shall be formed by a special corrosion and chloramine resistant, synthetic elastomer which is permanently bonded to and completely encapsulates a cast iron valve disc. Valve ends for underground installation shall be mechanical joint as specified for ductile iron pipe and flanged for above ground valves. Interior of valve body shall be coated with a fusion bonded or thermo setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. Exterior surfaces shall be coated as specified hereinafter. Resilient -seated type gate valves shall be manufactured by M & H Valve Company, U.S. Pipe Company, or approved equal. 4. Gate valves with nominal sizes from 24 through 42 inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 500, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi. Valves shall be iron body, solid wedge, tapered seat, bronze mounted, non -rising stem type with O-ring stem seals. The valve stem, stem nut, bushings, pinion stem, body rings, wedge rings, guides and wedge guides shall be bronze. Non -rising stem collars shall be cast integrally with the stem and machined to size. The thrust bearing area shall be fully bronze lined. Disc shall be cast iron, bronze faced. Bronze facing shall be machined after insertion into the disc face. Tongue and groove guides shall be provided on the sides of the wedge and in the body to keep the wedge centered between the seats throughout its length of travel. Guide contacts shall be bronze to bronze and valves shall be suitable for installation in any position. Valve ends for underground installation shall be mechanical joint as specified for ductile iron pipe and flanged for above ground valves. Interior of valve body shall be coated with a fusion bonded or thermo setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. Exterior surfaces shall be coated as specified hereinafter. Solid wedge type gate valves shall be manufactured by M & H Valve Company, U.S. Pipe Company, or approved equal. 5. Valve Joints: All gate valves shall have either mechanical joint, restrained joint or flanged ends to fit the pipe run in which they are to be used. Gate valves installed on push -on joint pipe shall have mechanical joint ends unless otherwise specified. 6. Valve Operators: Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings or specified herein, gate valves shall have non -rising stems. Buried gate valves shall be furnished with a 2 inch square AWWA standard nut operator with a valve box and cover. Gate valves located aboveground or inside structures shall be furnished with a handwheel operator which shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening. Sixteen (16) inch and larger gate valves shall be equipped with bevel gear operators with a minimum gear ratio meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 500, latest revision. All below ground 16 inch and larger gate valves shall have bevel gear operators which are designed for buried service. 15050- 14 7. Exterior Valve Coatings: All exterior surfaces of iron body gate valves shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. For buried service, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated at the factory with coal tar epoxy with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. Prior to back filling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. For valves installed aboveground, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness 2 - 3.5 mils, of a lead and chromate- free primer with rust -inhibitive pigments and synthetic resins. Primer shall be suitable for finish paint specified. Following installation, aboveground valves shall be finish painted in accordance with Section 09900. 2.08 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. General: Butterfly valves for water service, 4 inches in size and larger, shall be Class 150-B in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C 504, latest revision and designed for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi. Butterfly valves shall be of the tight closing rubber seat type. Valves shall be bubble tight with 150 psi on the upstream side of the valve and 0 psi on the downstream side and shall be satisfactory for applications involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity. Valve discs shall rotate 90 degrees from the fully open position to the fully closed position. Butterfly valves shall be as manufactured by American Flow Control, Dresser Industries, Inc., Kennedy Valve Manufacturing Company, Mueller Company, DeZurik, Milliken Valve Company, or Henry Pratt Company. B. Valve Bodies: Valve bodies shall be constructed of high strength cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B. Buried valves shall have integrally cast mechanical joint ends as specified for ductile iron pipe and aboveground valves shall have cast iron flanges or wafer style ends as indicated on the Drawings. End flanges shall conform in dimensions and drilling to ANSI B 16. 1, Class 125. Two trunnions for shaft bearings shall be integral with each valve body. Valve body thickness shall be in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 504 latest revision for Class 150-B valves. C. Valve Seat Ring: Valve seat ring shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel. Seating edges of the seat ring shall be smooth and polished. The seat ring shall be capable of compensating for changes in direction of flow to assure a bubble tight seal in either direction. D. Valve Discs: Valve discs shall be solid (no cores) for 24 inch and smaller valves, and shall be either solid or hollow core for valves greater than 24 inch. Discs shall be constructed of ductile iron ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Valve disc shall be of the offset design to provide 360 degree uninterrupted seating. 15050- 15 E. Valve Shafts: Valve shafts may consist of a one piece unit extending completely through the valve disc bearings and into the operating mechanism or may be of the "stub shaft" type, which comprises two separate shafts inserted into the valve disc hubs. If used, stub shafts shall extend a minimum of 1 '/z -shaft diameters into the valve disc hubs. Valve shafts shall be constructed of ASTM A 276, Type 304 stainless steel or a stainless steel with greater overall corrosion and oxidation resistance. The minimum shaft diameter shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 504, latest revision for Class 150B valves. The valve disc shall be attached to the shaft by means of "O" ring sealed taper pins. The valve shaft seal shall consist of "O" rings in bronze cartridge or self adjusting nitrile Vee -type ring seals. F. Valve Seats: Valve seats shall be of a corrosion and chloramine resistant synthetic rubber compound bonded to a high grade stainless steel retaining ring and secured to the valve disc by Type 304 stainless steel set screws or shall be molded in, vulcanized and bonded to the body. Seats bonded to the body shall withstand a 75 pound pull tested in accordance with ASTM D 429,. Method B. The valve seat shall be adjustable and replaceable in the field without dismantling operator, disc or shaft. G. Valve Bearings: Valve shafts shall be fitted with sleeve -type bearings. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant and self-lubricating (Nylon or Teflon). Bearings shall be designed for a pressure not exceeding the published design load for the bearing material, or 1/5 of the compressive strength of the bearing or shaft material. H. Valve Operators: All butterfly valves shall open left or counter -clock -wise when viewed from the stem. Automatic valve operators shall have motorized valve actuators as specified hereinafter. Manual valve operators shall be of the worm gear or traveling nut type and shall be fully enclosed. All operators shall have adjustable mechanical stop limiting devices to prevent over travel of disc. Should an adjustment of the disc be required to maintain a bubble tight seal, this adjustment shall be made externally without removing the operator housing cover. The operator shall be designed such that all adjustments can be made under pressure and without the possibility of dirt getting into the operator lubricant. Any adjustments through the lower shaft will not be acceptable. Units furnished for buried service shall be fully gasketed and grease packed. Manual valves located aboveground shall be equipped with handwheel or chainwheel operators and shall have a suitable indicator arrow to give valve position from fully open to fully closed. Buried butterfly valves shall be furnished with 2 inch square AWWA nut operator with valve box and cover. Operator components shall, at the extreme operator positions, withstand without damage a pull of 200 lbs. for handwheel or chainwheel operators or an input torque of 300 ft. -lbs. for operating nuts. 15050- 16 I. Pneumatic Valve Operators: Pneumatic actuators shall be spring -assisted, piston type, 1/4 turn actuators. Actuators shall be air pressure operated to open or close as indicated on the drawings with spring -return to rest position. Actuators shall utilize either a rack and pinion or scotch yoke type mechanical movement design. Actuators shall be sized for the 150% of the anticipated torque load required by the valve and its application. Actuators shall operate on a 60 to 80 psig air supply pressure without requiring the use of external pressure regulators. 2. Actuators shall be constructed of extruded anodized aluminum with a stainless steel drive shaft. Internal metallic moving parts shall either be aluminum or stainless steel. Actuators shall be equipped with low friction O -rings with Teflon rings that prevent metal -to -metal contact between piston and cylinder. Bearings shall be low friction, non-metallic. 3. Actuators shall be supplied with full open and full closed limit switches for remote indication of valve status. Limit switches shall be NEMA 4X and be rated for 10 amps at 120V. Actuators shall be supplied with an air supply line filter regulator to prevent sticking and contamination. 4. Mechanical operation in event of power or air pressure loss shall be provided by a clutchable handwheel drive mechanism completely independent from the actuator gearing. Hand operation shall be direct permitting fast manual valve operation. Failure of actuator gearing shall not prevent manual operation. 5. Manufacturer: Actuators shall be as supplied by Remote Control, EI -O -Matic, or Rotork, supplied with and assembled to the valve it actuates by the valve manufacturer. However, all pneumatic valve operators for the project shall be of the same manufacturer and model series. J. Electric Motor Valve Operators: 1. Motor operators for open -shut and/or modulating valve service, shall meet the requirements of AWWA C504 except as herein specified. 2. Motor operators shall include motor, motor controller with remote -local switch, open -stop -close pushbuttons for local operation, associated gearing, stem nut, pedestal limit switches, torque switches, auxiliary handwheel for manual operation, and local position indicator. With the remote -local switch in the remote position, the valve shall respond to a remote, maintained contact for open and close operation and/or a 4-20 mA signal for modulating service as indicated on the appropriate wiring diagrams. 15050- 17 3. Position indicator, pushbuttons, and selector switches shall be mounted in a valve - mounted NEMA 4 enclosure. Gear case shall be cast iron. 4. Motors shall be standard duty rated, TEFC, Class B insulated, 60 Hz, 480 volt, 3 phase motors especially designed for valve operator service. The design shall combine low inertia with a high starting stalling torque. The motors shall be sized to operate valves from full open to full closed in one to two minutes, under the process conditions associated with the valve. The motor winding temperature rise shall be NEMA standard for Class B insulation at the rated service factor load. 5. Motor controllers shall be the reverse contactor type complete with gang operated switch, two mechanically interlocking reversing contactors, 120 volt control power transformer, and all associated wiring, enclosed in a NEMA 4 compartment. All operators shall have thermal overload protection for each phase. Positioners for modulating valves shall except a 4-20 mA input signal. 6. Limit switches shall be provided at the extreme open and closed position of the operator travel. At least six independent switches at each end of the operator travel shall be provided. Travel stops for butterfly valve service shall be provided to provided positive seating under automatic remote operation. 7. Torque switches shall be provided in both the open and closed position of the operator travel. The torque switches shall be field adjustable and designed to stop the operator motor when the torque exceeds safe limits for either the operator or the valve. An electrical or mechanical interlock shall be provided to prevent the open torque switch from tripping when unseating a torque seated valve. 8. Terminal blocks shall be provided for all electrical connections, both internal and external remote signals or power. All electrical devices shall be housed in NEMA 4 enclosures. Operators shall be prewired and factory tested before shipping. 9. Mechanical operation in event of power loss shall be provided by a clutchable handwheel drive mechanism completely independent from the motor gearing. Hand operation shall be direct permitting fast manual valve operation. Failure of motor gearing shall not prevent manual operation. Manual operation shall disconnect electrical operation. 10. Electric motor operators shall be manufactured by Auma, Limitorque, or EIM, supplied with and assembled to the valve it actuates by the valve manufacturer. However, all electric motor valve operators for the project shall be of the same manufacturer and model series. K. Interior Valve Coating: Interior of valve body and valve disc except for valve seat and stainless steel valve seat ring shall be coated with a fusion bonded or thermosetting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free, 15050- 18 NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. L. Exterior Valve Coating: All exterior surfaces of butterfly valves shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. For buried service, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated at the factory with coal tar epoxy with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. Prior to backfilling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. For valves installed aboveground, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness 2 - 3.5 mils, of a lead and chromate -free primer with rusk -inhibitive pigments and synthetic resins. Primer shall be suitable for finish paint specified. Following installation aboveground valves shall be finish painted in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. M. Valve Testing: Prior to shipment from the factory, hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be conducted for each butterfly valve. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be conducted in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 504, latest revision, and results shall be submitted. 2.09 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Swing check valves 2 inch through 12 inch in size shall conform to AWWA C 508, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum water working pressure of 150 psi. Check valves shall have cast iron body, swing type and ends shall be flanged, Class 125 drilling pattern in accordance with ANSI B 16.1. When open, the valve shall have a straight way passage with a minimum flow area equal to the full pipe area. Swing check valves shall be completely bronze fitted with renewable bronze seat ring and a rubber faced disc; valve hinge pin shall be stainless steel. Check valves shall be supplied with an outside lever and weight. The check valve bonnet shall be provided with a tapped boss with plug for future installation of a pressure gauge. The valves with oil cushion dampeners shall have a bottom hydraulic buffer to permit free open, but positive non -slam control closure of the disc. The hydraulic buffer shall make contact with the disc during the last 10% of closure, to instantly control the valve disc until shut-off in a manner to prevent slam and water hammer. The last 10% of closure shall be externally adjustable and variable to suit operating conditions. The line media to the buffer must be separated by a combination pressure sensing, oil/water, separator device to protect the buffer cylinder against corrosion from the main line media. The hydraulic buffer assembly shall be removable from valve without need to remove the entire valve from the pipeline. B. Swing check valves shall absolutely prevent the return of water back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases below the downstream pressure. The check valve shall be constructed such that the disc and body seat ring may be easily removed and replaced without removing the valve from the line. Each valve shall be hydrostatically tested at the factory, at a test pressure of 300 psi. 15050- 19 C. For each check valve, provide an externally mounted, NEMA 4, lever or rod actuated, limit switch, mounted on the valve body. The switch shall be mounted such that the contacts close when the valve is closed as sensed by the valve's lever arm position. Contacts shall be rated for 120v service. Switch shall be as manufactured by Square D Class 9007, Allan Bradley Bulletin 802X, or approved equal. Limit switch bracket shall be Type 316 stainless steel. D. Interior Valve Coating: Prior to shipment from the factory, the interior ferrous surfaces of the valve, except for finished, non-ferrous or bearing surfaces, shall be coated with a fusion bonded or thermosetting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. E. Exterior Valve Coating: All exterior surfaces of swing check valves shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. For valves installed in below ground valve vaults, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated at the factory with coal tar epoxy with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. Following installation, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. For valves installed aboveground, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness 2 - 3.5 mils, of a lead and chromate -free primer with rust -inhibitive pigments and synthetic resins. Primer shall be suitable for finish paint specified. Following installation, the aboveground valves shall be finish painted in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. F. Valve Manufacturer: Swing check valves shall be as manufactured by American Flow Control; APCO; Kennedy; or approved equal. 2.10 PLUG VALVES A. General: Plug valves shall be non -lubricated eccentric type with flanged or mechanical joint ends as specified below. Valves shall open by turning to the left (counter- clockwise), when viewed from the stem. Port area of valves shall be a minimum of 80 percent of full pipe area. Valve pressure ratings, body flanges and wall thicknesses shall be in full conformance with ANSI B 16.1, latest revision. Valves shall seal leak -tight against full rated pressure in both directions. Prior to shipment from the factory, each valve shall be hydrostatically tested as follows. Valve seats shall be tested to provide leak tight shut off to 175 psi for valves through 12 inch and 150 psi for valves 14 inches and larger, with pressure in either direction. In addition, a hydrostatic shell test shall be performed with the plug open to a pressure twice that of rating specified above to demonstrate overall pressure integrity of the valve body. Plug valves shall be eccentric plug valves as manufactured by DeZurik, Milliken Valve Company, or approved equal. B. Eccentric Plug Valves: Eccentric plug valves shall be constructed of high strength cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B and AWWA C 504, latest revisions. Valve 15050-20 seats shall be formed by cast bodies with raised eccentric seats which have a corrosion resistant welded -in overlay of not less than 90 percent pure nickel on all surfaces contacting the plug face or valve seats shall be replaceable 316 stainless steel seats. Valve seats shall be in accordance with AWWA C 504 and AWWA C 507, latest revisions. Valves shall be furnished with resilient faced plugs with Neoprene facing. Valves shall be furnished with replaceable, permanently lubricated, stainless steel or fiberglass backed woven teflon fiber, sleeve -type bearings in the upper and lower plug stem journals. Plug stem bearings shall comply with AWWA C 504 and C 507, latest revisions. Valves shall be bolted bonnet design. Valves shaft seals shall be designed so that they can be repacked without removing the bonnet and the packing shall be adjustable. Packing material shall be Buna-Vee type packing. Valve shaft seals shall be in accordance with AWWA C 504 and AWWA C 507, latest revisions. All exposed valve nuts, bolts, springs, washers and the like shall be Type 304 stainless steel. C. Interior Valve Lining: All interior ferrous surfaces of the valve except the valve seating surfaces shall be coated with a factory applied, fusion bonded or thermosetting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday -free with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from rust, oil, and grease before coating. D. Exterior Valve Coating: All exterior surfaces of plug valves shall be clean, dry and free from rust and grease before coating. For buried service, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated at the factory with coal tar epoxy with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. Prior to backfilling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. For valves installed aboveground, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness 2 - 3.5 mils, of a lead and chromate -free primer with rust -inhibitive pigments and synthetic resins. Primer shall be suitable for finish paint specified. Following installation aboveground valves shall be finish painted in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. E. Valve Joints: All plug valves installed aboveground, in valve vaults or on flanged piping shall have flanged ends as specified for ductile iron pipe. Flanges shall comply with facing, drilling and thickness of ANSI Standards for Class 125 dimension. All buried plug valves shall have mechanical joint ends as specified for ductile iron pipe. F. Mechanical Valve Actuators: 1. Unless otherwise noted, plug valves installed in valve vaults or buried underground shall have gear actuators with 2 inch square nut designed for buried and submerged service. Valve shall have seals on all shafts and gaskets on valve and actuator covers to prevent entry of water and dirt. Actuator mounting brackets for buried or submerged service shall be totally enclosed and shall have gasket seals. All exposed valve nuts, bolts, springs, washers and the like shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 15050-21 2. Unless otherwise noted, above ground plug valves 6 inch in size and larger shall be furnished with mechanical gear actuators furnished with handwheel, chainwheel or 2 inch square nut operators. Gear actuator shall be sized for the maximum pressure differential across the valve, equal to the pressure rating of the valve. All gearing shall be enclosed in a high strength cast iron housing, suitable for running in a lubricant. Housing shall be provided with seals on all shafts to prevent the entry of dirt and water into the actuator. Actuator shaft and quadrant shall be supported on permanently lubricated bronze bearings. Actuator shall clearly indicate valve position for aboveground and valve vault installations and an adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing torque. Actuator shall be capable of withstanding an over -torque without damage up to 450 foot-pounds for 2 inch square nut operators and to 300 foot-pounds for handwheel or chainwheel operators. 3. Four inch and smaller aboveground valves shall be furnished with manual actuators, one-quarter turn to open. Actuator shall be supplied with an AWWA Standard 2 inch operating nut with a standard valve operating lever. 4. When noted on the Contract Drawings, provide gear actuator as specified above with an automatic, electric valve operator. Automatic valve operators shall have motorized valve actuators as specified hereinbefore for Butterfly Valves. 2.11 AIR RELEASE VALVES (CLEAN WATER SERVICE) A. Large Valves: Valves 1 inch or larger shall have heavy duty compound lever operating mechanism with 316 stainless steel pivot pins and 316 stainless steel retaining rings. Valves shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A 48, Class 35 with 316 stainless steel trim and float. Valves shall have an adjustable orifice button, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel with viton or Buna-N seating. Provide 1/2 -inch threaded outlet and stainless steel plug for top cover and body drain. Valves shall have a working pressure rating of at least 150 P.S.I. Valves shall be APCO Model 200A, or as manufactured by Valmatic; or approved equal. B. Valve End Connections: Valves smaller than 3 inches shall have threaded ends. Valves 4 inches or larger shall have flanged ends. 2. Flanges for Class 150 valves shall comply with ANSI B 16. 1, Class 125. Flanges for Class 300 valves shall comply with ANSI B 16. 1, Class 250. Threaded ends shall comply with ANSI B2.1 / \ C. All air release and vacuum release valves shall be isolated from the service line with a (� Type 316 stainless steel gate valve for valves up to 3 inches, and a flanged body butterfly 15050-22 valve for valves greater than 3 inches (provide a spacer plate if required to clear the rotation of the butterfly disc). 2.12 COMBINATION AIR/VACUUM A. Purpose: Designed to release and admit large quantities of air from pump discharge piping when pump starts and stops. Valve shall also function to release small, accumulated quantities of air from piping while system is pressurized and functioning. B. Arrangement: Shall consist of a combination of an air/vacuum valve with surge check and an air release valve. C. Air/Vacuum Valves: 1. Valves shall be designed to exhaust, or admit large quantities of air. 2. Cast iron construction, ASTM A126 Grade B for body and cover, ASTM A48, Class 30 for baffles with stainless steel trim and float and Buna-N seat. 3. Designs having levers and weights attached to floats will not be permitted. 4. Valves shall be equipped with 1 -inch body drains with 316 stainless steel plugs. 5. Valves shall have a steel protector hood. 6. Valves shall have a working pressure rating of at least 150 P.S.I. 7. Valves shall incorporate a double-acting throttling device to prevent vacuum formation in suction column after pump stop. 8. Valves shall incorporate a water diffuser with surge check device to break down the water column force into a smooth non-destructive flow. 9. Manufacturer: ARI D-040, appropriately sized valve by Valmatic, or equal. D. Valve End Connections: 1. Valves smaller than 3 inches shall have threaded ends. Valves 4 inches or larger shall have flanged ends. 2. Flanges for Class 150 valves shall comply with ANSI B 16. 1, Class 125. 3. Threaded ends shall comply with ANSI B2.1 E. All air release and air/vacuum valves shall be isolated from the service line with a 316 stainless steel gate valve for valves up to 3 inches, and a flanged body butterfly valve for 15050-23 valves greater than 3 inches (provide a spacer plate if required to clear the rotation of the butterfly disc). 2.13 SERVICE SADDLES, CORPORATION STOPS AND TEMPORARY SAMPLING STATIONS A. Service Saddles: Service saddles shall have ductile iron bodies in accordance with ASTM A 536, latest revision, with double stainless steel straps. Ductile iron body shall have a fusion bonded nylon coating with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Straps shall be Type 304 stainless steel with premium grade Type 304 L stainless steel bolts and Type 304 stainless steel washers and nuts. The nuts shall be Teflon coated. The gasket material shall be an elastomeric compound resistant to degradation by oil, natural gas, acids, alkalies, most aliphatic fluids and chloramines. The outlet of the saddle shall have NPT threads. Service saddles shall be Smith -Blair No. 317 or an equal approved by the Engineer. B. Corporation Stops: Corporation stops shall be all bronze construction in accordance with AWWA C 800, latest revision. Inlet threads shall be NPT iron pipe threads and the outlet connection shall be of the packed joint type suitable for use with Schedule 80 PVC pipe. Corporation stops shall be Ford Ballcorp Type FB 1102 or an equal approved by the Engineer. C. Temporary Sampling Stations: Temporary sampling stations shall be a combination of corporation stops, service saddles, polyethylene tubing, and curb stops. Temporary sampling stations shall be properly abandoned after successful testing. 2.14 SOLENOID VALVES A. Solenoid valves shall be 2 -way type for normally closed operation designed for not less than a 150 psi water working pressure. Valves less than 3 inches shall have forged brass bodies. Three inch valves shall have aluminum bodies. Valves shall have NPT threaded ends; stainless steel wetted parts; Buna N seals/disks; and NEMA 4X solenoid enclosures. The valves shall operate on 120 VAC power, shall have threaded conduit hubs, standby manual operators and shall not require a minimum operating pressure differential for steady operation. The valves shall be manufactured by Automatic Switch Company (ASCO Red Hat), or approved equal. 2.15 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS A. Adapters shall be suitable for joining plain end pipe to flanged pipes and fittings. Adapters shall conform in size and bolt hole placement to ANSI standards for steel and/or cast iron flanges 125 or 150 pound standard unless otherwise required for connections. B. Adapters shall be constructed of steel or cast iron, coated in accordance with Section 09900. Bolts and nuts shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8 for bolts, and ASTM A 194, Grade 8 for nuts and washers. Bolts and nuts greater than 1 1/8 -inches shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B, with cadmium plating, ASTM A 165, Type NS. 15050-24 C. Adapters shall beequipped pwith tie rods and all required accessories needed to restrain plain end pipe joint against piping system thrust. D. Adapters shall be Dresser Manufacturing Co. - Style 128 for exposed ductile iron and steel pipes with diameters of 2 inches through 96 inches, and/or Dresser Manufacturing Co. - Style 127 locking type for buried ductile iron, and iron steel pipes with diameters of 3 inches through 12 inches. 2.16 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS A. Flexible expansion joints shall be of the molded wide arch design manufactured of neoprene rubber with polyester and steel reinforcement. Neoprene body shall be supplied with a hypalon coating. Joints shall be flanged suitable for 150 psi water working pressure and in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 dimensions and bolting patterns. Flanged ends shall be furnished with 304 stainless steel split retaining rings. B. Provide control units consisting of gusset plates, control rod bolts, washers and nuts on all expansion joints. Expansion joints 6 inches and larger in size shall have a minimum of four control rod bolts. Restraint gusset plates, bolts, washers and nuts shall be Type 304 stainless steel. C. Minimum performance for flexible expansion joints shall be as follows: Size Axial Compression Axial Elongation Lateral Deflection Angular Deflection Inches Inches Inches Inches Degrees 2 1 3/4 3/4 3/4 30 4 1 3/4 3/4 3/4 25 6 1 3/4 3/4 1 20 8 1 3/4 3/4 1 20 10 1 3/4 3/4 1 15 12 1 3/4 3/4 1 15 16 2 7/8 1 1/8 12 20 2 7/8 1 1/8 9 24 2 1 l 1/8 9 D. Flexible expansion joints shall be Redflex as manufactured by Redvalve, Style 1015 Maxi -Joint as manufactured by General Rubber Corporation, Style 711 Metrasphere as manufactured by the Metraflex Company or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.17 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants shall be general service type, ductile iron body, fully bronze mounted, for 150 psi working pressure, complying with AWWA Standard C 502, latest revision. The inlet connection shall be mechanical joint type, with accessories, for 6 inch ductile iron pipe. The hydrant foot shall have integral cast tie -back lugs. The integral shut-off valve 15050-25 shall be compression type opening against water pressure, and shall open left (counter -clockwise) as viewed from the operating nut. B. The main hydrant valve opening shall be 5 1/4 -inches. Valve diameter and general interior design shall be sufficient to provide head loss/flow quantity ratios less than specified in the above cited standard. The main valve seat and the threaded portion of the hydrant into which it screws shall be bronze. The hydrant barrel drain valve and port shall be bronze. The hydrant barrel drain shall be actuated by the main valve stem. The drain washer for the drain valve shall be Buna-N rubber which shall provide positive sealing action when the valve is opened. The stem operating threads and thrust bearing, and bronze seat ring threads shall be sealed by replaceable O -rings to protect from moisture and corrosion. Stem and seat ring threads shall be permanently greased lubricated or provided with a means for lubrication. All interior working parts of the hydrant shall be removable from the top of the hydrant to allow for repairs without removing the hydrant barrel after it has been installed. A weather shield shall be provided on the bonnet to protect the operating nut and lock nut area from dirt and water. C. The hose nozzles shall be bronze with American National Standard fire hose coupling screw threads, one 4'/2 -inch pumper nozzle and two 2'/2 -inch hose nozzles. The hydrant operating nut and nozzle cap nuts shall be the same standard size and shape as specified by the local fire district. Nozzle caps shall be securely chained to hydrant barrel. Chains shall be corrosion resistant and painted to match hydrant color. The hydrants shall be "traffic" type with a frangible flange or lugs and operating stem section at ground line. D. Hydrants shall be furnished with a 3 foot bury body except where deeper burial depths are indicated on the Contract Drawings or are designated by the Engineer. E. Coatings For Fire Hydrants: All ferrous metal surfaces of the hydrants shall be clean, dry and free from grease before coating as follows: All exposed exterior surfaces below the ground line shall be coated at the factory with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M, for a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. 2. All exposed interior surfaces above and below the main hydrant valve, except non-ferrous and machined ferrous surfaces shall be coated at the factory with a fusion bonded or thermosetting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, latest revision. Coating shall be holiday free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. 3. All exposed, exterior, aboveground ferrous metal surfaces including barrel, bonnet, nozzle caps, nozzle cap chains, nuts, bolts and other fasteners shall be coated at the factory. Shop prime with one coat, 5 mils dry film thickness of a phenalkamine epoxy primer. Primer shall be compatible with finish coating specified. Finish coating shall be applied in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Finish coating shall be one coat, 3 mils dry film thickness of Carboline Carbocrylic 3359, or approved equal. Color of the finish coating shall be as required by the local fire district. 15050-26 F. Approved Fire Hydrants: Fire hydrants shall be supplied from one manufacturer for the Project. The fire hydrants supplied shall be for general service type fire hydrants and shall be American Model B-84-13; Kennedy Model K81A Guardian; Mueller Model Centurion A-423; or approved equal. G. Auxiliary Gate Valve: Auxiliary gate valve furnished with each hydrant shall be a 6 inch non -rising stem, resilient seated gate valve with mechanical joint ends and a cast iron valve box in conformance with the specifications in this Section. 2.18 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE BACK FLOW PREVENTERS A. Standards of Construction: Back flow prevention devices shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C 510, latest revision, American Society of Sanitary Engineering Standards, and the University of Southern California Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research "Manual of Cross Connection Control", Sixth Edition. B. Product Handling: Exercise care in transporting and handling back flow preventers to avoid damage. Inside of back flow preventers shall be kept free of dirt and debris. C. Double check valve back flow preventers shall include independent spring loaded check valves that remain closed until there is a demand for water. Each of the two check valves in series is designed to open at one (1) psi pressure differential in the direction of flow. In the event pressure increases downstream of the unit, tending to reverse direction of flow, both check valves are closed to prevent backflow. If the second check valve is prevented from closing tightly, the first check valve will still provide protection from a backflow condition. D. Double check valve back flow preventers shall have all bronze bodies for sizes 2 ''/z - inches and smaller and all ductile iron bodies for sizes 3 inches and larger. Ductile iron bodies shall be coated with a fusion bonded thermosetting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550 with a minimum, holiday -free, coating thickness of 12 mils. The double check valve back flow preventer shall consist of two independently operated, spring loaded, wye pattern, poppet type check valves designed for installation in a normal horizontal flow attitude. Check valve assemblies, springs and seats, and all other internal parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Check valve seats shall be field replaceable without removing the device from the service line. Back flow preventers shall be designed for a working pressure of 200 psi and a temperature range of 32°F to 1407. The back flow preventer shall be manufactured as a complete unit including test cocks, and upstream and downstream isolation gate valves. The test cocks shall be manufactured of bronze and shall be arranged such that the unit can be tested without removing the unit from the line. E. Isolation Valves: Double check valve back flow preventers shall be furnished complete with isolation valves. For sizes 2'/z -inches and smaller, the isolation valves shall be all bronze ball valves with Buna N O -rings and valve seats, and a lever operating handle. 15050-27 Ball valves shall be in accordance with AWWA C 800, latest revision. For sizes larger than 3 inches, the isolation valves shall be resilient seated gate valves with flanged ends and OS&Y handwheel operators. Gate valves shall be as specified and described hereinbefore. F. Exterior Coating: The exterior ferrous surfaces of the double check valve back flow preventer and the isolation valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness of 5 mils, of a phenalkamine epoxy compatible with the finish coats. Following installation, the back flow preventer unit and aboveground piping shall be finish painted in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. All surfaces to be coated shall be clean, dry and free of rust, oil and grease. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Double check valve back flow preventers shall be Model No. 2 as manufactured by Hersey Products, Inc., Model 805 YD as manufactured by Febco, Model 709 as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.19 PRESSURE GAUGE ASSEMBLIES A. Pressure gauges shall have the following design features: glycerine filled, 4'/2 -inch dial (for pump service), 2'/2 -inch dial (for other services), aluminum dial with black numerals on white background, Type 316 stainless steel bourdon tube and movement, 300 series stainless steel case and ring, safety glass lens, threaded lens retaining ring, adjustable pointer with over -pressure stop and zero pointer stop, blowout protection, '/2 -inch Type 316 stainless steel stem mounting, and 1.0 percent accuracy based on full scale. Provide Type 316 stainless steel pressure snubbers on all gauges not protected by diaphragm seals. Provide a supply of replacement fill liquid for all gauges supplied for the entire Project. Pressure gauges shall be as manufactured by U.S. Gauge, Ashcroft, Marshalltown, Marsh, or approved equal. B. Pressure Gauge Service and Ranges: Pressure gauges shall be furnished for the following services. The gauge ranges will be selected such that the normal operating pressure is indicated approximately at mid span. Diaphragm seals shall be furnished for gauges as indicated: Service Diaphragm Seal Wastewater/Sludge Piping Yes Potable Water Supply No Air Supply No C. As indicated above, pressure gauges shall be furnished with diaphragm protection seals which shall be joined to the pressure gauges and filled at the manufacturer's factory. The seals shall be the removable design such that the bottom member can be removed for cleaning without disturbing the diaphragm. The diaphragm shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The top and bottom members of the seal shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Connections for both the gauge and the bottom connection shall be '/2 -inch female NPT 15050-28 threaded connections. The bottom member shall have a 1/4 -inch plugged flushing connection with a Type 316 stainless steel plug. Liquid filling for the diaphragm seals shall be silicone. Provide a supply of replacement fill liquid for all diaphragm seals supplied for the entire Project. Diaphragm protection seals shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the gauge. D. Each pressure gauge assembly shall be furnished with an isolation ball valve. Body, stem and all other parts of valves shall be manufactured of Type 316 stainless steel. Valve packing shall be high-density TFE. Valve connections shall be '/z -inch female NPT threaded connections. Ball valves for pressure gauge assembly isolation shall be 45 Series as manufactured by the Whitey Company, or an equal approved by the Engineer. 2.20 VALVE AND METER VAULTS A. Valve and meter vaults shall be constructed of precast or cast -in-place concrete with dimensions as shown on the Contract Drawings. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 03410, Precast Concrete Structures. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,500 psi at 28 days. The steel reinforcement for the structures shall be designed and constructed to withstand the loads expected. B. The covers for the meter vaults shall be a watertight aluminum access frame and cover as specified in Section 08350. 2.21 VALVE BOXES A. Furnish, assemble, and place a valve box over the operating nut for each buried valve. The valve box shall be designed so as to prevent the transmission of surface loads directly to the valve or piping. B. Valve boxes shall be of the adjustable slide -type of suitable length with an interior diameter of not less than 5 inches. The valve boxes shall be manufactured of cast iron and shall be of the two piece design including a bottom section and top section with cover. The cast iron cover shall be cast with the applicable service, "WATER", "WASTEWATER", etc., markings. The top section shall be adjustable for elevation and shall be set to allow equal movement above and below finished grade. C. The castings shall be manufactured of clean, even grain, gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30B for Gray Iron Castings; and shall be smooth, true to pattern, free from blow holes, sand holes, projections and other harmful defects. The seating surfaces of both the cover and the top section shall be machined so that the cover will not rock after it has been seated. D. The valve boxes shall be coated inside and outside with an asphaltic coating prior to machining, so that the machined seating surfaces will be free of any coating. Cast iron 15050-29 valve box assemblies shall be Clow Corp. No. F-2452, Tyler Corp. Series 6855 or 6865 or an approved equal. Valve extension stems shall be provided for all buried valves when operating nut is deeper than 3 feet below final grade. 2.22 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS A. Identification systems for aboveground and below ground piping and for valves shall be as specified under Section 09905 of these Specifications. 2.23 TIE RODS A. When prior approval is obtained from the Engineer, ductile iron pipe, fittings, and valves may be restrained using tie bolt joint restraint. Joint restraint materials for this method of restraint shall be the Super -Star SST Series Joint Restraint System as manufactured by Star National Products, a Division of Star Industries, Inc. Columbus, Ohio, or an equal approved by the Engineer. B. All bolts, nuts, washers, tie rods and other fasteners for the joint restraint system shall be manufactured of CORTEN high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel in conformance with ASTM A 242. Tie bolts shall be manufactured of heat treated CORTEN steel. Tie rods and all fasteners for the system shall be galvanized in conformance with the requirements of ASTM A 123. Tie rods shall have a minimum diameter of 3/4 -inch. The number of tie rods required per j oint shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Prior to backfilling after installation, all parts of the joint restraint system shall be coated with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M, for a minimum dry film thickness of 20 mils. 2.24 HOSE BIBB (AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS) 2.25 WASHDOWN HOSE A. Hoses shall be 50 feet long, 3/4 inch diameter abrasion and weather resistant EPDM red cover, rayon braided hose with 8 inch adjustable brass hose nozzle on discharge end and 3/4 inch brass female threaded connection with threads which match the hose bibb threads on the supply end. All components shall be as manufactured by Amazon Hose & Rubber Company, or approved equal. 2.26 WET TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES A. Wet Tapping Sleeves: Shall be cast iron, mechanical joint type, with working pressure rating of 200 psi for sizes 4 through 12 inches and 150 psi for sizes 14 inches and larger, 15050-30 and shall conform to the applicable Sections of AWWA Standard C 110 of current revision. Sleeve and glands shall be split type for assembly on pipe, and sleeve and mechanical joint glands and gaskets shall be sized for use with the class and type of pipe being tapped. Sleeve and glands shall be factory coated on interior and exterior with a fusion bonded, thermosetting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C 550, current revision. Coating shall be holiday free with a minimum thickness of 12 mils DFT, and shall be furnished complete with all accessories. Outlet flange shall be Class 125 Standard. Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer for drilling machine used prior to tapping operations. Tapping sleeves shall be as manufactured by the Mueller Company, American Valve and Hydrant Company, Kennedy Valve, or approved equal. Prior to backfilling, all uncoated exterior nuts, bolts, glands, rods and other parts of sleeve shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. B. Wet Tapping Valves: Tapping valves shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 509, current revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi. 1. Tapping valves 3 to 16 inches in size shall be resilient seat type gate valves as specified hereinbefore for gate valves 3 to 16 inches in size. Resilient seat type tapping valves shall be furnished with a raised guide ring cast integrally on the flanged end which is designed to match the groove in the tapping sleeve in accordance with MSS-SP60. The purpose of this guide ring shall be to ensure true alignment of the valve with the tapping sleeve. The interior of the waterway in the valve body shall be a full opening and capable of passing a full sized shell cutter equal to the nominal diameter of the valve. Tapping valves shall be as manufactured by the M & H Valve Company, U.S. Pipe Company, or approved equal. 15050-31 2.27 CLA VAL PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES A. Pressure Relief, Pressure Sustaining Valve Function: The valve shall maintain a constant upstream pressure by bypassing or relieving excess pressure and shall maintain close pressure limits without causing surges. If upstream pressure decreases below the spring setting, the valve shall close. 2. Main Valve: The valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm -actuated, globe or angle pattern. The valve shall consist of three major components: the body with seat installed, the cover with bearings installed, and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure form the line pressure. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes are not permitted and there shall be no pistons operating the main valve or pilot controls. Main Valve Body: No separate chambers shall be allowed between the main valve cover and body. Valve body and cover shall be of cast material. Stainless Steel is used. The valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc with a rectangular cross- section contained on three and one-half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable seat insert. No O-ring type discs (circular, square, or quad type) shall be permitted as the seating surface. The disc guide shall be of the contoured type to permit smooth transition of flow and shall hold the disc firmly in place. The disc retainer shall be of a sturdy one-piece design capable of withstanding opening and closing shocks. It must have straight edge sides and a radius at the top.edge to prevent excessive diaphragm wear as the diaphragm flexes across this surface. No hourglass -shaped disc retainers shall be permitted and no V -type or slotted type disc guides shall be used. The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic 316 stainless steel stem of sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum of five - degree taper on the seating surface for a positive, drip -tight shut off. No center guides shall be permitted. The stem shall be drilled and tapped in the cover end to receive and affix such accessories as may be deemed necessary. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve separating operating pressure from line pressure. 15050-32 The flexible, non -wicking, FDA approved diaphragm shall consist of nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber compatible with the operating fluid. The center hole for the main valve stem must be sealed by the vulcanized process or a rubber grommet sealing the center stem hole from the operating pressure. The diaphragm must withstand a Mullins Burst Test of a minimum of 600 psi per layer of nylon fabric and shall be cycle tested 100,000 times to insure longevity. The diaphragm shall not be used as the seating surface. The diaphragm shall be fully supported in the valve body and cover by machined surfaces which support no less than one- half of the total surface area of the diaphragm in either the fully open or fully closed position. The main valve seat and the stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. The cover bearing and seat in 6" and smaller size valves shall be threaded into the cover and body. Valve seat in 8" and larger size valves shall be retained by flat head machine screws for ease of maintenance. The lower bearing of the valve stem shall be contained concentrically within the seat and shall be exposed to the flow on all sides to avoid deposits. To insure proper alignment of the valve stem, the valve body and cover shall be machined with a locating lip. No "pinned" covers to the valve body shall be permitted. Cover bearing, disc retainer, and seat shall be made of the same material. All necessary repairs and/or modifications other than replacement of the main valve body shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes shall not be permitted and components including cast material shall be of North American manufacture. The valve manufacturer shall warrant the valve to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment provided the valve is installed and used in accordance with all applicable instructions. Electrical components shall have a one-year warranty. The valve manufacturer shall also provide a computerized cavitation chart which shows flow rate, differential pressure, percentage of valve opening, Cv factor, system velocity, and if there will be cavitation damage. 4. Material Specification: Valve Size: Main Valve Body and Cover Main Valve Trim: End Detai I: Pressure Rating: Temperature Range: Rubber Material: 5. Pilot Control System 6" 316 Stainless Steel 316 Stainless Steel Slip on Two Piece Flange per ANSB 16.5 285 PSI To 180° F Buna-N 15050-33 The pressure relief pilot shall be a direct -acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, diaphragm valve designed to permit flow when controlling pressure exceeds the adjustable spring setting. The pilot control is normally held closed by the force of the compression on the spring above the diaphragm and it opens when the pressure acting on the underside of the diaphragm exceeds the spring setting. Pilot control sensing shall be upstream of the pilot system strainer so accurate control may be maintained if the strainer is partially blocked. A full range of spring settings shall be available in ranges from 0-450 psi. 6. Material Specification for Pilot Control: Pressure Rating: 300 PSI Trim: 316 Stainless Steel Rubber Material: Buna-N Tubing and Fittings: 316 Stainless Steel Adjustment Range: 0-75 or 20-200 TBD Operating Fluids: H2° 7. The valve shall be a Cla-Val Co. Model No. 5650-OIBKXRP Pressure Relief and Pressure Sustaining Valve. B. Back Pressure and Pump Control Valve Equipped for Rapid Closing on Power Failure Solenoid Control Feature: Solenoid Control is a direct acting 3 -way Solenoid Control that changes position when the coil is energized or de -energized. This applies or relieves pressure in the cover chamber of auxiliary hytrol. 2. Pressure Relief Feature: Pressure relief control is a normally closed control that responds to main valve inlet pressure changes. An increase in inlet pressure tends to open control and a decrease in inlet pressure tends to close control. This causes main valve cover pressure to vary and the main valve modulates (opens and closes) maintaining a relatively constant pressure at the main valve inlet. When inlet pressure is lower than the set point of control, control closes. This pressurizes the main valve cover chamber and the main valve closes. Pressure Relief control adjustment: Turn the adjusting screw clockwise to increase the setting. 3. Rapid Closing on Power Failure: Solenoid control must be energized during normal operation. This applies pressure to auxiliary hytrol cover which closes hytrol. When a power failure occurs, solenoid is de -energized. This relieves pressure from auxiliary hytrol 15050-34 cover chamber and hytrol opens. This applies pressure to the main valve cover through hytrol and valve and the main valve rapidly closes. 4. Main Valve: The valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm -actuated, globe or angle pattern. The valve shall consist of three major components: the body with seat installed, the cover with bearings installed, and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure form the line pressure. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes are not permitted and there shall be no pistons operating the main valve or pilot controls. 5. Main Valve Body: No separate chambers shall be allowed between the main valve cover and body. Valve body and cover shall be of cast material. Stainless Steel is used. The valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc with a rectangular cross- section contained on three and one-half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable seat insert. No O-ring type discs (circular, square, or quad type) shall be permitted as the seating surface. The disc guide shall be of the contoured type to permit smooth transition of flow and shall hold the disc firmly in place. The disc retainer shall be of a sturdy one-piece design capable of withstanding opening and closing shocks. It must have straight edge sides and a radius at the top edge to prevent excessive diaphragm wear as the diaphragm flexes across this surface. No hourglass -shaped disc retainers shall be permitted and no V -type or slotted type disc guides shall be used. The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic 316 stainless steel stem of sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum of five - degree taper on the seating surface for a positive, drip -tight shut off. No center guides shall be permitted. The stem shall be drilled and tapped in the cover end to receive and affix such accessories as may be deemed necessary. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve separating operating pressure from line pressure. The flexible, non -wicking, FDA approved diaphragm shall consist of nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber compatible with the operating fluid. The center hole for the main valve stem must be sealed by the vulcanized process or a rubber grommet sealing the center stem hole from the operating pressure. The diaphragm must withstand a Mullins Burst Test of a mimrnum of 600 psi per layer of nylon fabric and shall be cycle tested 100,000 times to insure longevity. The diaphragm shall not be used as the seating surface. The diaphragm shall be fully supported in 15050-35 the valve body and cover by machined surfaces which support no less than one- half of the total surface area of the diaphragm in either the fully open or fully closed position. The main valve seat and the stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. The cover bearing and seat in 6" and smaller size valves shall be threaded into the cover and body. Valve seat in 8" and larger size valves shall be retained by flat head machine screws for ease of maintenance. The lower bearing of the valve stem shall be contained concentrically within the seat and shall be exposed to the flow on all sides to avoid deposits. To insure proper alignment of the valve stem, the valve body and cover shall be machined with a locating lip. No "pinned" covers to the valve body shall be permitted. Cover bearing, disc retainer, and seat shall be made of the same material. All necessary repairs and/or modifications other than replacement of the main valve body shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes shall not be permitted and components including cast material shall be of North American manufacture. The valve manufacturer shall warrant the valve to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment provided the valve is installed and used in accordance with all applicable instructions. Electrical components shall have a one-year warranty. The valve manufacturer shall also provide a computerized cavitation chart which shows flow rate, differential pressure, percentage of valve opening, Cv factor, system velocity, and if there will be cavitation damage. 6. Material Specification: Valve Size: 12" Main Valve Body and Cover: 316 Stainless Steel Main Valve Trim: 316 Stainless Steel End Detail: Slip on Two Piece Flange per ANSB 16.5 Pressure Rating: 850 PSI Temperature Range: To 180° F Rubber Material: Buna-N 7. Pilot Control System The pressure relief pilot shall be a direct -acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, diaphragm valve designed to permit flow when controlling pressure exceeds the adjustable spring setting. Pilot control sensing shall be upstream of the pilot system strainer so accurate controlmaybe maintained if the strainer is partially blocked. A full range of spring settings shall be available in ranges from 0-450 Psi. 8. Material Specification for Pilot Control: 15050-36 Pressure Rating: Trim: Rubber Material: Tubing and Fittings: Adjustment Range: Operating Fluids: Back Pressure Adjustment Range Solenoid Voltage: 300 PS 316 Stainless Steel Buna-N 316 Stainless Steel 0-75 or 20-200 TBD H2° TBD TBD 9. The valve shall be a Cla-Val Co. Model No. 5658-01 BKXRP Combination Back Pressure and Solenoid Shutoff Valve. C. Valves shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations 2.28 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Other items necessary for the complete installation and not specified herein shall conform to the details and notes shown on the Contract Drawings. All minor items implied, usually included, or required for the construction of a complete operating system shall be installed whether shown on the Contract Drawings or not. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. All pipe, fittings, valves, and other material shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer after delivery, and no broken, cracked, imperfectly coated, or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. When a defect or crack is discovered, the injured portion shall not be installed. Cracked pipe shall have the defect cut off at least 12 inches from the break in the sound section of the barrel. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Excavation, backfill, and compaction shall conform to the provisions of Section 02220. Upon satisfactory installation of the pipe bedding material as specified in Section 02220, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe bells or couplings shall be excavated by hand digging. When the pipe is laid in the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall receive continuous, uniform support and no pressure will be exerted on the pipe joints from the trench bottom. B. Cover for underground piping shall not be less than that indicated on the Contract Drawings. The minimum cover for pipe shall be 36 inches. In areas where other piping 15050-37 conflicts preclude the maximum cover desired, the piping shall be laid to provide the maximum cover obtainable. C. Pipe, fittings, valves and accessories shall be installed as shown or indicated on the Contract Drawings. D. All connections to existing piping systems shall be made as shown or indicated on the Contract Drawings after consultation and cooperation with authorities of the Owner. Some such connections may have to be made during off-peak hours (late night or early morning). E. Pipe Joint Deflection: Whenever it is desirable to deflect pipe joints to avoid obstructions or to maintain required alignment, the amount of the joint deflection shall not exceed 80 percent of the maximum limits allowed by the pipe manufacturer. F. In preparation for pipe installation, placement (stringing) of pipe should be as close to the trench as practical on the opposite side of the trench from the excavated material. The bell ends of the pipe should point in the direction of the work progress. G. Pipe and fittings shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required. Where grades for the pipeline are not indicated on the Contract Drawings, maintain a uniform depth of cover with respect to finish grade. Care shall be taken to insure a good alignment both horizontally and vertically and to give the pipe a firm bearing along its entire length. Any pipe which has its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relayed. H. All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of sand, dirt, and debris before laying. All precautions shall be taken to prevent sand, dirt or other foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. If necessary, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end of the pipe before lowering into the trench and left there until the connection is made to the adjacent pipe. Any sand, dirt, or other foreign material that enters the pipe shall be removed from the pipe immediately. Interior of all pipe and fittings shall be kept clean after installation until accepted in the complete work. I. Any time that pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other method approved by the Engineer. Plugs shall remain in pipe ends until all water is removed from the trench. No pipe shall be installed when trench conditions are unsuitable for such work, including standing water, excess mud, or rain. J. After pipe has been laid, inspected, and found satisfactory, sufficient backfill shall be placed along the pipe barrel to hold the pipe securely in place while conducting the preliminary hydrostatic test. No backfill shall be placed over the joints until the preliminary test is satisfactorily completed, leaving them exposed to view for the detection of visible leaks. 15050-38 K. Upon satisfactory completion of the hydrostatic test, backfilling of the trench shall be completed. L. Aboveground and Exposed Piping: Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all equipment access areas and openings. Changes in sizes shall be made with appropriate reducing fittings. Pipe connections shall be made in accordance with the details shown and manufacturer's recommendations. Open ends of pipe lines shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt and other foreign material out of the system. Pipe supports and hangers shall be provided where indicated or as required to insure adequate support of the piping. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. INSPECTION AND TESTING 1. All pipe shall be inspected and tested at the foundry. 2. The Owner shall have the right to have any or all piping, fittings or special castings inspected and tested by an independent testing agency at the foundry or elsewhere. Such inspection and testing will be at the Owner's expense. 3. Mark as rejected and immediately remove from the job site, all pipe lengths showing a crack, damaged lining, or receiving a severe blow that may cause an incipient fracture, even though no such fracture can be seen. 4. Removal of cracked portions: Any pipe showing a distinct crack, but no incipient fracture beyond the limits of the visible crack, may be cut off and the sound portion installed. Cut the pipe at least 12 inches from the visible limits of the crack. Cutting of pipe shall be done by skilled workmen, and in such a manner as to not damage the pipe. Every cut shall be square and smooth, with no damage to the pipe lining. Cut surfaces, shall be recoated as specified for the pipe. Cutting and installing cracked pipe shall only be performed when approved by the Engineer, and shall be at the expense of the Contractor. B. Handling and Cutting Pipe: Care shall be taken in handling, cutting, and laying ductile iron pipe and fittings to avoid damaging the pipe and interior coal tar epoxy or cement mortar lining, scratching or marring machined surfaces, and abrasion of the pipe coating. All cracked pipe and fittings shall be removed at once from the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Pipe cutting shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner without creating damage to the pipe and interior epoxy or cement mortar lining. Ductile iron pipe may be cut using an abrasive pipe saw, rotary wheel cutter, guillotine pipe saw, milling 15050-39 wheel saw or oxyacetylene torch. Cut ends and rough edges of ductile iron pipe shall be ground smooth. For push -on joint connections, the cut end shall be beveled to prevent gasket damage during joint assembly. Interior lining shall be repaired at cut ends per the manufacturer's instructions prior to joint assembly. C. Laying Pipe and Fittings: Bedding for Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum bedding requirements shall be Type 2 as defined in ANSI/AWWA C 600, latest revision. Provide proper bedding required, in accordance with thickness class of pipe being laid and depth of cover. Proper pipe laying conditions shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 150 and C 151, latest revisions, and ANSI/AWWA C 600, latest revision. 2. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be laid in accordance with American Water Works Association Standard ANSI/AWWA C 600, latest revision, entitled "Standard for Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances", with the following sections specifically applying: a) Section 3.3 - Pipe Installation b) Section 3.4 - Joint Assembly D. Ductile Iron Pipe Joints: 1. Type: The joints of all pipelines shall be made absolutely tight. The particular joint used shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation. Where shown on the Drawings or where, in the opinion of the Engineer, settlement or vibration is likely to occur, all pipe joints shall be bolted mechanical type or restrained type as specified above, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Push -on Joints: Push -on joints shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Lubricant, if required, shall be an inert, non- toxic, water soluble compound incapable of harboring, supporting, or culturing bacterial life. Manufacturer's installation recommendations shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before commencing work. The bell of the pipe shall be cleaned of excess tar or other obstructions and wiped out before the cleaned and prepared spigot of the next pipe is inserted. The new pipe shall be shoved firmly into place until properly seated and held securely until the joint has been completed. 3. Mechanical Joints: All types of mechanical joint pipes shall be laid and jointed in full conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before work is begun. Only specially skilled workmen shallbepermitted to makeup mechanical joints. Torque wrenches, set as specified in AWWA Standard C 11 1, shall be used; or spanner 15050-40 type wrenches not longer than specified therein may be used without the permission of the Engineer. 4. Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Joint assembly shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval before commencing work. 5. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made up by inserting the gasket between the flanges. The threads of the bolts and the faces of the gaskets shall be coated with suitable lubricant immediately before installation. a) Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate bolts with oil and graphite. b) Insert the nuts and bolts (or studs) finger tighten, and progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to the proper tension. C) Execute care when tightening joints to prevent undue strain upon valves, pumps and other equipment. d) If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PVC PIPE A. Storage and Handling: PVC pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles packaged in such manner as to provide protection against damage. When possible, pipe should be stored at the job site in the unit packages until ready for use. Packaged units shall be handled using a forklift or a spreader bar with fabric straps. Packaged units shall not be stacked at the job site higher than two units high. 2. When it is necessary to store PVC pipe for long periods of time, exposure to direct sunlight shall be prevented by covering the pipe with an opaque material. Adequate air circulation above and around the pipe shall be provided as required to prevent excessive heat accumulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources of hot objects such as heaters, fires, boilers or engine exhaust. Pipe gaskets shall be protected from excessive exposure to heat, direct sunlight, ozone, oil and grease. The interior and all sealing surfaces of pipe, fittings, and other appurtenances shall be kept clean and free of dirt and foreign matter. 15050-41 3. Care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid severe impact blows, crushing, abrasion damage, gouging or cutting. Pipe shall be lowered, not dropped, from trucks or into trenches. All cracked, damaged, or defective pipe and fittings, or any length of PVC pipe having a gouge, scratch or other permanent indentation of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth, shall be rejected and removed at once from the work and replaced with new acceptable pipe at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Field Cutting PVC Pipe: Field cutting of pipe shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner without creating damage to the pipe. The pipe shall be cut square with a fine- toothed hand or power saw or other cutter or knife designed for use with plastic pipe. Prior to cutting, the pipe shall be marked around its entire circumference or a square -in vise shall be used to ensure the pipe end is cut square. Remove burrs by smoothing edges with a knife, file, or sandpaper. C. Field Cutting Bell and Spigot PVC Pipe: Bevel the cut end of the pipe using a pipe beveling tool, wood rasp or portable sander to prevent damage to the gasket during joint assembly. A factory -finished beveled end should be used as a guide to ensure proper beveling angle and correct depth of bevel. Round off any sharp edges on the leading edge of the bevel with a knife or file. D. Laying PVC Pipe: Pipe Bedding: Bedding for PVC pipe shall be as specified in Section 02220 using granular pipe bedding material. 2. All PVC pipe shall be laid in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's published installation guide, the AWWA Manual of Practice No. M23 "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" and the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association installation recommendations. 3. Pipe laying shall commence at the lowest end of the system and proceed upgrade with the spigot ends of bell and spigot pipe pointing in the direction of the flow. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a close concentric joint with the adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets of the flow lines. As the work progresses, the interior of the sewer shall be cleared of dirt and superfluous materials. Except where authorized, trenches shall be kept completely free from water until the pipe jointing and jointing inspection are completed. At all times when work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely plugged so that water, earth or other substances will not enter pipe or fittings. 4. PVC Pipe for gravity sewers shall be installed in accordance with requirements of ASTM D 2321, latest revision, "Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe", and the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer. 15050-42 PVC gravity sewer shall not be installed with cover depths in excess of 25 feet without prior approval from the Engineer. 5. Pipe and fittings shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades indicated on Contract Drawings and as specified herein. Care shall be taken to ensure a good alignment both horizontally and vertically and to give the pipe a firm bearing along its entire length. Any pipe which has its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relayed at no additional expense to Owner. 6. All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of sand, dirt and debris before laying. All precautions shall be taken to prevent sand, dirt or other foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. If necessary, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end of the pipe before lowering into the trench and left there until the connection is made to the adjacent pipe. Any sand, dirt or other foreign material that enters the pipe shall be removed from the pipe immediately. Interior of all pipe and fittings shall be kept clean after installation until accepted in the complete work. 7. Any time that pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other method approved by the Engineer. Plugs shall remain in pipe ends until all water is removed from the trench. No pipe shall be installed when trench conditions are unsuitable for such work including standing water, excess mud, rain or ice. E. PVC Pipe Joint Assembly for Rubber Gasketed Bell and Spigot Pipe: 1. The PVC bell and spigot joint shall be assembled in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's installation instructions, ASTM D 2774, and AWWA Manual M23. Clean the interior of the bell, the gasket, and the spigot of the pipe to be jointed with a rag to remove any dirt or foreign material before assembling. Inspect the gasket, pipe spigot bevel, gasket groove and sealing surfaces for damage or deformation. 2. Lubricate the spigot end of the pipe with a lubricant supplied or specified by the pipe manufacturer for use with gasketed PVC pipe in potable water systems. The lubricant should be supplied as specified by the pipe manufacturer. After the spigot end is lubricated, it must be kept clean and free of dirt and sand. If dirt and sand adhere to the lubricated end, the spigot must be wiped clean and relubricated. 3. Insert the spigot into the bell so that it contacts the gasket uniformly. Align the pipe sections and push the spigot end into the bell until the manufacturer's reference mark on the spigot is flush with the end of the bell. The pipe should be pushed into the bell using a bar and wood block. The joint shall not be assembled by "stabbing" or swinging the pipe into the bell, nor shall construction machinery be used to push the pipe into the bell. 15050-43 4. If undue resistance to insertion of the spigot end is encountered or if the reference mark does not reach the flush position, disassemble the joint and check the position of the gasket. If the gasket is twisted or pushed out of its seat, inspect the components, repair or replace damaged items, clean the components and repeat the assembly steps. Be sure the pipe is in proper alignment during assembly. If the gasket was not out of position, check the distance between the spigot end and the reference mark and relocate the mark if it is out of position. F. PVC Pipe Joint Assembly for Threaded and Solvent Welded Pipe: 1. All threaded and solvent welded joints shall be made watertight in accordance with ASTM D 2855, ASTM D 2564, and AWWA Manual M23. All pipe cutting, threading and jointing procedures for threaded and solvent welded PVC pipe joints shall be in strict accordance with the pipe and fitting manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Thread lubricant for threaded joints shall be Teflon tape only. 2. At threaded joints between PVC and metal pipes, the metal side shall contain the socket end and the PVC side the spigot. A metal spigot shall not, under any circumstances, be screwed into a PVC socket. G. Field Testing: 1. Following installation, the pipe shall be tested and flushed as specified herein. 2. Long Term Deflection Test: The pipe shall be tested to demonstrate that maximum long term deflection of the pipe does not exceed 5 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe. The test method for deflection shall be by using an electronic deflectometer or a rigid "Go -No Go" device. The test for long term deflection shall be done after the trench has been backfilled a minimum of 72 hours. 3. Joints: Shall be left exposed following makeup for visual inspection to show that the pipe is fully seated and the bell is not cracked. 4. Alignment: Following placing of one foot of tamped backfill cover, the pipe shall be sighted between successive manholes to ensure proper grade and alignment. This work shall be performed in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Upon examination from either end of the sewer line section, a full circle of light shall be visible from the viewed end. Any section which does not pass the alignment test shall be repaired, or removed and relayed at no additional cost to the Owner, until the section passes the test. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE 15050-44 A. Threaded Joints: 1. Threads shall be neatly cut with long tapers using sharp tools, and the jointing procedure shall conform to the best practice of the trade. 2. Ream the ends of threaded pipe to remove all burrs. 3. Remove all dirt and chips from the inside of the pipe and fittings and from the threads. 4. Makeup joints with an approved pipe joint compound or tape applied to the male threads only. 5. When required to back off joints, entirely disjoint, wipe the threads of both the pipe and fittings clean, apply new joint compound, and reassemble the joint. B. Shop Welded Connections: 1. All welding shall conform to ANSI B31.1. 2. All welders shall be certified for types and classes of welds being performed. 3. All welds shall be inspected for quality and suitability. Repair or replace all unsatisfactory welds. C. Flanged Joints: I. Tighten flange bolts so that the gaskets are uniformly compressed and sealed. 2. Do not distort flanges. 3. Leave flange bolts with the ends projecting 1/8 -inch to 3/8 -inch beyond the faces of the nuts after tightening. 4. Gasket material shall be compatible with the fluid being conveyed. D. Shop Cutting: Cut pipe from measurements taken at the site, not from the Contract Drawings. E. To permit convenient disassembly for alterations and repairs, install unions or flanges where shown on the Contract Drawings and: 1. In long runs of piping. 2. In bypasses around equipment. 15050-45 3. In connections to traps, tanks, pumps, and other equipment. 4. Between shutoff valves. F. All glands, clamps, bolts, nuts, studs and other uncoated parts of fitting joints for underground installation shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. G. Testing: Test in accordance with Section 15044. 3.06 FITTING INSTALLATION FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING A. The weight of ductile iron fittings shall not be carried by the pipe on which they are installed. The fitting shall be supported by a concrete cradle. Concrete used for supports shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. Concrete for the support cradle shall be poured against undisturbed soil. B. All glands, clamps, bolts, nuts, studs and other uncoated parts of fitting joints for underground installation shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 3.07 THRUST BLOCKING A. Thrust blocks shall be avoided in as much as possible. All ductile iron or other push -on or mechanical joint connections shall be restrained with restrained joints as specified hereinbefore. Thrusts blocks may be used for any additional support the Contractor may deem desirable, or at certain locations not applicable to restrained joints, and shall be per the Contractor's design, with approval from the Engineer. B. Suitable concrete reaction or thrust blocking shall be applied on all pressure pipe lines, except for those having flanged or restrained joints, at all tees, plugs, caps and at bends deflecting 11 1/4 -degrees or more. As an option, at no additional cost to the Owner, pipe movement shall be prevented as specified hereinbefore for Restrained Joints. Concrete used for thrust blocking shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. C. Both concrete thrust blocks and restrained joints or tie rods must be used when, in the judgement of the Engineer, the nature and criticality of an installation is such as to require additional stability. D. Areas where thrust blocks are to be placed shall be hand excavated. Excavation for thrust blocks shall be completed following installation of the pipe and fitting to be restrained. For thrust blocks, hand excavate to undisturbed soil and to the sizes and configurations shown on Drawings. Use extreme care following excavation not to disturb soil in the thrust block area, prior to pouring concrete. 15050-46 E. Each fitting and pipe shall be wrapped with 8 -mil thick polyethylene prior to pouring concrete, so that no concrete comes in direct contact with the surface of the fitting or pipe. Concrete shall cure a minimum of 7 days prior to putting the line under pressure. The Contractor shall not backfill around thrust blocks until approval is obtained from the Engineer. 3.08 CONCRETE PIPE ENCASEMENT A. Concrete for concrete pipe encasement shall have a minimum strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days and encasement shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the Contract Drawings. Encasement shall be constructed where: 1. Indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. The Engineer shall order the pipeline encased. B. The points of beginning and ending of concrete pipe encasement shall be not more than 6 inches from a pipe joint to protect the pipe from cracking due to uneven settlement of its foundation or the effects of superimposed live loads. C. Pipe encasement shall provide a minimum coverage of 6 inches all around the pipe including pipe bells. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES, WALL CASTINGS AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe sleeves and wall castings shall be provided at the locations called for on the Contract Drawings. These units shall be as detailed and of the material as noted on the Contract Drawings. They shall be accurately set in the concrete or masonry to the elevations shown. All wall sleeves and castings required in the walls shall be in place when the walls are poured. Ends of all wall castings and wall sleeves shall be of a type consistent with the piping to be connected to them. B. Link seals for wall sleeves shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. For watertight applications in tanks or treatment units, the link seal installation shall be tested hydrostatically for leaks at the same time as the tank or treatment unit. Any leaks that occur during the test period shall be repaired by checking the link seals for proper installation and replacement of unit(s) found to be defective at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Pipe couplings shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Valves of the size and type shown on the Contract Drawings shall be set plumb and installed at the locations indicated on the Contract Drawings. Valves shall be installed in 15050-47 accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and with the details shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Valves shall be installed such that they are supported properly in their respective positions, free from distortion and strain. Valves shall be installed such that their weight is not borne by pumps and equipment that are not designed to support the weight of the valve. C. Valves shall be carefully inspected during installation; they shall be opened wide and then tightly closed and the various nuts and bolts shall be tested for tightness. Special care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter from becoming lodged in the valve seat. Check and adjust all valves for smooth operation. D. Install valves with the operating stem in either horizontal or vertical position. E. Allow sufficient clearance around the valve operator for proper operation. F. Clean iron flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean carbon steel flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads with oil or graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight. G. For buried valves, a valve box shall be centered accurately over the operating nut and the entire assembly shall be plumb. The tops of valve boxes shall be adjusted to the proper elevation as specified below and as shown on the Contract Drawings. I. In paved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set flush with pavement. Following paving operations, a 24 inch square shall be neatly cut in the pavement around the box and the paving removed. The top of the box shall then be adjusted to the proper elevation and a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad poured around the box cover. Concrete pads in traffic areas shall be reinforced with No. 4 reinforcement bars as shown on the Contract Drawings. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. 2. In unpaved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 2 inches above finished grade. After the top of the box is set to the proper elevation, a 24 inch square by 6 inch thick concrete pad shall be poured around the box cover. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,000 psi compressive strength. 3. The concrete pad for the valve box cover shall have a 2 '/2 -inch diameter, bronze identification disc embedded in the concrete surface as shown on the Drawings. The bronze identification disc shall be as specified in Section 09905 and shall have the information as shown on the Contract Drawings neatly stamped on it. 15050-48 H. Valves shall be tested hydrostatically, concurrently with the pipeline in which they are installed. Protect or isolate any parts of valves, operators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less than the pressure test(s). If valve joints leak during pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts and hydrostatically retest the joints. Following installation, all aboveground valves shall be painted in accordance with the painting system specified in Section 09900. Following installation of buried valves or valves installed in valve vaults, repair any scratches, marks and other types of surface damage, etc., with a coating equal to the original coating supplied by the manufacturer. Prior to backfilling, all nuts, bolts and other parts of the valve joints shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 3.11 INSTALLATION OF FIRE HYDRANTS A. Fire hydrants shall be installed at the locations shown and as detailed on the Contract Drawings, and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. No fire hydrant assembly shall be backfilled until approved by the Engineer. C. Provide crushed stone drainage material and restrained joints as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. Thrust blocks shall be as specified hereinabove. D. Barrel and operating stem extensions shall be provided for fire hydrants, if necessary, to install the hydrant at the proper elevation above finish grade, as detailed on the Contract Drawings. E. After installation, the fire hydrants shall be hydrostatically tested and flushed with the line in which they are installed. F. Following installation, finish paint aboveground exterior of hydrant with one coat, 3 mils dry film thickness, of a waterborne acrylic coating. Finish coating shall be supplied by the hydrant manufacturer and shall be applied in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Prior to finish coating, surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of concrete, grease and dirt. Finish coating shall be Carboline Carbocrylic 3359, or approved equal. Color shall meet the Owner's requirements as approved by the Engineer. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE CHECK VALVE BACK FLOW PREVENTERS A. Back flow preventers shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings. Back flow preventers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions and as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Back flow preventers shall be installed horizontally with an 18 inch minimum clearance between the finished grade and the lowest point on the bottom of the unit. Back flow 15050-49 (� preventers shall be installed with provisions for a suitable drain arrangement to drain off �✓ discharges from the relief valve, so that discharges are not objectionable. Back flow preventers shall be installed such that they are easily accessible for testing, maintenance and repair. C. Piping and fittings for units 3 inches and larger in size shall have flanged joints. Piping, fittings and valves for units 3 inches and larger in size shall be properly supported with adjustable pipe support stands as shown on the Contract Drawings. D. Following installation of the back flow preventer, piping, fittings and valves, the entire aboveground assembly shall be finished painted in accordance with Section 09900. 3.13 INSTALLATION OF METER VAULTS A. Concrete meter vaults shall be constructed in a workmanlike manner at locations and dimensions indicated on the Contract Drawings. Precast concrete vaults shall be set on a foundation of crushed stone, 12 inches thick. The vaults shall be constructed such that the structure will not transmit dead or live loads to the piping. Care shall be taken to prevent earth and other material from entering vault structures. B. Door frames and covers for meter or vault shall be cast into the top as indicated on the Contract Drawings. In non -paved areas, the top of the vaults shall be set a minimum of 2 inches above finished grade. 3.14 INSTALLATION OF AIR RELEASE VALVES A. Precast valve pits shall be constructed in a workmanlike manner at the locations and to the dimensions indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Piping, fittings and the air release valves shall be installed as shown on the Contract Drawings. C. The air release valve assemblies shall be installed so that they are properly supported and such that they will function properly and freely and no parts shall be strained. D. Frames and covers shall be installed for valve pits as indicated on the Contract Drawings. E. Valve tests shall be performed with and part of tests on companion piping. 3.15 INSTALLATION OF TIE RODS A. Tie rods shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written installation requirements. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings, the size and number of tie rods for a joint or installation shall be as recommended by the manufacturer's design chart for a working pressure of 150 psi. 15050-50 B. Following installation and prior to backfilling, all parts of the buried tie rod joint restraint system, including tie rods, tie bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners, shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 3.16 SEPARATION OF WASTEWATER MAINS, REUSE WATER MAINS AND POTABLE WATER MAINS A. Potable water mains shall be installed with at least a 10 foot horizontal separation from any wastewater mains and storm sewers. Separation distance shall be measured outside edge to outside edge. Reuse water mains shall be installed 5 feet center to center or 3 feet clear (outside edge to outside edge) from any potable water or wastewater mains. At crossings, the installation shall provide for a minimum vertical separation distance of 18 inches between the outside edge of the crossing wastewater, storm sewer or reuse water mains and the outside edge of the potable water mains. This separation shall be provided where the potable water main is either below or above the wastewater, storm sewer or reuse water mains. When the 18 inch minimum vertical separation distance cannot be maintained, the crossing shall be arranged so that the wastewater main, storm sewer or reuse water main joints and potable water main joints are equidistant from the point of crossing with no less than 10 feet between any two joints and the piping shall be at least one twenty (20) ft length of ductile iron pipe. Alternately, the wastewater main or reuse water main shall be placed in a casing pipe or encased in concrete to obtain the equivalent of the required 10 ft separation. In case of a storm sewer and water main crossing provide steel casing pipe or concrete encasement around the potable water main to obtain equivalent of the required 10 ft separation. Concrete encasement shall be as specified above. 3.17 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING A. See Section 15044. 3.18 INFILTRATION/EXFILTRATION TESTING FOR GRAVITY DRAIN LINES A. See Section 15044. 3.19 MAIN CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Following the hydrostatic and leakage tests, all the mains constructed under this contract shall be cleaned and flushed to remove sand, loose dirt and other debris. Flushing velocity shall be a minimum of 2.5 fps. Flushing shall continue until clean water flows from the main. However, the Contractor shall endeavor to use the minimum amount of flushing water required to complete the work. To increase the efficiency of the cleaning and flushing operation, the Contractor shall use a pipeline pigging device of the proper size and designed to clean the intended pipeline. The pigging device shall be capable of 15050-51 turning through a standard 90 degree MJ bend. The type of pipeline pigging device and the method of operation shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Upon completion of testing for the gravity drain line system, drain lines shall be flushed to remove dirt, sand, stones and other debris which may have entered the lines during construction and settled out in the lines and manholes. Materials and debris flushed from the drain lines shall be removed from a downstream manhole or basin and disposed of at an approved disposal area. C. Temporary blowoffs may be required for the purpose of flushing mains. Temporary blowoffs shall be installed as close as possible to the ends of the main being flushed. Blowoffs installed on the main shall be the same diameter as the main. Temporary blowoffs shall be removed and plugged after the main is flushed. All costs for installing and removing temporary blowoffs shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The Owner shall be notified at least 72 hours prior to flushing mains. E. Blowoffs and temporary drainage piping used for flushing shall not be discharged into any gravity sewer or pumping station wet well. The Contractor shall obtain prior approvals from the Engineer and the Owner as to the methods and locations of flushing water discharge. 3.20 FINAL DISINFECTION FOR POTABLE WATER PIPELINES A. Before any portion of the potable water piping systems is to be placed in service, it shall be disinfected; and its disinfection shall be demonstrated by bacteriological tests conducted in accordance with "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Sewage" for the coli -aerogenes group, by an approved laboratory, acceptable to the Engineer and the County Health Department. B. All pipe, fittings, valves and all other appurtenances installed for potable water lines shall be disinfected prior to being placed in service. Disinfection procedures shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C 651, latest revision. C. Pipe subjected to contaminating materials shall be treated as approved by the Engineer. Should such treatment fail to remove contaminants from the pipe, contaminated sections of pipe shall be replaced with new uncontaminated pipe at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Disinfection of a completed line shall be accomplished using the following procedure: 1. All potable water piping, fittings, valves and appurtenances shall be disinfected with a chlorine solution with a sufficient concentration such that the initial chlorine concentration in the water line shall be a minimum of 50 mg/1 available chlorine, at any point in the line. 15050-52 2. Chlorine used for the purpose of disinfection shall be high test granular calcium hypochlorite which contains approximately 65 to 70 percent available chlorine by weight. The calcium hypochlorite shall be stored in a cool, dry, and dark environment, prior to its use, to minimize deterioration. The dry calcium hypochlorite will be used to makeup a high concentration chlorine solution which will be used for disinfection. Under no circumstances will undiluted, dry calcium hypochlorite by placed in the pipeline to be disinfected. 3. Water from the existing, in-service water line shall be made to flow at a constant, slow rate into the water line to be disinfected. Chlorine solution shall be injected or pumped at a regulated rate into the new main, at a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new water main. The method of tapping the water main for the chlorine injection point and the location of the tap shall be approved by the Engineer. Water from the existing potable water system at the connection point shall flow through a temporary jumper connection equipped with a backflow preventer as shown on the Contract Drawings. 4. Chlorine solution shall be circulated in the water main by opening the water control valve and systematically manipulating hydrants, manual air release valves and blowoffs. 5. Water service lines shall be disinfected in a similar manner as that for water mains, including corrective measures, by methods acceptable to the Engineer. 6. Chlorine solution shall remain in the water lines for no less than 24 hours, but longer than 24 hours if directed by the Engineer. 7. Extreme care shall be exercised at all times to prevent concentrated chlorine solution from entering existing water mains. E. After 24 hours, the free residual chlorine concentration in the water line at the pipe extremities shall be at least 10 mg/l; if not, the water lines shall be redisinfected as described above. F. Final flushing of lines may proceed after 24 hours, provided the free residual chlorine analysis is satisfactory. Flushing shall be continued until a chlorine residual test shows that lines contain only the normal chlorine residual. Prior to flushing water with high chlorine concentrations, obtain approvals from the Engineer and the Owner as to the methods and locations of discharge. G. Following disinfection and thorough flushing of the water lines, as specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials required to obtain samples of water from established points of the water line in suitable sterilized containers obtained from the County Health Department or approved analytical laboratory. Two (2) series of successive samples shall be obtained at each established sampling point. Each test series will require two samples at each sampling point. The period between each series of 15050-53 (� samples shall be a minimum of 24 hours. Samples shall be delivered by the Contractor to �✓ the County Health Department or approved analytical laboratory for bacteriological examination. Samples shall be collected in conformance with the County Health Department standards and lab testing schedule. Prior to collecting samples, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Owner who will have representatives present during sample collection. H. Bacteriological test results will be available approximately 48 to 72 hours after samples are submitted. If tests results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall immediately rechlorinate and retest the water lines and proceed with such corrective measures as are necessary to secure disinfected lines. All services shall be rechlorinated if the lines are rechlorinated. The water lines shall be redisinfected and retested, at the Contractor's expense, until approved by the Engineer, and the County Health Department. I. At satisfactory completion of the bacteriological test requirements, potable water lines shall not be placed into service until a FDEP letter of clearance is obtained. The system shall remain isolated until that time. Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Owner 72 hours prior to placing lines in service. 3.21 OBTAINING POTABLE WATER FOR TESTING, FLUSHING, AND DISINFECTION A. The potable water supply shall be protected with a temporary double check valve backflow preventer. B. To obtain water service during construction, the Contractor shall be required to install a temporary construction water service from an existing fire hydrant. The piping, fittings, backflow preventer and appurtenances required for the temporary construction water service shall be supplied by the Contractor. C. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for temporary construction water service connection, usage, and flushing. 3.22 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. The Contractor shall coordinate making connection of the new mains to mains which are in service at the time of construction, with the Owner. The Contractor shall not connect to existing facilities unless the Engineer and a representative of the Owner are present. The Engineer and the Owner shall be notified at least 48 hours prior to the time connection is desired. B. Operation of all system valves shall be the responsibility of the Owner's personnel only. At no time shall the Contractor operate any system valves. System valves shall be defined as any valve which has main pressure against either side of the valve. The Contractor shall notify the Owner to request that a valve be operated, at least 48 hours prior to the time operation is required. 15050-54 3.23 EXISTING WATER OR SEWER LINE ABANDONMENT A. In-place Abandonment: Water or sewer lines to be abandoned shall be abandoned in- place where possible or removed and disposed. In-place abandonment of pipe shall consist of isolating and plugging the line segments to remain in service, removal of valve boxes and pads, and filling all lines to be abandoned in-place completely with grout. B. Removal and Disposal: Abandoned pipe, valves, fittings and appurtenances to be removed shall be removed and disposed of offsite by the Contractor in accordance with all applicable local, state and federal regulations. All trenching or disturbed ground due to removal shall be backfilled, compacted and restored to original condition. The cost of removal, backfilling, compaction, disposal, and restoration shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 15050-55 SECTION 15062 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, test, complete and ready for operation all stainless steel pipe as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Where the word "pipe" is used it shall refer to pipe, fittings, hangers, supports and appurtenances unless otherwise noted. C. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: Furnishing and installing interior, above grade, stainless steel pipe, fittings and specials with screwed, butt welded, or flanged and plain ends. Furnishing stainless steel pipe sleeves and stainless steel pipe wall castings for interior and exterior wall and foundation wall penetrations. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete work is included in Division 3. B. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 15050. C. Pipe hangers and supports are included in Section 15126. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, the following: Shop drawings including piping layouts and schedules, including dimensioning, fittings, expansion joints, locations of valves and appurtenances, joint details, wall penetration details, methods and locations of supports and all other pertinent technical specifications for all piping to be furnished. Shop drawings shall include all data and information required for the complete piping systems. All dimensions shall be based on the actual equipment to be furnished. Types and locations of pipe hangers and/or supports shall be shown on the piping layouts for each pipe submittal. Not all dimensions will be checked by the Engineer, nor will detailed review be performed. Contractor shall be responsible for accurate dimensioning of piping systems. Certifications that welders are qualified, in accordance with ANSI B31.1, Paragraph 127.5 for shop and project site welding of pipe work. Proposed cleaning method, including precleaning, descaling, chemicals to be used, or mechanical descaling method and final cleaning/passivation 15062-1 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.0 1.0 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A312 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. 2. ASTM A530 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A778 - Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125 and 250. 2. ANSI B36.19 - Stainless Steel Pipe C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C 111 - Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. AWWA C220 — Stainless -Steel Pipe, 1/2 Inches and Larger 3. AWWA C226 — Stainless -Steel Fittings for Waterworks Service, '/2 Inch thru 72 Inch. D. American Welding Society (AWS) F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable, qualified and regularly engaged for the last 5 years in the manufacture of the materials to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with this Section. 6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Piping shall be installed in those locations as shown on the Drawings. B. The equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard types of stainless steel pipe and fittings for use in transporting water with up to 375 mg/L of chlorides. C. Stainless steel piping for the system listed below shall be designed for the following conditions: 1. System: Aboveground raw water discharge piping a. Material: Type 316L b. Operating Pressure: 50 psi 15062-2 Wm c. Test Pressure: 100 psi d. Flow Velocity: 7 fps e. Temperature: ambient 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall not be dropped. Pipe and fittings shall be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. B. In handling the pipe, wide cushioned slings or other devices and methods acceptable to the Engineer shall be used. No uncushioned ropes, chairs, wedges or levers shall be used in handling the pipe, fittings and couplings. C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe by the Contractor, at the Contractor's own expense. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be kept clean until they are put into service. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All stainless steel pipe and fittings 8 -in and larger shall be fabricated from stainless steel sheet and conform to ASTM A778 Type 316L. Carbon content of Type 316L material shall be 0.03 percent maximum. Finish shall be No. 1 or No. 2B. B. Pipe shall be die -formed or rolled true to dimension and round. Tolerances for length, inside and outside diameter and straightness shall conform to ASTM A530. The two edges of sheet shall be brought to line so as not to leave a shoulder on the inside of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. Longitudinal seams on pipe and fittings shall be welded by either the tungsten gas or the metallic -gas method. The interior welds shall be smooth, even and shall not have an internal bead higher than 1/16 -in. All pieces shall be marked with gauge and type of stainless steel and with the initials of the inspector marked on the inside of each piece, at each end. 15062-3 C. Pipe and fittings shall be supplied with a rating of 150 psi and the following minimum wall thicknesses: WALL THICKNESS DIAMETER (INCHES) INCHES 3 to 6 0.079 8 to 12 0.109 14 to 16 0.124 18 to 20 0.138 24 3/16 30 3/16 36 1/4 D. Fittings shall be smooth curve type up to 18 -in diameter and mitered type 20 -in diameter and greater. Fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.9. E. Flanges for pipe 4 -in and smaller shall be of the type of stainless steel as the pipeline, and shall be welded directly to the pipe end, and shall be drilled to the 125 lb ANSI B 16.1 standard. Flanges for pipe larger than 4 -in shall have stub ends or rolled angle rings of the type of stainless steel as the pipeline welded to the pipe end, with suitable gaskets between the mating surfaces and joined through the use of 125 lb rated back-up flanges, drilled to ANSI B16.1, and made of same type of stainless steel as the pipeline. Where the pipe stub is to pass through a sleeve during installation, a split -type back up flange shall be used. Bolts, washers, nuts and other hardware for flange bolting shall be Type 316 stainless steel. F. Gaskets for flanged connections shall be a minimum of 1/16 -in thick and shall be rubber. G. Shop fabricated multiple output headers may be used in lieu of individual flanged fittings. H. Wall pipes shall have integral shop welded wall stops. All stainless steel pipe and fittings [except those used for ozone service] shall be pickled at the point of manufacture, scrubbed and washed until all discoloration is removed in accordance with ASTM A380. Pipe ends shall be prepared for couplings or other type ends where required by transport and handling limitations, where required by the support layout requirements and where noted on the Drawings. Plain end pipe may be coupled with 'Pressfit"-style connectors, for pipe/tubing sizes 1 -1/2 -in and smaller, manufactured by the Victaulic Co. or by the use of grooved end couplings. Grooving (or built-up ends for Schedule 5s or l Os pipe) shall be of the coupling manufacturers standard type. Contractor is responsible for ensuring rigidity of joints where required. All normal pipe joints at valves, bends, etc, shall be flanged, drilling per ANSI B16.1, Class 125. K. Shop welding of fabrications shall be done according to the procedures and by welders certified per ASME Section IX. Welds shall be by an inert gas shielding process using only extra low carbon filler metals. Welds shall have a bead height of no more than 1/16-m. Butt welds shall 15062-4 have 100 percent penetration to the interior or backside of the weld joint. Cross-sectional thickness of welds shall be equal or greater than that of the parent metal. L. Where shown on the Drawings or where approved by the Engineer, plain end pipe shall be joined by all stainless steel flexible couplings. Sleeve type couplings shall be of the Type 316L stainless steel and shall be Style 38 as manufactured by Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries; coupling 411 as manufactured by Smith Blair, Inc. or equivalent couplings manufactured by Depend -O -Lok Co. M. Where shown on the Drawings or where approved by the Engineer, flanged coupling adaptors shall be used to connect plain end pipe to equipment, fittings and valves. Flanged coupling adaptors shall be of the Type 316L stainless steel and shall comply with AWWA C207. Flanged coupling adapters shall be manufactured by Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries; Smith Blair, Inc. or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All pipe and fittings shall be installed true to grade and alignment and pipe anchorage and/or restraint shall be provided where required. Manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed. B. All pipe and fittings shall be protected from dirt, dust, oil, grease and other foreign matter during installation to prevent damage to pipe and to assure no foreign matter is left in the piping. C. To assemble the joints in the field, thoroughly clean all joint surfaces and gaskets, if any, with soapy water before assembly. Bolts shall be tightened alternately, evenly to the manufacturer's specified torques. Under no condition shall extension wrenches or pipe -over -handle ratchet wrenches be used to secure greater leverage. All electrical bonding or insulation shall be installed as joints are made up. D. Fittings, in addition to those shown on the Drawings, shall be provided if required. Due consideration shall be given to thermal expansion/contraction over a temperature range of 200 degrees F. E. Sleeves of the proper size shall be installed for all pipes passing through floors or walls as shown on the Drawings. F. When cutting of pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine neatly, without damage to the pipe. Cut ends shall be smooth and at right angles to the axis of the pipe. G. After installation, stainless steel pipe lines shall be washed clean with steam or hot water to remove any foreign material picked up during transport. 3.02 JOINING MECHANICAL AND RESTRAINED JOINTS A. Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with the "Notes on Methods of Installation" under AWWA CI I I and the instructions of the manufacturer. B. Restrained joint pipe and fittings shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings and as acceptable to the Engineer. 15062-5 3.03 JOINING FLANGED JOINTS A. Flanged joints shall be made with gasket, bolts and nut bolts stud with a nut on each end, or studs with nuts where the pipe is tapped. The number and size of bolts shall conform to the same standard requirements as the flange. 3.04 FIELD WELDING A. Welding in the field shall be done only if approved by the Engineer. Field welds shall be made by welders certified under ASME Section IX and be equal in all respects to shop welds. After field welding has been done, all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and buffed using deburring and finishing wheels. 3.05 FIELD PAINTING A. Final field painting is included in Section 09900 except that for all stainless steel pipe, only bands, labels and arrows rather than full pipe painting will be required. 3.06 DISINFECTION AND CLEANUP A. After installation, completed lines shall be cleaned with Oakite deoxidizer or similar deoxidizer as recommended by the manufacturer to remove all foreign matter, construction stains or shop markings. Cleaned lines shall be rinsed clear with steam or hot water. B. Disinfection of the completed water bearing lines shall be in accordance with Section 15000. 3.07 FIELD TESTING A. Field Testing of the pipe is specified in Section 15044. END OF SECTION 15062-6 SECTION 15126 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install all pipe supports as indicated and as specified herein. B. Number and Location: The Drawings depict only minimum pipe support locations. Adequate pipe supports shall be supplied for all piping systems to provide a rigid overall installation and additional support for pipe ends when equipment is disconnected. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for all pipe support devices and materials demonstrating compliance with this Specification and the support details shown on the Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SUPPORTS FOR DUCTILE IRON AND LARGE DIAMETER STEEL PIPE A. Furnish and install supports necessary to hold the piping and appurtenances in a firm, substantial manner at the lines and grades indicated on the drawings or specified. Piping supports and hangers shall conform to Federal Specification WW -H-171 or shall be as specifically shown or indicated on the Drawings. Piping within structures shall be adequately supported from floors, walls, ceilings or beams. Supports from the floor shall be approved flange supports, saddle stands or suitable concrete piers as indicated or approved. Pipe saddles shall be shaped to fit the pipe with which they will be used and shall be capable of screw adjustment. B. Concrete piers shall conform accurately to the bottom 1/3 to 1/2 of the pipe. Piping along walls shall be supported by approved wall brackets with attached pipe rolls or saddles or by wall brackets with adjustable hanger rods. For piping supported from the ceiling, approved rod hangers proportioned for the size of pipe to be supported and of a type capable of screw adjustment after erection of the pipeline, with suitable adjustable concrete inserts or beam clamps, shall be used. The use of perforated band iron strap (plumber's strap), wire, or chain as pipe hangers will not be acceptable. If required, piping supports shall be placed so as to provide a uniform slope in the pipe without sagging. Supports shall be located wherever necessary in the opinion of the Engineer; however, in no case shall they exceed the dimensions shown on the following table. 15126- 1 Adequate supports shall especially be used adjacent to valves and fittings in pipelines. Fabricated steel or cast iron pipe supports, saddles, rolls, brackets and the like shall be as manufactured by Grinnell or an equal approved by the Engineer. C. All fabricated steel or cast iron pipe supports, saddles, rolls, brackets, devises and the like, shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication and/or machining. All nuts, bolts, clips and other hardware, and all hanger rods used for pipe supports, shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All nuts, bolts and threaded rods shall be in accordance with ASTM A 320, Class 2. All such devices shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900, painting, after installation. 2.02 PIPE SUPPORTS FOR SMALL DIAMETER PVC AND STEEL PIPE A. Small diameter PVC piping 4 inches in diameter and smaller, and steel piping 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be supported with Type 316 stainless steel pipe supports on the exterior or interior of buildings and fiberglass reinforced plastic on the interior only of buildings. Hardware used for pipe supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. B. In some cases, to adequately support small diameter PVC or steel piping, a metal frame support structure may be required for support of the piping system. Where required, metal frame support structures shall be constructed using channels, fittings, brackets, hardware and other accessories as manufactured by B -Line Systems, Inc. of Highland, Illinois, or an equal approved by the Engineer. The materials for the frame structure shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Hardware used to construct the frame support structure shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Pipe supports for small diameter PVC and steel piping shall be located wherever necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to adequately support the pipe; however, they shall have a maximum spacing as specified hereinafter for straight pipe runs. Adequate supports shall especially be used adjacent to valves and fittings in pipelines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hangers or supports at all changes in direction at the spacing requirements stated in this specification and at the end of piping runs to minimize the stresses imposed on piping, valves, associated equipment and appurtenances. 2. Piping support systems and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 15126-2 3. Install all hangers, supports, rods, inserts, clamps, bolts and other supporting devices of sizes and spacings to prevent loads from exceeding the manufacturer's maximum recommended loading with a safety factory of 5. 4. Secure hangers to beams or approved concrete insert where possible. 5. When piping is installed on structural steel supports, provide blocking of pipe rolls to prevent lateral pipe movement. 6. Do not support piping from other pipes or from stairs and walkways. 7. Set all inserts before the concrete is placed. B. Expansion and Contraction: Rigidly support all piping with adequate provisions for expansion and contraction. 2. Firmly anchor horizontal runs over 50 feet in length at the midpoint of the runs to force expansion equally toward the ends. C. Spacing: 1. Install hangers and supports at sufficiently close intervals to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 2. The following table is based on spacing requirements for hard drawn copper tube, Class 53 DIP, Schedule 80 PVC, or Standard Weight (Schedule 40) steel pipe carrying a fluid with a Specific Gravity of 1.0 at a temperature not exceeding 120 degrees F. Support spacing for other pipe materials or for piping carrying fluids with Specific Gravities or temperatures exceeding those stated above shall be approved by the Engineer. Maximum spacing of hangers and supports shall be as follows: Note: Spacing shall be 10 feet but may be increased depending on pipe size. Refer to AWWA standard of practice. 15126-3 Support Spacing,Feet Nominal Pipe Diameter, (inches) Copper Ductile Iron Plastic Steel 1/2 4.0 N/A 3.5 4.5 3/4 4.0 N/A 4.0 5.0 1 4.0 N/A 4.5 5.5 1-1/4 6.0 N/A 5.0 6.5 1-1/2 6.0 N/A 5.0 7.5 2 6.0 N/A 5.5 8.0 2-1/2 6.0 N/A 5.5 8.0 3 6.0 N/A 6.0 8.0 4 N/A 8.0 7.0 8.0 Larger than 4 N/A See Note N/A See Note Note: Spacing shall be 10 feet but may be increased depending on pipe size. Refer to AWWA standard of practice. 15126-3 D. Supporting Vertical Piping: 1. Support at a maximum of 10 feet spacing. 2. Support at all points necessary to insure rigid installation with adequate provisions to allow expansion and contraction and prevent vibration. 3. Support by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests. E. Supporting PVC and Fiberglass Piping: 1. Support in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the conditions of operation, temperature, and size of pipe. 2. Support in a manner which will prevent subsequent visible sagging of the pipe between supports due to plastic deformation. F. Drain, Waste and Vent Piping: Support by adjustable hangers. G. Valves, Fittings and Specialties: Independently support pipe, valves and specialties connected to pumps and equipment. H. Temporary Pipe Supports: 1. Lay out each section of pipeline and make connections while the pipe is held in temporary supports. 2. After the completion of connections in each section of pipeline, hold the section in place with temporary clamps. 3. Do not remove the temporary clamps until the piping is correctly installed on the permanent supports. 3.02 PAINTING A. All fabricated steel or cast iron pipe supports, saddles, brackets, rolls, clevises and the like shall be painted, after installation, as specified in Sections 09900 and 09905. END OF SECTION 15126-4 SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included consists of all supervision, labor, materials, equipment, facilities and installation required for the complete, satisfactory and approved electrical systems as indicated on the Drawings and called for in these Specifications, or as may be reasonably implied by either, for the installation of complete electrical systems. B. The Contractor shall install, complete and operating, electrical systems consisting of the following: Complete distribution for power and lighting as shown on plans, including switches and circuit breakers, feeders, subfeeders, grounding, panelboards, branch circuits, control wiring, switches and receptacles and all other equipment shown on drawings. 2. Contractor shall make all final connections to equipment furnished by other trades. 3. Connection of all motors, electrically operated equipment and controls. 4. All conduits, sleeves and backboards required for all systems and all duct banks. 6. Temporary electrical power and lighting shall be furnished, installed and maintained for all trades. 7. Miscellaneous items obviously required for a complete and operating system but not specifically called for on the drawings or in the specifications shall be provided by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Department (nuts and bolts, masonry anchors, conduit and equipment supports, drilling, welding, scaffolding, crane service, etc.). 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Reference within these Specifications to standards, codes or reference specifications implies that any item, product, or material so identified must comply with all minimum requirements as stated therein, unless indicated otherwise. Only the latest revised editions are applicable. B. Codes and Standards: The following codes and standards shall be used: Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-I I. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 3. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.) 7. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 8. Standard Building Code (SBC) 9. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Additionally, designs, work practices and conditions must conform with the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) 12. Rules of ADAAG (1993) with Latest Amendments 13. Florida Administration Requirement Manual (FARMS) C. Where materials and equipment are available under the continuing inspection and labeling of UL, provide such material and equipment. Listing by Underwriters' Laboratories shall be evidenced by the label. 1.3 DRAWINGS A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangements of equipment and wiring systems. If any departures from the Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and reasons therefor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 30 days after award of the Contract. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Engineer. All items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or noted on the Drawings but obviously necessary to make a complete working installation shall be included. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each package of shop drawings shall be bound as a unit and shall contain a first sheet with the project name, location, date submitted, name and address of the Design/Builder, Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-2 name and address of the equipment supplier and a list of the contents. Opposite each type of equipment or system shall be the manufacturer's name. The equipment data sheets shall appear in the same order as they are listed in the table of contents. B. The submittal drawings shall include complete specifications for every item, including materials, finish, dimensions, fabrication details, installation instructions, standards compliance and UL approval. Where a data sheet contains details covering various sizes or ratings of equipment, clearly mark the items applicable to the project. C. The operation and maintenance manuals shall include the name, address, and phone number of the supplier and nearest manufacturer's representative and shall contain a complete parts list for each system. 1.5 EQUIPMENT MANUAL AND OWNER INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion of the work, the Design/Builder shall prepare and deliver to the Department three complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals for each electrical, signal, control and special system installed. Manual shall consist of detailed drawings or catalog sheets for each component, replacement parts lists, wiring diagrams, maintenance instructions and description of system operation. The Contractor shall provide qualified instructors for a minimum of 40 hours of instruction to designated Department personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems. 1.6 RULES OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES A. Rules of local Utility Companies shall be complied with. Before submitting his bid, Contractor shall check with the Utility Companies supplying service to this installation and shall determine equipment, etc., he will be required to install and shall include cost of same in Bid. No extra payment will be made for the installation of such items, except in cases where the requirements of the Utility Companies change after the Contractor has submitted his Bid. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-3 1.7 COORDINATION WITH OTHER UTILITIES A. Installation of underground ducts and conduits for power and telecommunications services shall be thoroughly coordinated with other utilities on the site. Duct and conduit sizes and material types shall be as shown on the Drawings. Details of routing, burial depth, size of bends and termination at each end of service shall be verified on the job site. 1.8 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Contractor shall plan and layout the electrical work in order to be compatible with the building structure, the HVAC system and the plumbing system. Where failure to coordinate the work with other trades results in equipment having to be removed and relocated, the Contractor shall perform such removal and relocation at no cost to the Department. Where equipment has to be moved, the Engineer shall determine which equipment has to be moved regardless of which equipment was installed first. 1.9 STORAGE A. All material shall be stored in a safe, orderly manner. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground or floor and shall be kept clean, dry and free from damage or deteriorating elements. Damaged or rusted materials shall not be installed. 1.10 MATERIALS A. All equipment, materials and components shall be new, of standard current products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and be the manufacturer's latest design. All components by same manufacturer shall be mechanically and electrically compatible with rating of apparatus in which installed. All materials shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratory for the intended use in all cases where this labelling is available or shall be materials reviewed by the code enforcing authorities and Engineer. Equipment of a similar nature shall be identical. Example: All panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer and of the same style. 1.11 ACCESSORIES A. All hardware and accessory fittings shall be of a type designed, intended or appropriate for the use, and complement the items with which they are used, and shall have corrosion protection suitable for the atmosphere in which they are installed. All such hardware shall be U.S. standard sizes. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-4 0 1.12 INSTALLATION A. All materials shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the specific manufacturer's recommended installation methods. B. All equipment shall be set level, at the correct heights, properly aligned and where in sections, shall be bolted together. Install indoor surface mounted equipment, including panelboards, automatic transfer switches, safety switches, individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers, motor starters, etc., on metal framing support system (continuous slot metal channel system). C. Secure all materials and equipment firmly in place. Do not weld electrical materials for attachment and/or support. D. All screws, bolts, nuts, clamps, fittings or other fastening devices shall be made up tight. E. All materials and equipment shall be installed complete, including screws or bolts, covers, plates, fittings, etc. F. Follow the installation directions and recommendations of the materials and equipment manufacturers. G. Cutting, welding, or other weakening of building structure to facilitate electrical equipment and materials installation shall not be permitted. H. Light fixtures are intended to be supported by the ceiling support system, however, where additional supports are required they shall be provided by the Contractor. I. Provide all required wire, conduit and fittings for connection of HVAC system controls. Coordinate exact requirements with Division 15 Contractor. J. Use of manufacturer's name and catalog number: In some instances specified reference has been made to one manufacturer's name and catalog number. Such use does not necessarily mean that the equipment is an "off the shelf' item. Variances may be required for finish, material or other modifications. The Design/Builder shall assure that all such required modifications are made. K. In the case of panelboards, terminal cabinets and other equipment requiring wire and cable terminations, the Design/Builder shall ascertain that wiring gutter sizes are as required by NEC Tables 373-6(a) and 373-6(b). L. Working clearance around equipment shall meet or exceed code requirements as per NEC Tables 110-16(a) and 110-34(a). 1.13 INTERFERENCES Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-5 A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the electrical work shall be coordinated with the work of other trades so that interferences between conduits, piping, equipment, architectural, and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets in raceways, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work shall be furnished so as to take up a minimum space and all such offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish this shall be furnished and installed without additional expense to the Department. In the event of conflict, the Department will decide which equipment, piping, etc., must be relocated. Cutting and patching required to relocate work shall exactly match original finish, and shall be at the Contractor's expense. 1.14 IDENTIFICATION A. Electrical equipment shall be clearly and permanently labeled with a securely fastened nameplate. Nameplates shall be 1/16 inch thick engraved laminated plastic and shall have 1/4 inch high white letters on a black background. Plates shall be provided for all switches and disconnects, starters, panelboards, dry type transformers and lighting contactors. B. Color coding tape shall be moisture, flame and abrasion resistant vinyl plastic tape equal to Scotch No. 35. Colors shall be as specified elsewhere. C. All emergency equipment, including disconnect ahead of main panel and all equipment related to the fire alarm system, shall have red nameplates. These pieces of electrical equipment such as fire alarm control panel, etc., shall be labeled as described in A. above. D. Nameplate information shall include voltage, current rating (if any) and number of phases of the item labeled besides its designation. Also, the nameplate shall provide the panel and circuit number from which the equipment is fed, and the item it controls. E. All conductors shall be permanently tagged at terminal boxes, equipment and control stations to indicate their control function. Feeders shall be identified at every accessible point with a permanent tag indicating circuit number. Conductor tags shall be non- conductive. F. Major conduits shall be identified at wireways, panels, pull boxes, cabinets and similar locations to assist in future circuit tracing. Use adhesive markers, Dymo Labels or other approved methods. G. All circuits and equipment shall be identified to correspond with drawings and specifications. A Nameplate List shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. H. All panelboards shall contain a typewritten directory behind a plastic cover, located on inside of door. I. All conduit stub ups shall be identified with a stamped non-ferrous tag attached with Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-6 stainless steel wire. Numbers as shown on drawings. J. Install equipment identification nameplate at the center top of the equipment, using a rubber base adhesive. 1.15 CONNECTION A. Make all connections for air conditioning and ventilation equipment, controls individually mounted starters, thermostats, firestats and other control devices. Install and connect starters, contactors, and controls, including exact wiring requirements as determined in accordance with control wiring diagrams furnished for the equipment. 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All openings through walls, ceilings, roadways and floor slabs required for the installation of electrical equipment shall be provided as required. Where existing walls, ceilings or floor slabs have to be cut the Design/Builder shall coordinate with the Department before making such cuts. Any damage done in the process of providing such openings shall be patched and refinishished after making such required openings. 1.17 TESTING A. Upon completion of the Work, the Design/Builder shall energize, start-up and test operate all the systems and equipment in the presence of the Department personnel. All testing and measuring instruments and equipment required to test each system shall be provided by the Contractor. Any defects or variances from standard or specified conditions found during these tests shall be corrected at no cost to the Department. The following tests shall be performed: 1. All circuit breakers shall be manually tripped and reset. 2. All defective lamps found during test shall be immediately replaced. 5. All receptacles and light switches shall be tested to verify they are connected properly. 6. All HVAC motors and controls shall be checked to verify correct connection and operation. 7. All panelboards shall be inspected prior to installing covers to verify correct sizes and color coding. B. At completion of work, clean all fixtures and lenses, and install new lamps. C. Prior to the final test, continuity tests and insulation, resistance tests shall be performed Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-7 to assure there are no shorts or unintentional grounds in the entire electrical system. Test readings shall be recorded and given to the Department. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-8 1.18 TEST REPORTS A. Submit all test reports as specified. B. The Design/Builder shall notify the Engineer two weeks prior to commencement of all testing except for megger tests. C. Maintain a written record of all tests showing date, personnel making test, equipment or materials tested, tests performed, and results. 1.19 PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT A. The Design/Builder shall provide the following: 1. Qualified personnel to conduct all testing. 2. The services of the equipment manufacturer's representative to assist in testing their equipment, when the service is specified. 3. The services of the equipment manufacturer's representative to assist in repair or trouble -shooting their equipment, in the event that said equipment fails to pass all tests. 4. All labor, temporary power, lighting, and wiring, and all materials required for testing. B. The Design/Builder shall furnish all test equipment, which shall include the following: 1. Wet and dry bulb thermometer. 2. A 500 -Volt megger by James G. Biddle Co., or Associated Research Inc., or equal. 3. Battery powered portable telephone sets and portable radios. 4. A Simpson Model 260 -Volt Ohm Milliammeter, or equal. 5. A phase sequence and rotation meter, 60-300 Volts 30-60 Hz. by Knopp Inc., or equal. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-9 C. The Design/Builder shall furnish and use safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, protective screens and barriers, danger signs, etc., to adequately protect and warn all personnel in the vicinity of the tests. 1.20 TOOLS A. Use only tools designed for the particular operation. Tools shall be kept in good condition. Worn or broken tools shall not be used. B. Special tools and spare parts provided with any equipment shall be turned over to the Department's authorized personnel and the Design/Builder shall obtain signed and dated receipts for them. 1.21 CLEAN-UP AND PAINTING A. After all systems and equipment have been installed, clean-up of all electrical equipment inside and outside the enclosures shall be done. All grease, dust, rust and chipped plaster and concrete shall be removed from the installed equipment. Each piece of equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and left in brand new condition. Special attention shall be given to the interior of panelboards and other similar equipment. All light fixture lenses and reflectors shall be thoroughly cleaned. The project will not be accepted as being finished until all such dirt and contamination has been removed. Provide touch-up painting where finished surfaces have received minor scratches during installation. Where electrical equipment with painted surfaces has been installed in finished areas, any such damage to the painted surfaces that cannot be corrected with minor touch-up painting shall be refinished at the factory at no cost to the Department. Equipment installed in finished areas having noticeable damage to the finished surface will not be accepted. 1.22 FINAL INSPECTION A. On completion of final inspection the Design/Builder shall deliver to the Engineer the Certificate of Final Inspection from the local authority having jurisdiction. PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 - NOT USED END OF SECTION Indian River County Remote Supply Wells 10 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010- SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. I WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install raceways for electrical and power wiring as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Size of raceways shall be not less than NEC requirements but in no case shall be less than indicated on the Drawings. Drawings are diagrammatic and routing of conduits shall be made by the Contractor to avoid interferences with other work. Install larger size raceways than shown where required for pulling of wire. B. Materials shall bear UL labels. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 16450 - Grounding. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Literature: Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving materials, finishes, dimensions, weights and standards compliance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Rigid Conduit: 1. Steel: Hot dipped zinc coated, galvanized, threaded rigid steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1, Fed. Spec. WW -C-581 and UL Standard 6. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Hot dipped zinc coated, galvanized, threaded intermediate rigid steel conduit conforming to ANSI -C80.1 and UL Standard 1242. 3. Plastic: Rigid, Schedule 40-90 degrees C, UL rated PVC plastic conforming to Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-1 UL 651, Fed. Spec. W -C-1094 and NEMA TC -2. Fittings shall conform with UL 514 and NEMA TC -3.. 4. Couplings, Elbows and Nipples for Rigid Steel Conduit: Couplings, elbows and nipples shall be galvanized steel, threaded. B Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Zinc coated steel electrical metallic tubing conforming to ANSI C80.3, UL 797 and Fed. Spec. WW -C-563. 2. Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be steel compression type. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Standard: Flexible zinc coated conduit conforming to UL 1. 2. Liquid -Tight: Flexible zinc coated conduit with liquid -tight flexible plastic sheath, conforming to UL 360 Standard. 3. Fittings For Flexible Conduit: Fed. Spec. W -R-40613 and UL 514. D. Fittings for Rigid Steel Conduit and EMT: 1. Conform to ANSI C80.4. 2. Provide all required couplings, connectors and adapters of materials and finish matching conduit or EMT. 3. Conduit Coating: (Metallic Conduit Underground) Kop-Coat Bitumastic No. 50. E. Straps and Fastenings for Conduit and EMT: 1. Straps: Formed zinc coated steel straps sized for conduits and tubing. 2. Fastenings: Zinc coated steel screws, bolts, toggles and expansion anchors as required. F. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: 1. Hot dip galvanized code gauge sheet steel, complete with knockouts, enclosures and removable screw covers unless indicated as hinged. Units shall be as manufactured by Square "D", Hoffman, Keystone. 2. Exterior locations shall have accepted weathertight gasketed covers and joints and 0 UL listed raintight. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-2 3. Conform to UL 870. H. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings: 1. Shall have internal grounding means. 2. Shall maintain constant inside diameter in any position and shall provide a smooth wireway for protection of wire insulation. 3. Shall be made watertight by a neoprene outer jacket that shall also protect the grounding means and the attachment points of the hubs. Jacket shall be secured by stainless steel straps. 4. Shall accommodate the following movements without collapsing or fracturing the conduit and damaging the wires it contains: a. Axial expansion or contraction of not less than 3/4 inches in either direction. b. Angular misalignment of the axis of coupled conduit runs in any direction of not less than 30 degrees. C. Parallel misalignment of the axis of coupled conduit runs in any direction of not less than 3/4 inch. I. Pull Wires: 16 gauge galvanized steel wire or 200 pounds tensile strength plastic rope. J. Fire Stopping Material/Sealing Compound: 1. Material shall maintain its dimension and integrity while preventing the passage of flame, smoke, water and gases under conditions of installation and use when exposed to the ASTM E119 time -temperature curve for a time period equivalent to the rating of the assembly penetrated. Cotton waste shall not ignite when placed in contact with the non -fire side during the test. Fire- stopping material shall be noncombustible as defined by ASTM E136; and in addition for insulation materials, melting point shall be a minimum of 1850 degrees F for 2 -hour protection. 2. Seal for floor, exterior wall, and roof shall also be watertight. 3. Sleeves: Plastic or 16 -gauge sheet steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-3 N A. Provide metal conduits, tubing, wireways, auxiliary gutters and electrical ducts where indicated in accordance with NEC, subject to following provisions: 1. Route feeders, home runs and conduits where indicated, except that minor deviations will be permitted. 2. Raceways shall be concealed in all finished areas. Raceways shall be exposed in mechanical, electrical and systems rooms only. 3. Conduits, tubing or raceways shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlet to cabinet, junction box or pull box. 4. When field cutting conduit, thread and carefully ream or file conduit and raceway ends to remove rough edges that might injure insulation of conductors. Cold galvanize field made threads. 5. Changes in directions of raceway runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings. Field made bends and offsets shall be made with a hickey or conduit bending machine specifically for size and type of conduit used. Minimum radius shall be 6 times conduit diameter for rigid metal conduit. Form thin wall tubing bends of proper radius. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be used. Use factory formed fittings for surface raceways. 6. Conduit shall be sized as shown on the Drawings. Minimum size of conduit shall be 3/4 inch with the following exceptions: a. Conduit down to light switch box shall be 1/2 inch. b. Flexible conduit to a light fixture shall be 3/8 inch. (Maximum length six feet). C. Other sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings. 7. Take care to prevent lodgement of plaster, dirt, or trash in raceways, boxes, fittings and equipment during course of construction. Clogged raceways shall be entirely freed of obstructions or shall be replaced. 8. Except where boxes, panels and other equipment have threaded openings, make conduit connections as follows: a Double locknuts, one inside and one outside. b. Provide malleable iron or steel bushing with Bakelite liner molded and 0 bonded into the bushing. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-4 C. Place bushing on end of conduit in addition to locknuts. B. Exposed Conduits: Install parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members or to intersections of vertical planes and ceilings. Install horizontal raceways close to ceiling or ceiling beams and above water piping and other piping wherever possible. C. Location and Use of Each Type of Conduit: 1. Galvanized threaded rigid steel conduit shall be used: a. Where installed exposed at levels below 6' 0" AFF. b. Where subject to abuse. C. Wherever specifically called for on plan. d. Fire Pump Room. 2. Galvanized threaded intermediate rigid steel conduit shall be used where galvanized rigid steel conduit is specified. Intermediate threaded conduit may be used as an option. 3. Plastic conduit shall be used: a. Where installed in concrete slabs or underground below slabs on grade, or in poured concrete walls and block walls. b. For underground work beyond the building. C. Trenches for direct buried PVC conduit shall be free of rocks and other material that may damage the conduit. 4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be used indoors for all branch circuit wiring installed in hung ceilings and exposed in mechanical/electrical rooms above 6' 0" AFF only. 5. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connections to rotating or vibrating equipment such as motors, transformers and devices on piping and ductwork. Flexible conduit may be used for short connections to control devices, recessed fixtures and similar items. Connection between structure and first point of attachment to vibrating equipment shall be flexible. Provide not less than 24 -inch length except for recessed lighting fixtures. 6. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for connections to rotating or vibrating equipment in wet and damp locations and exterior locations. Install liquid -tight flexible metal conduit so that liquids run off surface and drain away Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-5 from fittings. Provide not less than 24 -inch length. D. Installing Galvanized, Rigid or Intermediate Steel Conduit Below Slabs on Grade or in Ground: 1. Coat underfloor and underground metal conduits including fittings with two coats of specified conduit coatings. 2. Factory applied plastic resin or epoxy coated metal conduit and fittings may be used, provided that abrasions to coating are repaired with compatible mastic. E. Conduits Passing Through Waterproof Membranes: Conduits Penetrating Waterproof Membranes Under Floor Slabs on Grade: Coordinate installation of conduits prior to installation of waterproof membrane. Membrane shall be sealed waterproof to conduits prior to pouring of slab over membrane. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for conduits penetrating floor slabs. 2. Conduits Penetrating Waterproof Membranes on Walls: Provide properly coordinated Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for conduits in concrete forms. Membrane shall be sealed waterproof to conduits. 3. Sealing of joints between conduits and pipe sleeves shall be as specified hereinbefore. F. Expansion Joints: Conduits crossing expansion joints in building structure shall be provided with expansion fittings. G. Fire Stopping: Provide UL listed mineral fiber packing and fire retardant sealer in joints around conduits penetrating fire rated floors and fire rated walls. H. Fastening Conduits to Boxes, Cabinets, Wireways and Gutters: 1. Fasten conduit to boxes, cabinets, wireways and gutters with two locknuts, one each side and bushing on the inside as per NEC -373-6(c). 2. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be of threadless type reviewed for conditions encountered. I. Raceway Fastenings and Supports: 1. Supports: a. Secure support and fasten in place raceways at intervals of not more than eight feet, within 3 feet of any bend and every outlet or junction box. This shall apply on vertical runs as well as horizontal runs. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-6 b. Support individual horizontal conduits not larger than 1-1/2 inches in pp g diameter by means of one -hole pipe straps or individual pipe hangers. C. Support individual horizontal conduits larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter by individual pipe hangers. d. Space conduits, installed against concrete surfaces, not less than 1/4 inch away from the surfaces by clamp backs or other approved means. e. In dry locations, spring steel fasteners, clips, or clamps specifically designed for supporting exposed single conduits may be used in lieu of pipe straps or pipe hangers. £ Hanger rod used in connection with spring steel fasteners, clips, and clamps shall be either not less than 1/4 inch in diameter galvanized steel rods or, if concealed above a suspended ceiling, galvanized perforated steel strapping. g. Support parallel conduits at the same elevations on trapeze -type multiple conduit hangers or channel inserts. Secure each conduit to the pipe hanger or channel insert member, by a U -bolt, one -hole strap, or other specifically designed and approved fastener suitable for use with the pipe hangers or channel inserts. h. Installation of supporting devices shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner and care shall be taken that at no time shall any portion of the building structure be overloaded. Should the building structure sustain damage through carelessness or through failure of the Design/Builder to properly support and install the electrical equipment, the Contractor shall bear all costs involved in repairing or replacing such installation. 2. Fastenings: a. To Wood: Wood screws, sheet metal screws or screw type nails. b. To Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts or expansion bolts as required. Holes not used shall be filled with mortar. C. To Concrete or Solid Brick Masonry: By expansion bolts. Holes drilled to a depth of more than 1-1/2 inch in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joists shall avoid cutting the main reinforcing bars. Holes not used shall be filled with mortar. d. To Steel Work: Machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring - tension clamps. Raceways or pipe straps shall not be welded to steel structures. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-7 e. To Light Steel Construction Partitions: Sheet Metal screws. Bar hangers may be attached with saddle ties of 16 gauge double strand zinc -coated steel wire. f. Nail -type nylon anchors or threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or machine screws. g. Threaded C -clamps shall not be used. 3. Suspended Ceiling Construction: Above ceiling branch circuit raceways shall be supported independently of the ceiling support system. Wherever possible, they shall be fastened to the underside of the slab above. 4. Surface Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters: Use fastenings appropriate for surface. J. Sleeves: 1. Provide 1/2 -inch minimum clearance around conduit. Extend sleeve through full thickness of concrete. 2. Secure sleeves to concrete forms to prevent displacement during placing of concrete. 3. Filling of Openings: Wherever slots, sleeves, or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage of raceways, fill such opening, to prevent fire spread, passage of water or spread of products of combustion, as follows: a. Install the specified sealing compound. b. Where conduits passing through openings are exposed in finished rooms, use filling material that matches, and is flush with, the adjoining finished floor, ceiling or wall. K. Raceway Seals: 1. Seal with the specified sealing compound raceways through which moisture may contact energized live parts. 2. Underground Raceways Entering a Building: Seal the end entering the building with the specified sealing compound to prevent the entrance of moisture or gasses. Install sealing compound in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-8 3. Opening or Empty Conduit: Install nonflammable material, to stop flow of sealant, leaving not less than two-inch length of conduit to be filled with the sealant. 4. Conduit with Wires: Separate wires so that sealant can penetrate between wires, and between wires and conduit. END OF SECTION Indian River County Remote Supply Wells RACEWAYS 16110-9 SECTION 16120 WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install wires, cables and connectors for electrical and control circuits as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Materials to bear UL labels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving wire size, insulation type, rated voltage and temperature and NEC designation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conductors (600 Volts and below): 1. Conductors shall be rated at 600 Volts and conform to NEMA WC -7 and IECA S- 61-402. 2. Conductors shall be composed of 98 percent annealed copper only, stranded in size #10 AWG and larger. Furnish conductor sizes for circuits as shown on drawings. Minimum size shall be #12 AWG except as otherwise specified for control wiring. 3. All conductors shall be 600 Volt minimum type THHN/THWN rated 90 degrees C. maximum conductor temperature with polyvinyl chloride insulation, and shall comply with UL standard for thermoplastic insulated wire. 4. All conductors shall be plainly marked on outer braid at least every two feet with name of manufacturer, size and grade of insulation. B. Color code all service, feeder and branch circuit wire as follows: Indian River County Remote Supply Wells WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS 16120-1 1. 120/208 Volt System: White - Neutral Black - Phase A Red - Phase B Blue - Phase C 2. 277/480 Volt System: Light Gray - Neutral Brown - Phase A Orange - Phase B Yellow - Phase C 3. Bonding conductor - green. 4. Solid colored insulation shall be used on all conductors #10 AWG and smaller and colored vinyl tape banding over black insulation at all accessible locations for #8 AWG and larger. C. Control Wiring: 1. All control wiring conductors shall be 600 Volt type THHN/THWN. Minimum size shall be # 14 AWG. 2. Conductors for control wiring shall be color coded, using different color coding than for the power conductors specified above. Multiple -conductor control cables color coding shall conform to NEMA WC 5 and ILEA. 3. Conductors for fire alarm system shall be as shown on the fire alarm riser diagram and specifications. D. Conductor Bundling Straps: 1. Form from self -extinguishing nylon having a temperature range of plus 30 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F. 2. Equip each strap with a locking hub or head with a locking barb on one end and a taper on the other end. 3. Make wire and cable ties for installation outdoors and in exposed locations of black, ultraviolet resistant, nylon material. E. 2. Conductors to be connected: Copper. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS 16120-2 F. Connectors, Terminals and Splices: 1. Provide connectors, terminals and splices for all power and lighting circuits using 600 -Volt wire and cable as follows: a. Provide connectors, terminals, and splices, for all wire, cable, and equipment and bus connections, that are designed and approved for the specific type and size of conductors being connected. b. Connectors and terminals shall be designed and UL approved for use with the associated conductor material, and shall provide a uniform compression over the entire contact surface. Solderless terminal lugs shall be used on all stranded conductors. C. Pressure -crimp type connectors, terminals and splices shall be applied with a mechanical ,or hydraulic tool with proper size crimpling dies for making each connection. The tool shall be of the type that will not release until the correct pressure has been applied. d. Splices and taps in wire #10 AWG, and smaller, shall be made with approved, wire -nut -type, patent spring connectors. Use 3M Scotchlocks or equal. e. Provide Burndy, type YAV box, or equal, pressure -crimp ring -tongue terminals for termination of No. 8 stranded cable. f. Provide Burndy type YSV box butt splices, or equal, for splicing #8 AWG stranded cable. g. For termination and splicing of cable of #6 AWG or larger, provide long - barrel, type YA pressure -crimp lugs and type YS tubular pressure -crimp splices by Burndy or equal. Use long -barrel pressure -crimp lugs wherever space conditions permit. Use long -barrel pressure crimp splices exclusively for splicing. Where space is inadequate for use of long -barrel lugs, provide Burndy Type YA-L, pressure -crimp, short barrel lugs, or equal. Use 2 hole lugs on cable of 250 MCM and larger. h. For tap off #8 AWG cable and larger, provide Burndy type KS Split -bolt copper connectors (bugs), with Burndy type SC one-piece plastic split - bolt covers, or equal. Other types of connectors for tapping may be used subject to prior approval by the Engineer. Use proper size bronze bolts, nuts, washers, and lock washers of Burndy Durium alloy, or equal, for bolting cable terminations to equipment Indian River County Remote Supply Wells WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS 16120-3 terminals and bus bars. j. Termination of solid wires of #10 AWG and smaller at terminal blocks shall be made by fonning the wires in a ring to fit under a screwhead, thus requiring no terminal lug. 2. Provide terminals and splices and make connections in control, alarm and instrumentation system as follows: a. For stranded wiring provide type TP, vinyl -insulated, ring -tongue terminals by Burndy, or equal, for all terminations. b. In locations where splicing of stranded wire is indicated or permitted by specifications, use type SP vinyl -insulated, butt splices by Burndy, or equal. C. Wire terminals shall be installed with pressure tools equal to those manufactured by American Pamcor, one of which is No. 59072, which obliges the Contractor to apply the correct pressure required to produce a tight connection before the tool is released. Use a pressure tool designed for the specific size of connector and wire being terminated. d. Taps in stranded wire may be made with 3M, Scotchlock wire nut, or equal, except that the conductor being tapped shall not be cut, and shall be twisted together with the tap conductor before wire nut application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Conductors shall not be pulled into conduit until all mechanical work is complete. B. Pulling lubricants shall be of the type accepted for the particular cable insulation and as recommended by the cable manufacturer. C. Conductors in panelboards, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc., shall be formed, grouped and taped to present a neat and orderly appearance. D. Leading end of each conductor pulled shall be carefully examined for damage to jacket. If damaged, cable shall be extended and further checked for damage with good cable only to remain. E. At each outlet, allow not less than 6 inches slack for connection to load. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS 16120-4 F. Wire and Cable Supports: 1. Provide support for all conductors within vertical raceways at intervals as required by, and using one or more of the support methods of, Article 300-19 of the NEC, and as follows: a. For insulating wedge supports as described in (b)(1) of NEC Article 300- 19, and where indicated, provide OZ Company, or equal, Type R, plug - type, canvas-bakelite cable supports of proper duct or conduit size, and number of holes. b. Cable ties, where required, shall be Panduit Corporation Pany-Ty, or equal, nylon cable ties. C. Except where otherwise indicated or specified, support for conductors shall be as per paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(3) of NEC Article 300-19. 2. Provide Kellems Grip supports for wire and cable where indicated. 3. Support wire and cable within all enclosures and at each connection so that any strain on the wire or cable shall not be transmitted to the connection as follows: a. With nylon cable ties. b. With insulated cable clamps sized per O.D. of cable or wire bundle and bolted to equipment enclosure. C. With Kellems grips where indicated. G. Taping: Tape all connections in 600. -Volt wire and cable as follows: In dry locations, tape all connections, splices, taps and exposed barrels of terminal lugs with half -lapped layers of 3M Scotch 33, vinyl plastic tape, or equal, applied to a thickness equal to the conductor insulation. 2. In damp or wet locations, tape connections per paragraph G.1 above, and in addition, apply at least two half -lapped layers of 3M Scotch 88 vinyl plastic tape over the first layers of tape, and water proof the taped connection with a final overall application of an electrical varnish or sealer. 3. Insulated, splices and wire -nut connections, in dry locations, and where not subject to vibration, need not be taped. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS 16120-5 H. Wire and Cable Marking: 1. Identify each phase of all three phase feeder conductors with. 3M Scotch 35, or equal, vinyl plastic marking tape. Use color groups, with three distinct colors in each group, for phase identification of feeders of different system voltage as per 2.1B above. 2. All feeders and branch circuit conductors, and all control, alarm and instrumentation wires, shall be identified at all terminations, junction boxes, pull boxes, handholes and manholes as follows: a. Use Brady Company, or equal, self -sticking vinyl cloth, wire markers for all wire and cable identification. b. Except as otherwise indicated, identify each feeder with name of panelboard it feeds. C. Branch circuit conductors from panelboards shall be each marked with panelboard name, and circuit number. d. Identify all conductors of control, alarm and instrumentation systems with wire numbers or terminal letters as indicated on the Drawings. Where (`✓} markings are not indicated, the Contractor shall assign his own markings, and indicate them on the "Record Drawings" set of construction drawings. X L Installation of 600 -Volt Wire and Cable: 1. Install wire and cable in conduits, ducts, wireways, cable trays and other enclosures as indicated. 2. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, all wire and cable shall be installed in continuous runs between terminal points without splicing. 3. Make splices and taps only injunction boxes, from terminals in terminal boxes, in manholes, in handholes and other accessible enclosures. 4. Do not splice wire and cable in ducts or conduits. 5. Except as otherwise indicated, or specified, do not splice or tap control, alarm or instrumentation wiring in underground manholes and handholes. 6. When pulling wire or cable, do not subject the wire or cable to a tension greater than 50 percent of the yield strength of the conductor. 7. Use a UL approved lubricant to decrease friction when pulling cable in ducts and Indian River County Remote Supply Wells WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS 16120-6 conduits. 8. Do not subject cable to a bending radius less than 8 times the cable outside diameter during or after installation. 9. In wet locations, make splices first as for dry locations, then encapsulate them in an epoxy resin sealing and potting compound. Encapsulation of compression sleeve splices shall be with preformed molds. 10. Pulling of wires and cable into conduits shall be done in a manner which will in no way injure the insulation. 11. All wires in conduit shall be continuous between pull points without splices. No joints or splices in the conductors shall be permitted except at outlet or accessible junction boxes, or manholes. 12. Sufficient lengths of wire shall be left at pull boxes for connecting to equipment and apparatus without straining. 13. All wires passing through pull boxes shall have enough slack in each box so they may be pulled out of the box a distance of no less than 6 inches across the entire length of the box. 14. Pull together cables to be installed in a single conduit. J. Wire Sizes: Drawings indicate wire and conduit sizes for typical equipment. If sizes shown on the Drawings are not appropriate for the equipment chosen, wires and conduit shall be sized for the proper current -carrying capacity in accordance with the NEC, at no extra cost to the Department. K. Terminations: 1. Terminate solid conductors on screw terminals or mechanical connectors furnished on devices and equipment. 2. Terminate stranded conductors on mechanical connectors furnished on equipment. Where no connectors are included, provide suitable mechanical connectors. 3. Termination of stranded conductors on screw terminals will not be permitted. Provide suitable size compression or mechanical type connector with spade tongue. 3.2 TESTING Indian River County Remote Supply Wells WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS 16120-7 A. Continuity tests and insulation -resistance tests shall be performed to assure there are no shorts or unintentional grounds. The insulation resistance shall be measured with a 500 - Volt DC megger (conductor to conductor and conductor to ground) and should read greater than one megohm. Test readings shall be recorded and a certified copy given to the Department. END OF SECTION Indian River County Remote Supply Wells WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS 16120-8 SECTION 16130 OUTLET, PULL. AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide outlet, pull and junction boxes as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Materials shall bear UL labels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature, and shop drawings giving materials, finishes, accessories and installation directions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Outlet Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel and shall conform to Federal Specifications WC -583 and ANSI -C33.65. 2. Outlet boxes for switches and receptacles in finished walls shall be one piece gang boxes, with separators if required, and shall have corners with rectangular opening of proper size and shape. Minimum box size: 4 inch x 4 inch x 1-1/2 inch, unless otherwise noted on Drawings and/or as required. 3. Outlet boxes for all other devices shall be of suitable type and size in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer of equipment. 4. All outlet boxes shall be drip proof with screw attached covers. Each box shall have a turned -in lip. Lip shall be drilled and tapped for 1/8 inch or 3/16 inch round head screws, symmetrically placed. 5. Lighting fixture outlet boxes, where used, shall be square or octagonal. 6. Exterior outlet boxes and boxes for exposed conduit runs shall be cast, rust resisting metal with full threaded hubs, with rubber gasket and screw type covers. Indian River County RemoteSupply Wells OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 16130-1 7. Outlet boxes shall be as manufactured by National, Steel City, Appleton or equivalent. B. Pull and Junction Boxes: Pull and Junction Boxes shall conform to Federal Specifications WJ-800 and shall be of all steel construction, seam welded at joints and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A386. 2. All boxes shall be drip proof with screw attached covers. Each box shall have a turned -in lip which shall be welded at joint to develop full strength. Lip shall be drilled and tapped for 1/8 inch or 3/16 inch round head screws, symmetrically placed. To provide adequate length of thread, nuts shall be tack welded on inside of lip, or lip shall be made double thickness. Cover shall be drilled to match. 3. Pull and junction boxes shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand moderate twisting strains. Steel boxes of 100 cubic inches or less shall be of No. 14 gauge .steel; between 101 and 8500 cubic inches shall be No. 12 steel; large boxes shall be No. 10 gauge steel. Barriers and angles shall be supplied as required. 4. Outdoor pull and junction boxes shall be cast steel and gasketed with screw cover mounting on outward -turned flanges of boxes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Boxes for surface mounted ceiling and interior bracket lighting fixtures shall have fixture studs. Studs shall be in center boxes and strongly anchored. 2. Maximum number of conductors in a box shall comply with NEC - Table 370- 6(a). 3. Boxes and supports shall be fastened as follows: a. To concrete or brick with bolts and expansion shields. C. 11 To hollow masonry with toggle bolts. To steel work with machine screws or welded studs. "Tap -Con" system allowable where approved by pre -cast installer. Indian River County RemoteSupply Wells OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 16130-2 e 4. All outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be of adequate size to accommodate installation of conductors without excessive bending of conductors which would damage insulation. 5. Outlet, pull and junction boxes shall be surface or flush mounted as required. 6. Pull and junction boxes shall be provided at such location as required to reduce length of cable pull or reduce number of elbows between outlets. 7. Provide blank covers for all outlet boxes when devices or wiring has been removed or not installed. 8. Install boxes for light switches located near doors on the lock side, even where the symbols are indicated on the hinge sides. 9. Surface Mounted: Install cast-iron alloy hub -type outlet boxes and conduit bodies up to eight feet above interior floors. 10. Wet Locations: Install cast-iron alloy hub -type outlet boxes and conduit bodies with gaskets. H. Unless otherwise indicated, flush mount outlet boxes with the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers attached thereto flush with the finished wall or ceiling. 12. Unless otherwise indicated, provide boxes in plastered walls and ceilings with plaster rings. Do not install plaster rings until the finished plaster line is determined for the particular location. 13. The indicated mounting height of a wall -mounted outlet box means the height from the finished floor to the horizontal centerline of the cover plate. END OF SECTION Indian River County RemoteSupply Wells OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 16130-3 SECTION 16140 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide switches and receptacles as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature giving material, finishes, accessories and installation directions where required. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Materials shall bear UL labels. B. All wiring devices shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations. C. All wiring devices shall conform to NEMA WD -1, UL 20 and UL 498. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wall switches shall be of the quiet type and of the totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of phenolic compound. Wiring terminals shall be of the screw type or of the solderless pressure type having suitable conductor -release arrangement. No more than one switch shall be installed in a single -gang position. Switches shall be single pole, double pole, three way and four way rated 20 -Amp. 120 -Volt or 277 Volt for use on alternating current only. Switches shall conform to Federal Specifications WS -5896E. B. Receptacles shall be 20 Amp., 125 Volt, AC, 2 -pole, 3 -wire, single or duplex, U - slotted grounding type. Bodies of 20 Amps. receptacles shall be of phenolic compound supported by a mounting yoke having plaster ears. Receptacles shall conform to Federal Specifications WC -596D. Indian River County SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 16140-1 Remote Supply Wells C. Cover plates for non -weather proof areas shall conform to Federal Specifications WP -455, and shall be plastic with no grooves or ornate pattern to mar surfaces in finished area. Weatherproof applications shall have weatherproof cover as specified and as supplied with electrical box. Weatherproof cover plates shall be supplied as note on the drawings and for all outdoor locations or areas subject to wash down. Covers shall include a weatherproof while in use cover for each receptacle and switch. D. Duplex receptacles with ground fault interrupter shall be an integral unit suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box and conform to UL 943. Ground fault interrupter shall consist of a differential current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. It shall be rated for operation on a 60 Hz., 120 Volt, 20 Amp. branch circuit. Device shall have nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five milliamperes and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of ground leakage current above five milliamperes on the load side of the device. Device shall have a minimum nominal tripping time of 1/30th of a second. Receptacle shall be rated at 20 Amps., 125 Volts for indoor use and shall be the standard 2 -pole, 3 -wire grounding type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: 1. Duplex Receptacles: 18 inches AFF to centerline unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lighting Switches: 4'-0" AFF to centerline unless otherwise indicated. 3. Telephone Outlets: 18 inches AFF or 54 inches AFF to centerline, as indicated on symbol legend and drawings, unless otherwise noted. 4. Prior to rough -in of outlet boxes and conduit, locations of wiring devices shall be checked with architectural drawings for door swings and furniture details. Duplex receptacles in finished areas shall be mounted vertically. Particular attention shall be given to changes authorized by change order. B. Boxes mounted back to back will not be permitted. C. Receptacles, switches and other devices shall be ganged and provided with a single multi -gang cover plate. Receptacles on critical circuits shall be provided with orange devices and cover plates. Receptacles in outdoor locations shall be Indian River County SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 16140-2 Remote Supply Wells installed in exposed cast -metal outlet boxes with gasketed weatherproof cast -metal cover plates with a weatherproof while in use cover over each receptacle. D. Isolated ground receptacles shall be identified by an orange dot clearly embedded on face of receptacle. END OF SECTION Indian River County SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 16140-3 Remote Supply Wells SECTION 16156 SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid State Reduced Voltage motor Starters. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Motors are specified in Section 16150. B. Motor starters are specified in Section 16155. C. Adjustable Speed AC Motor Controllers are specified in Section 16157. D. Specifications for starters mounted as part of a motor control center are found in Section 16920. l 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing certified dimensions and data on all accessories. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All motor starters specified in this section shall be NEMA rated devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Solid state reduced voltage starters shall be manufactured by Square -D. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Environmental: The unit shall be rated for a maximum ambient temperature of 40°C, an altitude of 3,300 feet, and a humidity range of 0 to 95% non -condensing. B. Power Section: The power section shall be three phase, 480 VAC, 60 hertz, and rated for the horsepowers shown on the one -line diagram. It shall consist of three sets of back-to-back phase controlled SCR's. The SCR's shall be rated to withstand a peak inverse voltage of at least 2.5 times SCR rated line -to -line voltage. The starter shall have a short circuit withstand rating of not less than 42,000 symmetrical amperes. Indian River County, Florida SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS Remote Supply Wells 16156-1 1. Design Features: The starting current and the current limit shall be adjustable from 150 to 500 percent of motor full load current. The acceleration time shall be adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds. The power section shall have metal oxide varistor (MOV) type surge suppressors across the SCR's rated 10% above the SCR rated voltage. Suitably rated snubbers for voltage suppression shall be included. The SCR's shall be equipped with automatic reset over- temperature switches wired in series with the overload relay contact. The continuous current rating of the unit shall not be less than 115 percent of the motor full load ampere rating. 2. By -Pass Contactor: A contactor shall be provided to automatically bypass the SCR devices after the motor has reached running speed. The contactor shall be a NEMA rated contactor and sized rated for 3 phase, 60 hertz, 460 volts, and the horsepower shown on the one -line diagram,. 3. Disconnect Switch: A thermal magnetic breaker shall be provided for the incoming line. The switch shall have a minimum short circuit withstand rating of 42,000 amperes at 600 volts ac. A shunt trip shall be included to trip the switch if a malfunction is sensed by the starter circuitry. 4. Grounding: Two ground lugs shall be furnished, one for incoming and one for outgoing ground connections. 5. Terminations: Power terminations for the load and line side conductors shall consist of bolted type terminals suitable for use with the proper number of copper conductors per phase as listed in the conduit & cable schedule. C. Control Section: 1. Controls shall be provided to allow the motor starting current to be ramped up to the current limit setting. 2. The control logic shall include as a minimum: a) Single-phase protection. b) Undervoltage protection. C) Short circuit electronic trip overcurrent protection. Time not to exceed 1/2 cycle. d) Inverse time running overcurrent protection. e) Auxiliary trip circuitry. I) Gate firing circuit lockout protection on trip. g) 50% - 130% full load running current trip adjustment. h) 150% - 400% current limit adjustment. i) Individual light emitting diodes (LEDS) for run, trip, phase loss, and shorted SCR. J) Minimum and maximum voltage adjustments. 3. A control circuit transformer shall be provided adequately sized for the starter control circuits, the line switch shunt trip, and the door mounted indicating lights. The transformer shall have two primary and one secondary fuses. 4. The solid state logic shall be phase insensitive. Current from all three phases shall be monitored and used for control. Indian River County, Florida SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS Remote Supply Wells 16156-2 D. Operator Interface 1. The following devices shall be mounted on the enclosure door: a. Start -stop pushbutton b. Red and green indicating lights C. Overload reset pushbutton d. Ammeter e. Voltmeter 2. One potential transformer and one current transformer shall be connected to the load side of the unit to operate the meters. 3. Snubbers: Resistor/Capacitor snubber networks shall be used to prevent false firing of SCR's due to dv/dt characteristics of the electrical system. 4. Hand -Off -Automatic (HOA) switch: all motor starters shall be provided with H -O -A switches mounted on the enclosure door for local and automatic control. Switches will be provided with a spare contact for SCADA system monitoring in the automatic position. E. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be provided to interface with external control wiring. Terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts and 30 amperes, suitable for class C applications, and shall be double row construction with binder head screws. Marking strips shall be included. F. Enclosure: 1. The starter enclosure shall be NEMA Type 12 for indoor applications or NEMA Type 4X, stainless steel, for outdoor applictions, unless otherwise noted on the plans or in these specifications, constructed from not less than 16 gauge steel. 2. The structure, when floor -mounted, shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being rolled or lifted into installation position and bolted to the floor. 3. External and internal steel surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized prior to application of paint. They shall then be primed with a corrosion -resisting coating. Cabinet and door finish shall be manufacturer's standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The starter shall be installed per the manufacturer's specifications with a minimum clearance of 4 inches on each side of the enclosure. B. An "as built" wiring diagram shall be included for making the appropriate electrical connections. Indian River County, Florida SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS Remote Supply Wells 16156-3 C. Verify motor alignment prior to operation. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. TESTS 1. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be available to test and start up all solid state reduced voltage starters furnished under this specification. 2. The manufacturer shall supply certified test results, upon request, to confirm that the controller has been tested to substantiate designs according to applicable ANSI and NEMA Standards. The tests shall verify not only the performance of the unit and integrated assembly, but also the suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, the unit shall be factory tested in accordance with ANSI standards. 3. Manufacturer shall be prepared to show proper evidence of having tested for noise immunity on both input and output power connections. Noise testing shall be performed in accordance with NEMA ICA 2-230.40. 4. Install overload relay thermal elements based on motor nameplate rating. If capacitors are installed between the relay and motor, select thermal elements based on the measured motor current. Adjust other overcurrent protective devices to settings per the coordination study. 5. Megger each bus, phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground. **END OF SECTION** Indian River County, Florida SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS Remote Supply Wells 16156-4 SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide panelboards as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. B. All 120/208V panelboards shall have 200% rated neutrals for non-linear loads. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Materials shall bear UL labels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving panelboard type, phase, voltage, ampacity, mounting, dimensions, interrupting rating and data on all included circuit breakers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Square D or Westinghouse. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Panelboards shall be dead front, safety type construction and shall conform to Federal Specification WP -1 15, NEMA PB 1, ANSI C33.38 and UL 67. B. Solderless lugs, or connections, in the correct number and sizes for conductors, shall be provided on mains, on the load side of each branch circuit and on neutral and ground bars. C. All buses shall be 98 percent copper and sized as indicated on the plans. D. The enclosure shall be "bonderized" or equal and primed and finished inside and outside to resist rusting and corrosion and to present a pleasing appearance. E. All panelboard cabinets shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet steel and be completely galvanized for corrosion protection. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells PANELBOARDS 16160-1 F. All panelboards shall have flush chromium plated combination type cylinder lock and latch. Panels shall be keyed alike. G. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps and be complete with door, surface or flush mounted, as indicated on Drawings. H. Panelboards cabinets and fronts shall be finished with manufacturer's standard gray. Panelboards shall be circuit breaker type as scheduled on Drawings and supplied with copper buses including neutral bus and ground bus with 1/8 inch or larger terminal screws and with neutral terminals stamped with number corresponding to branch circuit numbers. J. Panelboard circuit breakers shall be bolt -on type with quick make, quick break mechanism, and have interrupting capacity as shown on the Drawings. Each circuit breaker shall have a thermal magnetic trip device with trip ratings as shown on Drawings. K. Any two single pole circuit breakers shall be replaceable by one two pole circuit breaker and any three single pole breakers shall be replaceable by a three pole circuit breaker. Handle ties will not be accepted. L. All panels shall have a circuit directory card mounted on the frame with plastic cover mounted on the inside of the door and all directory cards shall be filled in by the Contractor, using a typewriter, and indicating areas and/or devices served by each circuit. M. Circuit breakers minimum interrupting ratings shall be 14,000 Amp. for 277 Volts systems and 10,000 Amp. for 120 Volt systems. N. Panelboards for lighting and receptacles shall be a minimum of 20 inches wide, 5-3/4 inches deep. Side gutters shall be 4 inches minimum width and top and bottom gutters shall be 6 inches minimum height, to adequately accommodate conduit, wires and cables entering and leaving. O. Distribution panelboards shall be a minimum of 30 inches wide, 8 inches deep. Side gutters shall be 8 inches minimum width, and top and bottom gutters shall be 8 inches minimum height to adequately accommodate conduit, wires and cables entering and leaving. Distribution panelboards shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 25,000 Amps. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Panelboards shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells PANELBOARDS 16160-2 B. No panel shall be installed that has a capacity to receive more than 42 overcurrent devices. If design conditions dictate the use of more than 42 overcurrent devices, two or more panelboards shall be installed with feed through connections. C. Panelboards shall not exceed 78 inches in length and shall be so mounted that the height from the floor to the top operating handle is not greater than 6 feet. D. Numbering on panelboard circuits shall be by spaces and not be by breaker units. Panelboards with spaces in two columns shall have odd -numbered spaces on the left and even -numbered spaces on the right. Numbering shall be from top to bottom and shall be permanently attached. E. Panelboard cabinets shall be provided with suitable lugs for mounting, and be provided with dead -front shields arranged to provide access to wiring gutters with front removed. F. Panelboards shall be mounted where shown on Drawings. G. Provide black and white laminated plastic nameplate for each panelboard. H. Provide a typewritten directory for each panelboard. Locate directory on inside of cover. 1. Neatly route, harness and support conductors in gutters, wiring spaces and compartments. Conductor bending radius shall not be less than the minimum recommended by the conductor manufacturer. END OF SECTION Indian River County Remote Supply Wells PANELBOARDS 16160-3 .J SECTION 16170 DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide disconnect switches as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Materials shall bear UL labels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's catalog sheets giving type, ampacity, number of poles, HP rating, fusing, voltage and type enclosure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Safety switches shall conform to Fed. Spec. W -S-865, NEMA KSI and ANSI C33.64, and shall be of heavy duty type, enclosed, of quick -make, quick -break construction. Rating shall be as indicated on Drawings. All switches shall be horsepower rated, UL listed and so labeled. B. Safety switch operating handle shall be of the insulated, box mounted type that directly drives the switch mechanism and shall be suitable for padlocking in OFF position. C. Defeatable, front accessible, "coin -proof' interlocks shal l be provided to prevent opening of cover when switch is in ON position, and prevent turning switch ON when door is open. Securely fastened metallic nameplate shall include highly visible "ON- OFF" indication. D. Motor Disconnect Means: Provide each motor with a local disconnect switch whether shown on the Drawings or not. E. Provide fuses for all disconnect switches as indicated. Fuses shall be dual element type as specified in Section 16181, "Fuses." F. Safety switch enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for indoor and NEMA 3R for outdoor use. PART 3 - EXECUTION Indian River County DISCONNECTS 16170-1 Remote Supply Wells 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All switches shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations, where shown on Drawings and in compliance with NEC. B. Safety switches indoors shall be installed with top 5 feet 6 inches above floor, shall be rigidly and securely attached to building and shall not depend upon conduit for support. C. Each switch shall be labeled with the name of the equipment is serves. D. Switches which are specified to contain class RK5 fuses shall be furnished with rejection type fuse clips. Elevator disconnect switches shall be furnished with Class RK5 fuses. END OF SECTION Indian River County DISCONNECTS 16170-2 Remote Supply Wells N IN SECTION 16181 FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide fuses as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Fuses shall bear UL labels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review properly identified manufacturer's literature for each type of fuse specified. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fuses shall conform to Fed. Spec. WF -791, NEMA FU -1 and ANSI C33.42. B. Fuses shall have a label on the barrel giving the manufacturer's name, UL classification, current and voltage ratings and interrupting capacity. C. Fuses for motor circuits shall be class RK -5. D. Dual element fuses shall have low resistance and relatively low operating temperatures. Fuses shall be provided with thermal protection against damage from poor contact. Fuse shall open when temperature at thermal cutout reaches 280 degrees F, preventing damage to clips and switches before fuse opens. E. Dual element fuses shall combine high interrupting capacity (100,000 Amp. RMS symmetrical) with time, delay, holding 500 percent load for a minimum of ten seconds. F. Current limiting fuses shall be designed to provide high interrupting capacity (100,000 AIC SYM RMS) plus fast clearing time, restricting let -through current and energy to very low values. Clearing time on a severe short circuit shall be limited to less than 1/4 cycle. Fuse links shall be of silver construction. G. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussman or equivalent. Indian River County Remote Supply Wells FUSES 16181-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fuses shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install fuse labels facing out, such that the label is readable. C. Fuse shall be installed firmly and completely covered by its fuse clip. D. Provide fuses for all fusible equipment regardless of which trade has furnished such equipment. E. The time -current characteristic and ratings shall be such that positive selective coordination is assured. F. Fuses 601 amperes and larger, shall conform to UL Class L standard and be Bussman "Hi Cap" or equivalent. G. Fuses 600 amperes and lower, where applied to general feeder and branch circuit protection, shall conform to UL Class R K-5 standards and be Bussman "Low Peak" or equivalent. H. Individual motor circuit fuses shall be sized at approximately 150 percent of motor full load current, actual fuse rating shall be as per equipment manufacturer recommendations. Fuses, where required for circuit breaker back-up protection, shall conform to UL Class R K- 1 standards and be Bussman "Limitron" or equivalent. J. Provide 10 percent spares (minimum of three) of each size and type of fuse furnished, including fuses for starters and lighting contactors control voltage. Spare fuses shall be placed in a wall -mounted cabinet which shall be located in the main electrical room. K. All elevator switches shall be provided with rejection type fuses. END OF SECTION Indian River County FUSES 16181-2 Remote Supply Wells SECTION 16190 EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide metal framing support system for installation of surface mounted equipment. B. Provide all hangers, supports and braces, and metal framings where required for the proper installation of conduits, cable trays, panelboards, starting and control equipment as well as all other electrical equipment installed under this Contract. C. Properly support cabinets, outlet and pullboxes in an approved manner, and independent of the conduits. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving materials, finishes, accessories and installation directions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conduit and Equipment Supports: 1. Provide material for conduit and equipment supports in conformance with the following referenced standards: a. ASTM A 123 b. ASTM A 307 C. ASTM A 611 d. ASTM A 668 2. Provide galvanized steel conduit clamps, sized for the specific conduit size, to support all exposed metallic conduit. Provide non-magnetic clamps to support all non-magnetic conduits. Indian River County EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS 16190-1 Remote Supply Wells 3. Where not buried underground, embedded in concrete or masonry, or where otherwise indicated, all conduits shall be supported by supports fabricated of galvanized structural steel or galvanized framing members equal of "Unistrut" P- 3000 series. Provide all necessary rods, anchors, inserts, clamps, spacers, shims, bolts and miscellaneous steel as required for each support. 4. In outdoor areas and in damp interior or corrosive areas, paint all field cuts in galvanized support members with one coat of Rustoleum, or equal, aluminum paint. 5. Where exposed to the weather or high humidity, use nuts, bolts, washers, shims, and other small materials of non-corrosible metal or galvanized or cadmium -plated. 6. Conduit clamps, all fittings and light fixtures where required to be fastened to masonry, cast and pre -cast concrete, shall be fastened by means of bolts and expansion shields and Tap -cons in holes made by a rotary drill. 7. Provide conduit support, at spaced intervals, as required by the NEC for the type of conduit being installed, but not more than eight feet on center. 8. Construct all supports with sufficient rigidity to hold all mounted equipment and material in permanent and neat alignment. 9. Construct equipment supports so as to provide 1/4 inch space between equipment housings and walls upon which they are mounted. 10. Provide special conduit and equipment supports as indicated. B. Metal Framing (Continuous Slot Metal Channel System): 1. Standard: Conform to NEMA ML 1. 2. Configuration: Single channel, or two single channels welded together, as indicated, with continuous 7/8 inch slot and to accept spring -held steel nuts. 3. Single Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches, 12 gauge. 4. Double Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inches by 3-1/4 inches, 12 gauge. 5. General Fittings Dimensions for Flat, Angular and U shapes: 1/4 inch thick by 1-5/8 inches wide unless otherwise indicated. 6. Channel, Pipe Clamps and General Fittings Finish: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication conforming to ASTM A 386 or A 153, as applicable. Minimum weight of coating shall be 2.0 ounces per square foot. 7. Nuts, Bolts and Screws Finish: Electro -galvanized. Indian River County EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS 16190-2 Remote Supply Wells C. Threaded Hanger Rods: 1. Hot rolled steel conforming to ASTM A 575 and ASTM A 576. 2. Not less than 3/8 inch diameter, threaded either full length or for a sufficient distance at each end to permit at least 1-1/2 inches of adjustment. 3. Finish of Rods and Couplings: Electroplated. 4. Carrying Capacities: Nominal Rod Maximum Safe Load in Diameter in Pounds, at Rod Temperature Inches of 650 Degrees F 3/8 610 1/2 1130 5/8 1810 3/4 2710 D. Trapeze -Type Multiple Conduit Hangers: 1. Fabricate of two or more galvanized steel hanger rods, a steel horizontal member and U -bolts, clamps, and other attachments necessary for securing hanger rods and conduits. 2. Horizontal Member: Continuous slot metal channel single or double, as indicated or as required. 3. Design: a. Capable of supporting a load equal to the sum of the weights of the conduits and wires, the weight of the hanger itself, plus 200 pounds. b. Maximum deflection: 1/240 of the span between supports. E. Continuous and Spot Concrete Inserts: 1. Standards: Conform to NEMA ML L 2. Continuous Insert: a. Configuration and Dimensions: Single channel, 1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches, 12 gauge with continuous 7/8 inch slot to accept springheld steel nuts and with concrete anchors. Indian River County EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS 16190-3 Remote Supply Wells ( 1 b. Loading: 2000 pounds per foot. Minimum safety factor 3. �✓ C. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication ASTM A 386 or A 153 as applicable. Minimum weight of coating shall be 2.0 ounces per square foot. 3. Spot Insert: a. Configuration and Dimensions: Deep drawn metal cup 1-5/8 inches high by 3-3/4 inches maximum width, 12 gauge with knockout openings to accept either square or rectangular nuts. b. Loading: 800 pounds with a minimum safety factor of 3 C. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. 4. Concrete inserts shall be provided with the channel interior filled with expanded polystyrene or covered by other approved means to prevent seepage of concrete into the channel interior during placing of concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items rigid, secure, plumb, level and in true alignment with related and adjoining work. Do not weld electrical materials for attachment or support. B. Provide anchor bolts and anchorage items as needed for a rigid support, and field check to ensure proper alignment and location. Provide templates, layout drawings, and supervision at the job site to ensure correct placing of anchorage items in concrete. Check embedded items for correctness of location and detail before concrete is placed. C. Install supporting members, fastenings, framing, hangers, bracing, brackets, straps, bolts and angles, as needed to connect rigidly to the work. D. Control erection tolerances so as not to impair the strength, safety, serviceability, or appearance of the installations. Determine exact location of conduits. Route conduit parallel to building grid lines. E. Hanger rods shall be fastened to concrete inserts set flush with surface. Install a reinforcing rod through the opening provided in the concrete inserts. F. Inserts: 1. Channel Inserts: Install embedded channel inserts with the slotted face flush with the finished concrete surface. Indian River County EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS 16190-4 Remote Supply Wells 0 2. Spot Inserts: a. Install with the insert face flush with the finished concrete surface, firmly embedded, with no evidence of movement. b. Test overhead inserts selected by the Engineer, by suspension of 800 pounds of weight from the insert. If there is evidence of failure, replace the inserts in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. END OF SECTION Indian River County EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY SUPPORT SYSTEMS 16190-5 Remote Supply Wells SECTION 16405 UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide underground duct bank, and other appurtenances as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The work as specified and indicated on Drawings constitutes the best available information for use in planning the design and installation. However, this data shall not be construed to be necessarily complete or accurate and any existing or new underground or surface obstructions, interferences or impediments encountered in the installation of the conduits shall be avoided in the most practicable manner or the restriction removed or relocated as required without additional cost to the Department. Coordinate the installation with other new outside service installations of the various trades in order to maintain the grading herein specified and as indicated on the Drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall bear UL Labels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, properly identified manufacturer's literature giving materials, finishes, accessories and installations where required. Submit manhole drawings for approval. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.. Concrete Encased Underground Ductbanks: Underground ducts of the size as indicated on Drawings shall consist of a number of individual PVC ducts as indicated, encased in a reinforced concrete envelope with a minimum depth between finished grade and top of the concrete envelope, as shown on details. 2. Plastic Ducts: PVC plastic shall conform to UL 651, Fed. Spec. W -C-1094, NEMA (� TC -6 and ASTM D1784. ABS plastic shall conform to ASTM D1788, and NEMA Standards TC6. Ducts to have belled ends. Provide manufacturer's recommended solvent type joint cement. Ducts to be Type EB manufactured by Carlon or Indian River county Underground Ductbanks 16405-1 Remote Supply Wells Manville. Ducts carrying conductors rated 90 degrees C shall also be rated 90 degrees C. 3. Duct Base and Intermediate Spacers: Molded interlocking plastic spacers to provide duct spacings, to be as manufactured by Carlon or Mansville. 4. Duct Plugs: Plastic plugs sized to fit ducts, to be as manufactured by Carlon or Manville. 5. Out Banding: Flat steel banding or plumber's strapping. 6. Concrete Encasement: Class C concrete, 2500 pounds per square inch minimum compressive strength, using 3/8 inch aggregate and 7 inches to 8 inches slump in accordance with Section 03300, "Cast in Place Concrete.". Provide #4/0 ground conductor per Section 3.1A-10. 7. Conduit and fittings shall be free, within commercial tolerances, of objectionable lines, striations, bubbles, welds and other manufacturing defects that would impair the service of the conduit. The bore of the conduit shall be straight and circular in cross section, free from obstructions and rough and flaky areas. The conduit and fittings shall be free from all substances that injuriously affect any wire or cable covering such as is used on rubber -covered wire, polychlorprene sheathed cable and weatherproof wire. The conduit and fittings shall be corrosion resistant and not adversely affected by acids, alkalies, salts, bacteria and other organic matter that would normally be encountered in the ground. The conduit length for each size shall be the length that is standard with the manufacturer with a permissible tolerance of 1/4 inch per 10 foot length. Bends, elbows and other fittings shall be capable of freely passing a ball that is 1/4 inch less in diameter than the nominal bore of the conduit. Fitting shall be of a type especially made for use with plastic conduit for electrical service. Conduit and fittings shall be capable of being joined, by means of a solvent welding cement so as to provide a watertight and rootproof joint. 8. Provide #12 AWG pull wire or nylon pull string in all empty power and telecommunication ducts. 9. Temporary plugs shall be provided to prevent entrance of grout into the ducts and duct spaces during the pouring of concrete. Indian River County Underground Ductbanks 16405-2 Remote supply Wells PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION. A. Duct Line Installation: 1. Duct lines shall be laid to a minimum grade of 3 inches per 100 feet or as indicated on Drawings. Grade may be away from buildings, from one manhole to the next or both ways from a high point between manholes, depending on the contour of the finished grade. Duct lines shall be installed so that the top of concrete in encased duct lines is not less than 42 inches below finished grade or finished paving at any point. Changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertically or horizontally, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 12.5 feet, except that manufactured bends may be used at the ends of the run. The long sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections and/or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of 18 inches for use with ducts of less than 3 inches in diameter and a minimum radius of 36 inches for ducts of 3 inches in diameter and larger. Conduit shall terminate in end bells where duct lines enter manholes. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned before using or laying. During construction and after the duct line is completed, the ends of the conduits shall be plugged to prevent water from washing mud into the conduits or manholes. Particular care shall be taken to keep the conduits clean of concrete, dirt and any other substance during the course of construction. 2. After the duct line has been completed, a standard flexible mandrel not less than 12 inches long, having a diameter approximately 1/4 inch less than the inside diameter of the conduit, shall be pulled through each conduit after which a brush with stiff bristles shall be pulled through each conduit to make certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the line. Where connection is made to an existing duct that is of different material and shape than the duct line being installed, a suitable coupling of a type recommended by the duct manufacturer shall be used. Conduits shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun. Conduit joints in concrete encasement may be placed side-by-side horizontally but shall be staggered at least 6 inches vertically. At all locations where transition couplings between different types of conduit are installed and either run of conduit is concrete encased, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required, the encasement shall include the conduit joint plus 30 inch extension of the encasement beyond the conduit joint measured along the centerline of the conduit unless the 30 inch extension carries to a point more than 8 inches above grade level in which case the encasement may be terminated at the 8 inch level. 3. Each single conduit of the duct bank shall be completely encased in concrete as indicated. The thickness of concrete encasement indicated is the minimum thickness, and may be increased to fit the actual shape of the trench. Separators or spacing blocks shall be made of steel, concrete, plastic or a combination of these materials Indian River county Underground Ductbanks 16405-3 Remote Supply Wells placed on not greater than 4 foot centers. Ducts shall be securely anchored to prevent movement during the placement of concrete. 4. Installation of Couplings: Joints in all types of conduits shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the particular conduit and coupling selected. In the absence of specific recommendations, the various types of conduit joint couplings shall be made watertight by the following methods as appropriate. 5. Plastic conduit joints shall be made up by brushing a plastic solvent cement on the inside of the plastic coupling fitting and on the outside of the conduit ends. The conduit and fitting shall then be slipped together, until seated, with a slight twist to set the joint tightly and conduit then rotated one-half turn to distribute the cement evenly. Excess cement built up on the inside surface of the conduit shall then be removed. 6. Ends of all ducts entering through floor slabs shall be of rigid steel conduit. Connections between duct line conduits and steel conduits shall be made with approved couplings. All ends of cable -carrying ducts shall be adequately sealed against water entry. Provide end bells on conduit entries into manholes and walls as specified under manholes. 7. Duct openings in manholes shall have extended reinforcing rods and shall be keyed - in with reinforcing rods of duct bank. 8. Reinforcing rods shall be installed during construction of the duct bank and shall be of size, material (steel) and arrangement as shown on the Drawings. 9. Spare conduits shall be capped inside building wall. 10. A No. 4/0 bare stranded copper ground conductor shall be laid in concrete and shall be continuous in ducts and through manholes for primary power duct banks. 1 l . Coordinate all work with other trades. 12. Trenches in which concrete envelopes are poured shall be provided with an adequate concrete base to assure alignment and support of conduits during installation. This base shall be permitted to set before conduits are installed. Sidewall forms for concrete envelopes are not required if cut is clean, even and free of loose materials. All loose dirt and extraneous materials accumulating in trenches before and during concrete placement shall be completely removed. 13. Reinforce all duct bank concrete envelopes passing under roads and paved areas with #4 steel rods at each corner to prevent shearing or cracking. Indian River County Underground Ductbanks 16405-4 Remote Supply wells 14. All conduits shall be enclosed in Class C, 2500 psi concrete envelopes not less than 3 inches thick beyond exterior surfaces of any conduit with a minimum spacing of 2 inches between conduits or as indicated. 15. The relative locations of incoming services are indicated on the Drawings; however, the exact relative location of conduits may be changed as required to avoid obstructions, etc. 16. Design/Builder shall verify all crossings of existing underground utilities and will be responsible for any damage done to them. Coordinate with corresponding authority before proceeding with the underground work. 17. Repair and restore to original conditions all sidewalks or roadways or any other structures, that have to be replaced due to the construction of the underground conduit duct banks. 18. Provide manholes for primary power and telecommunication duct banks as indicated on Drawings and as per specifications of electric utility company for primary power duct banks and telephone company for telecommunication duct banks. 19. The Design/Builder shall present a Record Drawing set of drawings at termination of construction to the Department. END OF SECTION Indian River County Underground Ductbanks 16405-5 Remote Supply Wells N N SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a grounding system complete as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall bear UL label. B. Grounding system shall conform to ANSI C33.8, IEEE -81, IEEE -142. C. The electrical system and equipment shall be grounded in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and as specified. D. Grounding system installation shall conform to NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. E. Grounding system shall be installed as shown on Drawings. F. Install in all nonmetallic conduct runs an insulated, green, equipment grounding conductor and bond in accordance with the NEC. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review properly identified manufacturer's literature and shop drawings giving materials, finishes, accessories, dimensioned drawings and installation directions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. The grounding conductor shall be an insulated copper wire of size indicated. Where not indicated, the conductor shall be in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code except that minimum size shall be No. 12. Inaccessible connections shall be made with the exothermic welding process using equipment manufactured by Burndy or Erico Products. Accessible connections shall be made with multiple bolt silicon bronze connectors specifically designed and approved for the connection to be made. Connectors shall be as manufactured by Burndy or O.Z. Gedney Electric. Grounding jumpers shall be provided across metal parts which are separated by non -conducting materials or joined so that there is a high resistance at the joints. Grounding cable shall not be buried directly in Indian River County Remote Supply Wells GROUNDING 16450-1 concrete, but a conduit sleeve shall be provided where cable passes through concrete. Grounding cable buried in earth shall be tinned. Grounding for the lightning protection system shall be as specified in Section 16610, "Lightning Protection System," and as shown on the Drawings. Refer to electrical drawings for additional grounding. B. Grounding Source: The ground source shall consist of a counterpoise and ground rods as shown on Drawings, and a connection to the metal cold water main and building steel structure. All ground sources shall be connected to the ground plate mounted on the electrical room wall. 2. Maximum resistance to ground shall be limited to 5 Ohms. Two additional ground rods shall be driven if required to maintain this level. Maximum ground resistance to each of individual rods shall be 5 Ohms. B. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel not less than 5/8 inch in diameter, 20 feet long, driven full length into the earth. Maximum ground resistance shall not exceed 3 Ohms under normal dry conditions. E. Cold Water Pipe: 1. External building ground wire loop shall be connected to the building steel and shall also be grounded to main metal cold water pipe at point of entrance of the metallic water service with copper conductor in conduit. 2. Connection to cold water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp. 3. If flanged pipes are encountered, connections shall be made with the lug bolted to the street side of the flange connections. F. Parts To Be Grounded: Panelboard frames, fittings, fixtures and devices, cable sheaths, boxes and raceways, motor frames, street lighting standards, , non-current carrying parts of appliances and devices, and all other parts and equipment as required by NEC. Neutral wire shall never be used as grounding means. G. Conductor: All grounding cable shall be green insulated copper stranded cable, soft drawn or annealed, sized as indicated on Drawings. H. Ground Plates: Electrolytic copper, size as indicated, identified with a permanently attached nameplate, 5/8 -inch high with 3/8 -inch high etched white letters on dark green background. Legend: CHASSIS GROUND. PART 3 - EXECUTION Indian River County GROUNDING 16450-2 Remote Supply Wells 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All connections to equipment, bus or conduit shall be made with approved type of solderless connector and shall be unpainted and thoroughly cleaned before connection is made to insure a good metal contact. B. All connections which will be inaccessible after completion of project shall be made by exothermic weld process. C. The grounding medium for all lighting branch circuits shall be the conduit system. The lighting fixture shall be grounded by means of a conductor between the outlet box and fixture. All locknut connections to cabinets, pullboxes, junction boxes, etc., shall be drawn up sufficiently tight to assure a continuous metal -to -metal bond. D. Bond all conduits stubbing under switchboard, motor control center and similar locations using bonding bushings. E. Provide a bonding wire in all flexible conduits and connect to the boxes at each end in an approved manner. F. Provide aground rod driven near each pole base and weld a #12 AWG wire or as indicated in Drawings, to the top of the rod and extend the wire to a grounding lug in the base and bond the anchor bolts. G. All equipment shall be grounded per applicable codes and documents. H. Electrical metallic conduit and flexible conduit shall not be used as a grounding medium. 1. Ground receptacles to their outlet boxes by means of a grounding conductor from the green terminal on the receptacle to a grounding screw in the outlet box. END OF SECTION Indian River County GROUNDING 16450-3 Remote Supply Wells SECTION 16460 TRANSFORMERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide transformers as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall bear UL labels. B. Transformers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 506 and NEMA ST -20. C. Dry type transformer installation shall conform to NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and NEMA Standard TR -27. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review properly identified manufacturer's literature giving KVA, voltage, phase, taps, sound levels, temperature rise, percent impedance, and losses at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Transformers shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Core and coil assembly shall be vacuum impregnated for maximum resistance to moisture. These transformers shall be provided with a drip -proof enclosure, which has a durable finish and a rust -proof diagrammatic nameplate. Wiring compartments shall have adequate space for terminating cables and shall be front connected for easy accessibility. Indian River County TRANSFORMERS 16460-1 Remote Supply Wells B. Core of this unit shall be of high quality, cold -rolled, grain oriented steel, annealed by manufacturer, of low loss and exciting current. Laminations shall be formed to eliminate burrs and annealed to reduce losses to a minimum. Winding conductors shall be annealed and insulated by transformer manufacturer. Conductor surfaces shall be free from slivers, burrs, and other irregularities. C. Transformers shall be dry type, three phase, 60 Hz., 480 Volts Delta primary, 208Y/120 Volts secondary, with four 2-1/2 percent FCBN taps and two 2-1/2 percent FCAN taps for transformers rated 15 KVA and greater, and with two 2-1/2 percent FCBN taps and two 2-1/2 percent FCAN taps for transformers rated 9 KVA and smaller. KVA rating shall be as shown on Drawings. D. Transformer insulation shall be Class "H", 150 degrees Centigrade rise for transformers rated 30 KVA and greater. Transformer insulation shall be Class "K", 115 degree Centigrade rise for transformers rated 15 KVA and smaller. E. Transformer sound level shall not exceed following values: 0 to 9 KVA -36 db, 10 to 45 KVA-42 db, 50 to 100 KVA-45 db. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Dry type transformers shall be installed by Contractor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in rooms assigned for the installation of equipment. B. Transformer enclosures and secondary neutral shall be securely grounded. C. Dry type transformer shall be floor mounted type with body six inches from wall for sizes 30 KVA and larger, bracket mounted for sizes under 30 KVA. D. Floor mounted transformers shall be bolted to floor. E. Wall mounted transformers shall be bolted to steel bracket angles. F. Dry type transformers shall be installed with wiring compartment to the front. G. Primary and secondary connections shall be made with flexible conduit. Flexible conduit shall be a minimum of 24 inches long. Indian River County TRANSFORMERS 16460-2 Remote Supply Wells H. Transformers shall be vibrationally isolated from building structure by means of neoprene isolation pads. I. Adjust taps, after adjustment of taps in primary power supply, to provide a secondary voltage of approximately 118 -120 -volt phase to neutral for 120/208 Volt transformers and within 5 percent of nominal rated voltage for 277/480 Volt transformers. END OF SECTION Indian River County TRANSFORMERS 16460-3 Remote Supply Wells SECTION 16520 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 - American National Standard for Electric Lamps -- Reflector Lamps -- Classification of Beam Patterns; 2006. B. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast; 2004. C. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High -Intensity -Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple -Supply Type); 2002. D. ANSI 05.1 - American National Standard for Wood Poles -- Specifications and Dimensions; 2002. E. IESNA RP -8 - American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting; Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; 2000 (ANSI/IES RP8). F. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2000. G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire which is not a standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. D. Test Reports: Indicate measured illumination levels. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product. F. Maintenance Data: For each luminaire. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI 05.1. 1.06 COORDINATION PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. American Scientific Lighting Corporation: www.asllighting.com. B. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com. C. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.03 BALLASTS A. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: ANSI C82.4, mercury vapor lamp ballast, suitable for lamp specified. 1. Voltage: 277 volts. 2. Product: 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.04 LAMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com. 2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lighting.philips.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Lamp Types: As specified for each luminaire. C. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: 1. Product: 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 501. B. Install lamps in each luminaire. C. Bond luminaires and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 3.05 SCHEDULE -See Drawings END OF SECTION SECTION 17000 ( PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. A Process Instrumentation and Control Supplier (PICS) shall furnish all services and equipment specified herein and in other specification sections as listed in Article 1.02. B. All materials, equipment, labor and services required to achieve a fully configured, integrated and operational process control system shall be provided by the PICS. The PICS shall coordinate the process control system for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these specifications and with related existing equipment. C. Application software programming for the Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) shall be provided by the PICS. All programming, configuration and integration, including but not limited to loading of software on computers, operating system software configuration, communication network communications between operator workstations, servers and PLCs shall be provided by the PICS. D. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for complete system operation or performance to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by other suppliers under other sections of these specifications, shall be included whether or not they are shown on the drawings. These devices include but are not limited to, transducers, current isolators, signal conditioners or interposing relays. E. Substitution of functions or type of equipment specified shall not be acceptable, but the PICS is encouraged to recommend changes in the design that will improve the overall process control system subject for approval by the Engineer. In order to ensure interchangeability of parts, maintain quality, interface between other subsystems, and establish minimums with regard to ranges and accuracy, strict compliance with the above requirements shall be maintained. System design shall allow removing devices from service without disrupting other devices in the process control system. F. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed and placed in proper operating conditions in full conformity with detail drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions and recommendations by the equipment manufacturers as approved by the Engineer. G. To facilitate the Owner's future operation and maintenance efforts, similar products currently in use or proposed for installation at the water treatment plant shall be by the same manufacturer, as much as possible. H. The specified project work is generally located near the existing North County Water Treatment Plant (WTP) in Indian River County, Florida. The WTP is in the process of being upgraded; including the WTP SCADA system. This project 17000-1 includes the integration of water production well sites that are to be added to the SCADA system. The PICS shall coordinate their work throughout the project with Operations, and the Engineer to produce, install and place into operation Remote Terminal Units (RTU); one at each well pump station site. All equipment and installations shall be in accordance with Federal, State and Local codes, regulations and laws. Where applicable, the PICS shall coordinate with the Engineer and other suppliers under other sections of these specifications on the following: 1. Interface requirements. 2. PLC input and output (I/O) requirements. 3. Consistency of instrumentation. 4. PLC communication requirements. 5. Transfer of data. 6. HMI graphic screen design. 7. Control requirements. K. All materials, equipment, labor and services necessary to achieve the monitoring, control and reporting functions described herein shall be provided in a timely manner so that the monitoring, control and reporting functions are available when the equipment or process is ready to be placed in service. L. The PICS shall coordinate all required testing and training with the General Contractor, Engineer and Owner in a timely manner. M. The PICS shall supply all necessary software programming and configuration to demonstrate the RTU functionality during the Operational Readiness Test (ORT) and the Functional Demonstration Test (FDT). N. To assist the PICS in determining the scope of work, loop drawings and details are provided on the plans. Unless specifically stated otherwise, the PICS shall be responsible for providing all instrumentation, control equipment and auxiliary devices necessary to perform the functions specified herein and as shown and described on the drawings. Any auxiliary devices such as lightning/surge protectors, relays, timers, signal isolators, signal boosters, etc., which are necessary for complete operation of the system, or to perform the functions specified, shall be included whether or not they are specifically shown or tabulated on the loop drawings. O. The intent of the loop drawings are to describe the functional requirements of a process measurement and control system. They are not intended to convey requirements for conduit and wiring between panels or system components. This �✓ information is included in appropriate electrical Specifications and Drawings. Any additional wiring or raceway required for a fully operational system shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 17000-2 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The PICS shall furnish all materials, labor and services specified in the following specification sections and drawings except as provided by the Owner as required to ensure that a complete coordinated process control system is supplied: 1. Section 17000 — Process Instrumentation and Control System 2. Section 17010 — Application Engineering Services 3. Section 17015 — Remote Terminal Units 4. Section 17040 — Communication Network 5. Section 17700 — Instrumentation B. Divisions requiring coordination shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Division 1 —General Requirements 2. Division 11 — Equipment 3. Division 15 —Mechanical 4. Division —16 — Electrical C. The PICS shall coordinate with the Contractor, the Engineer, the Owner, all equipment suppliers and all subcontractors including the mechanical and electrical subcontractors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These submittals shall fully demonstrate that the equipment and services to be furnished comply with the provisions of these specifications and provide a true and complete record of the equipment as manufactured and delivered. Each submittal shall be securely bound with an index and sectional dividers. All submittal drawings shall be legible and a maximum size of 11 - inches by 17 -inches. B. The Engineer shall determine whether a product is an "Approved Equal" based upon the information specified herein and the manufacturer's data sheets regarding the models specified. Substitute or alternate equipment must meet the criteria listed herein and any additional information in the manufacturer's data sheets in order to be accepted as an "Approved Equal". The supplier must furnish at the Engineer's request five (5) working installation references for any substitute or alternative equipment along with reference Owner, contact and telephone number. 17000-3 C. Submittals listed below shall be provided as a minimum. Each submittal must be complete in order to be reviewed by the Engineer. A total of 6 submittals of each type are required to be submitted to the Engineer. 1. Field instruments 2. SCADA system hardware and software (provided by PICS) 3. Communication network 4. Process control strategies, graphic screens and reports 5. Control panels, panel mounted equipment and wiring 6. Test procedures and results 7. Instrument loop diagrams 8. Spares and test equipment 9. Operation and maintenance manuals (O&M) 10. As -built documentation D. Submittal Descriptions 1. Field Instruments a. This submittal shall be provided by the PICS and shall provide complete documentation of all field instruments using an ISA -S20 format. A complete Bill of Materials (BOM) listing all field instrumentation equipment shall be provided. b. Provide ISA data sheets for each instrument listing model numbers, options and ancillary devices that are being provided. Data sheets shall be provided with an index, proper identification and appropriate cross-referencing. Data sheets shall include, but not be limited to, the following information: (1.) ISA instrument tag number (2.) Item name used herein and on the Drawings (3.) Manufacturer's complete model number (4.) Physical installation location (5.) Input or output characteristics (6.) Range, units, size and graduations (7.) Physical dimensions (8.) Enclosure dimensions (9.) NEMA classification (10.) Mounting details 17000-4 (11.) Materials of construction (12.) Instrument sizing calculations, where applicable (13.) Calibration data (Certified for all flow metering devices) c. Provide manufacturer's equipment specifications, which shall fully describe each device, the intended function, how it operates, and its physical environment and performance characteristics. As a minimum, the specification sheets shall include the following: (I.) Complete information regarding the instrument as required by ISA -S5.4 standards. (2.) Description of operation (3.) Performance characteristics (4.) Calibration standards (5.) Environmental characteristics (6.) Electrical requirements (7.) Process requirements (8.) Materials of construction (9.) Physical dimensions and clearance requirements (10.) Installation details (11.) Maintenance and calibration requirements (12.) Spare parts, special tools and test equipment requirements 2. SCADA System Hardware and Software a. This submittal shall be provided by the PICS and shall provide complete documentation of all SCADA system hardware and software using an ISA -S20 format. A complete Bill of Materials (BOM) listing all SCADA system hardware and software shall be provided. b. This submittal shall include all related software for the SCADA system including the computer operating system, communications network, management, operations, HMI, report, diagnostic, etc. c. Provide a complete set of SCADA System Block Diagrams showing interconnections between all major components of the SCADA system. The block diagrams shall reflect the total integration of all digital devices in the SCADA system and any human machine interface (HMI) locations. Locations of all components shall be clearly identified with appropriate cross-references. The diagrams shall also show all interconnecting cabling requirements for digital components of the system including the complete communication network. The diagrams shall include, but not be limited to: (1.) Computers and peripheral devices (2.) Control centers 17000-5 (3.) PLCs (4.) Panels and Consoles (5.) Communication network (6.) Interfaces to other systems (7.) UPSs d. Provide ISA data sheets for each component of the SCADA system hardware and software listing model numbers, options and ancillary devices that are being provided. Data sheets shall be provided with an index, proper identification and appropriate cross-referencing. Data sheets shall include, but not be limited to, the following information: (1.) ISA instrument tag number, if applicable (2.) Item name used herein and on the Drawings (3.) Manufacturer's complete model number (4.) Physical installation location (5.) Functional characteristics (6.) Physical dimensions (7.) Enclosure dimensions, if applicable (8.) NEMA classification (9.) Mounting details (10.) Materials of construction (11.) UPS sizing calculations e. Provide manufacturer's equipment specifications, which shall fully describe each device, the intended function, how it operates, and its physical environment and performance characteristics. As a minimum, the specification sheets shall include the following: (1.) Complete information regarding the equipment as required by ISA -S5.4 standards. (2.) Description of operation (3.) Performance characteristics (4.) Calibration standards (5.) Environmental characteristics (6.) Electrical requirements (7.) Process requirements (8.) Materials of construction (9.) Physical dimensions and clearance requirements (10.) Installation details 17000-6 (11.) Maintenance and calibration requirements (12.) Spare parts, special tools and test equipment requirements £ Provide a complete SCADA System Input/Output (I/O) List for all equipment connected to the SCADA system under this Contract. The I/O List shall fully identify and describe each I/O point in the SCADA system, the intended function, how it operates, and its physical location and performance characteristics. As a minimum, the I/O List shall include the following: (1.) All listed I/O from the plans. (2.) 1/0 Point Address (PLC name, PLC address and point address) (3.) I/O Physical Address (Panel name, rack, slot, etc.) (4.) I/O Alarms, limits and tag names (5.) Identify Instruments for 2 -wire or 4 -wire configuration (6.) Any other applicable data g. The submittal shall also contain all planning information, site preparation instructions, power supply and grounding procedures, cabling diagrams, system identification, safety precautions and equipment layouts in order to enable the General Contractor to proceed with detailed site preparation for all equipment. 3. Communication Network a. This submittal shall be provided by the PICS and shall provide complete documentation of all communication network devices using an ISA -S20 format. A complete Bill of Materials (BOM) listing all communication network devices shall be provided. b. This submittal shall include all communication network devices, network switches, fiber-optic cable, fiber-optic connectors, and related equipment. c. Provide ISA data sheets for each component of the communication network listing model numbers, options and ancillary devices that are being provided. Data sheets shall be provided with an index, proper identification and appropriate cross-referencing. Data sheets shall include, but not be limited to, the following information: (I.) ISA instrument tag number, if applicable (2.) Item name used herein and on the Drawings (3.) Manufacturer's complete model number (4.) Physical installation location (5.) Functional characteristics (6.) Physical dimensions (7.) Enclosure dimensions, if applicable W1111I13/ j (�✓) (8.) NEMA classification (9.) Mounting details (10.) Materials of construction (11.) UPS sizing calculations d. Provide manufacturer's equipment specifications, which shall fully describe each device, the intended function, how it operates, and its physical environment and performance characteristics. As a minimum, the specification sheets shall include the following: (1.) Complete information regarding the equipment as required by ISA -55.4 standards. (2.) Description of operation (3.) Performance characteristics (4.) Calibration standards (5.) Environmental characteristics (6.) Electrical requirements (7.) Process requirements (8.) Materials of construction (9.) Physical dimensions and clearance requirements (10.) Installation details (11.) Maintenance and calibration requirements (12.) Spare parts, special tools and test equipment requirements e. The submittal shall also contain all planning information, site preparation instructions, power supply and grounding procedures, cabling diagrams, system identification, safety precautions and equipment layouts in order to enable the General Contractor to proceed with detailed site preparation for all equipment. 4. Process Control Strategy, Graphic Screen and Reports a. Provide submittals as per Section 17010. 5. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Panel Mounted Equipment and Wiring a. This submittal shall be provided by the PICS and shall provide complete documentation of each RTU, panel mounted equipment and related wiring. A complete Bill of Materials (BOM) listing all panels and panel -mounted equipment shall be provided. b. Provide ISA data sheets for each panel, equipment or instrument listing model numbers, options and ancillary devices that are being provided. Data sheets shall be provided with an index, proper identification and appropriate cross-referencing. Data sheets shall include, but not be limited to, the following information: 17000-8 (1.) ISA instrument tag number (2.) Item name used herein and on the Drawings (3.) Manufacturer's complete model number (4.) Physical installation location (5-.) Input or output characteristics (6) Range, units, size and graduations (7.) Physical dimensions (8.) Enclosure dimensions (9.) NEMA classification (10.) Mounting details (11.) Materials of construction (12.) Instrument sizing calculations, where applicable (13.) Calibration data c. Provide manufacturer's equipment specifications, which shall fully describe each device, the intended function, how it operates, and its physical environment and performance characteristics. As a minimum, the specification sheets shall include the following: (1.) Complete information regarding the panel, equipment or instrument as required by ISA -S5.4 standards. (2.) Description of operation (3.) Performance characteristics (4.) Calibration standards (5.) Environmental characteristics (6.) Electrical requirements (7.) Process requirements (8.) Materials of construction (9.) Physical dimensions and clearance requirements (10.) Installation details (11.) Maintenance and calibration requirements (12.) Spare parts, special tools and test equipment requirements d. Provide detailed drawings for each RTU which shall include, as a minimum, the following: (l.) Panel assembly and physical layout drawings to scale. Drawings shall include exterior front and side views, as required to show the physical dimensions of the panel and all exterior mounted equipment. Drawings shall also include interior views of all sub -panels mounted within the enclosure. (2.) Material and paint Specifications 17000-9 (3.) Fabrication details (4.) Panel wiring diagrams showing all power connections to equipment within and mounted on the panel, panel power requirements, breaker sizes, fuse sizes and grounding requirements. The diagram shall be in ladder logic format and shall cross-reference all appropriate loop drawings for continuation or detail where required. The diagram shall include wire numbers and terminal block designations as required to complete the Drawing. e. The submittal shall also contain all planning information, site preparation instructions, power supply and grounding procedures, cabling diagrams, system identification, safety precautions and equipment layouts in order to enable the Contractor to proceed with detailed site preparation for all equipment. f. The submittal shall also include power calculations for UPS sizing and heat dissipation calculations for each enclosure. 6. Test Procedures and Results a. A test plan shall be prepared by the PICS after all hardware submittals have been approved. The test plan shall be completed prior to preparation of the detailed test procedures and shall include outlines of the specific proposed tests. Submittals shall include examples of proposed forms and checklists. b. The system shall be tested using the SCADA Block Diagrams and BOMs of all equipment indicating tag name, manufacturer, model number and serial number. The documents for the test plan shall be structured to define what the inputs are, what the predicted outputs should be and what the actual outputs are. The test plan shall have a sign -off and date block for the PICS, Contractor, and Engineer. c. The test plan should include as a minimum: (I.) SCADA System Block Diagrams (2.) BOMB for all equipment (3.) A testing schedule with descriptions of specific tasks to be performed and the time allotted for each task. (4.) A 100% communication test for data transfers over the communication network including all related software, computers, communication network, PLCs, consoles and equipment. (5.) A 100% 1/0 point test including all related software, graphic screens, reports, computers, communication network, PLCs, consoles and equipment. (6.) A 100% control strategy test including all related software, computers, communication network, PLCs, consoles and equipment. 17000-10 d. Test procedures shall be prepared by the PICS after the test plan is complete. The submittal shall document the proposed procedures to be followed by the PICS during the tests. Procedures shall include test descriptions, forms and checklists to be used during the tests including documentation of results. Each test procedure shall have a sign -off and date block for the PICS, General Contractor, and Engineer to sign upon completion of each test. 7. Instrument Loop Diagrams a. PICS shall provide detailed loop diagrams for each loop or multiple loops on 11 -inch by 17 -inch sheets of paper. The loop diagram shall show all components of the loop including analog, digital and discrete components as well as all relays, switches, 1/0 points, instruments, interfaces to other equipment, cross-reference designations, etc., which are required for a complete loop and proper operation. b. The format shall be based on the Instrument Society of America, Standard for Instrument Loop Diagrams, ISA -S5.4 and the following requirements: (1.) Show all interconnecting wiring between equipment, panels, terminal junction boxes and field mounted components. The diagrams shall show all components and panel terminal identification numbers and all wire numbers. The diagram shall include all intermediate terminations between field elements and panels (terminal junction boxes). The diagrams shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor and other equipment suppliers. (2.) The diagrams shall show the location of all devices. (3.) Show instrument descriptions including tag name, type, manufacturer, model number, range, set points and operation (fail open, open on energization, normally closed, etc.). (4.) Show all instrument loop power or instrument air requirements, fuse blocks and fuse size, etc. as applicable. (5.) Show all grounding points and systems. (6.) Complete information regarding the field instruments as required by ISA -55.4 standards. 8. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M) a. Provide O&M Manuals as per Section 17000 — 1.10. 9. As -Built Drawings a. Provide As -Built Drawings as per Section 17000 — 1.10. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Instrument Society of America (ISA) 17000-11 1. ISA 55.2 — Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations 2. ISA 55.3 — Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control / Shared Display Instrumentation Logic and Computer Systems 3. ISA S5.4— Instrument Loop Diagrams 4. Display Instrumentation Logic and Computer Systems B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI X3.5 —Flowchart Symbols and Their Usage in Information Processing C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Electric Code (NEC) E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid shall apply. 1.05 PICS QUALIFICATION A. The PICS shall be regularly engaged in the design and installation of computerized SCADA systems and their associated subsystems as they apply to J1 the municipal water or wastewater industry. The PICS shall be an organization that complies with all of the following criteria: 1. Maintains a fully equipped office / production facility with at least 15 full- time employees capable of fabricating, configuring, installing, calibrating, troubleshooting and testing the system specified herein. 2. Employs personnel who have successfully completed manufacturer's training courses on the configuration and implementation of the specific equipment specified in this project. 3. Employs qualified technicians capable of troubleshooting and repairing the specified controls that can respond to the job site within 24 hours. 4. Has completed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three (3) projects within the last five (5) years. 5. Has been in the water / wastewater industry performing the type of work specified for at least the last five (5) years. B. The PICS shall provide on-site supervision of the installation of the entire SCADA system specified herein. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide delivery, storage and handling requirements per Specification Section 01600 and as specified below: 17000-12 1. Shipping Precautions a. After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval, all equipment, cabinets, panels, consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene envelopes. The equipment shall then be skid -mounted for final transport. Boxed weights shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing and handling at jobsite. b. Special instructions for proper field handling, storage and installation required by the manufacturer for proper protection shall be securely attached to the packaging for each piece of equipment prior to shipment. The instructions shall be stored in re -sealable plastic bags or other acceptable means of protection. c. None of the control equipment shall be shipped to the jobsite until the storage room located at the jobsite or the final installation location at the jobsite is environmentally suitable. 2. Identification / a. Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, tag number and function in the system. Identification shall be prominently displayed on the outside of the package. b. Each piece of equipment supplied shall have a permanent stainless steel or other non -corrosive material tag firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number. 3. Storage a. Equipment shall not be stored outside. Equipment including in-line equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters and adequately protected against mechanical damage. If any equipment is damaged, the Contractor at his own cost and expense shall repair such damage. 1.07 PROJECT / SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Environmental Requirements: Air-conditioned areas require NEMA Type 12 ventilated enclosures. Equipment located below grade shall be rated or enclosed for NEMA Type 4X. All other areas require NEMA Type 4X stainless steel enclosures unless otherwise specified. Equipment located outdoors requires sun shields. B. Elevation: Equipment shall be suitable to operate at a ground elevation of approximately 1000 feet above mean sea level. C. Temperature: Equipment mounted indoors shall be suitable to operate from 10 to 350 C ambient. Equipment mounted outdoors shall be suitable to operate from - 30 to 500 C ambient. Equipment stored shall be suitable to operate from 0 to 500 17000-13 C ambient. Additional cooling or heating shall be furnished, if required, for stored equipment. D. Relative Humidity: Equipment mounted in air-conditioned areas shall be suitable for 20 to 95 % relative, non -condensing humidity. Equipment mounted in all other areas shall be suitable for 0 to 100 % relative, condensing humidity. E. Power Supply: Equipment shall be suitable for 120 VAC electric power supply from unregulated industrial panel boards. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts 1. All spare parts specified in related specification sections shall be furnished. 2. All spare parts shall be individually packaged and labeled. 3. Spare parts shall be packed in a manner suitable for long-term storage and shall be protected against corrosion, humidity and temperature. B. Specialty Tools, Software and Licenses 1. Any specialty tools, software and licenses used on the project shall be turned over to the Owner at the conclusion of the project. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties per Section 01740, Operation and Maintenance Manuals and as specified herein. 1.10 O & M Manuals A. Prior to final acceptance of the system and Owner training, operating and maintenance manuals (O&M) covering instruction and maintenance on each type of equipment shall be furnished by the PICS in accordance with Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. The manuals shall be bound in three-ring binders with Drawings reduced or folded for inclusion and shall provide the following as a minimum: 1. A comprehensive index. 2. A complete "As Built" set of approved shop drawings. 3. A complete list of equipment supplied, including model numbers, serial numbers, ranges and pertinent data. 4. Detailed service, maintenance and operating instructions for each item. 5. Special maintenance requirements for each specified system clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures. 17000-14 6. Operating instructions and control strategies for each specified system, which incorporate a functional description of the entire system, with references to the shop drawings. 7. A complete parts list with stock numbers, name, address and telephone number of the local supplier. C. The final documentation shall be new documentation written specifically for this project but may include standard or modified standard documentation. Modifications to existing hardware or software manuals shall be made on the respective pages or inserted adjacently to the modified pages. All standard documentation furnished shall have all portions that apply clearly indicated. All portions that do not apply shall be lined out. D. The manuals shall contain all illustrations, detailed drawings, wiring diagrams and instructions necessary for installing, operating and maintaining the equipment. The illustrated parts shall be numbered for identification. All information contained therein shall apply specifically to the equipment furnished and shall only include instructions that are applicable. All such illustrations shall be incorporated within the printing of the page to form a durable and permanent reference book. E. If the PICS transmits any documentation or other technical information, which ' \ they consider proprietary, such information shall be designated. Documentation (/} or technical information, which is designated as proprietary will be used only for the design, construction, operation or maintenance of the system and, to the extent permitted by law, will not be published or other wise disclosed. F. The final documentation requirements are as follows: 1. As -built documentation shall include all previous submittals, as described in this Specification, updated to reflect the as -built system. Any errors in or modifications to the system resulting from the Field Acceptance Tests shall be incorporated in this documentation. The Hardware Maintenance documentation shall describe the detailed preventive and corrective procedures required to keep the system in good operating condition. Within the complete Hardware Maintenance documentation, all hardware maintenance manuals shall refer to appropriate diagnostics, where applicable, and all necessary timing diagrams shall be included. A maintenance manual or set of manuals shall be furnished for all delivered hardware, including peripherals. The Hardware Maintenance documentation shall include, as a minimum, the following information: a. Operation Information: This information shall include a detailed description of how the equipment operates and a block diagram illustrating each major assembly in the equipment. b. Preventative Maintenance Instructions: These instructions shall include all applicable visual examinations, hardware testing, diagnostic routines and the adjustments necessary for periodic preventive maintenance of the system. 17000-15 c. Corrective Maintenance Instructions: These instructions shall include guidelines for locating malfunctions down to the card - replacement level. These guides shall include adequate details for quickly and efficiently locating the cause of an equipment malfunction and shall state the probable source(s) of trouble, the symptoms, probable cause and instructions for remedying the malfunction. d. Parts Information: This information shall include the identification of each replaceable or field -repairable module. All parts shall be identified on a list in a drawing; the identification shall be of a level of detail sufficient for procuring any repairable or replaceable part. Cross-references between the PICS part number and manufacturer's part number shall be provided. e. System Backup/Restore: This information shall include a detailed description of the procedure for backing up the SCADA system including the computer workstations, servers and PLCs; reloading using a backup; and completely restoring from a backup. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Process Control System 1. All equipment and instrumentation supplied shall be of the manufacturer's latest design and shall produce or be activated by signals, which are established standards for the water and wastewater industry. 2. All electronic instrumentation shall be of the solid-state type and shall utilize linear transmission signals of 4 to 20 mA DC (milliampere direct current), however, signals between instruments within the same panel or cabinet may be 1 to 5 VDC (volts direct current), or the like. 3. Output of equipment, not of the standard signals as outlined above, shall have the output immediately raised and / or converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission. Zero based signals shall not be allowed. 4. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware, floor stands, wall brackets or instrument racks as shown on the Drawings or as required. 5. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet Class, Group and Division as shown on the Drawings to comply with the National Electric Code. 6. All indicators and recorder readouts shall be linear in process units, unless otherwise noted. 17000-16 7. All transmitters shall be provided with either integral indicators or conduit mounted indicators in process units, accurate to two percent (2%). 8. Electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design, utilizing printed circuitry and suitably coated to prevent contamination by dust, moisture or fungus. Solid-state components shall be conservatively rated for their purpose to assure optimum long-term performance and dependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations and 0 to 95 % relative humidity. Field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid and slightly corrosive service conditions. 9. All equipment, cabinets, consoles and devices furnished hereunder shall be heavy-duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall consist of equipment models, which are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion. 10. Field -mounted digital system equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid and slightly corrosive service conditions. 11. All electronic and digital equipment shall be provided with radio frequency interference protections and shall be FCC approved. B. Electrical All equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 -hertz alternating current power source at a nominal 120 volts, +/- 10%, except where specifically noted. All regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided between power supply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be supplied. 2. Materials and equipment used shall be UL approved wherever such approved equipment and materials are available. 3. All equipment shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of a power interruption, the equipment specified hereunder shall resume normal operation without manual resetting when power is restored. 2.02 LIGHTNING / SURGE PROTECTION A. General 1. Lightning/surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation, control and SCADA system from induced surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. 2. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not L) interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance free and self -restoring. 17000-17 3. Instruments shall be properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to true earth ground, and where practical, each �✓ ground wire run individually and insulated from each other. 4. Surge protectors shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure or in a separate NEMA 4 junction box coupled to the enclosure. All contact points shall be copper with nickel plating. 5. Surge protector transient response shall be less than one nanosecond. 6. Surge protector shall meet IEEE C-62-41 Standards. 7. Lightning/surge protectors shall be provided for each instrument mounted outside of a building. B. Power Supply 1. Lightning/surge protection for all 120 VAC equipment power supplies located in the SCADA system, computer hardware, communication network, PLCs, panels, consoles and instrumentation shall be provided. 2. Isolation transformers and surge protectors shall be provided for equipment that is grouped together in panels, consoles or clusters, regardless of location (indoor or outdoor). 3. Surge protectors shall be provided for individual field -mounted instrumentation. 4. Surge protectors shall be manufactured by Circuit Components, Inc. (CCI), Joslyn, Current Technology, Leviton, Eaton or approved equal. C. Signal Lines 1. Lightning/surge protectors shall be provided at each end of signal lines for field -mounted instrumentation located outside of a building. The surge protector located indoors shall be panel mounted within a panel or console. 2. Surge protectors shall be manufactured by CCI Model SAB, Joslyn, ABB, Phoenix Contact or approved equal. D. Communication Cables 1. Lightning/surge protectors shall be provided at each end of communication cables for field -mounted equipment located outside of a building or for cables that run outside between buildings. Surge protectors shall be housed in a panel or console. 2. Surge protectors shall be manufactured by CCI, Joslyn, ABB, Phoenix Contact or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 17000-18 A. The SCADA system, instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. All information relevant to the placing of SCADA work shall be obtained in the field. In case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner. B. The instrumentation loop diagrams indicate the intent of the interconnections between the individual instruments. Any exceptions shall be noted. Two (2) complete sets of approved shop drawings shall be kept at the jobsite during all on-site construction work. Both sets shall be marked up identically to reflect any modifications made during field installation or start-up. All markings shall be verified and initialed by the Engineer. C. Following completion of installation and the Operational Readiness Test, one (1) set of the marked up drawings shall be provided to the Engineer; the other set shall be retained by the PICS for incorporation of the mark-ups into final as -built documentation. D. The instrumentation installation details in the Drawings indicate the designed installation for the instrument specified. E. All work shall be executed in full compliance with codes, ordinances, regulations and local rulings. Should any work be performed contrary to said codes, ordinances, regulations or local rulings, the Contractor shall bear full responsibility for such violations and assume all costs arising there from. F. All equipment used in areas designated as hazardous shall be designed for the Class, Group and Division as required on the Drawings for the specific locations. G. All piping to and from field instrumentation shall be provided with necessary unions, test tees, couplings, adaptors and shut-off valves. H. Field instruments requiring power supplies shall be provided with local electrical shutoffs and fuses as required by the National Electric Code or as shown on the Drawings. I. Brackets and hangars required for equipment mounting shall be provided and shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall not interfere with any other equipment. The Contractor shall investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to reach its final destination. If necessary, the PICS shall be required to ship material in sections sized to permit passing through restricted areas in the building. The Contractor shall also investigate and make any field modifications to the allocated space for each panel, enclosure and console to assure proper space and area around it (front, rear, side). K. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source to destination and shall be grounded as directed by the manufacturer of the �j instrumentation equipment, but in no case shall more than one ground point be employed for each shield. 17000-19 L. Lifting rings shall be removed from panels, enclosures and consoles and the remaining holes plugged using the same color as the panel. M. The PICS, acting through the Contractor, shall coordinate the installation, the placing and location of system components, and their connections to the process equipment panels, cabinets and devices, subject to the Engineer's approval. The PICS shall be responsible for ensuring that all field wiring for power and signal circuits is done correctly in accordance with best industry practice and provide for all necessary system grounding to ensure a satisfactory functioning installation. The Contractor, hereunder, shall schedule and coordinate his work under this Section with that of the electrical work specified under applicable Sections of Division 16. 3.02 TESTS (GENERAL) A. Unless otherwise specified in the individual Specification Sections, all equipment provided shall be tested at the factory as a single fully integrated system. B. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Unwitnessed Factory Test (UFT) 2. Operational Readiness Test (ORT) 3. Functional Demonstration Test (FDT) 4. 30 -Day Site Acceptance Test (SAT) C. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement shall be satisfied. D. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Engineer -approved procedures, forms, and checklists. Each specific test shall be described and followed by a section for signoff by the appropriate parry after its satisfactory completion. E. Copies of these signoff test procedures, forms and checklists will constitute the required test documentation. F. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform test using actual process variables, equipment and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment and data, provide suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test procedures. G. The General Contractor shall coordinate all testing with the Engineer, PICS, PICS, all affected Subcontractors and the Owner. H. The Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the prior approved Test Procedures. 1. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. 17000-20 J. No equipment shall be shipped to the jobsite until the Engineer has received all test results and approved the system as ready for shipment. K. The PICS shall furnish the services of servicemen, all special calibration and test equipment and labor to perform all required tests for equipment provided by PICS. L. Correction of Deficiencies 1. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 UNWITNESSED FACTORY TEST (UFT) A. The entire system, except primary elements, final control elements and field mounted transmitters, shall be interconnected and tested to ensure the system operates as specified. All analog and discrete input/output points not interconnected at this time shall be simulated to ensure proper operation of all alarms, monitoring devices / functions and control devices/functions. B. The UFT shall be performed by the PICS and the PICS's facility for a minimum period of 10 days including the continuous operation of the system test described below. C. During the tests all digital system hardware and software shall have operated continuously for five (5) days without a failure to verify the system is capable of continuous operation. The unwitnessed test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of the FAT. 3.04 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. Prior to startup and the FDT, the entire system shall be certified, inspected, tested and documented that it is ready for operation. B. The ORT will be a joint test by the PICS, General Contractor, Engineer and other related subcontractors and shall be conducted at the Owners facility. C. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated and adjusted on a loop -by -loop and component -by - component basis by the PICS and PICS to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these Specifications. 1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer approved forms and check lists. a. Project Name 17000-21 b. Loop Number c. Tag Number for each component d. Signoffs for each component • Tag/identification • Installation • Termination • Calibration/adjustment e. Signoffs for the loop • Panel interface terminations • VO interface terminations • I/O signal operation • Total loop operation f. Space for comments 2. Each active analog transmitter and each analog I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces for data entry and a space for signoff by the PICS, PICS and Engineer: a. Project Name b. Loop Number c. Tag Number for each transmitter or I/O module d. Manufacturer e. Model and serial number f. Summary of functional requirements: • Indicators and Recorders: Scale and chart ranges • Transmitters and Converters: Scale and chart ranges • Computing Elements: Function and Result • Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) and control modes (PID) • Switching Elements: Unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), preset (auto/manual) • 1/0 Modules: Input or output g. Calibrations: • Analog devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, 90 and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. • Discrete devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points, rising and falling. • Controller: Mode settings and tuning parameters (PID) • 1/0 Modules: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, 90 and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. 17000-22 h. Signoffs for each transmitter or I/O module i. Space for comments D. The General Contractor shall require the PICS to maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the Engineer/Owner at any time. E. The inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer shall review and initial all Loop Status Sheets and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon completion of the ORT. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected. 3.05 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Prior to startup and the SAT, the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. B. The FDT will be a joint test by the PICS, General Contractor, Engineer, Owner and other related subcontractors and shall be conducted at the Owners facility. C. Once the facility has been started up and is operating, a witnessed FDT shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with these Specifications. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph -by -paragraph, loop -by -loop and site -by -site basis. D. Loop -specific and non -loop -specific tests shall be the same as specified under FDT except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functionality demonstrated. E. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided for during the factory tests shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite before and during the tests. In addition, one (1) copy of all O&M Manuals shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during the testing. F. The system shall operate for 100 continuous hours without failure before the test shall be considered successful. G. Demonstrate communication failure and recovery. H. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. I. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a PLC. J. Demonstrate the procedure for backing up the computer system including the workstations and PLCs; reload using a backup; and completely restore a workstation and PLC from a backup. ( 3.06 30 -DAY ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. After completion of the ORT and FDT test, the entire system shall be operated for a period of 30 consecutive days, under conditions of full plant process operation, without a single non -field repairable malfunction. 17000-23 B. The SAT will be a joint test by the PICS, Contractor, Engineer, Owner and other related subcontractors and shall be conducted at the Owners facility. C. During the test, plant operating, Engineering, PICS personnel shall be present as required. For this test, the PICS are expected to provide personnel who have intimate knowledge of the system hardware. D. While the test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of the system. Only certified plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with the actual water production process. E. Any malfunction during the tests shall be analyzed and corrected by the responsible party immediately. The Engineer/Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test. F. During the 30 consecutive day test period, any malfunction which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by the responsible party, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered a non -field -repairable malfunction. G. Upon completion of a non -field -repairable malfunction, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. H. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 95 percent (95%) during this test period. Availability shall be defined as: Availability = [(Total Testing Time) — (Down Time)] / Total Testing Time Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or back-up power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test time above. Down times due to process equipment failures or other factors beyond the control of PICS or PICS shall not contribute to the availability test time above. K. Upon successful completion of the SAT and subsequent review and approval by the Engineer of the complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete, and a one-year warranty period shall commence. 3.07 TRAINING A. General 1. The cost of training programs for the Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract price. Where practical, the training and instruction shall be directly related to the system being applied. 2. Training shall be conducted on site at the Owner's facility. All Technicians, Operators, Engineers and Managers of the Owner shall require training on the system. The training courses shall address operation, 17000-24 maintenance and troubleshooting of the system provided. The courses shall be designed specifically for the type of personnel attending, such as Operators, Engineers, etc. 4. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner. Shift training shall be used where required by the Owner's operations schedule. 5. Provide detailed training manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. 6. The trainer shall make use of teaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After the training services, all training materials shall be delivered to the Owner. 7. The Owner reserves the right to videotape all training sessions. All training tapes shall become the sole property of the Owner. B. Field Training (provided by PICS) 1. Field and Panel Instruments a. Provide training for the Owner's personnel in the operation, configuration, programming, installation and maintenance of the field and panel -mounted instrumentation system supplied. b. This training shall be conducted no more than one (1) month before the FDT. c. Training shall consist of classroom and hands-on instruction utilizing the Owner's system. d. The following training shall be provided, as a minimum: (1.) Training in standard hardware maintenance. (2.) Specific training for the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged connected and set up for this Contract. (3.) Test, adjustment and calibration procedures (4.) Troubleshooting and diagnostics (5.) Periodic maintenance **END OF SECTION** 17000-25 (� SECTION 17010 APPLICATION ENGINEERING SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The General Provisions of Section 17000 shall apply to this section. B. All work in this Section shall be the product of the PICS. Sub -suppliers and/or manufacturers may provide components, and/or services to the PICS, but the final product shall conform to this specification and shall be the sole responsibility of the PICS. C. The PICS shall provide all applications programming and services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system. The PICS shall coordinate the control system for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these Specifications and with related existing equipment. D. Auxiliary and accessory programming structures necessary for system operation or performance shall be included whether or not they are specified or shown on the Contract Drawings. E. All equipment shall be controlled in full conformity with the Specifications, Drawings, engineering data, instructions and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. F. The PICS shall coordinate and schedule all testing procedures with the General Contractor. G. The PICS shall be responsible for the integration of new well pump stations into the North County Water Treatment Plant's SCADA system. The Owner is currently using Wonderware as their HMI software. The PICS shall make the necessary modifications to the software to incorporate these well pump stations into the SCADA system as specified and in coordination with the existing system philosophy. It is the responsibility of the PICS to become familiar with the existing WTP SCADA system in order to provide necessary services to properly integrate the wells into the system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 17000 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 17000 B. Submittals listed below shall be provided, as a minimum. Each submittal must be complete in order to be reviewed by the Engineer. 17010-1 1. Preliminary Graphics Submittal 2. Process Control Strategy, Graphic Screen and Reports Submittal 3. Testing - Refer to Section 17000 4. Training - Refer to Section 17000. 5. O&M Manuals - Refer to Section 17000. C. Submittal Descriptions 1. Preliminary Graphics Submittal a. The preliminary graphics submittal be reviewed at the first coordination meeting and shall include the following: (1.) Standard symbols (2.) Standard color conventions to be used for pumps, valves, filters, pipe colors, equipment on and off, alarm status colors, etc. (3.) Sample HMI graphic displays (4.) Sample equipment interface popup displays (5.) Alarm display descriptions (6.) Alarm acknowledge descriptions 2. Process Control Strategy, Graphic Screen and Reports a. The process control strategies shall be developed in a functional block (logic) diagram presentation based on information from the Specifications. Included with each diagram shall be: (1.) A short narrative of the control strategy (2.) Any assumptions made in developing the program (3.) 1/0 database list showing all field inputs and outputs (Al, AO, DI, DO) associated with the control strategy (4.) Cross-reference list of all 1/0 showing to which 1/0 modules or software modules they are linked (5.) List of all operator inputs or outputs to and from the control strategy. (6.) Specific HMI graphic displays and reports related to the strategy shall be illustrated, defined and formatted. 17010-2 (7.) A narrative of the operation of any panels shall be described as it relates to the strategy. (8.) A narrative of failure contingencies shall be described in detail b. This submittal shall cover any associated program (function block diagrams, script language, etc.) developed under this Contract required to implement the control strategy specified. c. The annotated program shall be submitted in 8-1/2 inch by 11 -inch format and on diskette or CDs for all logic developed. Annotation shall be 3 lines of 6 characters each for every logic contact. In addition, each network or rung shall be annotated so that a non- technical person can read and easily comprehend what control function the rung or network is performing. d. This submittal shall also include PLC I/O configuration tables, 1/0 reference usage table, complete cross-reference to specific rung used of all inputs, outputs, internal coils, data registers and special purpose coils. In addition, any special switch settings or hardware configuration requirements such as communications port configurations shall be described in detail and submitted. e. This submittal shall cover the specific control strategies as well as the semifinal details of the reports and process graphic displays. This submittal shall also include what appears on each display and what calculations are required to support them. f. Submitted process graphic displays shall be no less than 8-1/2 inches by 11 -inches and in full high-resolution color. g. Each system point shall have the capability of being stored historically for an indefinite period of time and shall be capable of being changed. Each system point's raw value shall be available for trending. h. A complete list of all signals to be collected for long-term historical information shall be provided. This listing shall include frequency of data sampling and duration for which the data shall be immediately accessible. 1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Refer to Section 17000 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Section' 17000 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 17010-3 A. Refer to Section 17000 1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Section 17000 B. The PICS is responsible for providing all applications programming and configuration services to accomplish the control and monitoring functions described in the Specifications and Contract Drawings. The PICS shall provide all programming functions including, but not limited to, any control strategies and communications specified. The PICS shall also provide all application programming and configuration services necessary to produce the HMI graphic displays, reports, trends, historical archive, etc. as described in the Specifications and Contract Drawings. C. PICS shall develop and provide customized graphic displays (not including standard trends, pop-up windows, HMI supplied displays, etc.) to illustrate the addition to the plant process control system. All graphic displays shall be designed by the PICS utilizing the HMI software and shall be approved by the Owner. These displays shall be prepared and submitted for review at the second coordination meeting. The displays shall represent all process control systems and all associated equipment, pumps, valves, gates, feed systems, filters and auxiliary systems. The PICS shall establish a consistent process control i/ philosophy, standard graphical layout and standard graphical symbolic representation for all displays. The PICS shall provide the following list of displays as a minimum: • Flow and Level Summary • Alarms • Trends • Historical Data • Diagnostics • Well Pump Station(s) Control and Monitoring D. PICS shall develop and provide customized reports for the additions to the plant process control system in addition to those specified below. Exact report formats and data to be reported shall be determined by the Owner. All reports shall be configured and designed by the PICS and shall be prepared using Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Access software and shall be approved by the Owner. These reports shall be prepared and submitted for review at the second coordination meeting. 1.08 PROGRAMMING AND CONFIGURATION GUIDELINES AND DELIVERABLES A. Real Variables Processing 1. Real variables shall represent process data for which there are analog signal ((� inputs to the system. The system shall sample each of these input signals at the selected scan frequency and perform the proper conversions and scaling to obtain the instantaneous engineering values. These values shall be used to 17010-4 update real-time data on HMI displays, check for alarm conditions and store for use in historical files. 2. The instantaneous values of all variable data shall be displayed on the appropriate HMI display and shall be added to the historical database whenever the present value exceeds a preprogrammed compression dead band. The compression dead band will be field adjusted by the PICS to provide for maximum storage utilization. 3. Variables such as rate of flow shall have their instantaneous values integrated with respect to time and their quantities totaled before archiving. 4. Alarm conditions shall be stored in a separate historical file. The alarm storage format shall be an alarm description, true time of occurrence, and tag number. B. HMI Graphic Displays I. All displays shall contain and continuously update the displayed process variables, date and time of day. All process values shall be displayed in engineering units. All displays shall incorporate references to both instrumentation tag numbers and plant equipment numbers. 2. The HMI displays shall make maximum use of the colors available. Color for status such as open/close, start/stop shall be the same as the indicators �J used on the existing process control system. 3. The HMI displays shall be interlinked for easy and direct operator call up. They shall be available for viewing be either entering the display name (via keyboard) or via a "hot spot" on the current display screen (mouse driven cursor movement and pick button). All displays shall have "hot spots' for, at a minimum, the Alarm Summary display, Plant Overview Menu display and the Summary Menu display. 4. The system shall allow the operator to manually control the status of pumps, valves, etc. via either keyboard entry or the currently displayed graphic display. The status change shall require a secondary acknowledgement (action confirmation) by the operator before the command is processed. The acknowledgement shall be in the form of an assigned password. 5. Unless specifically noted, all timers, set points, alarm actuation levels, etc. shall be operator adjustable from the HMI. 6. Menu displays shall be provided as a guide to the available display options. The menu displays shall be a complete and logical listing of the names and number of all displays. 7. Graphic displays shall depict basic process schematic diagrams with representative symbols for pumps, tanks, etc. combined with real time process variables or conditions. The equipment represented on the display shall be suitably titled for identity. The displays shall be dynamic (i.e., symbols for a pump shall change color indicating run or stop or alarm, the volume of tanks shall be indicated by varying the height of the interior color 17010-5 of the tank symbol, etc.). Its name and tag number shall identify the data on the display. All of the current data in the database shall be available for graphic displays. It shall be possible to easily modify an existing display or generate a new display. All process variables shall be displayed on their associated display (s) in engineering units. The Engineer/Owner shall approve color standards for the equipment symbols, process piping, etc. Analog trend displays shall display the value of assigned points versus time. The intent is to depict the type of plot produced on an analog recorder on the HMI display. Each point shall be trended in a different color. Each of the assigned points shall have a point identification number, point name, point description, current value and instrument range display in the color used for its trend. The time period shall be selected and be either current or historical. The time period selected and time and date of start shall be displayed. The values displayed on a historical trend shall consist of the stored values for each variable trended. Current trends shall be updated at the scan frequency of the variable. A trend display shall not be considered a graphic display. 9. Alarm summary displays shall consist of all points currently in alarm and shall include the tag number, description, true time of occurrence and present status, (high, low, normal, etc.). The alarm summary shall identify alarm points by severity (event, attention, caution and urgent) by utilizing distinct colors for each severity category. The severity classification shall be easily changeable by the Owner. 10. System status displays shall summarize the error status of all system devices capable of reporting errors to the CPU (i.e., printers, communication devices, etc.). The display shall indicate if an error is detected or a failure occurs. It shall also allow assignment of those items capable of acting as back up to other devices. These displays shall be used primarily for maintenance purposes. 11. Single point configuration / status displays shall be of the HMI software manufacturer's standard format. C. Alarm / Equipment Status Reporting The alarm log shall display all alarms as they occur. The alarm message shall include the time occurrence, tag name, tag number and whether it is a low, high or failure alarm. When the point in alarm returns to normal, the time, point identification number and "return to normal" shall be displayed. All reports shall include the plant equipment number of the associated device. 2. Equipment status shall be logged whenever a change in status occurs (i.e., start, stop). The status monitoring shall be capable of being disabled and/or suppressed from the operator workstation. The equipment status log shall include the time, equipment name, tag number and the particular change in status. The status log shall include the operator's password if the change was generated by operator personnel. 3. All alarms and events shall be displayed on the display and archived. No alarm or event shall be printed automatically; however, alarms and events 17010-6 shall be available for printing on demand for operator -specified time periods. Alarm information shall consist of point identification number, point name, time of occurrence and type and priority of alarm. 4. All alarms shall be placed in a separate historical file and be easily accessible for use as needed. The PICS shall maintain ninety (90) days of "as logged" raw data and twelve (12) months of partially compressed raw data on the server. The PICS shall recommend the number of additional days or month's data may be retained based on the capacity of the new system. 5. The equipment and point status summary report shall log the status of all points in the system, including contact inputs, real variables with analog inputs and calculated variables. When required this printout will be initiated manually and shall consist of the tag number, tag name and its current status (i.e., Running, Off, High, Low, Active, Disabled, On -scan, Off -scan, etc.). 6. The summary printout shall summarize all alarms for the previous 24-hour period. Normally, this printout shall be initiated manually but provision shall be made so that it may be initiated automatically every day, if desired. The printout shall be generated on-line from stored data. This printout shall consist of all data in the initial alarm occurrence and return to normal, as specified. 7. The current alarm summary printout shall print all points currently in alarm. ' This printout shall be initiated manually, as required. The printout shall be generated on-line from stored data. This printout shall consist of all points currently in alarm. 8. The capability shall be provided to sort both daily and current alarm summary reports by operator defined groups. (i.e., print all power failure alarms, etc.). 9. The suppressed alarm summary printout shall summarize those points that are still actively scanned, but whose alarm messages have been suppressed. This printout shall be initiated manually, as required, be generated from stored data on the server and shall consist of the point identification number and the point name. D. Historical Data Management The following features shall be provided for processing and storage of system historical data: 1. Data Processing and Storage. The real time instantaneous values shall be stored in a historical log file on the server. 2. Data Archiving. Historical data shall be automatically alarmed and operator initiated to a control server on a weekly basis. Historical data, laboratory data, administrative data and monthly administrative and operational reports shall be automatically alarmed and operator initiated to a control server on a monthly basis. Decompression routines shall also be stored on the control server. The intent is to ensure that a long-term record of historical information is available to support future studies, etc. 17010-7 3. Each system point (analog or digital, real or pseudo) shall have the capability of being historically logged. A point shall have the capability of being deleted from the historical log at any time. It shall be easy to add or delete system points using minimal keystrokes. 4. Data Correction. Historic data shall be manually modifiable by personnel with appropriate security levels. Such data shall be differentiated from actual monitored values on reports, in the database and in trends. 5. Displays used for historical analysis (such as historical trends, alarms/events summary, etc.) shall have similar capabilities to those used for real time data review. The source of data shall be the HMI's database. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 17000 1.10 FINAL DOCUMENTATION A. Refer to Section 17000 PART 2 - PRODUCTS NONE IN THIS SECTION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17000 3.02 UN -WITNESSED FACTORY TEST (UFT) A. Refer to Section 17000 3.03 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. Refer to Section 17000 3.04 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Refer to Section 17000 3.05 30 -DAY ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. Refer to Section 17000 3.06 TRAINING 17010-8 `\ A. Refer to Section 17000 3.07 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES A. Refer to Section 17000 3.08 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND DETAILS A. Refer to Section 17000 **END OF SECTION** 17010-9 (� SECTION 17015 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS (RTU) (Well Pump Control Panel) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The General Provisions of Section 17000 shall apply to this section. B. The RTU manufacturer shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide, complete and ready for operation, the Remote Terminal Units (RTUs) at the well sites as specified. C. All work in this Section shall be the product of the Process Instrumentation and Control Supplier (PICS). Sub -suppliers and/or manufacturers may provide components, and/or services to the PICS, but the final product shall conform to this Specification and shall be the sole responsibility of the PICS. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Specification Sections 17000, 17010 and 17035. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 B. The PICS shall investigate the existing control and programming at the North County Water Treatment Plant (WTP). The PICS shall make modifications to this existing programming and HMI as needed to integrate the well system. This existing system was provided by others under a different contract. However, it r was the intent of that contract to incorporate these wells into the control scheme as described here. 17015-1 L) C. The PICS shall integrate the wells into the existing SCADA system based on the following description of operation: There shall be three modes of operation; Remote -Automatic, Remote -Manual and Local -Manual. In the Remote -Automatic Mode, the wells are rotated in terms of use. The H -O -A switch for the pump motor starter must be in automatic for automatic operation. Rotation of pumps is controlled (started or stopped) at the WTP depending on the treatment skid selected by the WTP control system. The solid state starter at each well site will have a hand -off -automatic selector switch. In the Remote -Manual Mode, a well can be remote started or stopped by operations staff at the WTP or at the local OIT display. The H -O -A switch for the pump motor starter must be in automatic for remote manual operation. This operation must be interlocked with the appropriate skid controls to sustain flow rates through the treatment skids. This function should be locked out if a skid(s) are not available for additional flows into the plant by manually starting a well. The use of the local OIT shall be monitored by the WTP HMI and displayed to notify the WTP of all local operations. In the Local -Manual Mode, a well can be locally started or stopped by placing the H -O -A switch in the hand position and pushing the local start or stop button at the motor starter. The following shall be the sequence of operation in any mode of starting a well pump: The RTU calls for the well pump to start or has an input that the well pump starter has called for the pump to run in manual. The RTU shall output to open the blowoff line using a solenoid controlled valve, where the first 30 seconds (operator selectable value) of water flows out and onto the ground. After this period of time expires, the blowoff line begins to close using the control valve and the discharge begins to open using a similar control valve with solenoid control pilot. These valves then travel to fully closed (blowoff) and fully opened (discharge). Valve position shall be monitored by the RTU. Flow rate to the WTP is monitored using in inline turbine meter and well level is monitored using a level transmitter. Water level, pressure, flow metering, position of valves, on/off signals and alarms are all sent back to the WTP via the fiber optic Ethernet network and shown locally using the HMI and OIT. When the operator/WTP controls initiate a pump shut down or if the pump shuts down via the H -O -A or a failure or alarm event, the discharge valve closes and the pump shuts off. The discharge valve should always be closed or closing when there is any initiation of pump shutdown. There is a high pressure switch located on the discharge side of the well pump. High pressure alarm shall be sent via the RTU to the WTP. The RTU shall also monitor the pump motor starter for failure and report alarms associated with fail or fault signals. The RTU shall also monitor pump flow rates during run cycles of the pump(s). The RTU shall provide an alarm to indicate low flow and high flow rates to the WTP. These selectable values shall be established by the PICS and verified by the Engineer. Emergency Shutdown (Loss of Power at WTP) initiated by shutdown logic shall stop all wells even, if well still has power. The wells receive their emergency power from the WTP. If wells lose power, skids at the WTP shall shut down automatically (emergency stop). If any one well loses power, the associated (selected) skid will shut down immediately. No automatic restart of wells or skids under emergency shutdown. 17015-2 D. Each RTU system shall have an initial installed capacity of I/O as shown on the Drawings and plus a minimum of 20 percent installed spares. All installed action and spare I/O points shall be wired and terminated to terminal strips. Each RTU system provided shall be sized for an additional 20 percent minimum I/O expansion slots within the panel that it's installed. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 1.09 SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT A. Provide spare parts and test equipment as follows: 1. RTU systems including the following: a. Chassis b. Power Supply c. Central Processing Unit (CPU) d. Communications Module e. I/O Cards: One of each type used. 2. I/O cards: 10 percent of each type used, but no less than one of each type. B. All spare parts shall be packed in a manner suitable for long-term storage and shall be adequately protected against corrosion, humidity and temperature. C. Program Development Software 1. Provide two (2) licenses of the RTU program development software. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 1.11 FINAL DOCUMENTATION A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT (RTU) A. Hardware 1. Major hardware components of the RTU system shall include: a. Central Processing Unit (CPU) b. Communications Equipment 17015-3 c. Input / Output Modules (1/0) d. Power Supply and Chassis e. Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) 2. General a. The RTUs shall communicate between the operator workstations at the water plant control room console and field -mounted instrumentation, valves and pump controllers. Communications protocol shall be completely transparent to plant operators in the control room. The RTU shall be an intelligent microprocessor based device that can collect data and process control functions. Communications between RTUs and the operator workstations shall utilize Ethernet/IP. The RTU shall reside directly on the Ethernet communication network and communications shall be via an RTU chassis mounted Ethernet communications module, as manufactured by the PLC manufacturer. b. All components of the RTU system shall be normally recognized industry standards and regularly sold for industrial applications. The RTU manufacturer shall assemble all components of the RTU system in structurally sound housings. All connecting cables, switches and other operator -controlled devices shall be constructed so as to withstand, without damage, all normal use and handling. c. Electrical supply voltage to the RTU shall be 115 VAC +/- 15%, 48 — 63 Hz. RTU system power supplies shall be fused for overload protection. d. The RTU shall be capable of stand-alone operation in the event of failure of the communications link to the operator workstations. e. The RTU shall be a digital solid-state logic system capable of performing the same functions as conventional relays, timers, counters, math functions, controllers, etc. f. The RTU system shall be of modular plug-in design and shall consist of a CPU, memory, I/O cards, racks, power supplies, interconnecting cables, communication lines and other items as necessary to meet the functional requirements of the specification. All components of the RTU system shall be marketed and supported by one RTU manufacturer. All necessary cable shall be provided. g. All products shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with recognized industrial standards. All components shall have corrosion protection and shall have UL, CSA and FM approval. The RTU subsystems shall be approved for and adhere to the following agency and environmental specifications: 1. Vibration - 3.5 mm Peak -to -Peak, 5-9 Hz: LOG, 9-150 Hz. The methods of testing are to be based upon IEC 68-2-6 and JIS C 0911 standards for vibration. The system shall be operational during and after testing. 2. Shock — 15G, 11 msec. The methods of testing are to be based upon IEC 68-2-27 and JIS C 0912 standards for shock. The system shall be operational during and after testing. 17015-4 3. Temperature — All RTU hardware shall operate at an ambient temperature of 0 to 60° C, with an ambient temperature rating for storage of —40 to +850 C. 4. Relative Humidity — All RTU hardware shall function continuously in the relative humidity range of 5% to 95% with no condensation. 5. Noise Immunity — All RTU hardware shall be designed and tested to operate in a high electrical noise environment of an industrial plant as governed by the following regulations: EEE 472, IEC 801, MILSTD 46113, IEC 255-4, NEMA ICS 2-230.40 and ANSUIEEE C -37.90A-1978. h. The RTU manufacturer shall provide operating instruction manuals with adequate information pertaining to the following: 1. System specifications 2. Electrical power requirements 3. Application considerations 4. Assembly and installation procedures 5. Power up procedures 6. Troubleshooting procedures 7. Programming procedures 8. Internal fault diagnostics 9. Shut down procedures 10. Recommended spare parts list i. The RTU manufacturer shall utilize a network of field sales and support personnel located in major cities throughout the United States. It shall also utilize a field service department with experienced representatives stationed in major cities with the capability to provide telephone consultation, prompt on-site service and field replacement stock. j. The RTU manufacturer shall provide product application assistance by trained and experienced engineers to assist the Owner with program and system development through telephone consultation and on-site checkout, debug and start-up assistance. k. The RTU manufacturer shall have the capacity to conduct on-site training programs. It shall also have the capacity to provide videotape -training courses for operation and maintenance of RTUs. 1. Modules are defined herein as devices, which plug into a chassis and are keyed to allow installation in only one direction. The design must prohibit upside down insertion of the modules as well as safeguard against the insertion of a module into a wrong slot. m. In a single chassis system, all system and signal power to the CPU and support modules shall be distributed on a single motherboard or backplane. Interconnecting wiring between modules via plug - terminated jumpers shall not be acceptable. 17015-5 LIX n. All system modules on the main or expansion chassis shall be designed to provide free air flow convection .cooling. Heat sinks shall be used to dissipate component heat. Internal fans shall not be permitted. o. The RTU manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacturing and servicing of RTUs and all corresponding components. p. The RTU manufacturer shall have a fully operational quality assurance and control program in place and shall comply with ISO9001 standards for "Quality Systems — Model for Quality Assurance in Design, Development, Production, Installation and Servicing". q. The RTU manufacturer or its authorized representative shall provide complete technical support for all of its products. r. All major assemblies and sub-assemblies, circuit boards, components and modules shall be identified using permanent labels or markers, each of which indicates the manufacturer's catalog number and a product manufacturing date code. s. The RTU. system shall use the latest PLC based system as manufactured by Allen-Bradley to meet this specification and coordinate with the existing PLC 5/40 system at the WTP. 3. Central Processing Unit (CPU) a. General The CPU shall be as a minimum a 16-bit microprocessor that provides system timing and is responsible for scheduling I/O updates. It shall execute user -developed relay ladder logic programs, communicate with intelligent 1/0 modules and perform on-line diagnostics. The CPU shall consist of a single module, which solves application logic, stores the application program, stores numerical values related to the application processes and logic and interfaces to the 1/0. 2. The CPU shall sample all the discrete and analog inputs and outputs including internal coils and registers and service special function modules on every scan. The CPU shall process the I/O with user programs stored, in memory, then control the outputs based on the results of the logic operation. The CPU shall execute the user program by rapidly scanning the program stored in user memory. Both logic and data word functions are executed in the order they appear in the user program. As each rung of logic is solved, the results shall be available to any following rungs. The CPU shall have an instruction to allow a decrease in scan time by skipping over parts of the program. The CPU shall allow the RTU program to be broken into ladder logic subroutines that execute only when called. The RTU shall allow analog and discrete points to be updated immediately within the scan as the analog or discrete value is called in the ladder logic program. 17015-6 3. The CPU shall be a single printed circuit board utilizing surface mount technology. The CPU shall plug directly into the backplane and shall not require additional wiring to the backplane, power supply or the I/O. 4. The CPU shall support floating point without the need of a co -processor. 5. The CPU shall be supplied with a battery -backed time of day clock and calendar. 6. The CPU family shall allow for user program transportability from one CPU model to another. b. Capacity 1. The CPU I/O capacity shall be 8,192 bits in and 8,192 bits out, minimum. 2. The processing of a typical logic program consisting of a mix of analog and digital commands shall not exceed 1.4 milliseconds for 1,024 instructions. c. Diagnostics 1. The CPU shall perform on-line diagnostics that monitor the internal operation of the RTU. If a failure is detected, the CPU shall initiate system shutdown and fail -over if a failure occurs. The following at a minimum shall be monitored: a. Memory failure b. Memory battery low c. CPU over temperature and general fault d. Communications port failure e. Scan time over run f. I/O failure g. Analog or special function I/O module failure 2. All diagnostic information shall be accessible at the programming terminal, which attaches at the CPU. A diagnostic CRT page shall provide information, which identifies the nature of the fault, the absolute memory or I/O address of the fault, and the date and time of occurrence of the fault. 3. All diagnostic information shall be accessible to the host communications interface. 4. All diagnostic information shall be accessible to the ladder program or other executing software. 5. The CPU shall have LED indicators to show status such as RTU READY, PROGRAM RUN and BATTERY GOOD. If any of the above mentioned failure conditions occur, provide an internal RTU diagnostic alarm contact output. The CPU within the system shall perform internal diagnostic checking and give visual indication to the user by 17015-7 illuminating a "green" indicator when no fault is detected and a "red" indicator when a fault is detected. d. Programming Environment 1. The CPU shall be capable of being programmed by an external computer workstation via either a serial communication port on the CPU, or via optional Ethernet communications. Serial programming shall be possible without the use of a workstation interface board. 2. The programming device shall have access to the application program, the system configuration, all registers, I/0, system fault status, I/O override and system diagnostic relays. 3. Application programs may be loaded or stored while the CPU is running with minimal impact on the scan time. 4. if contacts or entire rungs are intentionally deleted from an existing logic program, the remaining program shall be automatically repositioned to fill this void. Whenever contacts or entire rungs are intentionally inserted into an existing program, the original program shall automatically be repositioned to accommodate the enlarged program. 5. The number of times a normally open (N.O.) and/or normally closed (N.C.) contact of an internal output can be programmed shall be limited only by the memory capacity to store these instructions. 6. The CPU shall support multiple industry standard IEC 1131- 3 programming languages. As a minimum, ladder diagram, structured text and Sequential Function Chart (SFC) programming shall be provided. All hardware and software necessary to program the CPU in a mode other than standard ladder logic shall be supplied. e. Memory: The CPU shall contain the CMOS RAM program memory. The memory shall be a battery backup system capable of retaining all memory for a minimum of three months under load and shall require no external or special vents. The backup battery shall be capable of being replaced without interruption of memory integrity. 2. A visual indication of backup battery status shall be provided. In the event of low battery voltage, a visual indication and a low battery output alarm contact (for remote alarm) actuation shall be provided before battery failure. 3. The program memory shall be sized, as required, to implement the functions specified plus a minimum of 10 words (16 bit) for each I/O provided as spare, but not less than 48K bytes. The entire program memory shall be available for user program storage. Scratch pad or 17015-8 "housekeeping" programs shall not be counted in memory size rating. 4. The RTU CPU memory shall consist of the following functional types of memory: a. Ladder logic program memory b. Constant data memory c. Variable data memory d. Input / output memory e. CPU status data memory f. 1/0 word memory g. User memory for compiled programs 5. Various memory combinations up to the maximum limits shall be software configurable between logic and data storage, to more closely match the application requirements. f. Instruction Set: 1. The RTU CPU shall be capable of performing the same functions as a conventional relay logic system, including relays, timers, counters and shift registers. The CPU shall also be capable or performing high-level instructions including data word functions such as: a. Four -Function Math: The CPU shall be capable of performing addition, subtraction, multiplication and division on integer numbers. b. Compare Function: The CPU shall perform the compare function that compares two integers for less than, equal to, greater than and not equal to. The programming function shall energize when true and de -energize when false. c. Square Root Function: The CPU shall be capable of taking the square root of a positive integer. d. Move Function: The CPU shall be able to move an integer value from one memory location to another memory location. e. Other data word capabilities shall include data file compare with pointer, file (block) move, word rotate, bit set, pick and clear. 2. The RTU CPU shall perform all the functions of the conventional three -mode (PID) analog controller. The CPU shall be able to process up to 64 PID loops with the processing time of each controller selectable. Each PID loop shall incorporate an anti -windup algorithm on reset. 3. The system shall have the capability to address software timers and software counters in any combination and quantity up to the limit of available memory. The CPU shall 17015-9 handle all management of these instructions into memory. Instructions shall permit programming timers in the "ON" or "OFF" delay modes. Timer programming shall also include the capability to interrupt timing without resetting the timers. Counters shall be programmable using up -increment and down -increment. 4. Timer instructions shall include selectable time bases in increments of 1.0 second and 10 milliseconds. The timing range of each timer shall be from 0 to 32,767 increments as a minimum. It shall be possible to program and display separately the timer's preset and accumulated values. 5. When using modules such as analog where multiple channels are terminated on one module, it shall be possible to transfer the status of all channels to the CPU upon execution of one program instruction. This instruction shall be bi-directional to include data transfer from the CPU to the module or from the module to the CPU. 6. Instructions shall be provided for grouping contiguous 16 bit data words into a file. The system shall address up to 1,000 files with up to 1,000 words per file. File manipulation instructions such as high speed "file copy" and "file fill", "file to file" move, "element to file" move, "file to element" move and "first in -first out" shall be supported by the system. The four function math instructions and instructions for performing "logical OR", "logical AND", "exclusive OR" and comparison instructions such as "less than", "greater than" and "equal to" shall be included within the system. All instructions shall execute on either single word or files. 7. The system shall contain instructions, which will construct asynchronous and synchronous 16-bit word shift registers. Additional instructions shall be provided to construct synchronous bit shift registers. S. The RTU shall have a jump instruction, which will allow the programmer to jump over portions of the user program to a portion marked by a matching label instruction. 9. It shall be a function of the CPU to automatically manage all data types. 10. In applications requiring repeatable logic runs it shall be possible to place such rungs in a subroutine section. Instructions, which call the subroutine and return to the main program, shall be included within the system. It shall be possible to program several subroutines and define each subroutine by a unique program file designator. The processor shall support nesting of subroutines up to seven levels deep. The program format as displayed on the CRT shall clearly define the main program and all subroutines. It shall be possible to pass selected values (parameters) to a subroutine before its execution. 17015-10 11. The program format shall display all instructions on a CRT programming panel with appropriate mnemonics to define all data entered by the programmer. The system shall be capable of providing a "HELP" instruction, which when called by the programmer will display on the CRT a list of instructions and all data and keystrokes required to enter an instruction into the system memory. 12. The system shall have the capability to enter rung comments above ladder logic rungs. These comments may be entered at the same time the ladder logic is entered. 13. The system shall have the capability to enter address comments and symbols. These entities may be entered at the same time the ladder logic is entered. 14. A means to program a fault recovery routine shall exist. When a major system fault occurs in the system, the fault recovery routine shall be executed and then the system shall determine if the fault has been eliminated. If the fault is eliminated, program execution resumes. If the fault still exists, the system will shut down. A user shall have the option to either resume operation or to shut down upon fault detection. 15. An interrupt routine shall be programmable such that the routine shall be executed regularly. The interval at which the routine is executed shall be user-specified in the range of 1 to 65,535 milliseconds. 16. The CPU shall support indexed and indirect addressing of inputs and outputs, along with all data table words (integer, binary, floating point, timers and counters) for the software instruction set. 17. Trigonometric instructions supported must include Sine, Cosine, Tangent, Inverse Sine, Inverse Cosine, and Inverse Tangent. These instructions must fully support floating- point math. 18. Additional floating point instructions supported must include Log 10, Natural Log and Exponential. 19. It shall be possible to complete complex, combined calculations in a single instruction, such as flow totalizing or equations of the format ((A+((B-C)*D))/E). 20. File function instructions supported shall also include Sort, Average, Square Root and Standard Deviation. 21. The processor instruction set shall provide support for a variety of ASCII string manipulation instructions such as search, concentration, extraction, compare and to/from integer conversion. 22. The processor shall support ladder functions providing ASCII port control such as read, write, handshake line control, buffer examination, etc. 17015-11 23. An interrupt routine shall be programmable such that the routines shall be executed based upon the input condition of one of sixteen discrete hardware inputs in the processor chassis. The routine will be executed within two milliseconds of the detection of the input signal. 24. It shall be possible to divide user logic into multiple program blocks (structured programming). g. Communication Ports: 1. The CPU shall have at least three built-in communication ports for programming, operator interface and remote 1/0 operations. 2. The CPU shall automatically sample and update all local and remote I/O modules every scan cycle of the CPU. 4. Input / Output Modules (I/O): a. General: 1. The I/O count and type has been determined by the Engineer and includes an allowance for active spares as noted below. 2. Each I/O system per location shall include 20 percent (minimum of 4 for each type) active input and output points (both DI, DO and Al, AO) for future use. The spares shall be the same type of 1/0 module as the active I/O modules and shall be wired down to the terminal strip. 3. Minimum isolation between input/output and logic voltage shall be 2,500v RMS per NEMA standards via opto- isolation. 4. All outputs shall have field replaceable fuse protection and blown fuse indicators. 5. I/O modules shall be plug-in mounted to the 1/0 mounting bases. 1/0 modules shall be designed to allow insertion at any point on the mounting base. 6. Field wiring terminal blocks shall be pull a part type if mounted on the I/O modules or mounted on the 1/0 mounting base to allow I/O module replacement without disconnecting of the field wiring. All field wiring terminal blocks shall be 300V minimum NEMA rated and accommodate no less than two (2) # 14 gauge wires. 7. 1/0 modules shall comply with the following schedule unless noted otherwise: a. Analog input modules shall be 4-20mA and shall have a maximum of eight (8) isolated differential channels per module. Common mode input protection of 30 volts DC minimum shall be provided. Input signal conversion shall be a minimum of 14 -bit resolution. 17015-12 b. Analog output modules shall be 4-20mA and shall have a maximum of eight (8) isolated differential channels per module. Output load capability shall be 750 ohms minimum for each output. Accuracy shall be 0.1 percent of full-scale output span. Analog output modules shall be selectable on a point per point basis to either hold the last state or to return to zero upon reset or stop of the RTU. c. Discrete input modules shall be 24 VDC and shall have a maximum of sixteen (16) circuits per module. Inputs shall be optically isolated (channel -to - channel) to protect bus circuits from transients and surges. Isolation resistance shall be 1000 ohms minimum at 300 VDC between any set of terminals and any other set or earth ground. Light emitting diodes shall be provided adjacent to each pair of output terminals for on status indication. d. Discrete output modules shall be 24 VDC and shall have a maximum of sixteen (16) circuits per module. Outputs shall be optically isolated (channel -to - channel) to protect bus circuits from transients and surges. Light emitting diodes, one adjacent to each pair of input terminals shall be provided to indicate a closed contact, conducting transistor switch; a low positive logic level, AC -line voltage on conditions. 8. I/O points shall be optically isolated and capable of withstanding low energy common mode transients of 1,500 volts peak. 5. I/O List a. Active inputs and outputs shall be provided according to the plans and these specifications. 6. Power Supply and Chassis a. The I/O chassis shall provide for direct mounting of the CPU, power supplies, communication modules and I/O modules. The chassis shall be available for direct mounting in a rack, flush or surface mounted. The I/O chassis shall have at least the number of 1/0 slots necessary to accommodate any mixture of CPUs, power supplies, communications modules or I/O modules. Modules shall be electrically isolated from each other (as a minimum 1,500VDC) allowing mixed voltages on the same 1/0 chassis. The chassis shall also allow for mounting both analog and digital I/O modules on the same I/O chassis. b. The power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, single-phase to power the CPU, communication modules and I/O modules. Power supply shall include a fuse and fuse holder, which is accessible without requiring the removal of the power supply from the chassis. c. The CPU shall monitor the power supply status and voltage levels. d. The power supply shall operate at the following: 17015-13 B. Software: 1. 120 VAC rms +/- 15% continuously. 2. 120 VAC rms +/- 30% maximum for no more than 30 seconds. 3. 120 VAC rms +/- 100% maximum for no more than 17 milliseconds. 4. Line spikes at 100 VAC (5,000 microseconds duration), 0.5% maximum duty cycle. 5. A single main power supply shall power the CPU and local 1/0 modules. 6. At the time of power -up, the power supply shall inhibit operation of the processor and I/O modules until the DC voltages are within Specifications. 1. The PICS shall provide as part of the RTU system, two software packages to allow off-line or on-line program development, annotating and monitoring on a PC-based computer operator workstation. The software shall support multiple industry standard IEC 1131-3 programming languages. As a minimum, ladder diagram, structured text and Sequential Function Chart (SFC) programming shall be provided. 2. The software packages shall include a software license agreement allowing the Owner the rights to utilize the software, as required for any current or future modification, documentation or development of the RTU program. 3. The software shall provide as a minimum the following functions: a. Annotation of all ladder elements with at least 3 lines of 6 characters each. b. Annotation of all ladder rungs with at least 240 characters. c. Provide visual "power flow" monitoring of circuit elements (when connected to the RTU). d. Provide annotated ladder diagram printout on a standard computer printer for documentation purposes. e. On-line help facility. f. Download or upload program from the RTU to the computer workstation. g. Provide ladder element and I/O cross-reference table. h. Provide all monitoring, forcing, programming error detection, searching, configuration, etc. functions as required, to allow an operator / programmer to completely program a RTU. i. The programming software shall allow the RTUs to be programmed, debugged and downloaded from a 17015-14 computer workstation over the Ethernet communication network. 4. The software for the PLC shall be AB RSLogix and RSLinx for communications. C. Panel/Enclosure: 1. PICS shall provide an enclosure/panel for each RTU. Shop drawings shall include the following information: a. Materials for all panels and enclosures. b. Drawings shall be prepared on 11" by 17" paper, shall be to scale and shall show the location of panel mounted devices as well as doors, louvers and sub -panels. c. Drawings shall include a panel legend and a bill of materials. d. The panel legend shall list and identify front of panel devices by their assigned tag numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legends and annunciator inscriptions. e. The bill of materials shall list devices mounted within the panel that are not listed in the panel legend and shall include the tag number, description, manufacturer and model number for each item. 2. Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams a. Provide interconnecting wiring diagrams showing electrical connections between panels, consoles, terminal junction boxes and field mounted components. b. Diagrams shall show component and panel terminal identification numbers and external wire and cable numbers. c. Circuit names shall be shown. d. These diagrams shall be coordinated with the Electrical Subcontractor and shall bear his mark showing that this has been done. 2.02 Panel General Requirements A. Furnish and install the panels per the Specifications and Drawings. L) B. The construction and wiring for the panels shall be in accordance with this Specification and applicable panel drawings. The panel drawings will specify the arrangement of instruments to be mounted on the front, rear and sides of the panels. 17015-15 C. All panels shall be fully enclosed for use with high-density instrumentation mounting. D. All panel doors shall have a lock installed in the door handle, or a hasp and staple for padlocking. Locks for all panels provided under this Contract shall be keyed alike. E. The instruments and equipment designated for rear -of -panel mounting shall be arranged within the panel according to associated panel drawings in a manner to allow for functionality, ease of maintenance and adjustment. F. Conductors running from the field to the panels shall be continuous without splices, except at approved junction boxes. G. Conduits and cables entering panels shall be sealed to prevent the intrusion of gas and moisture. H. All components shall be mounted in a manner that shall permit servicing, adjustment, testing and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on removable plates, in such a manner that the component may be removed without removing the plate and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Mounting orientation shall be in accordance with the requirements of each component. I. Components shall be identified with suitable plastic or metal engraved tags attached adjacent to (not on) each component identifying the component in accordance with the Drawings, Specification and PICS data. J. The internal framework of each panel shall permit panel lifting without distortion. Provide removable lifting rings designed to facilitate simple, safe rigging and lifting of the panel during installation. Plugs shall be provided and shall unobtrusively fill the panel lifting ring holes when substituted for the lifting rings after installation is complete. K. All panels, consoles and exterior mounted equipment shall be installed with suitable gaskets, faceplates, etc. required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel. L. The complete fabricated control panel assemblies shall be UL certified before shipment from the PICS fabrication facility. M. All panels shall be supplied with suitable nameplates, which identify the panel and individual devices as required. Nameplates shall be provided for all flush mounted equipment in the interior and exterior of each panel. Nameplates shall be constructed of white and black laminated phenolic material having engraved letters extending through the white face into the black layer. Nameplate shall be beveled and attached to panels by adhesive or glue. 2.03 Panel Materials and Construction 17015-16 A. General All panels located in indoor areas, unless otherwise specified, shall be NEMA 12 construction; panels located in outdoor areas shall be NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL. a. Freestanding panels shall be constructed of 12 gauge or thicker steel, suitably braced internally for structural rigidity and strength. All exposed welds, seams or edges shall be ground smooth. b. Front panels or panels containing instruments or components shall be 10 gauge or thicker sheet steel reinforced to prevent warping or distortion. c. Interior panels of 10 gauge steel construction shall be provided where necessary for instrument or component mounting. d. All doors shall be lockable, mounted with strong, continuous, piano type hinges and shall be provided with door handles and three point latches or screw clamps. 2. The panel shall be suitable for top or bottom conduit entry as required by the Electrical Drawings. 3. All conduit and cable penetrations shall be provided with ground bushings, hubs, gasketed locknuts or other accessories as required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel and the electrical rating of the conduit system. B. Finish Requirements All panel sections shall be descaled, degreased, filled, ground and finished. The enclosure, when fabricated of carbon steel, shall be furnished with two rust resistant phosphate prime coats and two coats of enamel, polyurethane or lacquer finish, which shall be applied by either the hot air spray or conventional cold spray methods. Brushed anodized aluminum, stainless steel and fiberglass -reinforced polyester panels will not require a paint finish. 2. The panels shall have edges ground smooth and shall be sandblasted and then cleaned with solvent. Surface voids shall be filled and ground smooth. 3. Immediately after cleaning, one coat of a rust -inhibiting primer shall be applied inside and outside, followed by an exterior intermediate and top coat of a two -component type epoxy enamel. A final sanding shall be applied to the intermediate exterior coat before the final top coat is applied. 4. The panel interior shall have a minimum of two coats of flat white lacquer after priming. D. Manufacturers 1. The panels shall be manufactured by Hoffman or Engineer approved equal. 17015-17 2.04 Temperature Control A. Freestanding panels shall be provided with louvers, forced air ventilation or air conditioning as required to prevent temperature buildup due to ambient temperature conditions and/or electrical devices mounted in or on the panel. B. Panels that require louvers shall have them mounted on the rear at the top and bottom of the panel unless the panel is located against a wall, then they shall be mounted on the sides. C. The internal temperature of all panels shall be regulated so as not to exceed 100° F. 2.05 Corrosion Control A. Panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosion - inhibiting vapor capsules as manufactured by Hoffman or Engineer approved equal. 2.06 Internal Construction A. Internal Electrical Wiring 1. Panel equipment and components shall be mounted and wired on or within the panel or console. Wiring shall comply with the National Electric Code. Wiring within the panel shall be grouped together with wire ducts and secured to the structure. Wiring shall be numbered in compliance with the numbering system used on the wiring / connection diagrams. Wiring and connection diagrams shall comply with ISA S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams and shall be as part of the Shop Drawings for review by the Engineer. 2. Power wires shall be 14 AWG Type THAN stranded and shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts. Conductors shall be of tinned copper construction. All interconnecting wiring, except for electronic circuits, shall be rated for not less than 90° C. 3. Control wires shall be 16 AWG Type THWN stranded and shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts. Conductors shall be of tinned copper construction. All interconnecting wiring, except for electronic circuits, shall be rated for not less than 90° C. 4. Analog signal cables shall be single pair 16 AWG shielded cable with a ground wire. Conductors shall be of tinned copper construction. 5. All wiring leaving or entering the panel shall be terminated on terminal blocks that are rigid, numbered and located for ease of access and troubleshooting. 6. Terminal strips shall be separated into groups for power, control and analog signals. 7. Terminal strips and/or block systems shall be rated for a minimum of 600 volts. 17015-18 S. Wire ducts for supporting internal wiring shall be a plastic type with snap on covers. 9. Each wire shall be provided with a numbered and typed heat shrink tubing identification marker at both ends. Handwritten markers or paper markers will not be permitted. Each individual wire shall be assigned a number. 10. Each panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for all signal and shield ground connections. Grounding shall be in accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's recommendations. 11. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding bus (safety) in accordance with the National Electric Code. 12. Each panel shall be provided with analog signal isolation (I/1) when analog signals are sent from one panel or console to another. 13. Each panel shall be provided with surge suppression protection (electrical transients) for connections between AC power systems and electrical or electronic equipment. Surge suppressor grounding shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 14. Each panel shall be provided with a circuit breaker power disconnect switch. 15. Each digital output shall be wired to an interposing relay and one normally open contact from each relay shall be wired to the terminal strip. The contact shall be rated for 115 VAC, 10 Amp or 24 VDC, 10 Amp. B. Print Storage Pockets 1. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel or console. Its size shall be sufficient to hold all of the prints and documentation necessary to service the equipment attached to it or within it. 2.07 Miscellaneous Panel Components A. AC Power Surge/Transient Protection 1. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) shall be provided to protect all power sources for the SCADA system against damage due to electrical transients induced by lightning and nearby electrical systems. 2. All incoming AC power sources to panels, consoles, field mounted instrumentation, etc. shall be protected. 3. The AC power surge/transient protectors shall be as manufactured by Circuit Components, Inc. (CCI), Joslyn, Current Technology, Leviton, Eaton or ' \ approved equal. (fid) B. Panel Mounted Surge/Transient Protection 1. Type 17015-19 a. Solid-state electronic type. 2. Functional Performance a. Provide signal isolators and surge/transient protection as required for the control system specified and as shown on the Drawings. b. All analog wiring for transmitters, receivers or related devices that run outside of a building or vault from a PLC or other similar device shall have a surge/transient protection. c. Supply voltage, line -to -line: 28 VDC maximum. d. Supply voltage, line -to -ground: 28 VDC maximum. e. Minimum life: >1000 operations with 200A, 10x1000 microseconds. f. Peak clamping voltage: At 5000A 8x20 microseconds. Surge and voltage rate of rise of 100kV/microseconds shall be 55V. g. Operating temperature range: -40 to 100° C. 3. Physical a. Units shall be suitable for mounting on a rail, rack, etc. 4. Manufacturers a. The panel mounted surge/transient protectors shall be manufactured by CCI Model SAB, Joslyn, ABB, Phoenix Contact or approved equal. C. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 1. An Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) shall be provided for each new panel. The UPS shall protect all PLC equipment, including remote I/O, instrumentation, power supplies, etc. 2. Provide a separate enclosure for the UPS adjacent to the RTU. 3. The UPS shall be based on ferroresonant technology, preventing spikes, sags, surges, noise and harmonics from adversely affecting equipment. Input power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. Output power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. Each UPS shall have a single 20A/1P output breaker feeding its LCP accordingly. 4. The UPS shall contain hot-swappable internal backup batteries sufficient to allow all connected equipment to run continuously after a normal power / failure for no less than 30 minutes. PICS shall submit power calculations for each UPS system to be reviewed by the Engineer. If the 120 VAC/1P breaker and associated cable/conduit supplying power to UPS are not adequate, the Contractor shall upsize the breaker and cables/conduits at no extra cost. 17015-20 5. The UPS shall automatically switch to battery power upon loss of normal L) power and back to normal power upon return to normal conditions, using a continuous no -break connection to ensure that there are no momentary power interruptions. 6. The UPS shall be housed in a NEMA 12 enclosure for indoor use and NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL for outdoor installation. 7. The UPS shall include auto -diagnostics and communications capabilities, accessible through a RS -232 port. 8. The UPS shall be Best Power, Ferrups Model FE or Engineer approved equal. D. Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) 1. RTUs will be supplied with a door mounted HMI display/Operator Interface Terminal (OIT). Monitoring and control for local well operations with equipment control via the OIT touch screen display. a. Computer display shall be Allen Bradley PanelView Plus touch screen display 1000 or engineer approved alternate. b. 10 -inch color touch screen display. c. Communications between the OIT and PLC shall be selected by the PICS. d. Enclosure shall be NEMA 12 minimum for indoor use and NEMA 4X stainless steel for outdoor installations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 3.02 UNWITNESSED FACTORY TEST (UFT) A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 3.03 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) A. Refer to Specification Sections 17000, 17010 and 17035. B. All RTU systems, sub -systems and communication networks shall be tested for proper operation and approved by the Engineer at the PIC's facility prior to shipment to the Jobsite. C. Tests shall demonstrate all specified control functions by simulating inputs and outputs to the panels, communication to and from the SCADA and HMI systems, etc. 17015-21 D. Acceptance of factory tests by Owner or Engineer shall not constitute a waiver or requirements to meet field tests under specified operating conditions, nor does inspection relieve the PICS of his responsibility in any way. 3.04 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 3.05 30 -DAY ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 3.06 TRAINING A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 3.07 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 3.08 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND DETAILS A. Refer to Specification Section 17000 **END OF SECTION** 17015-22 SECTION 17040 COMMUNICATION NETWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The General Provisions of Section 17000 shall apply to this Section. B. The PICS shall furnish, install, test and make ready a fiber-optic communication network including cables, connectors, switches, etc. as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. This network shall connect the well sites to an existing Ethernet switch and remote I/O network at the North County Water Treatment Plant (WTP). Conduit routing is shown on the plans from the WTP to each well site for this contract. C. All work in this Section shall be the product of the Process Instrumentation and Control Supplier (PICS). Sub -suppliers and/or manufacturers may provide components, and/or services to the PICS, but the final product shall conform to this Specification and shall be the sole responsibility of the PICS. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Section 17000 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 17000 B. Submit to the Engineer, the following: 1. Certification of compliance in writing stating; the fiber-optic communication network, anticipated layout and components are compatible, acceptable for use and in compliance with these Specifications. 2. Complete layout and installation proposed, which shows cable and conduit routing, materials, cable size and type, pulling lubricant to be used, installation details, estimated maximum pulling tensions, overall system losses for each fiber and any and all network switch locations. 3. Resumes of the certified installation personnel who will actually conduct and supervise the installation of the network. 4. Training plan and schedule for fiber-optic cable and connector terminations. 5. Network installation test reports as specified. 6. Provide fiber-optic power calculations for each cable run in excess of 500 feet. The calculations shall include transmitter power, receiver sensitivity, connector losses, cable losses and a 3db aging margin. Fiber-optic transmission lines shall maintain a minimum of 3db safety margin. 1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS 17040-1 17040-2 A. Refer to Section 17000 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Section 17000 B. NFPA-70-2005 C. IEEE Standard 383 — Flame Retardancy D. EIA -STD -RS -455 — Standard Test Procedures for Fiber -Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices E. NEC Article 770 — Optical Fiber Cable F. DOD -STD -1678 — Fiber -Optic Test Method and Instrumentation G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect, at the time of bid opening, shall apply. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 17000 B. The installation of the fiber-optic communication network furnished under this Section shall be performed by the fiber-optic cable manufacturer's certified installation contractor, who has installed these types of networks for a minimum of three years. C. All fiber-optic cables shall be tested for 100% attenuation. The attenuation of each fiber shall be provided with each cable reel. D. The fiber-optic cable manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. 1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Section 17000 B. The fiber-optic communication network shall provide communication between the WTP and the PLC using fiber-optic cable, connectors, switches, etc., as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 17000 B. The cable shall be packaged in cartons and/or wound on spools or reels. Each package shall contain only one continuous length of cable. The packaging shall be damage constructed to prevent to the cable during shipping and handling. 17040-2 C. The outer end of the cable shall be securely fastened to the reel to prevent the cable from coming loose in transit. The inner end of the cable shall project into a slot in the side of the reel or into housing on the inner slot of the drum, in such a manner, with sufficient length (minimum of 6 feet), to make it available for testing. D. Reels or spools shall be permanently marked with an identification number that shall be used by the manufacturer to trace the manufacturing history of the cable and fiber. E. The manufacture shall test and measure the attenuation at 850nm and 1300nm for multimode fibers. F. Both ends of the cable shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture. G. Each reel shall have a weatherproof tag attached identifying the reel and cable. Each cable shall be provided with a cable data sheet prepared by the manufacturer. H. The PICS shall be responsible for determining all cable lengths. 1.09 SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT A. Provide spare parts and test equipment as follows: 1. Spare Parts: a. Twenty (20) ST style connectors. b. Ten (10) patch cables with ST connectors terminated on both ends. c. Ten (10) patch cables with ST connectors terminated on one end and MT -RJ connectors on the other end. 2. Test Equipment: a. One (1) complete fiber-optic connector termination tool kit. The kit shall be Model TKT-UNICAM as manufactured by Siecor. b. One (1) optical test meter - The meter shall be capable of testing single and multi -mode cables with ST or SC style connectors. Provide data storage, Microsoft Windows based software, and necessary cabling for report printouts. The meter shall be Model OTS -210 as manufactured by Siecor. c. One (1) optical power source - The optical power source shall be capable of providing optical power for 850/1,300nm single and multi -mode with Visual Fault Locator (VFL). The unit shall be Model OS -302 as manufactured by Siecor. B. All spare parts shall be packed in a manner suitable for long-term storage and shall be adequately protected against corrosion, humidity and temperature. 1.10 WARRANTY 17040-3 A. Refer to Section 17000 LI I FINAL DOCUMENTATION A. Refer to Section 17000 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 TIGHT -BUFFER BREAKOUT RISER FIBER-OPTIC CABLE (INDOOR/OUTDOOR) A. General: 1. The cable shall meet the requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC), Section 770. 2. Riser Applications — Applicable Flame Tests: UL 1581 and UL 1666 B. Fiber Characteristics: 1. All fibers in the cable must be usable fibers and meet required Specifications. 2. All fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical and environmental requirements of the Specification. 3. Each fiber shall consist of a 100 kpsi proof -tested glass core surrounded by a primary buffer of UV -cured material to a diameter of 250um and a secondary tight buffer to 900um. 4. Multimode Graded Index: a. The multimode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall meet EIA/TIA-492AAAA-1989, "Detail Specification for 62.5um Core Diameter/125um.Cladding Diameter Class Multimode, Graded Index Optical Waveguide Fibers". b. Core diameter: 62.5 +/- 3.Oum c. Cladding diameter: 125.0 +/- 2.Oum d. Core -to -cladding offset: < 3.Oum e. Cladding non -circularity: < 2.0 % f. Core non -circularity: < 6.0 % g. Coating diameter: 245 +/- l0um h. Graded Index i. Numerical Aperture: 0.275 +/- 0.015um j. Attenuation uniformity: There shall be no point discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB at either 850nm or 1300nm. 5. All fibers shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum of 100 kpsi. 17040-4 6. Each fiber shall be coated with a UV -cured acrylate material to a diameter of 250um. The primary coating shall be in physical contact with the cladding surface. 7. Each fiber shall have a second coat of UV -cured acrylate material to a diameter of 900um. The secondary coating shall be in physical contact with the primary coat. S. The fiber coating and tight buffer shall be removable with a commercially available stripping tool in a single pass. C. Fiber Specification Parameters: 1. All fibers in the cable shall meet the requirements of this Specification. 2. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum attenuation for each fiber at 23 +/- 5°C. 3. The attenuation of the cabled fiber shall be uniformly distributed throughout its length, such that there are no discontinuities greater than 0.2dB at 850nm/ 1300nm in any one kilometer length of fiber. 4. Required Fiber Grade — Maximum Individual Fiber Attenuation 5. The minimum normalized bandwidth of multimode fibers shall be >160 MHz -km at 850nm and > 500 MHz -km at 1300nm. D. Cable Construction for Riser Cables up to 24 Fibers: 1. In cables with more than one fiber, the fibers shall be stranded around a dielectric member and surrounded by layered aramid yarns. The aramid yarns shall serve as the tensile strength member of the cable. 2. A ripcord shall be applied between the aramid yarns and the outer jacket to facilitate jacket removal. 3. A PVC outer jacket shall be extruded over the aramid yarns for physical and environmental conditions. 4. The strength member shall be a high modulus aramid yarn. The aramid yarns shall be helically stranded around the buffered fibers. Non-toxic, non- irritant talc shall be applied to the yarn to allow yarns to be easily separated from the fibers and the jacket. 5. Cable jacket: a. The jacket shall be continuous, free from pinholes, splits, blisters or other imperfections. The jacket shall have a consistent, uniform thickness that is not extruded under high pressure. The jacket shall provide the cable with a tough, flexible, protective coating able to withstand the stresses expected in non -nal installation and service. b. For cables with more than two fibers, the cable jacket shall be designed for easy removal without damage to the fibers by incorporating a ripcord under each cable jacket. c. The nominal thickness of the cable outer jacket shall be sufficient to provide adequate cable protection while meeting the mechanical, 17040-5 flammability and environmental test requirements of this Specification, over the life of the cable. d. The cable jacket shall be made of PVC material. 6. All cables shall be dielectric and shall be provided as shown on the SCADA Block Diagram. Each cable shall be provided sized for the actual application with a minimum number of four (4) active fibers plus two spare fibers. E. Cable Identification: 1. The individual fibers shall be color coded for identification. The color - coding shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA-598, "Color Coding of Fiber - Optic Cables." The coloring material shall be stable over the temperature range of the cable, shall not be susceptible to migration and shall not affect the transmission characteristics of the fibers. Color -coded buffered fibers shall not adhere to one another. When fibers are grouped into individual units, each unit shall be numbered in the unit jacket for identification. The number shall be repeated at regular intervals. 2. The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or UL file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, UL symbol and sequential length markings every two feet. The markings shall be in contrasting color to the cable jacket. F. Cable Specifications: 1. Temperature range — The storage temperature range for the cable on the original shipping reel shall be -400C to +700C. The installation and operating temperature range shall be -20°C to +70°C. Testing shall be in accordance with FOTP-3. 2. Crush resistance — The cable shall withstand a minimum compression load of 89 N/cm (501bf/in) applied uniformly over the length of the compression plate. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-41, "Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber -Optic Cable." While under compressive load, the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.6 dB at 1300 nm. After the compressive load is removed, the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm. 3. Impact resistance — The cable shall withstand a minimum of 20 impact cycles. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-25, "Repeated Impact Testing of Fiber -Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies." The fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm. 4. Cyclic flexing — The cable shall withstand 25 mechanical flexing cycles at a rate of 30 +/- 1 cycles per minute. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-104, "Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test." The fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.4dB at 1300nm. 5. Flammability — All cables shall comply with the requirements of the 2002 NEC, Article 770 and shall pass UL -1666. 6. The tight -buffer breakout riser fiber-optic cable shall be Model BX00* manufactured by Optical Cable Corporation. All cables shall be dielectric and shall be provided as shown on the SCADA Block Diagram. Each cable 17040-6 shall be provided sized for the actual application with a minimum number of four (4) active fibers plus two spare fibers. 2.02 FIBER-OPTIC CABLE CONNECTORS A. Provide composite ST connectors, as required, with ceramic ferrules for all fiber- optic fibers. The connectors shall be designed for use with 62.5/125 micron cable and shall cause a maximum signal attenuation of 1.6dB. The connectors shall be compliant to TIVEIA 604-2, FOCIS for ST compatible connectors. B. Connector specifications shall be as follows: 1. Insertion loss (average): 0.3dB . 2. Durability (mating cycles): < 0.2dB (500 minimum) 3. Repeatability: Less than 0.2dB 4. Operating temperature: -200C to +700C C. Manufacturers: 1. The fiber-optic cable connectors shall be UniCam Type ST as manufactured by Siecor. 2.03 FIBER-OPTIC PATCH CABLES A. Fiber-optic patch cables shall be constructed with two single fiber cables joined in the middle with a zipcord between them that allows the two cables to be separated for connection without dividing and routed to different terminals. B. The patch cables shall be 62.5 / 125 micron multimode riser rated cable and shall use UniCam Type ST or MT -RJ connectors as specified herein. C. Manufacturers: 1. The fiber-optic patch cables shall be as manufactured by Corning. 2.04 FIBER-OPTIC PATCH PANELS A. Fiber-optic patch panels shall be suitable for wall, panel or rack mounting, comprised of internal mounting plate, cable holders, slack cable take up and organizer brackets, connectors and ground lugs. B. Panels shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel construction for outdoor use and NEMA 12 steel construction for indoor use. C. Panels shall be suitable for multimode operation at 800nm and 1300nm and shall be suitable for ST connectors. D. Patch panels, if required, shall be sized to accommodate the number of fibers necessary for termination within an area. 17040-7 E. Manufacturers: 1. The fiber-optic patch panels shall be as manufactured by Corning model WCH or CCH, as required. 2.05 A -B ETHERNET/IP TO FIBER OPTIC INTERFACE MODULE A. Modular fiber optic converters for conversion of Allen Bradley Ethernet/IP signals to fiber optic shall be provided at the PLC controller described in Section 17015. The module shall consist of an Electrical Interface Module, an Optical Interface Module and a Power Supply Module. B. The module shall be capable of copper to fiber optic Ethernet/IP conversion and fiber optic to copper Ethernet/IP signal conversion of a 19.2k baud rate. C. The switch shall have two parts, one to transmit and one to receive. D. Physical: 1. The converter shall be DIN rail mounting 2. The unit shall utilize type ST optical connectors 3. The converter shall meet UL safety standards for indoor locations. 4. The power supply shall utilize an input voltage range of 85 to 240 VAC. E. The fiber optic converter module shall be manufactured by Weed Instrument Fiber Optics and shall be Electrical Interface Module (EIC), Optical Interface Module (OIM) and Power Supply Module (PSM). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 17000 B. Installation shall be accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). C. Installation shall comply with EIA/TIA Standards 568 and 569. D. Fiber-optic cable shall be continuous from component to component as shown on the Drawings. Intermediate fiber splices shall not be allowed. E. All cable shall be installed in conduit indoors and conduit in concrete duct banks outdoors. F. Inspect fiber-optic cable conduits or raceways prior to installing cables. Notify the Engineer of any conditions, which would prevent installation of the specified cables, before proceeding with the installation. Rod and swab out conduits or raceways prior to installing cables. G. Install cables prior to attachment of connectors. 17040-8 H. Install cables by directly pulling on the strength member. L Prior to installation, lubricate cables with lubricants specially formulated for fiber-optic cabling jackets. During installation, the Contractor shall not exceed cable manufacturer's specifications for tensile strength and bending radius. J. Splices shall not be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. If necessary, splices shall be made in designated patch panel enclosures above ground. K. Provide breakout kit(s), signal transceivers, power supplies, patch panels, pigtails and jumpers as required and as specified to install a complete data highway communications network. L. All fibers in a cable including active and spare shall be terminated using specified connectors and shall be connected to a patch panel. M. Provide support cables in riser conduits as required by the National Electric Code. N. The cable manufacturer shall approve all installation tools and materials. O. Identify and tag each cable in duct banks, junction boxes or manholes using permanent nylon/plastic tie -wrap tags with waterproof markings. P. Label each cable, buffer tube and fiber with permanent waterproof typewritten tags. 3.02 FIELD AND FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. The Contractor shall make the following site tests before removing the cable from the reels: 1. Determine attenuation losses of each fiber from end-to-end. Use an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) to capture and record all readings. 2. Submit to the Engineer all test data, test equipment used, calibration standards and test results. B. The Contractor shall make the following field tests after the cable and connector installation is complete: 1. All fiber-optic cables and related connectors shall be tested for performance and loss after the cable installation and connector termination is complete to certify that at least a 3dB power safety margin is obtained between all transmitters and receivers. 2. Test data for each fiber and safety margin calculations for each fiber path shall be provided to the Owner and Engineer after installation to verify conformance with the specification. 3. The following tests shall be performed as a minimum but not limited to: 17040-9 **END OF SECTION** 17040-10 a. Visually inspect terminal connectors for out -of -round condition and surface defects such as microchips and cracks using a 200X (minimum) inspection microscope. b. Check optical continuity of each fiber from terminal to terminal. Use test equipment as specified herein and provide certification reports for each fiber in each cable. c. Verify the calculated attenuation power losses of each fiber from both the transmit and receive terminals of each data communication loop (both directions) using an OTDR. d. Submit to the Engineer all test data, test equipment used, calibration standards and test results. 4. Notify Owner and Engineer at least one week prior to start of tests so that they may witness the tests. 3.03 UNWITNESSED FACTORY TEST (UFT) A. Refer to Section 17000 3.04 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. Refer to Section 17000 \ 3.05 (�✓) FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Refer to Section 17000 3.06 30 -DAY ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. Refer to Section 17000 3.07 TRAINING A. Refer to Section 17000 3.08 CORRECTION OF DEFICIENCIES A. Refer to Section 17000 **END OF SECTION** 17040-10 SECTION 17700 INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Work A. The General Provisions of Section 17000 shall apply to this section. B. The PICS shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the instrumentation system, complete and ready for operation, as depicted on the Drawings and in the Lists below. C. All work in this Section shall be the product of the Process Instrumentation and Control Supplier (PICS). Sub -suppliers and/or manufacturers may provide components, equipment, instrumentation and/or services to the PICS, but the final product shall conform to this specification and shall be the sole responsibility of the PICS. 1.02 Related Work A. Refer to Section 17000 1.03 Submittals A. Refer to Section 17000 1.04 Coordination Meetings A. Refer to Section 17000 1.05 Reference Standards A. Refer to Section 17000 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Refer to Section 17000 1.07 Signal Isolators and Surge Protectors A. Refer to Section 17000. 1.08 Spare Parts and Test Equipment A. Provide spare parts and test equipment as specified in Section 17000 and as indicated in the individual product specifications below. B. All spare parts shall be packed in a manner suitable for long-term storage and shall be adequately protected against corrosion, humidity and temperature. 17700-1 1.09 Warranty A. Refer to Section 17000 1.10 Final Documentation A. Refer to Section 17000 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Instruments A. Level Transmitter (Submersible Head -Type) 1. Type: Pressure sensor 2. Transmitter: Control box with Local LED display of level in Feet and built-in power supply to convert 120V AC to 24 VDC for pressure sensor loop power. Control box to have one or two displays as required. 1. Outputs: one or two 4-20 mA outputs 2. Accuracy: 0.3% of full range 3. Enclosure: NEMA 4X, polycarbonate housing (�.✓) 3. 4. Power Supply: 120VAC, 1 PH, 60 HZ Sensor: 316SS sensor housing and pressure sensor diaphragm with sufficient length of viton cable for each application. Polarity independent leads for 24 VDC powered loop from transmitter. Atmospheric compensation tube built into cable. Range as required for well depth. 4. Cleaning: Not required 5. Transmitter (Control Box) Mounting: mounted to 1/8" aluminum mounting plate with drip lid and SS hinged opaque sun shield. 6. Sensor shall be mounted as shown on the plans. Mounting accessories shall be provided as necessary by the manufacturer. 7. Start -Up: provide minimum of 2 hours/meter of service by factory -authorized representative for system start-up plus % day of training. 8. Acceptable Manufacturer: Cerlic or approved equal. Substitution submittals must include changes necessary to accommodate the substituted item. B. Pressure Switches (PSH and PSL) 1. Type a. Diaphragm actuated. 2. Functional Performance b. Repeatability — Better than 1.0 percent of pressure. 17700-2 c. Set Point — Field adjustable and set between 30 and 70 percent of the adjustable range. d. Deadband — Shall be fixed unless noted otherwise on the instrument device schedules. e. Reset — Unit shall be of the automatic reset type unless noted otherwise. f. Overrange Protection — Provide overrange protection to maximum process line pressure. g. Switch Rating -250 VAC at 10 amps; and 30 V DC at 5 amps. 3. Physical a. Housing — NEMA 4X. b. Switching Arrangement — Provide single pole double throw (SPDT) unless double pole double throw (DPDT) switches are shown. c. Wetted Parts — Teflon coated diaphragm, viton seals, stainless steel connection port. d. Connection Size — 1/2" NPT. 4. Options / Accessories Required a. Shutoff Valve — Provide shutoff valve which can be used as an adjustable pressure snubber. b. Provide diaphragm seal. 5. Manufacturers a. Ashcroft or approved equal. C. Pressure Gauge 1. Type b. Bourdon tube actuated pressure gauge. 2. Functional Performance a. Accuracy — Plus or minus 1.0 percent of span or better. 4. Physical a. Case — Phenolic shock resistant, ABS or 316 stainless steel for surface/stem mounting. Gage shall be capable of being liquid filled in the field or at the factory. 17700-3 b. Window — Shatter proof glass or Acrylic. c. Bourdon Tube — 316 stainless steel d. Connection Size — 1/2" NPT. e. Gauge size — 4 -inch minimum f. Range — as required by the application or the Engineer. 6. Options / Accessories Required a. Shutoff Valve — Provide shutoff valve which can be used as an adjustable pressure snubber. b. Provide factory liquid fill. 7. Manufacturers a. Ashcroft, Wika or approved equal. D. Flow Meters 1. Type a. Meters shall be velocity propeller types with magnetic drive, sealed housings and flanged tube type construction. 2. Functional Performance a. Accuracy — Plus or minus 2% or reading throughout range. 5. Physical a. Tube — Fusion bonded epoxy coating. b. Display — digital instantaneous flow rate indicator and straight reading totalizer. c. Transmitter — provide 4-20mA output proportional to the instantaneous flow rate. d. Bearing assembly and housing — 316 stainless steel e. Size — as shown on plans. f Impeller — high temperature thermoplastic g. Range — as required by thea application or the Engineer. PP g h. Working pressure — 150 psi minimum. 17700-4 4. Manufacturers a. McCrometer QW500 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Refer to Section 17000. B. The instrumentation shall be installed at locations as shown on the Drawings. 3.02 Operational Readiness Test (ORT) A. Refer to Section 17000. 3.03 Functional Demonstration Test (FDT) A. ; Refer to Section 17000. 3.04 30 -Day Acceptance Test (SAT) A. Refer to Section 17000. 3.05 Training A. Refer to Section 17000. 3.06 Correction of Deficiencies A. Refer to Section 17000. L) **END OF SECTION** 17700-5